17. 慧地详细解说的注释巴利
17. Paññābhūminiddesavaṇṇanā
缘起论的注释巴利
Paṭiccasamuppādakathāvaṇṇanā
570 “此慧”指的是依此所证得的内观。“作为地者”指的是作为生起依处的诸法。虽然“缘起”和“缘已生”这两个名称,就像父子之名一样,是依靠相互观待而成立的,但在因法与果法上,则是按顺序各自确定的,所以用“既是缘起……”等说法来分别解说。所谓“等”字,就是指“缘起等类别”这句话里所说的“等”。其余的内容是以注释的方式存在的,这就是意趣所在。因此说“它们的注释次第已经到来”。巴利
570.Imissāpaññāyāti imissā yathādhigatāya vipassanāya. Bhūmibhūtesūti pavattiṭṭhānabhūtesu. Kāmañcāyaṃ paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannasamaññā pitāputtasamaññā viya apekkhāsiddhā, hetuphaladhammesu pana yathākkamaṃ vavatthitāvāti ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādo cevā’’tiādinā vibhajja vuttaṃ. Ādisaddenāti ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādādibhedā’’ti ettha vuttaādisaddena. Avasesā honti, saṃvaṇṇanāvasenāti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ vaṇṇanākkamo anuppatto’’ti.
无明等诸法是缘起,而不只是生起。为了说明这个含义应当通过这句经文来了知,先说了“因为已经说过……”等话,接着为了显示缘所生法,便开始说“然而老死等……”。那么,为什么在这里顺行显示缘起法,逆行显示缘所生法呢?因为那些缘所生法是从缘而生的,这是为了紧接着显示那缘起。巴利
Avijjādayo dhammā paṭiccasamuppādo, na samuppattimattaṃ. Svāyamattho iminā suttapadena veditabboti dassento ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādiṃ vatvā paṭiccasamuppanne pana dassetuṃ ‘‘jarāmaraṇādayo panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Kasmā panettha anulomato paṭiccasamuppādadhammā dassitā, paṭilomato paṭiccasamuppannā dhammāti? Yato te paccayato uppannā, tassa samanantaradassanatthaṃ.
不是恒常、不是永恒,所以是无常。由各种缘共同和合而成,所以是有为。依缘、值得成为缘、依靠缘而共同生起,所以是缘已生。以灭尽为自性,是灭法。以消逝为自性,是消逝法。以离染为自性、以坏灭为自性,是离染法。以寂灭为自性,是寂灭法。其余在这里应当说的,将在后面说明。巴利
Na niccaṃ na sassatanti aniccaṃ. Samecca sambhūya paccayehi katanti saṅkhataṃ. Paṭicca paccayārahaṃ paccayaṃ nissāya sahitameva uppannanti paṭiccasamuppannaṃ. Khayanasabhāvaṃ khayadhammaṃ. Vayanasabhāvaṃ vayadhammaṃ. Virajjanasabhāvaṃ palujjanasabhāvaṃ virāgadhammaṃ. Nirujjhanasabhāvaṃ nirodhadhammaṃ. Sesaṃ yadettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
571 这里说的是前面那些经文句子。简要是指意义的简要。巴利
571.Etthāti etesu yathāvuttesu suttapadesu. Saṅkhepoti atthasaṅkhepo.
“以生为缘”说的是:以被称为“生”的那个条件为缘。这里用的是依格来表示因。那个界本来就是安住着的——也就是老死的这种此缘性:“以生为缘而有老死”,这就是界,这就是自性。它在诸佛出现之前不被了知,在诸佛出现之后也不被了知,只有在中间这段时期才被了知;它并不是由诸佛创造出来的,而是说,正在发生的老死,在任何时候都是以生为缘才发生的,所以它本来就是安住着的。只不过因为佛陀以自然智亲自现证,并宣说“这个法是我所证得的”,所以如来被称为“法主”,并不是因为他创造了前所未有的法。因此说“那个界本来就是安住着的”。正是这个“以生为缘而有老死”,由于没有颠倒,对于这样了知的人来说,这个自性或者这个因如实存在、安住不动,所以叫法住性。或者说,生是老死的生起、安住、运转、聚集、结合、系缚、集起、因、缘的安立,以它作为生起等的状态而安立,所以“法住性”是依据果的力量而说的因。巴利
Jātipaccayāti jātisaṅkhātā paccayā. Hetumhi nissakkavacanaṃ. Ṭhitāva sā dhātūti yāyaṃ jarāmaraṇassa idappaccayatā ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti, esā dhātu esa sabhāvo. Sā tathāgatānaṃ uppādato pubbe, uddhañca aviññāyamāno, majjhe ca viññāyamāno, na tathāgatehi uppādito, atha kho sambhavantassa jarāmaraṇassa sabbakālaṃ jātipaccayato sambhavoti ṭhitā eva. Kevalaṃ pana sayambhūñāṇena abhisambujjhanato, ‘‘ayaṃ dhammo tathāgatena adhigato’’ti pavedanato ca tathāgato ‘‘dhammassāmī’’ti vuccati na apubbassa uppādanato. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti. Sā eva jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti ettha vipallāsābhāvato evaṃ avabujjhamānassa etassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā tatheva bhāvato ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā. Jāti vā jarāmaraṇassa uppādaṭṭhiti pavattaāyūhanasaṃyogapalibodhasamudayahetupaccayaṭṭhitīti taduppādādibhāvenassā ṭhitatā ‘‘dhammaṭṭhitatā’’ti phalaṃ patisāmatthiyato hetumeva vadati.
或者,因为被诸缘所支撑,所以叫做法;果依那些缘而存续,所以叫做住;法的住,就是法住。或者,法就是因的意思,缘就是它的含义。法有住的自性,而且离开法之外没有别的自性,所以说法住,也就是缘。因此说:“在把握缘的时候,慧就是法住智。”法住本身就是法住性。正是那个界,也就是“以生为缘而有老死”这个自性;或者因为因不可能有别的样子,对于被了知为“老死并不是以生为缘”的那种状态,由于它本来就不存在那种状态,所以它是决定性的、已被确定的状态,这就是法决定性。或者,果——老死——在生存在时才能生起,这是安立在因法之中,所以是法住性;在生不存在时就不生起,这是于法中决定,所以是法决定性。这样就是用果来说明因。他现等觉了“那个界是已确立的……”等所说的这个缘性,以现前作证而现前觉了,如实地通达。现证是它的同义词。从头开始讲说,就是宣说,意思是开示。把同一个开示讲到最后,就是演说。按照所开示的意义,以解释的方式,用种种方式让人知道,就是施设。用种种方式加以安立,就是建立。按照已经解释过的意义,再加以解释的方式,开显、分别;把已开显、已分别的意义,通过持因和显示而让它明了,就是显了。在显了的时候,让它成为完全现前之后,以总结的方式说“你们看”。巴利
Atha vā dhārīyati paccayehīti dhammo, tiṭṭhati tattha tadāyattavuttitāya phalanti ṭhiti, dhammassa ṭhiti dhammaṭṭhiti. Dhammoti vā kāraṇaṃ, paccayoti attho. Dhammassa ṭhitisabhāvo, dhammato ca añño sabhāvo natthīti dhammaṭṭhiti, paccayo. Tenāha ‘‘paccayapariggahe paññā dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇa’’nti (paṭi. ma. 1.45). Dhammaṭṭhiti eva dhammaṭṭhitatā. Sā eva dhātu ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti imassa sabhāvassa, hetuno vā aññathattābhāvato ‘‘na jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti viññāyamānassa tabbhāvābhāvato niyāmatā vavatthitabhāvoti dhammaniyāmatā. Phalassa vā jarāmaraṇassa jātiyā sati sambhavo dhamme hetumhi ṭhitatāti dhammaṭṭhitatā. Asati asambhavo dhamme niyatatāti dhammaniyāmatāti evaṃ phalena hetuṃ vibhāveti. Taṃ ‘‘ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.20) vuttaṃ idappaccayataṃ abhisambujjhati paccakkhakaraṇena abhimukhaṃ bujjhati yāthāvato paṭivijjhati. Abhisametīti tassa vevacanaṃ. Ādito kathento ācikkhati, uddisatīti attho. Tameva uddesaṃ pariyosāpento deseti. Yathāuddiṭṭhamatthaṃ niddisanavasena pakārehi ñāpentā paññapeti. Pakārehiyeva patiṭṭhapento paṭṭhapeti. Yathāniddiṭṭhamatthaṃ paṭiniddisanavasena vivarati vibhajati, vivaṭañhi vibhattañca atthaṃ hetudhāraṇadassanehi pākaṭaṃ karonto uttānīkaroti. Uttānīkaronto tathāpaccakkhabhūtaṃ katvā nigamanavasena passathāti cāha.
572 缘的特相,就是缘的状态这一特相;或者,应当被认识为缘。它的作用是让流转的苦持续不断地接续下去。由于它是通往涅槃之道的歧路,所以显现为邪道。巴利
572.Paccayalakkhaṇoti paccayabhāvalakkhaṇo, paccayoti vā lakkhitabbo. Pavattidukkhassa anubandhāpanakiccatāya dukkhānubandhanaraso. Nibbānagāmimaggassa uppathabhāvato kummaggapaccupaṭṭhāno.
缘起就像阶梯一样。应当以多少种缘生起的果,就恰好以那些不欠缺的缘生起,别的什么都不需要,所以说“以无减无增的”。正如眼识依眼、色、光明和作意而生起,同样,这样一一成办各自的果,就说明这缘的聚合只朝向那个果,这便是“如性”。聚合,就是集合、会合的意思。由于“无不生”,也就是没有不产生的情况。因为缘的聚合若已存在而果却不生起,那这个聚合就成了虚假的。所谓“以他法之缘”,就是作为其他果法的缘。所谓“其他法不生起”,就是因为从那些缘不会生出别的果法。因为绝不可能用眼、色、光明和作意来产生耳识;如果可能的话,那这个聚合就成了“异性”,但并没有这回事,所以说“不异性”。“从缘”,就是从缘的状态来说;“从缘的集合”,道理也是一样。巴利
Sopanāyaṃ paṭiccasamuppādo. Yāvattakehi paccayehi yaṃ phalaṃ uppajjanārahaṃ, avikaleheva tehi tassa uppatti, tadaññena ca tassa payojanaṃ natthīti āha ‘‘anūnādhikehevā’’ti. Yathā taṃ cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi cakkhuviññāṇassa, etena taṃtaṃphalanipphādanena tassā paccayasāmaggiyā tapparatā tathatāti dasseti. Sāmagginti samodhānaṃ, samavāyanti attho. Asambhavābhāvatoti anuppajjanassa abhāvato. Paccayasāmaggiyañhi sati anuppajjane tassā vitathatā siyā. Aññadhammappaccayehīti aññassa phaladhammassa paccayehi. Aññadhammānuppattitoti tato aññassa phaladhammassa anuppajjanato. Na hi kadāci cakkhurūpālokamanasikārehi sotaviññāṇassa sambhavo atthi, yadi siyā, tassā sāmaggiyā aññathatā nāma siyā, na cetaṃ atthīti ‘‘anaññathatā’’ti vuttaṃ. Paccayatoti paccayabhāvato. Paccayasamūhatoti etthāpi eseva nayo.
573 仅仅因为“此缘”本身,就称为“此缘性”:这里的“tā”只是把词形扩展了一下,并没有任何别的含义,就像说“天就是天”一样。或者,“此缘性”是指各种“此缘”的集合,所以“tā”表示集合义,就像说“人的集合就是人群”一样。难道不是这样吗?当有人问“有以这个为缘的老死吗?”,阿难,应当回答“有”。如果问“老死以什么为缘?”,就应当回答“老死以生为缘”。在“以生为缘而有老死”这句话里,由于“生”这个词和“缘”这个词与“什么”这个词同格同指,而“什么”这个词又与“此”这个词同格同指,所以“此缘”这个词应看作持业释复合词。因为在这里,不可能问“以这个为缘,所以有这个缘”,也就是说,不可能问老死或其他东西是否从某个缘产生,因为这是已知的,也是不可能的;只会问老死的缘是什么。由于“此”这个词和“缘”这个词同格同指,“以这个为缘”这种问缘的方式才说得通。这种同指关系在依主释复合词里也能找到。可是,当不想表达别的词义时,就采用持业释复合词。巴利
573.Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatāti tā-saddena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ, na kiñci atthantaraṃ yathā devo eva devatāti. Idappaccayānaṃ vā samūho idappaccayatāti samūhatthaṃ tā-saddamāha yathā ‘‘janānaṃ samūho janatā’’ti. Nanu ca ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti puṭṭhena satā, ānanda, atthītissa vacanīyaṃ. Kiṃ paccayā jarāmaraṇanti iti ce vadeyya, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇanti iccassa vacanīya’’nti (dī. ni. 2.96) jātisaddapaccayasaddasamānādhikaraṇena kiṃ-saddena idaṃsaddassa samānādhikaraṇatādassanato idappaccayasaddassa kammadhārayasamāso dissati, na hettha ‘‘imassa paccayā idappaccayā’’ti jarāmaraṇassa, aññassa vā paccayato jarāmaraṇasambhavapucchā sambhavati viditabhāvato, asambhavato ca, jarāmaraṇassa pana paccayapucchā sambhavati. Paccaya-saddena ca samānādhikaraṇatāya idaṃ-saddassa imasmā paccayāti paccayapucchā yujjati. Sā ca samānādhikaraṇatā bāhiratthasamāsepi labbhati. Tato ca aññapadatthavacanicchābhāve kammadhārayasamāso labbhati.
那么,依主释复合词里并没有同位关系,所以持业释复合词就无论如何都不能成立吗?并非如此,因为所要表达的词义本来就不同。在“idappaccayatā paṭiccasamuppādo”(此缘性即缘起)这句话里,想表达的是缘起;而在“atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ”(有此缘而有老死)这句话里,只是在追问老死的缘是什么。因此,正如“idaṃ”这个词既可以限定缘起,也可以限定所问的缘,这里的复合词也有不同的构成方式,应当按具体情况来定。所以,看到别的复合词形式,并不能否定依主释复合词。那为什么在这里也不采用持业释复合词呢?因为“有因生起之法,其因就是缘起”这个含义,在持业释复合词里根本成立不了;而这里想表达的,是“与这个自身相应的缘,那个相应的缘就是此缘”。在“atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ”这句话里,“idaṃ”所指的意义已经被“jarāmaraṇa”(老死)这个词本身涵盖进去了,所以“idaṃ”从缘生法上脱落,因无其他可能而安住于缘上,因此那里用的是持业释复合词。但在这里,并没有理由把“idaṃ”从那个意义中排除出去,所以这里用的就是依主释复合词。即便如此,也不能说“此缘”本身就等于“此缘性”,从而认为“此缘性”不可能具有缘起的性质吧?这个过失并不存在,因为并没有另一个不同的含义。前面已经说过这个道理了。巴利
Sāmivacanasamāse pana samānādhikaraṇatā natthīti na kathañci kammadhārayasamāsasambhavoti? Nayidamevaṃ vacanicchantarabhāvato. Paṭiccasamuppādavacanicchā hesā ‘‘idappaccayatā paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti ettha. ‘‘Atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettha pana jarāmaraṇassa paccayamattaparipucchā, tasmā yathā idaṃ-saddassa paṭiccasamuppādavisesanatā, pucchitabbapaccayavisesanatā ca hoti, tathā samāsavikappo ettha, tattha ca kātabboti na samāsantaradassanaṃ sāmivacanasamāsabādhakaṃ. Kasmā panetthāpi kammadhārayasamāso na icchitoti? Hetuppabhavānaṃ hetu paṭiccasamuppādoti imassatthassa kammadhārayasamāse asambhavato, ‘‘imassa attano paccayānurūpassa anurūpo paccayo idappaccayo’’ti imassa ca atthassa icchitattā. Yo panettha idaṃ-saddena gahito attho, so ‘‘atthi idappaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’nti ettha jarāmaraṇaggahaṇeneva gahitoti idaṃ-saddo paṭiccasamuppannato abhassitvā aññāsambhavato paccaye avatiṭṭhati, tasmā tattha kammadhārayasamāso. Ettha pana idaṃ-saddassa tato pariccajanakāraṇaṃ natthīti sāmivacanasamāso eva. Evampi na idappaccayo eva idappaccayabhāvo bhavituṃ yuttoti idappaccayatāya paṭiccasamuppādatānupapattīti? Nāyaṃ doso atthantarābhāvatoti vuttovāyamattho.
或者,也可以这样说:就让“此缘的状态”就是此缘性吧。这里所说的“状态”,是指因相对于与它不相离的果而具有的存在性。因为“此缘”这个词,本来就是在生等意义上通用的。而这种此缘的存在性,并不在此缘之外另有。倘若另有,那它就应当是不存在的——因为在已存在者之外,并无另一个存在者。
再者,如果说存在性就是存在者本身,那么,凡是它的存在性所归属的那个东西,就成了不存在者。因为那个存在者之所以成为存在者,并不是由于它与存在性有所不同。所以,“存在者的状态就是存在者”这样的说法并不成立。
而且,不存在者不会仅仅因为与存在者有关联,就成了存在者;更何况,它本来就谈不上与存在者有关联呢?如果不存在,那么执取“存在”便是颠倒的执取,因此不能凭这种执取就成立存在性。
再者,经由相似性的想象,比如把少年想象成狮子,也并不因此就使不存在的东西具有了存在的本性。然而,此缘的状态如上所说,是存在性,而不是不存在性;那种存在性所归属的东西,也并不是不存在者。因此,为了显示此缘的状态就是此缘自身的样貌,并且是与其他自性相离的状态,所以特别用“此”来限定,而说为“此缘性”。因此,不能说此缘性不可能具有缘起的体性。巴利
Atha vā pana hotu idappaccayabhāvo idappaccayatāti. Bhāvoti cettha avinābhāviphalaṃ pati hetuno satvaṃ. Tathā hi idappaccaya-saddo jātiādīsu niruḷho. Tañca idappaccayasatvaṃ idappaccayato aññaṃ natthi. Yadi aññaṃ siyā, taṃ avijjamānaṃ siyā. Na hi satā aññaṃ vijjamānaṃ hoti. Atha satvaṃ saṃ nāma, yassa sato bhāvo, taṃ asaṃ nāma siyā. Na hi taṃ satvaṃ sabhāvaṃ satvato aññattā, tasmā sato bhāvo satvanti niddeso na yujjati. Na ca saṃ-sambandhena asaṃ saṃ nāma hoti, pageva saṃ-sambandhena. Asati ca saditiggahaṇaṃ viparītaggāhoti na gahaṇato saṃsiddhi. Sadisakappanāyañca māṇavakassa sīhabhāvo viya na asato saṃ-sabhāvatā. Yasmā pana idappaccayabhāvo yathāvuttaṃ satvaṃ, na asatvaṃ. Nāpi yassa taṃ satvaṃ, tadasaṃ, tasmā idappaccayabhāvo idappaccayasarūpaṃ sabhāvantarehi vinivattabhāvadassanatthaṃ imassāyanti visesetvā idappaccayatāti vuttanti na idappaccayatāya paṭiccasamuppādabhāvāsambhavo.
“依此而生起,所以叫缘起。”因为“生”等词也同样具有因的含义,所以应当理解为以因为主,即:有因生起之法的因,就是缘起。事实上,这个含义已由《狮子吼经》阐明:“诸比丘,如来具足十力、具足四无畏,宣称处于牛王之位,在大众中作狮子吼,转梵轮:此有故彼有……乃至……如是整个苦蕴的息灭。”当被问到“尊者的导师主张什么?宣说什么?”时,具寿阿萨吉尊者以偈颂回答:巴利
Paṭicca samuppajjati etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādoti tassāpi hetuatthabhāvato jātiādipadānaṃ evameva hetubhāvavācakatāya hetupadhānatā yojetabbā hetuppabhavānaṃ hetu paṭiccasamuppādoti katvā . Tathā hi ‘‘dasabalasamannāgato, bhikkhave, tathāgato catūhi vesārajjehi samannāgato āsabhaṃ ṭhānaṃ paṭijānāti, parisāsu sīhanādaṃ nadati, brahmacakkaṃ pavatteti, imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti yāva ‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa nirodho hotī’’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.21-22) anena sīhanādasuttena pakāsito evamattho. ‘‘Kiṃ vādī panāyasmato satthā kimakkhāyī’’ti puṭṭhena āyasmatā assajittherena –
“ 凡是因缘所生的法,如来都说明了它们的因;
而它们的灭尽,那位大沙门也这样宣说。”巴利
‘‘Ye dhammā hetuppabhavā, tesaṃ hetuṃ tathāgato āha; Tesañca yo nirodho, evaṃvādī mahāsamaṇo’’ti. (mahāva. 60; apa. thera 1.1.286) –
已经说了。由此可以知道,从因所生起的那些法的因,就是缘起。这里其余应当说明的内容,后面会显现出来。巴利
Vutto. Tena viññāyati hetuppabhavānaṃ hetu paṭiccasamuppādoti. Sesamettha vattabbaṃ parato āvi bhavissati.
574 “缘”是指依靠各种不同的原因。“正”是指没有颠倒,也就是把从无常[因]生起的无常[果]的生起看作是无常。如果认为果是从常因生起的,那就是颠倒。所以说“外道……无所期待”。像“生起被了知”这样所说的有为法特征之外,还有另一种相,就是这里说的“从缘、从刹那”的缘相,他们认为这就是“生起”的一种相。他们针对这一点说“生等的因就是生等”,但这只是他们自己的看法,因为离开生起特征的那种东西根本不存在。所以说“那不合理”等等。“深奥理趣的不可得”是指深奥的理趣不可得。“词语的坏失”是指词语的坏灭和词语的不相应。没有经典,因为“诸比丘,我为你们宣说缘起”等经典语句没有显示生起本身。这个意思前面已经显示,现在也显示。那就是生起本身。我安住于最初现等觉之时,这是意趣。或者说“我安住”是时间倒置的说法,意思是“我曾住”。在那里,是指在那个处所安住。以见缘行相,是指以那种行相,缘法成为缘所生法的缘,那缘行相就是缘性,以见彼。但这里是指受的缘性。所以说“以邪见为缘也有感受”等等。因为只见受的缘,所说的安住就只是见缘起的一分而安住,所以成为处所安住;而无边之理和一切处作意是最初现等觉的安住。因为那从无分来说就是见缘行相,这是一派的主张。与处所安住经相违,因为那阐明了受的缘法作意。巴利
574.Paṭiccāti taṃ taṃ kāraṇaṃ nissāya. Sammāti aviparītaṃ aniccato aniccassa uppādoti katvā. Niccato hi kāraṇato phalassa uppādo viparīto. Tenāha ‘‘titthiya…pe… nirapekkho’’ti. ‘‘Uppādo paññāyatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.38; a. ni. 3.47; kathā. 214) evaṃ vuttasaṅkhatalakkhaṇato añño ‘‘paccayato khaṇato’’ti ettha vuttapaccayalakkhaṇo eko ākāro uppādoti tesaṃ adhippāyo. Yaṃ sandhāya te ‘‘jātiādīnaṃ hetavo jātiādayo’’ti vadanti, taṃ tesaṃ matimattaṃ, nibbattilakkhaṇavinimuttassa tādisassa kassaci abhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘taṃ na yujjatī’’tiādi. Gambhīranayāsambhavatoti gambhīrānaṃ nayānañca asambhavato. Saddabhedatoti saddavināsato saddāyogato. Suttaṃ natthi ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādaṃ vo, bhikkhave, desessāmī’’tiādisuttapadehi (saṃ. ni. 2.1, 20) uppādamattassa appakāsitattā. Ayameva hi attho heṭṭhā dassito idānipi dassīyati. Taṃ uppādamattaṃ. Viharāmi tasmiṃ paṭhamābhisambuddhakāleti adhippāyo. Viharāmīti vā kālavipallāsena vuttaṃ, vihāsinti attho. Tatrāti tasmiṃ padesavihāre. Paccayākāradassanenāti yenākārena paccayadhammo paccayuppannassa paccayo hoti, so paccayākāro paccayabhāvo, tassa dassanena. Idha pana vedanānaṃ paccayabhāvo adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘micchādiṭṭhipaccayāpi vedayita’’ntiādi. Vedanānaṃyeva hi paccayaṃ passantena vuttavihāro paṭiccasamuppādassa ekadesameva passato vihāroti katvā padesavihāro jāto, anantanayasamantapaṭṭhānamanasikāro paṭhamābhisambuddhavihāro. Tañhi nippadesato paccayākāradassananti eke. Padesavihārasuttavirodho āpajjati tassa vedanānaṃ paccayadhammamanasikāravibhāvanato.
世间从它而生起,所以叫“世间集”,也就是无明等那一堆条件,而不只是“世间集起”这个说法本身。因此说“顺缘起”。“不存在”就是彻底没有,指的是人的相续彻底断灭,这就是断灭的意思。不过,“不存在”因为和断灭见一起出现,所以这里指的是断灭见。“缘不灭”就是条件不断绝。就像依靠过去五因,现在有五果,同样也有五因;依靠现在五因,未来也会有五果。因此说“缘不灭故果不灭”。巴利
Loko samudeti etasmāti lokasamudayo, avijjādiko paccayagaṇo, na lokasamudayamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘anulomapaṭiccasamuppādo’’ti. Natthitāti sabbaso abhāvo, naranvayavināso ucchedoti attho. Natthitāsahacaraṇato pana ucchedadiṭṭhi natthitāti adhippetā. Paccayānuparamo paccayānaṃ avicchedo. Yathā hi atītahetupañcakasannissayena etarahiphalapañcakaṃ viya hetupañcakampi hoti, evaṃ etarahihetupañcakasannissayena āyatiṃphalapañcakampi bhavissati. Tenāha ‘‘paccayānuparame phalānuparamato’’ti.
这种深奥性并不存在于单纯的生起之中,因为它是没有自性的法。由于“一性”等理趣可以在有自性的法上找到,而在单纯的生起上无论如何都找不到,所以说“四种理趣在单纯的生起上不存在”。巴利
Taṃ gambhīrattaṃ uppādamatte natthi asabhāvadhammattā. Ekattanayādayo nayā sabhāvadhammesu labbhamānato uppādamatte kathañcipi na labbheyyunti āha ‘‘nayacatukkaṃ uppādamatte natthī’’ti.
575 在同一作者这一点上,意思是:就在同一个作者身上,对于生起的动作来说他是作者,对于作为缘的动作来说他也是作者。比如“洗过澡后吃饭,吃过饭后躺下”。“在前时”这句话,是因为以“tvā”结尾的词大多表示先前的动作才这么说的,并不是说这里的“缘”这个词本身有前时的含义。只有这样,“依眼”这样的举例才能和所要说明的道理对应起来。或者也可以说,虽然这里两种动作是同时的——因为在生起的动作之前不可能有作为缘的动作——但果的动作相对于因的动作,仍然可以像前时那样来安立。这样,这里因与果的区分就非常清楚了,所以采用假立成就的前时,说成“在前时”。成就义理,就是使句子的意义能够被理解。因为在这里,对“缘起”这个句子意义的领悟,就是所说的义理成就。当“缘”这个词被使用时,应该把它和“生起”这个词所表达的同一个作者,与“没有作者”这个说法连接起来理解。因为在这里的意思是:在“依眼和诸色而生起眼识”等句子中,作为缘的动作和生起的动作,都以识为同一个作者,因此就成立为同一作者。巴利
575.Samāne kattarīti ekasmiṃyeva kattari uppajjanakiriyāya yo kattā, tasmiṃyeva paccayanakiriyāya ca kattubhūteti attho. Yathā ‘‘nhatvā bhuñjati, bhutvā sayatī’’ti. ‘‘Pubbakāle’’ti idañca tvāsaddantānaṃ padānaṃ yebhuyyena purimakālakiriyāya dīpanato vuttaṃ, na idha paṭiccasaddassa purimakālatthattā. Evañhi ‘‘cakkhuṃ paṭiccā’’ti nidassanavacanaṃ nidassitabbena saṃsandeyya. Atha vā kāmañcettha ubhinnaṃ kiriyānaṃ samakālatā uppajjanakiriyāya pubbe paccayanakiriyāya asambhavato, tathāpi phalakiriyāya hetukiriyā purimakālo viya voharituṃ yuttā. Evamettha hetuphalavavatthānaṃ supākaṭaṃ hotīti upacārasiddhaṃ purimakālaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘pubbakāle’’ti. Atthasiddhikaroti vākyatthapaṭiviññattikaro. Paṭiccasamuppādoti hi ettha vākyatthāvabodho idha atthasiddhīti adhippeto. Payujjamāno paṭiccasaddo uppādasaddena vuccamānassa samānassa ‘‘kattu abhāvato’’ti padaṃ ānetvā yojetabbaṃ. Ayañhettha attho ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇa’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-44; 2.4.60; kathā. 465) paccayanakiriyāya, uppajjanakiriyāya ca viññāṇameva kattāti samānakattukatā labbhati.
关于“缘起”这个词,由于“起”这个字是状态成就的含义,只表示行为本身,所以带有同一作者特征的构词用法就不能成立。因此说“出现了词音过失”,意思是成了不正确的表达。这里既不像“未至河而有山,越过山而有河”等句那样是前后关联的用法,也不像“见狮子而恐惧生,饮酥而力生,作‘dha’声而杖倒”等句那样,是取相状、取因等用法。在这里,词音过失实际上并不存在。因为在如掌中庵摩罗果般能现见一切所知而安住的大仙教语之中,那些文字思辨者的戏论是找不到空隙可入的。就算真有机可乘,从句义上说,词的成就也如同“沐浴后而行,食后而卧”等句子一样。即便这样,也仍旧不能成就任何义理。虽然各个词的词义可以辨识,但句子的义理却不合逻辑,因此就像“十石榴”那样的句子,由于没有可关联的义理而成为无意义之语,这就是要说的大意。巴利
‘‘Paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti ettha pana uppādasaddassa bhāvasādhanatāya kiriyāva vuttāti samānakattulakkhaṇo saddappayogo na sambhavatīti. Tenāha ‘‘saddabhedaṃ gacchatī’’ti, apasaddappayogo hotīti attho. Na cettha parāvarayogo (pāṇinī 3.4.20) ‘‘appatvā nadiṃ pabbato, atikkamma pabbataṃ nadī’’tiādīsu viya, nāpi lakkhaṇahetuādipayogo ‘‘sīhaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hoti, ghataṃ pivitvā balaṃ jāyate, ‘dha’nti katvā daṇḍo patito’’tiādīsu viya. Nevettha saddabhedo. Na hi hatthatale āmalakaṃ viya sabbaññeyyaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā ṭhitānaṃ mahesīnaṃ vacane akkharacintakānaṃ vippalāpo avasaraṃ labhati. Labhatu, vākyatthena saddasiddhito ‘‘nhatvā gamanaṃ, bhutvā sayana’’ntiādīsu viyāti. Evampi na ca kiñci atthaṃ sādheti. Yadipi paccekaṃ padattho labbhati, vākyattho pana na yujjati, tasmā dasadāḷimādivākyāni viya asambandhatthatāya niratthakaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.
当名词词被说出时,即使那些动词并没有直接跟它搭配,也应该引入“有”“是”“存在”这类动词,把它们连接起来——这是通例。正是依据这个道理,论主才说“我们将与‘是’这个词结合”。“在这些之中”指的是前面所说的、按教说、承认、提问、结语的方式说出的缘起词句。这只是一个示例而已。在别的地方,比如“他好好如理作意缘起本身,也就是此缘性、缘起”“阿难,这缘起甚深”等等语句中,“是”这个词同样不和其中任何一个词发生关联。它不关联,是因为没有按关联的方式说出来。“而并没有生起”这句话,是就生起没有自性、不具足生起的相状来说的。就像坏灭没有坏灭一样,生起也没有生起,如同坏灭那样。如果生起还有生起,那么使生起成为有生的那个生起,它自身也必定是有生的,这样就会陷入无穷的过失。前面所讲的正是这个意思。因此论主说“如果那样的话”等等。如果是这样的话,怎么还会有集起呢?这并没有过失,因为这里并不是在说生起。这里真正的意思是:如此,苦蕴便集起、显现、产生。而在这里,缘起是“有”,这是对它的存在性的表述;如果把它当作“生起”,就变成了对生起的表述。正是基于这个用意,才说“并没有生起”。巴利
Nāmapade vutte appayuttānipi ‘‘atthi, hoti, vijjatī’’ti evarūpāni kiriyāpadāni ānetvā sambandhitabbānīti ñāyaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘hotisaddena saddhiṃ yojayissāmā’’ti. Imesūti yathāvuttesu desanāpaṭiññāpucchānigamanavasena vuttesu paṭiccasamuppādapadesu. Nidassanamattañcetaṃ, aññesupi ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādameva sādhukaṃ yoniso manasi kāroti. Yadidaṃ idappaccayatā paṭiccasamuppādo (dī. ni. 2.67; ma. ni. 2.337; sa. ni. 1.172; mahāva. 7). Gambhīro cāyaṃ, ānanda, paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti (dī. ni. 2.95; saṃ. ni. 2.60) evamādīsupi ekenapi saddhiṃ hoti-saddo sambandhaṃ na gacchati. Yogaṃ na gacchati tathā sambandhavasena avuttattā. ‘‘Na ca uppādo hotī’’ti idaṃ asabhāvadhammattā uppādassa nibbattilakkhaṇāyogaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Yathā hi vināsassa vināso natthi, evaṃ uppādassa vināso viya uppādopi natthi. Yadi siyā, yena uppādena uppādo uppādavā, sopi uppādavāti anavaṭṭhānameva āpajjeyyāti vuttovāyamattho. Tenāha ‘‘sace heyyā’’tiādi. Yadi evaṃ, kathaṃ samudayo hotīti? Nāyaṃ doso nibbattiyā anadhippetattā. Evaṃ dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo pātubhāvo sambhavatīti ayañhettha attho, idha pana paṭiccasamuppādo hotīti tassa atthibhāvacodanāti katvā hoti, jāyatīti nibbatticodanā katā siyāti adhippāyena vuttaṃ ‘‘na uppādo hotī’’ti.
576 无明等这些法是行等这些法的缘,所以叫“此缘”;它们的存在状态,就是“此缘性”。那么,这个存在状态又是什么呢?论主说“存在状态就是名……”等等。它的意思是:无明等法以某种方式成为行等法显现的因;无明等法转起时的行相差别,即那一种变化,就在这上头安立“缘起”这个名称。这是那些论师的主张。因性之言说,就是从因性来说的。巴利
576. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayā idappaccayā, avijjādayo, tesaṃ bhāvo idappaccayatā. Ko pana so bhāvoti āha ‘‘bhāvo ca nāmā’’tiādi. Tassattho – yenākārena avijjādayo saṅkhārādipātubhāvahetū honti, tasmiṃ avijjādīnaṃ pavattiākāravisese vikāre paṭiccasamuppādoti ayaṃ samaññāti. Tesaṃ vādīnaṃ taṃ maññanaṃ. Hetuvacanatoti hetubhāvavacanato.
577 这里说的“在此”是指“缘起”这个词。有些人认为,“缘起”是以“生起”为主要表达、与众生相关的因。他们之所以这样想,是因为不了解这不颠倒的含义,又看到别处“生起”一词被用作“存在”的意思,就依着文字表面的影子,以为这里也只是说生起,而不是说因。对于他们生起的这种想,应当通过现在所说的方式把握“缘起”这个词的含义,把它止息、遣除。巴利
577.Etthāti paṭiccasamuppādapade. Samuppādapadhānavacanaviññeyyo sasattiko hetu paṭiccasamuppādoti aviparītaṃ atthaṃ ajānantānaṃ aññattha samuppādasaddassa bhāvasādhanassa dassanato tathā idhāpi byañjanacchāyāya uppādoyevāyaṃ vutto, na hetūti yā saññā uppajjati, sā imassa paṭiccasamuppādapadassa evaṃ idāni vuccamānākārena atthaṃ gahetvā vūpasametabbā vinodetabbā.
关于“以两种方式”这句偈颂,简要的意思是:由于依自己的缘而转起的缘所生法聚,从应当被缘知的角度来说,它是“缘”,又因为它与“生起”同时发生,所以是“起”;或者说,不抛开因的聚合而同时生起,因此也是“起”。这样一来,“缘起”这个说法就应当以两种方式来理解。所以,那些作为缘的法,也借着果的称呼而被说成是“缘起”。巴利
Dvedhāti gāthāya ayaṃ saṅkhepattho – yasmā attano paccayavasena pavatto paccayuppannadhammasamūho paccetabbato paṭicco ca so saha uppajjanato samuppādo ca, paṭicca vā kāraṇasāmaggiṃ apaccakkhāya saha uppajjanato evāti ca evaṃ dvedhā ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti idaṃ vacanaṃ icchitabbaṃ, tasmā tassa paccayadhammopi phalūpacārena paṭiccasamuppādo icceva vuttoti.
从缘的聚合来说,就是缘性。转起,就是已生起。法聚,就是缘所生法的聚集。被认知,就是随着智慧的行进而朝向、接近,意思是现观。为了利益和安乐,就是为了出世间的利益和出世间的安乐。共同生起,因为任何一法都不可能有时单独生起。正确地生起,因为不是从无因生,也不是从邪因生。共同生起,就是一起生起,因为至少也有八法同时生起。不排斥,就是不拒绝,意思是说,与自身成为缘的诸法聚合中的任何一法都不分离。它的,就是那个被称为缘起的缘所生法之聚,它所有的这个无明等因的聚合。因为是它的缘,由此说明:在缘起的缘上,安立了缘起这个名称。因此他说如同世间等。正如世间以果的名称来称呼因,说胆汁是搅动之物、酒是酪、三果是热病、痰是糖、寿命是酥,同样应当知道,这里是依果的比喻而说缘起。巴利
Paccayatāyāti paccayasamūhato. Pavattoti nibbatto. Dhammasamūhoti paccayuppannadhammapuñjo. Patīyamānoti ñāṇagatiyā abhimukhaṃ upeyamāno, abhisamiyamānoti attho. Hitāya sukhāya cāti lokuttarahitāya, lokuttarasukhāya ca. Saha uppajjati ekekassa kadācipi uppattiyā abhāvato. Sammā uppajjati ahetuto, visamahetuto ca anuppajjanato. Saha uppajjatīti ekajjhaṃ uppajjati antamaso aṭṭhannaṃ dhammānaṃ uppajjanato. Na paccakkhāyāti apaṭikkhipitvā, attano paccayabhūtadhammasamudāyena kenaci na vināti attho. Tassāti yvāyaṃ ‘‘paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti vutto paccayuppannadhammasamūho, tassa ayaṃ avijjādiko hetusamūho. ‘‘Tappaccayattā’’ti etena paṭiccasamuppādapaccaye paṭicca samuppādasamaññāti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘yathā loke’’tiādi. Yathā hi loke ‘‘pittaṃ mathitaṃ, sūrā dadhi, tipusaṃ jaro, semho guḷo, āyu ghata’’nti ca paccayo phalavohārena vuccati, evaṃ phalūpacārena paṭiccasamuppādo vuttoti veditabbo.
578 578. 在“缘”这个词里,“缘”这个音有“面对”的意思,“此”这个音有“去”的意思。为了说明这一点,他说“面对……而来”。那么,面对谁?由谁而来?或者,谁而来?对这三个质问,他回答最后一个时说“因的集合”。因为当这个被解答时,因的集合也就是缘的聚合,在其中,它们彼此面对,也正是彼此而来,这样,这个意思也就被解答了。“俱”:即和合、不分离。“它”:即因的集合。“被称为起”:如此连接。巴利
578. Paṭicca-sadde paṭi-saddo abhimukhattho, icca-saddo gammatthoti dassento āha ‘‘paṭimukhamito’’ti. Kassa pana paṭimukhaṃ, kena vā ito, ko vā itoti codanattaye pacchimaṃ vissajjento ‘‘hetusamūho’’ti āha. Tasmiñhi vissaṭṭhe hetusamūho nāma paccayasāmaggīti tattha aññamaññassa paṭimukhaṃ, aññamaññeneva ca itoti vissaṭṭhovāyamattho hotīti. Sahiteti samudite avinibbhutte. Soti hetusamūho. Samuppādo iti vuttoti yojanā.
“为了生起”指的是为了出现。虽然在经典里说的是“以无明为缘而有行”,但无明并不是唯一的缘。俱生的法、所依、所缘等,如理作意等,以及渴爱、取等法,都会按各自的情况,成为无明生起行时的辅助条件。同样,行等对于识等也是如此。因此说“以无明等每一个因作为代表所显示的因的集合”。所谓“以产生共同果为意义”,是指属于这个集合的诸因法,以产生共同果的方式。所谓“以无欠缺为意义”,是指以没有不足的方式。因为如果在这个因的集合中,有些果是某些因不共的,而且只能由某些因产生,但所有这些缘法之间并没有相互观待,由于没有互相面对,缘的意义就不圆满。所谓“和合的支分”,是指属于缘的和合的组成部分,也就是“集合”的意思。这里的属格表示从整体中区分出部分。所谓“果法的共存”,是指它们并非各自单独存在,不像因法那样互相观待,因此说“彼此不可分离而运作的法”;这里说“不可分离地把握”,也是为了把色法包括进来。否则,就应该说成“相应法”了。巴利
Pātubhāvāyāti uppādāya. Kāmaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1; mahāva. 1; netti. 24; vibha. 225) avijjāva paccayabhāvena vuttā, tathāpi na avijjā ekāva paccayo hoti, atha kho sahajātadhammavatthuārammaṇādayo, yonisomanasikārādayo, taṇhupādānādayo ca dhammā yathārahaṃ saṅkhāruppādane avijjāya sahakārīkāraṇaṃ hontiyeva. Evaṃ saṅkhārādayopi viññāṇādīnanti āha ‘‘avijjādiekekahetusīsena niddiṭṭho hetusamūho’’ti. Sādhāraṇaphalanipphādakaṭṭhenāti taṃsamūhapariyāpannānaṃ hetudhammānaṃ sādhāraṇassa phalassa nibbattakabhāvena. Avekallaṭṭhenāti anūnabhāvena. Tasmiñhi hetusamūhe ekaccāsādhāraṇañcetaṃ phalaṃ, ekacceheva ca nibbattetabbaṃ siyā, sabbesaṃ tesaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ aññamaññāpekkhā natthīti paṭimukhagamanābhāvato paṭiccattho na paripūreyyāti. Sāmaggiaṅgānanti paccayasāmaggiyā aṅgabhūtānaṃ, samūhīnanti attho . Niddhāraṇe cetaṃ sāmivacanaṃ. Phaladhammānaṃ sahitatā nāma visuṃ abhāvo, na hetudhammānaṃ viya aññamaññāpekkhāti āha ‘‘aññamaññaṃ avinibbhogavuttidhamme’’ti avinibbhogaggahaṇañcettha rūpadhammānampi saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ. Aññathā sampayuttadhammeti vucceyya.
579 “缘性”就是指无明等这些缘的集合。“彼此”就是相互之间。“缘于”就是依靠、得到助成的条件。“和合”就是不偏、不缺。“俱”就是一起。“法”就是自己由缘所生的那些法。因为能令生起,所以从那里、也由此。这样,“缘起”就是牟尼、世尊所说的——这是句子的连接。为了显示“不是不缘,而正是缘”这个限定的意思,说明偈颂里的“eva”字是省略而说的。巴利
579.Paccayatāti ayaṃ avijjādiko paccayasamūho. Aññoññanti aññamaññaṃ. Paṭiccāti nissāya sahakārīkāraṇaṃ laddhā. Samanti avisamaṃ avekallena. Sahāti ekajjhaṃ. Dhammeti attano paccayuppannadhamme. Yasmā uppādeti, tatopi tasmāpi. Evaṃ paṭiccasamuppādoti muninā bhagavatā bhāsitāti yojanā. Na apaṭicca paṭiccevāti avadhāraṇatthaṃ dassento gāthāyaṃ eva-kāro luttaniddiṭṭhoti dasseti.
“一一分”是指果的集合中的每一个部分,也就是“部分”的意思。“以前后次第”是指按顺序。这一切都是针对色法与无色法聚的生起而说的。“善于随顺义理的言说者”,是指精通于随顺胜义法的表述的人。巴利
Ekekadesanti phalasamudāyassa ekadesekadesaṃ, bhāgasoti attho. Pubbāparabhāvenāti paṭipāṭiyā . Sabbametaṃ rūpārūpakalāpuppādanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Atthānusāravohārakusalenāti paramatthadhammānugatavohāranipuṇena.
580 “由前一词”是指句子的连接。“常见等”是指常见这种状态等,或者是指常见论等。因为与常见一起生起的论说也被称为“常见等”,就像说“苦的教示就是苦”一样。“断见等”在这里也是同样的道理。“破坏”就是毁灭,意思是断除。“理”是指远离两种极端的中道修行。巴利
580. Purimena padenāti yojanā. Sassatādīnanti sassatabhāvādīnaṃ, sassatavādādīnaṃ vā. Sassatasahacaritā hi vādāpi sassatādayoti vuccanti yathā ‘‘dukkhadesanā dukkha’’nti. Ucchedādīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Vighāto vināso, pahānanti attho. Ñāyoti antadvayavirahitā majjhimā paṭipatti.
“流转的诸法”是指作为流转而存在的诸法,也就是烦恼轮等的意思。以“我与世间是常”这类见解生起的,是常见论。以“众生的杂染没有因、没有缘”这类见解生起的,是无因论。认为世间是依本性、极微、时间等而流转的,这样生起的见解是不正因论。自在天、原人、生主等论说,是自在主宰论。在这里,通过“无因论”这个说法,也应当知道已经包含了自性论、随意论、偶然论等。不过有些人说“眼就是眼的因”这类说法,属于不正因论。自在天等论说包含在无因论里面。那些认为“诸法纯粹依自性而流转”的论说,他们称之为“自在主宰论”。它的意思是:缘的和合有什么用呢?通过“缘起”这个词就说明了这一点——这是句子的衔接。为了显示阐明的无颠倒之因,所以说“因为诸法在缘的和合中生起”。“被破坏”就是被摧毁。通过“依前前之缘”这句话,显示了无间断地流转、能消除断见的因果相续。因此说“哪里会有断灭呢?”在这里,通过说明断灭不存在,也应当知道断灭论本身也不存在。巴利
Pavattidhammānanti pavattibhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ, kilesavaṭṭādīnanti attho. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādinayappavatto (dī. ni. 1.31) sassatavādo. ‘‘Natthi hetu, natthi paccayo sattānaṃ saṃkilesāyā’’tiādinayappavatto (dī. ni. 1.168; ma. ni. 2.101, 227; saṃ. ni. 3.212) ahetuvādo. Pakati aṇukālādivasena loko pavattatīti evaṃ pavatto visamahetuvādo. Issarapurisapajāpativādā vasavattivādā. Ahetuvādaggahaṇeneva cettha sabhāvaniyati yadicchāvādānampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Keci pana ‘‘cakkhu eva cakkhussa kāraṇa’’nti evamādiko visamahetuvādo. Issarādivādo ahetuvādantogadho. Sabhāveneva dhammā pavattantīti vādo ‘‘vasavattivādo’’ti vadanti. Kiṃ hi paccayasāmaggiyā payojananti adhippāyo. Samuppādapadena paridīpito hotīti yojanā. Paridīpanassa pana aviparītakāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘paccayasāmaggiyaṃ dhammānaṃ uppattito’’ti vuttaṃ. Vihatāti abbhāhatā. ‘‘Purimapurimapaccayavasenā’’ti iminā avicchedavasena pavattamānaṃ ucchedadiṭṭhinivattakaṃ hetuphalapabandhaṃ dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘kuto ucchedo’’ti. Ucchedābhāvakathaneneva cettha ucchedavādassāpi abhāvaṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“于彼彼缘的和合”是指在彼彼因缘的聚合中。“不中断相续”是指不中断称为因果相续的相续。由于彼彼缘生的诸法生起、产生,不落入称为常与断的两边,依各自的缘生起相应的果,这里意指的是中道行。由于业轮与果报轮的自性不同、时间不同,故舍弃“同一者造作、同一者感受”的论说。因为在善不善蕴的流转中,有“作者”的称谓;在果报蕴的流转中,有“受者”的称谓。由于在哪个相续中造了业,就在那个相续中生起其果,故舍弃“另一者造作、另一者感受”的论说。因为已作的不会灭去,未作的不会到来。“女人、男人”的称谓是世间通称。在这里,因为世间的智者也不会说“把五蕴带来,让名色过来”,而只是以“女人、男人”来称呼,所以对于未了知所依的人来说,会有“这就是女人,这就是男人”的执著。然而,对于知见者、了知缘起的人来说,只是依于如此这般流转的诸法而安立的假名,在那里,从胜义上说,并没有执著,因此说“不执著于世间通称”。“于共称”即于世间共称。“不超越”即不逾越。因为当说“有情”时,不应作“这里谁是有情?是色,还是受等?”这样的分析,而应如同世间人那样,依世间共称,不违背共称地,以世间义来言说。巴利
Tassā tassā paccayasāmaggiyāti tasmiṃ tasmiṃ hetupaccayasamavāye. Santatiṃ avicchinditvāti hetuphalapabandhasaṅkhātassa santānassa avicchindanena. Tesaṃ tesaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ sambhavato uppajjanato sassatucchedasaṅkhātaṃ antadvayaṃ anupaggamma yathāsakaṃ paccayehi anurūpaphaluppatti idha majjhimapaṭipadāti adhippetā. Kammavaṭṭassa, vipākavaṭṭassa ca bhinnasabhāvattā, bhinnakālattā ca so karoti so paṭisaṃvedetīti vādappahānaṃ. Kusalākusalakkhandhappavattiyañhi kārakavohāro, vipākakkhandhapavattiyaṃ vedakavohāroti. Yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tattheva tassa phalassa nibbattanato añño karoti añño paṭisaṃvedetīti vādappahānaṃ. Na hi katassa vināso, akatassa vā abbhāgamo atthi. ‘‘Itthī, purisā’’ti vohārena janapadanirutti. Tattha yasmā paṇḍitāpi loke ‘‘pañcakkhandhe ānetu, nāmarūpaṃ āgacchatū’’ti avatvā itthī, purisotveva voharanti, tasmā ‘‘itthī evāyaṃ, puriso evāyanti apariññātavatthukānaṃ hoti abhiniveso. Viddasuno pana paṭiccasamuppādaṃ jānantassa tathā tathā pavattamāne dhamme upādāya paññattimattato tattha paramatthato na abhinivesoti āha ‘‘janapadaniruttiyā anabhiniveso’’ti. Samaññāyāti lokasamaññāya. Anatidhāvananti anatikkamanaṃ. ‘‘Satto’’ti hi vutte ‘‘ko ettha satto, kiṃ rūpaṃ, udāhu vedanādayo’’ti vibhāgaṃ akatvā lokasamaññāvaseneva lokiyehi viya lokiyo attho samaññaṃ avilaṅghantena voharitabbo.
另一种解释:应当被了知、被通达,所以叫“缘”。因为凡是能了知、通达它的人,它就会一直导向苦的止息。“正确地”并且“一起”生起,所以叫“生起”。缘法在生起自己的果时,是完整地生起,不是残缺地生起。而它所生起的那些法,是全部同时一起生起,不是一个一个地生起。因此,它既是缘,又是生起,所以叫“缘生起”。或者也可以说,面向、前往,不拒绝因缘和合,而是一起生起,所以叫“缘生起”。所谓“面向、前往”,就是指缘作为因缘和合的一部分而生起果。“不拒绝”的意思是:不是离开那因缘和合、不成为它的一部分,而自己单独生起。这样就说明了因的众多性;用“一起”这个词,说明了缘所生法的众多性。通过这两方面,也就阐明了后面将要说的“不是一、不是从一生起”等教法道理。巴利
Aparo nayo – paccetumarahatīti paṭicco. Yo hi naṃ pacceti abhisameti, tassa accantameva dukkhavūpasamāya saṃvattati. Sammā, saha ca uppādetīti samuppādo. Paccayadhammo hi attano phalaṃ uppādento sampuṇṇameva uppādeti, na vikalaṃ. Ye ca dhamme uppādeti, te sabbe saheva uppādeti, na ekekaṃ. Iti paṭicco ca so samuppādo cāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Atha vā paṭicca paṭimukhaṃ itvā kāraṇasāmaggiṃ appaṭikkhipitvā sahite uppādetīti paṭiccasamuppādo. Paṭimukhagamanañca paccayassa kāraṇasāmaggiyā aṅgabhāvena phalassa uppādanameva. Appaṭikkhipitvāti ca na vinā tāya kāraṇasāmaggiyā, aṅgabhāvaṃ agantvā sayameva na uppādetīti attho. Etena kāraṇabahutā dassitā, ‘‘sahite’’ti iminā paccayuppannadhammabahutā. Ubhayenāpi ‘‘ekaṃ na ekato’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 2.617) parato vuccamāno sāsananayo dīpito hoti.
或者,“缘于所应缘之法,取之为缘,然后并非离开它而有联结的生起,这就是缘起”(《如是语》义注 1)。在这里,“缘起”应当被理解为以“生起”为主的词,是与有情相关的因。其中,当说“缘于”(paṭicca)时,有人会问“缘于什么”,所以回答说“所应缘之法”。而因为它是缘法,所以称为“缘”。现在,为了说明“缘于”这个词的含义,说“取之为缘”,意思是:以因的本性,沿着获得它的方式而到达。怎么会不离开它呢?因为当它存在时,那个果才生起,不是别的样子;当它不存在时,果就灭去。这就是“缘于”一词所指的缘的安住状态。因此,“缘于”这个词,就像“此有故此生起”这些话一样,所观待的是“此”这个词所指的有因者的因所依状态——这种状态由处格与属格表达出来——并且以后续的生起为动作;凡有那种依属状态,就以那种能力来说因。同样地,“到达”是另一个词,它所指的,是那可知的缘之作用者的因;这个因以因缘的方式、以后续的生起为动作而被观待;凡有那种依属状态,就以那种能力来说因。这样做了之后,在《无碍解道》中说:“缘于无明,诸行是缘起的”(《无碍解道》1.46)等等。这里的能力,就是作为因等的状态。而那种能力对于不离它的果来说,正是“有”本身。所谓“联结”,是指以与结缚相应的方式,由生等而联结的、以老死等为缘所生者的联结。“生起”就是发生。如果是这样,为什么用“缘于”这个词呢?岂不是说,这种用词方式通常是用于同一主语相续的场合吗?如“吃了以后去”、“耕了以后播种”等句中,确实如此;但那应当理解为多是就同一主语而言,因为也可见到用于非同一主语的情形。首先,就同一时间的情况而言——巴利
Atha vā paṭicca paccetabbaṃ paccayaṃ paṭigantvā na vinā tena sambandhassa uppādo paṭiccasamuppādo (udā. aṭṭha. 1). Paṭiccasamuppādoti cettha samuppādappadhānavacanaviññeyyo sasattiko hetūti veditabbo. Tattha ‘‘paṭiccā’’ti vutte kiṃ paṭiccāti vattabbanti āha ‘‘paccetabba’’nti. So ca paccayadhammoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘paccaya’’nti. Idāni paṭiccasaddassa atthamāha ‘‘paṭigantvā’’ti. Kāraṇassa sabhāvena tappaṭilābhagatiyā patvā. Kathaṃ na vinā tena? Sati eva tasmiṃ, tassa ca phalassa uppādato eva, na aññathā. Asati, nirodhato cāti ayaṃ paccayaṭṭhiti paṭiccasaddassa attho. Tenāyaṃ paṭiccasaddo yathā ‘‘imasmiṃ sati imassuppādo’’ti ete saddā bhummanissakkavacanajotanīyena idaṃ-saddavacanīyassa hetumato hetuāyattabhāvena bhāvuppāduttarakiriyāpekkhena yāyassa tadāyattatā, tāya samatthatāya hetuṃ vadanti, evaṃ gantvā-saddantaravacanīyena taṃviññeyyasseva paccayanakiriyākattuhetumato hetupaccayanena hetuāyattabhāvena samuppāduttarakiriyāpekkhena yāyassa tadāyattatā, tāya samatthatāya hetumāha. Evañca katvā ‘‘avijjā paṭicca, saṅkhārā paṭiccasamuppannā’’tiādi (paṭi. ma. 1.46) saṅkhārapiṭake vuttaṃ. Samatthatā cettha nidānādibhāvo. So ca tadavinābhāviphalaṃ pati satvameva. Sambandhassāti ca saṃyojanānurūpatāvasena jātiādinā sambandhassa jarāmaraṇādipaccayuppannassa. Uppādoti uppajjanaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kathaṃ paṭiccasaddappayogo, nanu samānakattukānaṃ pubbakāle īdiso saddappayogoti? ‘‘Bhutvā gacchati, kasitvā vapatī’’tiādīsu saccametaṃ, taṃ pana yebhuyyavasena daṭṭhabbaṃ samānāparakāle, asamānakattuke ca dassanato. Samānakāle tāva –
“ 驱散了黑暗,太阳升起的时候;
以容貌和智慧的光辉照亮之后而显现。”巴利
‘‘Andhakāraṃ nihantvāna, uditāyaṃ divākaro; Vaṇṇapaññāvabhāsehi, obhāsetvā samuggato’’ti. –
举例说明。不过,有些人举的例子是“张开嘴躺着,转动眼珠看”。另一些人则举“坐着学习,站着说话”。巴利
Udāharaṇaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘mukhaṃ byādāya sayati, akkhīni parivattetvā passatī’’ti udāharanti. Apare ‘‘nisajja adhīte, ṭhatvā kathetī’’ti.
在这里,对于“躺下、转动”之后才出现的“看”这一动作,确实存在前后时间的关系,但这种差别微细难辨,有些人觉察不到。“坐着学习,站着说话”这个例子中,虽然学习和说话可以是同时的,但在此之前也的确有坐下和站立的动作,所以前后时间关系是可以成立的,因此前面的例子才恰当。因为遮止与彼遮止确实是同时的。而在后时的情况,就如“关了门后进入,关了门后出来”。另有些人举例说“杖子啪嗒一声倒下”。然而在这里,撞击本身与撞击所生之声具有同时性,因此在这里也是前面的例子才恰当。不过,正是基于“前时”这一说法的意趣,才成立了“表示相状与因的动作具有相状与因之状态”这一说法的意趣,因此从相状的状态而言,“前时”正是所意欲的,所以“摧毁了”一词得以成立。如此,缘的动作在生起的动作之前,因此“缘”字得以成立。在这里,若有人说:因为现量可见作者,所以合理;而在这里因为没有作者,所以不合理?这并没有过失。因为在这里也是由推理而成立的。老死等的作者确实存在,因为可见“了知后,从动作而灭”等用法,这种词句用法必定由被推理出的作者而被意欲。而在作者不同的情况下,应知如“见了鬼而生起恐惧,以慧见而诸漏灭尽”等。正如在那里,见鬼等是人的作用,同样在这里,缘的作用就是缘产生自己的果,而那果就是生起,因此“有缘时,从缘的生起”这一说法,由于缘是生起之因,即使没有同一作者,也能成立“缘”字。如果缘与生的关系之生起就是缘起,那缘怎么是缘起呢?这个道理前面已经讨论过了。此外,这里由“生起”一词所表明的、由“缘”一词所表明的缘所生法,其有势力的因是被意指的,因为它倾向于生起,其自性应通过主要表述来了知,所以那样说。巴利
Tattha byādānaparivattanuttarakālabhāvisayanadassanakiriyāpekkhā pubbuttarakālatā atthi, sā ca bhedānupalakkhaṇā kehici na lakkhīyati. ‘‘Nisajja adhīte, ṭhatvā kathetī’’ti ca samānakālatāyapi ajjhenakathanehi pubbepi nisajjaṭṭhānāni hontīti sakkā pubbuttarakālatā sambhāvetuṃ, tasmā purimāniyeva udāharaṇāni yuttāni. Udayasamakālameva hi tannivattaniyanivattananti. Aparakāle ‘‘dvāramāvaritvā pavisati, āvaritvā nikkhamatī’’ti. Keci pana ‘‘ḍakkacca patito daṇḍo’’ti udāharanti. Abhighātabhūtasahajātāya pana abhighātajasaddassa samānakālatā ettha labbhati, tasmā idhāpi purimāniyeva udāharaṇāni yuttāni. Purimatāvacanicchāvaseneva pana lakkhaṇahetukiriyānaṃ lakkhaṇahetubhāvavacanicchāti lakkhaṇabhāvato purimakālo icceva ‘‘nihantvānā’’ti saddasiddhi icchitā, evañca paccayanakiriyā samuppajjanakiriyāya purimikāvāti paṭicca-saddasiddhi. Tattha yuttaṃ paccakkhato kattudassanato. Idha pana tadabhāvato na yuttanti ce? Nāyaṃ doso. Idhāpi anumānato siddho. Jarāmaraṇādiko kattā attheva ‘‘ñatvā kiriyato vaya’’nti evamādipayogadassanato avassaṃ anumiyamānena kattunā īdiso saddapayogo icchitabbo. Asamāne pana kattari ‘‘pisācaṃ disvā bhayaṃ hoti, paññāya cassa disvā āsavā parikkhīṇā hontī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.271; 2.182; pu. pa. 204) evamādi veditabbaṃ. Yathā ca tattha pisācadassanādipurisabyāpāro, evamidhāpi paccayanaṃ paccayabyāpāro attano phaluppādanaṃ, tañca satvaṃ samuppādovāti ‘‘paccaye sati, paccayassa uppādā’’ti paccayanassa samuppādahetutāya gamako samānassa kattu abhāvepi paṭicca-saddo siddhoti veditabbo. Yadi paṭiccasambandhassa uppādo paṭiccasamuppādo, kathaṃ paccayo paṭiccasamuppādoti? Heṭṭhā vicāritovāyamattho. Apica yoyaṃ samuppāda-saddavibhāvitānaṃ paccayuppannānaṃ paṭiccasaddavibhāvito sasattiko hetu adhippeto, tassa samuppādābhimukhatāya padhānavacanaviññeyyasabhāvattā tathā vuttoti.
那么,为什么以“生起”为主要表述,就能让人知道生起的因,而不是直接说“有因的生起”呢?回答是:因为通过“缘”的说明,已经阐明了所见之苦的缘。怎么说呢?正如经中所说——巴利
Kiṃ pana kāraṇaṃ samuppādapadhānena vacanena samuppādassa hetu veditabbo, na pana sahetuko samuppādo evāti? Vuccate – diṭṭhassa dukkhassa yo paccayo paccayaniddesena tassa vibhāvitattā. Kathaṃ? Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,一位比丘在探究时这样探究:“世间生起的这种种、各式各样的苦,也就是老死——这苦到底以什么为因?以什么为集?以什么为生?以什么为根源?当什么存在时,才有老死?当什么不存在时,就没有老死?”他这样探究时,便如此了知:“这苦……以生为因”等等。巴利
‘‘Idha, bhikkhave, bhikkhu parivīmaṃsamāno parivīmaṃsati ‘yaṃ kho idaṃ anekavidhaṃ nānappakārakaṃ dukkhaṃ loke uppajjati jarāmaraṇaṃ, idaṃ nu kho dukkhaṃ kiṃ nidānaṃ kiṃ samudayaṃ kiṃ jātikaṃ kiṃ pabhavaṃ, kismiṃ sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, kismiṃ asati jarāmaraṇaṃ na hotī’ti. So parivīmaṃsamāno evaṃ pajānāti ‘yaṃ kho idaṃ…pe… idaṃ kho dukkhaṃ jātinidāna’’’miccādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.51) –
所见之苦的因由,在《观察经》中已经说过。而那个了知以及因由,也应当被了知。正如所说的——巴利
Diṭṭhassa dukkhassa nidānaṃ parivīmaṃsasutte vuttaṃ. Taṃ pajānanañca nidānampi viññātabbanti. Yathā cāha –
比丘们,在我还没有证得正觉、还是菩萨的时候,我心里这样想:这个世间确实陷入了困境,有生、有老、有死、有死去、有再生,可是众生却不知道怎样从老死之苦中出离。到底什么时候,才能看清这苦的出离、老死的出离呢?……比丘们,我通过如理作意,以智慧通达了:有生,才有老死;老死是以生为条件的。巴利
‘‘Pubbe me, bhikkhave, sambodhā anabhisambuddhassa bodhisattasseva sato etadahosi ‘kicchaṃ vatāyaṃ loko āpanno jāyati ca jīyati ca mīyati ca cavati ca upapajjati ca, atha ca panimassa dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ nappajānāti jarāmaraṇassa. Kudāssu nāma imassa dukkhassa nissaraṇaṃ paññāyissati jarāmaraṇassā’ti…pe… tassa mayhaṃ, bhikkhave, yoniso manasikārā ahu paññāya abhisamayo ‘jātiyā kho sati jarāmaraṇaṃ hoti, jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇa’’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.10) –
从开头所说的“所见之苦”,是通过对缘的观察与通达而说的。因为缘应当被了知,而了知苦的出离又依赖于这种通达。凡是应当被了知的,就应当被宣说。所以“缘起”这个词,是为了阐明缘而说的:由“生起”一词所显明的所见之苦,正是依缘而有,而不是别的样子。即使以“缘”为重点,为了让人了知和宣说,也会因为某种特殊的可了知性,而以非重点的方式加以说明。比如“谁是入流者?就是已断三结的人。谁是提婆达多?就是拥有更高殿堂的人。”同样,在这里,通过说明缘和缘所生之义,在解说中以殊胜的能力,为了表明它应当被了知为以自身的果为所缘,所以用“依缘”这个同义词来称说缘。巴利
Ādinā diṭṭhassa dukkhassa paccayavīmaṃsābhisamayā vuttā. Paccayo hi ñātabbo. Tadabhisamayāyattañca dukkhanissaraṇapajānananti yo ca ñātabbo, so pavedetabboti paṭiccasamuppādasaddo yaṃ yadidaṃ samuppādasaddavibhāvitaṃ diṭṭhaṃ dukkhaṃ, taṃ paccayaṃ paṭicceva, na aññathāti evaṃ paccayavibhāvanatthaṃ vuccati. Bhavati hi ñātuṃ, pavedetuñca icchitabhāvena padhānassāpi kenaci visesena ñātabbatāya appadhānabhāvena niddeso yathā ‘‘ko sotāpanno, yassa tīṇi saṃyojanāni pahīnāni. Ko devadatto, yassa uccatarāni gehānī’’ti, evamidhāpi paccayapaccayanapavedanaṭṭhena niddese sattivisesena attano phalena paccanīyatāya ñātabbabhāvena ‘‘paṭiccā’’ti pariyāyena paccayo vutto.
而“以无明为缘而有行”等这一系列解说,是从整个苦蕴的根本开始,把诸缘展示出来。到了结尾也说“如此,这整个苦蕴就集起了”,用“如此”这个词指出应当被灭尽的苦,然后把前面所说的诸缘指向这苦的集起,由此归结到诸缘。在《行道经》里也说“以无明为缘……集起”,接着又说“比丘们,这叫做邪行道”。并不是以缘生的方式所摄取的苦是邪行道,而是作为苦之集起的那些缘才是邪行道。又像“五支正定”“五智正定”那样,在教说中以正定等词为重点,是为了让人通达支与智,所以用正定等词来达成对支与智的通达;同样地,这里也应以“生起”一词为重点,理解为达成了对缘的通达。巴利
Yo cāyaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko niddeso, so ca sakalassa dukkhakkhandhassa mūlato paṭṭhāya paccayānaṃ pavedanāya niddiṭṭhoti pariyosānepi ‘‘evametassa kevalassa dukkhakkhandhassa samudayo hotī’’ti evaṃ-saddena samugghātaṃ dukkhaṃ dassetvā tassa yathāvutte paccaye taṃsamudayābhimukhe katvā nigamitā paccayā. Paṭipadāsuttepi (saṃ. ni. 2.3) ‘‘avijjāpaccayā…pe… samudayo hotī’’ti vatvā ‘‘ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, micchāpaṭipadā’’ti vuttaṃ. Na ca paṭiccasamuppannabhāvena gahitaṃ dukkhaṃ micchāpaṭipadaṃ, atha kho dukkhasamudayabhūtā paccayāti. Yathā ca ‘‘pañcaṅgiko sammāsamādhi (dī. ni. 3.335), pañcañāṇiko sammāsamādhī’’ti (dī. ni. 3.355) aṅgañāṇapaṭivedanatthattā desanāya sammāsamādhipadhānehi saddehi aṅgañāṇapaṭivedanaṃ kataṃ, evamidhāpi samuppādapadhānena saddena paccayapaṭivedanaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ.
581 所谓“此线”,其连接如下。“已放置”就是已安立,意思是已宣说。因为能持住所意图的含义,所以叫线,也就是典籍。当有人问“尊者,正自觉者持什么主张”时,摩嘎离之子·帝萨长老回答说“大王,是分别说者”,因此正自觉者的弟子们就是分别说者。他们随顺导师所分别宣说的应调伏等情形,以及喜悦等、衣服等的应受用与不应受用;或者,他们分别宣说常见与断见。他们搁置“我与世间是常”等应当搁置的论题;说贪等的灭尽为常,说贪等、身恶行等的断灭为断。但他们并不是抛开一向应记说等三种问题,只说分别记说。分别说者的团体、集合,就是分别说者众。或者说,世尊的会众就是分别说者众。又或者,世尊因为宣说不落常断两边的中道——缘起,所以是分别说者;其弟子们因为随说此义,所以也是分别说者。其余部分与前面相同。巴利
581. Yā panāyaṃ tantīti sambandho. Nikkhittāti ṭhapitā, desitāti attho. Yathādhippetassa atthassa tananato tanti, gantho. ‘‘Kiṃ vādī, bhante, sammāsambuddho’’ti pucchitena ‘‘vibhajjavādī, mahārājā’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 1.tatiyasaṅgītikathā; kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) moggaliputtatissattherena vuttattā sammāsambuddhasāvakā vibhajjavādino. Te hi satthārā venayikādibhāvaṃ vibhajja vuttaṃ anuvadanti, somanassādīnaṃ, cīvarādīnañca sevitabbāsevitabbabhāvaṃ. Sassatucchedavāde vā vibhajja vadanti. ‘‘Sassato attā ca loko cā’’tiādīnaṃ (dī. ni. 1.31) ṭhapanīyānaṃ ṭhapanato, rāgādikkhayassa sassatassa, rāgādikāyaduccaritādiucchedassa ca vacanato, na pana ekaṃsabyākaraṇīyādike tayo pañhe apanetvā vibhajjabyākaraṇīyameva vadanti. Vibhajjavādīnaṃ maṇḍalaṃ samūho vibhajjavādimaṇḍalaṃ. Vibhajjavādino vā bhagavato parisā vibhajjavādimaṇḍalantipi vadanti, vibhajja vā sassatucchede ubho ante anupagamma majjhimapaṭipadābhūtassa paṭiccasamuppādassa desanato bhagavā, tadanuvādato tassa sāvakā ca vibhajjavādinoti. Sesaṃ purimasadisaṃ.
“进入”就是深入,意思是成为分别说者。因为自己如果不是分别说者,仅仅因为处在分别说者中间,并不能算是进入了分别说者的圈子。不是通过显示与师长未曾说过的相反意思来指责他们。凡是说“无明也是福行、不动行的因和缘”,以及主张《论事》中已被驳斥的补特伽罗论等观点的人,就叫偏离自宗;不这样做的,就没有偏离。不以指责、攻击他宗的心态去运作。有人说:“不把他宗归纳为‘这部经也应该接受’。”凡是说“我这样理解世尊所说的法:正是这识流转、轮回,而不是别的”等等,就叫排斥经;不这样做的,就没有排斥。凡是说“我这样理解世尊所说的法:世尊所说的这些障碍法,即使去受用也不足以成为障碍;在梦中犯的过失是犯戒”等等,就叫违逆律;与此相反的方式,就是随顺律。因为违逆的人破坏了业的区别,违逆了法性,又怎么能随顺烦恼的调伏呢?应当观察经中所说的四大教示,以及注释书中所说的经、随经、师说、自见这四大教示。因为通过这样的观察,他就能安住于经和律,不会越出太远。巴利
Otaritvāti ogāhetvā, vibhajjavādī hutvāti attho. Na hi sayaṃ avibhajjavādī samāno vibhajjavādīnaṃ antare ṭhānamattena vibhajjavādimaṇḍalaṃ otiṇṇo nāma hoti. Ācariyehi avuttaviparītatthadīpanena te naabbhacikkhantena. Avijjā puññāneñjābhisaṅkhārānampi hetu paccayo hotīti vadanto, kathāvatthumhi paṭikkhitte puggalavādādike ca vadanto sakasamayaṃ vokkamati nāma, tathā avokkamantena. Parasamayaṃ dosāropanabyāpāravirahena anāyūhantena. ‘‘Idampi suttaṃ gahetabba’’nti parasamayaṃ asampiṇḍentenāti keci vadanti. ‘‘Tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’ntiādīni (ma. ni. 1.396) vadanto suttaṃ paṭibāhati nāma, tathā apaṭibāhantena. ‘‘Tathāhaṃ bhagavatā dhammaṃ desitaṃ ājānāmi, yathā yeme antarāyikā dhammā vuttā bhagavatā, te paṭisevato nālaṃ antarāyāya (ma. ni. 1.234; pāci. 417, 418), supinante kato vītikkamo āpattikaro hotī’’ti ca evamādiṃ vadanto vinayaṃ paṭilometi nāma, tabbipariyāyena taṃ anulomentena. Paṭilomento hi kammantaraṃ bhindanto, dhammatañca vilomento kuto kilesavinayaṃ anulometi. Sutte (dī. ni. 2.187 ādayo; a. ni. 4.180) vutte cattāro mahāpadese, aṭṭhakathāyañca vutte suttasuttānulomaācariyavādaattanomatimahāpadese olokentena. Tadolokanena hi sutte, vinaye ca santiṭṭhati nātidhāvati.
“法”是指缘起的经文,“义”是指它的含义。因,或者因与果,就是这里的因法,这里的果义。或者,“法”是指法性。有些人错误地把握“如来出现也好,如来不出现也好,那个界都安住”这句经文的意思,错误地宣说“缘起是常”,这样就是在错误地说明缘起法;这里不是那样说明,而是按照前面所说的方式,说明因对自身果报的确定本性。又像有些人用“无灭、无生”等说法错误地把握缘起的含义,这里不那样把握,而是按照所说的方式,收摄不颠倒的含义。把“对苦等无知就是无明”所说的含义转换之后,再用“对前际无知”等其他说法来说明。用“诸行依这种方式被称为有,渴爱依这种方式被称为取”等方式来说明——他们是这么说的。所谓“就本性而言”,就是完全不涉及上面所说的那些区分,仅仅就是本性本身。巴利
Dhammanti paṭiccasamuppādapāḷiṃ. Atthanti tadatthaṃ. Hetu, hetuphalāni vā ayamettha hetu dhammo, idamettha hetuphalaṃ atthoti. Dhammanti vā dhammataṃ. Yathā eke ‘‘uppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ anuppādā vā tathāgatānaṃ ṭhitāva sā dhātū’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.20) suttapadassa atthaṃ micchā gāhentā ‘‘nicco paṭiccasamuppādo’’ti paccayākāradhammaṃ micchā dīpenti, evaṃ adīpetvā heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva attano phalaṃ pati kāraṇassa vavatthitasabhāvaṃ dīpentena. Yathā ca eke ‘‘anirodhaṃ anuppāda’’ntiādinā paṭiccasamuppādassa atthaṃ micchā gāhenti, evaṃ gāhe akatvā vuttanayeneva aviparītaṃ atthaṃ saṅgāhentena. ‘‘Dukkhādīsu aññāṇaṃ avijjā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ parivattetvā puna ‘‘pubbante aññāṇa’’ntiādīhi (dha. sa. 1067) aparehipi pariyāyehiniddisantena. ‘‘Saṅkhārā iminā pariyāyena bhavoti vuccanti, taṇhā iminā pariyāyena upādāna’’ntiādinā niddisantenāti ca vadanti. Pakatiyāti yathāvuttavidhānaṃ anāmasitvā kevalameva.
“谛”是指四圣谛。他们称“有情”为“有情空性”,然而在空无有情的诸行中,有“有情”这个假名施设,也有有情意义和事业的成立。而“唯是缘起”就是唯是缘起,其中 ma 这个字只是连音用的。诸缘法对自身果报的缘性,就是缘起,这是它的含义。巴利
Saccanti catusaccaṃ. Sattoti sattasuññatāti vadanti, sattasuññesu pana saṅkhāresu sattavohāro, sattatthakiccasiddhi ca. Paccayākārameva cāti paccayākāro eva ca, ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Paccayadhammānaṃ attanoyeva phalassa paccayabhāvo paṭiccasamuppādoti attho.
“因此”这句话的意思是:因为要按前面所说的方式来做义理注释,而且这件事很难,所以说“我找不到立足处”。也就是说,安住于那个地方,注释就容易做,而那个作为立足处的道理,我凭自己的智慧力量找不到。接着,在说明所依时,说了“然而这教法”等话。这里的“教法”指巴利圣典,或者就是指缘起。因为缘起以顺观、逆观等多种说法方式庄严地展现,至今从未中断,所以成为所依。而被称为其注释的,就是前代阿阇梨之道。“你们专心谛听”,是为了让人生起恭敬和精进。如果有人问这有什么必要,为了说明这一点,就说了“因为已经说过”等话。“作骨”就是作义;或者,像不让它消失那样,使它如同入骨一般,就是“作骨”。从前时到后时存在的,就是前后。“殊胜”,指从最初开始,每一刹那都获得智慧的殊胜和烦恼灭尽的殊胜,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Tasmāti vuttanayena atthavaṇṇanāya kātabbattā, dukkarattā ca patiṭṭhaṃ nādhigacchāmīti yattha ṭhitassa vaṇṇanā sukarā hoti, tassā patiṭṭhābhūtaṃ taṃ nayaṃ attanoyeva ñāṇabalena nādhigacchāmīti attho. Nissayaṃ pana ācikkhanto ‘‘sāsanaṃ panida’’ntiādimāha. Idha sāsananti pāḷidhammamāha, paṭiccasamuppādameva vā. So hi anulomapaṭilomādinānādesanānayapaṭimaṇḍito abbocchinno ajjāpi pavattatīti nissayo hoti. Tadaṭṭhakathāsaṅkhāto ca pubbācariyamaggo. ‘‘Taṃ suṇātha samāhitā’’ti ādarajanane, ussāhane ca kiṃ payojananti ce, taṃ dassento āha ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi. Aṭṭhi katvāti atthaṃ katvā. Yathā vā na nassati, evaṃ aṭṭhigataṃ viya karonto aṭṭhiṃ katvā. Pubbakālato aparakāle bhavaṃ pubbāpariyaṃ. Visesanti paṭhamārambhato pabhuti khaṇe khaṇe ñāṇavisesaṃ, kilesakkhayavisesañca labhatīti attho.
582 从说法的差别来说,就是由于说法方式的不同。从含义、从特相等,以及从一种等来说,就是从含义、特相、一种等方面来说。还有从支的确定来说,就是通过显示无明等十二支的确定。巴利
582.Desanābhedatoti desanāvisesato. Atthato, lakkhaṇādito, ekavidhādito ca atthalakkhaṇekavidhādito. Aṅgānañca vavatthānāti avijjādīnaṃ dvādasannaṃ aṅgānaṃ vavatthānadassanato.
无明是缘起的根本,因为它是业、果报和烦恼这三种轮转的根本原因,而且从一开始就已被宣说。在这里,不应该做这样的比喻对照:就像看见了藤蔓的根,从那时起拔除藤蔓;同样,看见了缘起的根本,从那时起宣说缘起。因为世尊并不存在“仅此是已见的、这是未见的”这种分别,一切都已经见到了。不过,就像从根开始拔除藤蔓一样,缘起的宣说也是从根本开始的——这才是这里所要表达的共通之处。或者,也可以根据所教化者的意乐,按照他们应当领悟的方式,配上“见根本等”这一共通处。巴利
Kammavipākakilesavaṭṭānaṃ mūlakāraṇattā, ādito vuttattā ca avijjā paṭiccasamuppādassa mūlaṃ. Tattha valliyā mūle diṭṭhe tato pabhuti valliharaṇaṃ viya paṭiccasamuppādassa mūle diṭṭhe tato pabhuti paṭiccasamuppādadesanāti upamāsaṃsandanā na kātabbā. Na hi bhagavato idameva diṭṭhaṃ, idaṃ adiṭṭhanti vibhajanīyaṃ atthi sabbassa diṭṭhattā. Mūlato pabhuti pana valliharaṇaṃ viya mūlato pabhuti paṭiccasamuppādadesanā katāti idamettha sāmaññaṃ adhippetaṃ, bodhaneyyajjhāsayavasena vā bodhetabbabhāvena mūlādidassanasāmaññaṃ yojetabbaṃ.
比丘们,那个男孩随着长大、随着诸根成熟,具备了五种欲乐特质……都是会让人起贪染的。他用眼睛看到色之后,对可爱的色起贪恋,对不可爱的色起嗔恨,而且身念没有现前,心量狭小,也不能如实了知心解脱和慧解脱——也就是那些恶不善法彻底灭尽的地方。他就这样陷入迎合与抗拒之中,无论感受到什么受——乐受、苦受或不苦不乐受——他都对那个受欢喜、称赞、执取而安住。巴利
‘‘Sa kho so, bhikkhave, kumāro vuddhimanvāya indriyānaṃ paripākamanvāya pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappito…pe… rajanīyehi. So cakkhunā rūpaṃ disvā piyarūpe rūpe sārajjati, appiyarūpe rūpe byāpajjati, anupaṭṭhitakāyasati ca viharati parittacetaso, tañca cetovimuttiṃ paññāvimuttiṃ yathābhūtaṃ nappajānāti, yatthassa te pāpakā akusalā dhammā aparisesā nirujjhanti. So evaṃ anurodhavirodhaṃ samāpanno yaṃ kiñci vedanaṃ vedeti sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā adukkhamasukhaṃ vā, so taṃ vedanaṃ abhinandati abhivadati, ajjhosāya tiṭṭhatī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.408) –
像这样说了之后,在耳门等处也是这样。其中,“欢喜”是指带着喜的渴爱,以迎向所缘的方式而欢喜。“称扬”是指由发出“啊,乐呀!啊,乐呀!”这样的话而现起的强大渴爱,以“我、我的”来称扬。从此,因为无法从强大的渴爱中解脱,就执取而安住。比这更强大的,则是作为执取的渴爱之喜。在这里,应当知道:通过“欢喜”等词说的是渴爱,通过“喜”这个词说明的是以它为缘的执取——四种执取也都因为欢喜性与彼不相离,以及因为渴爱和邪见这两种欢喜状态而被说及。巴利
Evaṃ vuttassa. Evaṃ sotadvārādīsupi. Tassa abhinandatoti sappītikataṇhāya abhimukhabhāvena nandato. Abhivadatoti ‘‘aho sukhaṃ, aho sukha’’nti vacībhedakaraṇapavattāya balavataṇhāya ‘‘ahaṃ, mamā’’ti abhivadato. Tato balavatiyā mocetuṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya ajjhosāya tiṭṭhato. Tatopi balavatī pana upādānabhūtā taṇhā nandī. Ettha ca abhinandanādinā taṇhā vuttā, nandivacanena tappaccayaṃ upādānaṃ catubbidhampi nanditātadavippayogatāhi, taṇhādiṭṭhābhinandanabhāvehi cāti veditabbaṃ.
“生缘老死”等内容,也是就在那部《大渴爱灭尽经》里说到的。巴利
Jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇantiādikañca tattheva mahātaṇhāsaṅkhayasutte vuttaṃ.
对于作为异熟流转的结生、转起、触等,以及业所生起的食素,才说“四食以渴爱为因”等等。不过,维持流转的其他那些食也是以渴爱为因,当渴爱不存在时,它们也就不存在,所以说它们“以渴爱为因”是说得通的。巴利
Vipākavaṭṭabhūte paṭisandhipavattiphassādike kammasamuṭṭhānañca ojaṃ sandhāya ‘‘cattāro āhārā taṇhānidānā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vaṭṭūpathambhakā pana itarepi āhārā taṇhāpabhave tasmiṃ avijjamāne na vijjantīti ‘‘taṇhānidānā’’ti vattuṃ vaṭṭanti.
583 “从各种角度”是指在四种教说中,从各种不同的教说角度来说。“导向对理的证悟”中,“理”就是道,或者缘起本身就是理,因为经中说“他的圣理以慧善见”。缘起本身就是全面吉祥的,应当以各种方式证悟它,所以它以种种教说导向自身的证悟。“达到四种甚深”的意思是,在法、义、教说、证悟这四种甚深中,通过安立与证得而得以安立。巴利
583.Tatotatoti catubbidhāsu desanāsu tato tato desanato. Ñāyappaṭivedhāya saṃvattatīti ñāyoti maggo, so eva vā paṭiccasamuppādo ‘‘ariyo cassa ñāyo paññāya sudiṭṭho hotī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.41; 5.1024) vacanato. Sayameva hi so samantabhaddakattā tathā tathā paṭivijjhitabbattā tāya tāya desanāya attano paṭivedhāya saṃvattati. Catubbidhagambhīrabhāvappattiyāti dhammatthadesanāpaṭivedhagambhīresu patiṭṭhādhigamanena patiṭṭhitattāti attho.
“全面吉祥性”和“说法庄严的成就”,是四种说法共同的原因,现在想要说明它们各自特殊的原因,所以说“特别地”。这里的“它的”,应当理解为:这位世尊的说法,或者这个缘起的说法。流转之因的区分,即是自性未被区分的无明等,或者说,被执取为“因”的“本性”等,以及无明等的非因性和因性。在这里,有些人因为迷惑,把不是因的执为因;有些人则完全不知道有什么因。为了向他们各依相应的因,开示行等的流转,也就是为了开示轮回的流转,这就是这段话的意思。无明是遮蔽流转过患的起点,从它生起行,从行生起识——为了这样开示流转的生起次第,或者为了依入胎等方式,开示众生在各趣中受生的先后顺序,所以展开了顺观的开示。其他几种说法虽然也可能有同样的用意,但因为它们另有其他意义,所以并不是只为这个意义而展开。而这一种说法恰恰就是只为这个意义,所以说它具有这个意义。巴利
Samantabhaddakatā, desanāvilāsappatti ca catunnampi desanānaṃ samānaṃ kāraṇanti visesakāraṇaṃ vattukāmo āha ‘‘visesato’’ti. Assāti assa bhagavato desanā, assa vā paṭiccasamuppādassa desanāti yojetabbaṃ. Pavattikāraṇavibhāgo avibhattasabhāvā avijjādayova, kāraṇanti vā gahitānaṃ pakatiādīnaṃ, avijjādīnañca akāraṇatā, kāraṇatā ca. Tattha sammūḷhā keci akāraṇaṃ kāraṇanti gaṇhanti, keci na kiñci kāraṇaṃ bujjhantīti tesaṃ yathāsakehi anurūpehi kāraṇehi saṅkhārādipavattisandassanatthaṃ, saṃsārappavattisandassanatthanti attho. Pavattiādīnavapaṭicchādikā avijjā ādi, tato saṅkhārā uppajjanti, tato viññāṇanti evaṃ pavattiyā uppattikkamasandassanatthaṃ, gabbhaseyyakādivasena vā tattha tattha bhave attabhāvassa uppajjanānupubbisandassanatthañca anulomadesanā pavattāti. Itarāsaṃ tadatthatāsambhavepi na tāsaṃ tadatthameva pavatti atthantarasabbhāvato. Ayaṃ pana tadatthā evāti etissā tadatthatā vuttā.
正在逆观的人,在证悟之前的前分阶段,已经生起了一种前分通达,这被称为“了知各种缘所生法”;这段逆序的说法之所以展开,就是为了显示随顺它、跟随它而证得的、以生等为因的老死等。或者也可以这样连接:是因为逆观,才展开了逆序的说法。因为世尊在说法时,也是先逆观陷于苦难的世间,然后为了显示前分……而说法。食和渴爱等属于现在世,行和无明属于过去世——基于这个意图,才说“乃至追溯到过去世”。或者,食是由渴爱所引生的未来世,渴爱等属于现在世,行和无明属于过去世。不过,先显示现见的果,再通过显示它的因来展示因果的次第,这是合理的。所以说:由先前的渴爱所产生的食属于现在世,渴爱等属于过去世,行和无明比那更过去,这是为了显示轮回没有开始。“乃至过去世”的意思是“乃至更远的过去世”,这个意思才合理。或者,四种食是未来再生的引生者,正如经中说:“我不说食者……然而,如果有人这样问我:‘尊者,识食是为了什么?’这是个恰当的问题,对此有恰当的回答:识食是为了未来再生的引生。”(相应部12.12)触和思因为与它相应,段食因为它是它们生起的因,所以也是未来再生的引生者。因此,对于依靠它滋养色身者,以及欲求它者,就有欲界的识积集。经中确实说过:食物是信等以及贪等的近依。所以,那些被业轮所摄的食属于现在世——在这个解释方案中,还是前面那个意思更合理。巴利
Anuvilokayato yo sambodhito pubbabhāge taṃtaṃpaccayuppannāvabodhasaṅkhāto pubbabhāgapaṭivedho pavatto, tadanusārena tadanugamena jarāmaraṇādikassa jātiādikāraṇaṃ yaṃ adhigataṃ, tassa sandassanatthaṃ ayaṃ paṭilomadesanā pavattā. Anuvilokayato paṭilomadesanā pavattāti vā sambandho. Desentopi hi bhagavā kicchāpannaṃ lokaṃ anuviloketvā pubbabhāga…pe… sandassanatthaṃ desesīti. Āhārataṇhādayo paccuppannaddhā, saṅkhārāvijjā atītaddhāti iminā adhippāyenāha ‘‘yāva atītaṃ addhānaṃ atiharitvā’’ti. Āhārā vā taṇhāya pabhāvetabbā anāgato addhā, taṇhādayo paccuppanno , saṅkhārāvijjā atītoti. Paccakkhaṃ pana phalaṃ dassetvā tannidānadassanavasena phalakāraṇaparamparadassanaṃ yujjatīti āhārā purimataṇhāya uppāditā paccuppanno addhā, taṇhādayo atīto, saṅkhārāvijjā tatopi atītataro saṃsārassa anādibhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttoti. Yāva atītaddhānanti yāva atītataraṃ addhānanti attho yuttoti. Āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiāhārakā vā cattāro āhārā ‘‘āhāretītāhaṃ na vadāmi…pe… evaṃ pana maṃ avadantaṃ yo evaṃ puccheyya ‘kissa nu kho, bhante, viññāṇāhāro’ti, esa kallo pañho, tatra kallaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, viññāṇāhāro āyatiṃ punabbhavābhinibbattiyā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.12) vacanato, taṃsampayuttattā phassacetanānaṃ, tappavattihetuttā ca kabaḷīkārāhārassa. Tena hi upatthambhitarūpakāyassa, tañca icchantassa kāmaviññāṇāyūhanaṃ hoti. Bhojanañhi saddhādīnaṃ, rāgādīnañca upanissayoti vuttaṃ. Tasmā te kammavaṭṭasaṅgahitā āhārā paccuppanno addhāti imasmiṃ pariyāye purimoyeva attho yutto.
从过去世开始——也就是“诸比丘,像这样,以无明为缘而有行”等(相应部12.2)所说的内容——是针对这样一类人而说:他们不能直接看见当下可得的食之根源,也无法由此回溯而领悟。这番开示正是为了让他们看见那个因果链条才展开的,这就是这段话的意思。“从未来世的因生起开始”,是说从那些作为未来生命之因的诸法生起之时开始。“为了让人看见未来世”,是说对那些不能彻见、看不见未来世的人,先指出当下直接可得的因,再通过因果的层层相续,让他们看见未来世,这就是意思所在。在这里,从开头一直到结尾、以及从结尾一直到开头所展开的开示,有十二支、三个连接、四种概括。从中间一直到开头所展开的开示,有八支、两个连接、三种概括。从中间一直到结尾所展开的开示,有六支、两个连接、三种概括。“诸比丘,对于可作为结缚的法,随观其乐味而安住时,渴爱就增长,以渴爱为缘而有取”等等(相应部12.53、57),这是从中间一直到结尾所展开的开示,有一个连接、两种概括。这样,这个缘起开示就以多种支分出现了。缘起开示也可以只从一支的角度来理解。正如经中所说——巴利
Atītaddhato pabhuti ‘‘iti kho, bhikkhave, avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.2) atīte, tato parañca hetuphalapaṭipāṭiṃ paccakkhabhūtānaṃ āhārānaṃ nidānadassanavasena ārohitvā nivattanena vinā abujjhantānaṃ taṃsandassanatthaṃ sā ayaṃ desanā pavattāti attho. Anāgataddhahetusamuṭṭhānato pabhutīti anāgatassa bhavassa hetubhūtānaṃ dhammānaṃ uppattito paṭṭhāya. Anāgataddhasandassanatthanti anāgataddhuno appaṭivijjhantānaṃ apassantānaṃ paccakkhaṃ paccuppannaṃ hetuṃ dassetvā hetuphalaparamparāya tassa sandassanatthanti attho. Ettha ca ādito paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā, pariyosānato ca paṭṭhāya yāva ādi pavattā desanā dvādasaṅgā, tato eva tisandhi catusaṅkhepā. Majjhato paṭṭhāya yāva ādi pavattā desanā aṭṭhaṅgā dvisandhi tisaṅkhepā. Majjhato pana paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā pavattā desanā chaḷaṅgā dvisandhi tisaṅkhepā. ‘‘Saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhati, taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57) majjhato paṭṭhāya yāva pariyosānā pavattā desanā ekasandhi dvisaṅkhepā. Evaṃ ayaṃ anekaṅgā eva paṭiccasamuppādadesanā āgatā. Ekaṅgavasenāpi ca paṭiccasamuppādadesanā labbhateva. Yathāha –
比丘们,在这里,多闻的圣弟子只对缘起本身好好地进行如理作意:“此有故彼有,此生故彼生;此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭。”比丘们,以能感受乐的触为缘,乐受就生起。巴利
‘‘Tatra, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako paṭiccasamuppādaṃyeva sādhukaṃ yoniso manasi karoti ‘iti imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjati. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’ti. Sukhavedaniyaṃ, bhikkhave, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhavedanā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.62) –
这里只说到“以触为缘”这么多,这就是所说的缘起。由此可以知道,这是单支缘起。巴利
Ādi. Ettha hi ‘‘phassapaccayā’’ti ettako eva paṭiccasamuppādo vutto. Tenetaṃ viññāyati ‘‘ekaṅgapaṭiccasamuppādo’’ti.
在这里,“此有故彼有”,意思是:当无明等这些条件存在时,行等这些结果就存在。“此生故彼生”,意思是:由于无明等这些条件生起,行等这些结果就生起。“此无故彼无,此灭故彼灭”,则是通过说无明等不存在时行等也不存在、无明等灭时行等也灭,在前面的缘相中显示了确定性:“只有此存在时才存在,不是不存在时;只有此生起时才生起,不是灭时。”由此应当知道,这个包含确定性的特征,在这里是就缘起而说的。巴利
Tattha imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotīti imasmiṃ avijjādike paccaye sati idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ hoti. Imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatīti imassa avijjādikassa paccayassa uppādā idaṃ saṅkhārādikaṃ phalaṃ uppajjatīti attho. Imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatīti avijjādīnaṃ abhāve saṅkhārādīnaṃ abhāvassa, avijjādīnaṃ nirodhā saṅkhārādīnaṃ nirodhassa ca vacanena purimasmiṃ paccayalakkhaṇe niyamo dassito hoti ‘‘imasmiṃ sati eva, na asati, imassa uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti. Tenetaṃ lakkhaṇaṃ antogadhaniyamaṃ idha paṭiccasamuppādassa vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
所谓“灭”,就是通过证得对无明等的完全离贪,使它在未来不再生起、不再现起。正如经中所说:“正是由于无明的完全离贪灭尽……”等等。与灭相反的是生起,因为生起与灭相违,所以才说“由此灭故,此灭尽”,以此来显示:“无灭就是所谓的生起,而在这里,它也被说为有。”因为“此有故此有”这一特相,正是当另一方以另一种方式说“由此生故此生”时,对前一句作了限定。因此,“此有”并不是仅就持续存在而说的,而是说它通过道而未被灭尽的状态。又因为,在解说以两种方式——“此无故此无,由此灭故此灭尽”——所标示的灭的特相时,说“正是由于无明的完全离贪灭尽,而有行灭”等等,所说的正是灭。所以,不存在也就是灭;由此显示,与不存在相违的存在就是无灭。以这个称为无灭的存在来限定生起。因此,这里所说的生起,并不是仅仅获得自体,而是称为无灭的存在。这个意思已经阐明。应当知道,这样宣说两种特相,是通过互相限定与被限定的关系而有意义的。巴利
Nirodhoti ca avijjādīnaṃ virāgādhigamena āyatiṃ anuppādo appavatti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā’’tiādi (mahāva. 1; udā. 3). Nirodhavirodhī ca uppādo, yena so uppādavirodhibhāvena vutto ‘‘imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti, tenetaṃ dasseti ‘‘anirodho uppādo nāma, so cettha atthibhāvotipi vuccatī’’ti. ‘‘Imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hotī’’ti idameva hi lakkhaṇaṃ pariyāyantarena ‘‘imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti vadantena parena purimaṃ visesitaṃ hoti, tasmā na dharamānataṃyeva sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kho maggena aniruddhabhāvañcāti viññāyati. Yasmā ca ‘‘imasmiṃ asati idaṃ na hoti, imassa nirodhā idaṃ nirujjhatī’’ti (udā. 2) dvidhāpi uddiṭṭhalakkhaṇassa nirodhassa niddesaṃ vadantena ‘‘avijjāyatveva asesavirāganirodhā saṅkhāranirodho’’tiādinā (mahāva. 1; udā. 3) nirodho eva vutto, tasmā natthibhāvopi nirodho evāti natthibhāvaviruddho atthibhāvo anirodhoti dassitaṃ hoti. Tena anirodhasaṅkhātena atthibhāvena uppādaṃ viseseti. Tato na idha attalābhamattaṃ uppādoti adhippeto, atha kho anirodhasaṅkhāto atthibhāvo cāti ayamattho vibhāvitoti evametaṃ lakkhaṇadvayavacanaṃ aññamaññaṃ visesanavisesitabbabhāvena sātthakanti veditabbaṃ.
那么,这个被称为“无灭”、又被称为“有”和“生起”的,到底是什么呢?它是指没有被断除的状态,以及以果未生起的状态和未断除的适合性而使果生起的适合性。对于那些应当被它们断除的不善法来说,它是指这些法还没有被圣道彻底根除的状态;而对于那些不应被断除的善法和无记法来说,它是指对于尚未断尽烦恼的人来说,那些结缚还没有被完全灭尽的状态。因为,只要随眠还没有被彻底断除,带着结缚的诸蕴就会继续运转,这就是缘起。正如经中所说——巴利
Ko panāyaṃ anirodho nāma, yo atthibhāvo, uppādoti ca vuccatīti? Appahīnabhāvo, anibbattitaphalatāppahīnārahatāhi phaluppādanārahatā ca. Ye tehi pahātabbā akusalā dhammā, tesaṃ ariyamaggena asamugghātitabhāvo, ye pana na pahātabbā kusalābyākatā dhammā, yāni tesu saṃyojanāni akhīṇāsavānaṃ, tesaṃ aparikkhīṇatā ca. Asamugghātitānusayatāya hi sasaṃyojanākhandhappavatti paṭiccasamuppādo. Tathā hi vuttaṃ –
比丘们,愚人被无明遮住、又和渴爱绑在一起,这个身体就是这样形成的。而那个愚人的无明还没有断掉,那个渴爱也还没有灭尽。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,愚人没有为了正确灭尽苦而修梵行,所以愚人身体坏散之后,还会继续投生到身体中去;他既然还投生到身体中,就摆脱不了生和老死。巴利
‘‘Yāya ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya nivutassa bālassa, yāya ca taṇhāya sampayuttassa ayaṃ kāyo samudāgato, sā ceva avijjā bālassa appahīnā, sā ca taṇhā aparikkhīṇā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, bālo acari brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhakkhayāya, tasmā bālo kāyassa bhedā kāyūpago hoti, so kāyūpago samāno na parimuccati jātiyā jarāmaraṇenā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.19) –
首先,对于已断尽结缚的人来说,因为无明不存在,所以行不存在;因为渴爱和取不存在,所以取和有不存在,因此轮回的断绝就可以知道。所以他说:巴利
Ādi. Khīṇasaṃyojanānaṃ pana avijjāya abhāvato saṅkhārānaṃ, taṇhupādānānaṃ abhāvato upādānabhavānaṃ na sambhavoti vaṭṭassa upacchedo paññāyati. Tenevāha –
帕古那,正是由于对六触处的完全离贪灭尽,才有触的灭尽;由于触的灭尽,才有受的灭尽。巴利
‘‘Channantveva, phagguna, phassāyatanānaṃ asesavirāganirodhā phassanirodho, phassanirodhā vedanānirodho’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.12) –
首先,从证得最高道之后一直到般涅槃,六处等并不是不再生起,而是根本不存在,可以称为“灭”,也就是结缚已经断尽,所以这里说为“灭”。另外,即使是很久以前造下的业,由于还没有生出果来、还没有断除所应断的,它虽然作为有能力生果的因存在着,却既没有生出果,也不算是已被断除。因此,按照前面所说的方式,对于无明、行等作为果的生起因缘,那种有能力生果的状态,应当知道就是“没有灭”。正因为这种“没有灭”的状态——没有它,果就不可能生起——那个因缘即使是过去的,也用“此有”这句话来说。也正因为如此,对于还没有完成梵行、还没有达到“不转起”这一法性的人来说,缘的生起不涉及时间的区别,只因为它还没有回转,就说为“由此生起”。或者,当其他缘都齐备时,即使某个因还不存在,也像已经存在一样,更何况已经存在的呢。那种面向果的生起的状态,就说为“由此生起”。因为那时果将从它生起,所以处于那种状态的因,就是以能生果的方式现前,被称为已生起,而不是仅仅因为因存在;如果不处于那种状态,就不是这样。因此,应当知道,处于那种状态就是“生起”。巴利
Ādi. Na hi aggamaggādhigamato uddhaṃ yāva parinibbānā saḷāyatanādīnaṃ appavatti, atha kho natthitā, nirodhasaddavacanīyatā, khīṇasaṃyojanatāti nirodho vutto. Apica cirakatampi kammaṃ anibbattitaphalatāya, appahīnārahatāya ca phalārahaṃ santaṃ eva nāma hoti, na nibbattitaphalaṃ, nāpi pahīnārahanti phaluppattipaccayānaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārādīnaṃ vuttanayena phalārahabhāvo anirodhoti veditabbaṃ. Evaṃ aniruddhabhāveneva hi yena vinā phalaṃ na sambhavati, taṃ kāraṇaṃ atītādipi ‘‘imasmiṃ satī’’ti iminā vacanena vuttaṃ. Tato eva ca avusitabrahmacariyassa appavattidhammataṃ anāpanno paccayuppādo kālabhedaṃ anāmasitvā anivattitāya eva ‘‘imassuppādā’’ti vutto. Atha vā avasesapaccayasamavāye avijjamānassāpi vijjamānassa viya pageva vijjamānassa yā phaluppattiabhimukhatā, sā ‘‘imassuppādā’’ti vuttā. Tadā hi tato phalaṃ uppajjatīti tadavatthaṃ kāraṇaṃ phalassa uppādanabhāvena upaṭṭhitaṃ uppatitaṃ nāma hoti, na vijjamānampi atadavatthanti tadavatthatā uppādoti veditabbā.
在这里,用“有”这个词,只是依据它存在这一点来说明缘的状态,从而显示缘起是没有造作活动的。“生起”这个词,则是要说明生起的法性、并非一切时候都存在,以及面向果的生起,从而显示缘起的无常性。而“有,非无;由生起,非由灭”这样的依格和从格表述,是在因的意义上,显示缘起的因、集、生、源的性质。这里,依格在因的意义上,应当理解为:当某物存在时,不离它而存在的果也就存在,比如“当财富不施给穷人时,贫穷就越来越严重”(《长部》3.91),“庄稼成熟时,就产生丰足”。从格在因的意义上,则是就果的来源和本性来说,比如“从羯罗蓝而有頞部昙,从頞部昙而有闭尸”(《相应部》1.235;《论事》692),“恒河从雪山流出,湖从山峰产生”。由于无明等的存在,不离它而存在的行等的存在也就被标示出来;又因为行等从无明等生起、由无明等所造作,所以无明等是它们的来源和本性。因此,为了说明这个道理,就在因的意义上,作了依格和从格的表述:“此有故,此生起”。巴利
Tattha ‘‘satī’’ti iminā vijjamānatāmattena paccayabhāvaṃ vadanto abyāpārataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Uppādāti uppattidhammataṃ, asabbakālabhāvitaṃ, phaluppattiabhimukhatañca dīpento aniccataṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. ‘‘Sati, na asati, uppādā, na nirodhā’’ti pana hetuatthehi bhummanissakkavacanehi samatthitaṃ nidānasamudayajātipabhavabhāvaṃ paṭiccasamuppādassa dasseti. Hetuatthatā cettha bhummavacane yassa bhāvena tadavinābhāviphalassa bhāvo lakkhīyati, tattha pavattiyā veditabbā, yathā adhanānaṃ dhane ananuppadīyamāne dāliddiyaṃ vepullamagamāsi (dī. ni. 3.91), nipphanne sasse subhikkhaṃ jāyatīti ca. Nissakkavacanassāpi hetuatthatā phalassa pabhave pakatiyañca pavattiyā, yathā ‘‘kalalā hoti abbudaṃ, abbudā jāyate pesī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 1.235; kathā. 692), ‘‘himavatā gaṅgā pabhavati, siṅgato saro jāyatī’’ti ca. Avijjādibhāvena ca tadavinābhāvisaṅkhārādibhāvo lakkhīyati, avijjādīhi ca saṅkhārādayo pabhavanti, pakarīyanti cāti tesaṃ pabhavo, pakati ca, tasmā tadatthadīpanatthaṃ ‘‘imasmiṃ sati imassuppādā’’ti hetuatthā bhummanissakkaniddesā katā.
在这里,缘起以“此有故彼有,此生故彼生”这样简略的方式提出来后,又以“无明缘行”等详细方式加以说明。因此应当知道,前面所说的“有”和“生起”,就是那些缘所生法的缘性。因为除了以“非灭性”为内涵的“有”,以及以“不返性”或“生起状态”为内涵的“生起”,通过“唯有此存在,非无此;唯有生起,非灭去”这类包含必然性的表述所阐明之外,并不存在另一种所谓的缘性。所以应当知道,前面所说的“有”和“生起”就是缘性。即使在《发趣论》中出现的因等二十四缘,也应当知道它们正是这种缘性的不同分类。同样,通过“根本因、因缘、集起、生源”等异名,以及“生起之住立、转起之住立、相之住立、累积之住立、结合之住立、障碍之住立”等异名所阐明的因义,也应当看作包含在这里面。巴利
Yasmā cettha ‘‘imasmiṃ sati idaṃ hoti, imassuppādā idaṃ uppajjatī’’ti saṅkhepena uddiṭṭhassa paṭiccasamuppādassa ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’tiādiko niddeso, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo, uppādo ca tesaṃ tesaṃ paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvoti viññāyati. Na hi aniruddhatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthibhāvaṃ, uppādañca anivattasabhāvatāsaṅkhātaṃ, udayāvatthatāsaṅkhātaṃ vā ‘‘satiyeva, na asati, uppādā eva, na nirodhā’’ti antogadhaniyamehi vacanehi pakāsitaṃ muñcitvā añño paccayabhāvo nāma atthi, tasmā yathāvutto atthibhāvo, uppādo ca paccayabhāvoti veditabbo. Yepi hi paṭṭhāne āgatā hetuādayo catuvīsati paccayā, tepi etasseva paccayabhāvassa visesāti veditabbā. Tathā yvāyaṃ mūlahetunidānasambhavapabhavādipariyāyehi , uppādaṭṭhiti pavattaṭṭhiti nimittaṭṭhiti āyūhanaṭṭhiti saṃyogaṭṭhiti palibodhaṭṭhitītiādipariyāyehi ca pakāsito kāraṇattho, sopi ettheva antogadhoti daṭṭhabbo.
584 针对“根本因”这个词,说“不是无因”,这是中性词的解释,意思是“并非无因”。为了说明“如果无因,那么经典就会被否定”,他引用了“从诸漏生起”这段经文。“异名”就是因。在讲轮回流转时,(无明的)首要性在于:它也是作为轮回之因的业的因。其中,无明也是“有渴爱”的因;因为被无明遮蔽了过患,才对“有”生起渴爱,所以无明特别首要,因此被称为“根本因”。巴利
584. Mūlakāraṇasaddaṃ apekkhitvā na akāraṇanti napuṃsakaniddeso, akāraṇāti attho. Akāraṇaṃ yadi siyā, suttaṃ paṭibāhitaṃ siyāti dassento ‘‘āsavasamudayā’’ti suttaṃ āharati. Pariyāyo kāraṇaṃ. Vaṭṭakathāya sīsabhāvo vaṭṭahetuno kammassāpi hetubhāvo. Tattha bhavataṇhāyapi hetubhūtā avijjā, tāya paṭicchāditādīnave bhave taṇhāya uppajjanato avijjā visesena sīsabhūtāti ‘‘mūlakāraṇa’’nti vuttā.
当前际不可知时,会因无生起而执取常,于是他说:“诸比丘,如是此说……”等。由此表明:由不知“此前无曾生起”,所以说“前际不可知”——正是为了说明这个意义。巴利
Purimāya koṭiyā apaññāyamānāya uppādavirahato niccataṃ gaṇheyyāti āha ‘‘evaṃ cetaṃ, bhikkhave, vuccatī’’tiādi. Tena ito pubbe uppannapubbatā natthīti apaññāyanato purimakoṭiapaññāyanaṃ vuttanti imamatthaṃ dasseti.
585 585. 在以无明和渴爱为因、依次解说果报时,说“趣向善趣和恶趣者”这句话,是为了不违背语法规则。因为在复合词中,应受尊敬的部分要放在前面。据说,萨瓦拉人为了不让肉粘在骨头上,反复烧烤、捶打,再灌饮热水让牛腹泻,然后宰杀那头骨头上已不剩肉的瘦牛。因此他说“用火烧烤”等话。其中,正如那头待宰的母牛被无明所制伏,而开始喝上述的热水,凡夫也同样开始造作上述趣向恶趣的业。又正如那头母牛看到喝热水的过患后,因渴爱之力而开始喝冷水;凡夫也因为无明并非极其强大,看到趣向恶趣之业的过患后,便因渴爱之力而开始造作趣向善趣的业。因为在苦中,渴爱随顺无明;在乐中,无明随顺渴爱。巴利
585. Avijjātaṇhāhetukkamena phalesu vattabbesu ‘‘sugatiduggatigāmino’’ti vacanaṃ saddalakkhaṇāvirodhanatthaṃ. Pūjitassa hi dvande pubbanipāto. Savarā kira maṃsassa aṭṭhinā alagganatthaṃ punappunaṃ tāpetvā koṭṭetvā uṇhodakaṃ pāyetvā virittaṃ sūnaṃ aṭṭhito muttamaṃsaṃ gāviṃ mārenti. Tenāha ‘‘aggisantāpā’’tiādi. Tattha yathā vajjhagāvī ca avijjābhibhūtatāya yathāvuttaṃ uṇhodakapānaṃ ārabhati, evaṃ puthujjano yathāvuttaṃ duggatigāmikammaṃ. Yathā pana sā uṇhodakapāne ādīnavaṃ disvā taṇhāvasena sītudakapānaṃ ārabhati, evaṃ puthujjano avijjāya nātibalavabhāvato duggatigāmikamme ādīnavaṃ disvā taṇhāvasena sugatigāmikammaṃ ārabhati. Dukkhe hi avijjaṃ taṇhā anuvattati, sukhe taṇhaṃ avijjāti.
586 在某些经里说“以一法为根本的教说”,意思是:在无明和渴爱当中,只有一法成为它的根本,所以叫“以一法为根本”;也就是在那里只以这一法为根本,来开示缘起的教说。“果报依止于此”,所以叫“依止”,也就是因;无明是这些的依止,所以叫“以无明为依止”。“观味者”,是指在所取着的、成为所缘的三界诸法当中,因为可被品味,所以称为“味”,也就是快乐和喜悦,这样的人习惯于随观。“愚者”,是因为没有断除无明,与愚者的特相相应,所以是愚者。所谓“如是”,是因为被无明遮蔽、与渴爱相应。所谓“此身”,是指这既是我的、也是你们的、现前存在的有识之身,即五蕴;或者,由于“缘六处有触”这句话,这被称为触之因,所以是六处。所谓“集起”,就是生起。所谓“外名色”,是指外在的有识之身即五蕴,或者六处。所谓“如是此”,即如是这个。自己的和他人的五蕴、十二处,以门和所缘的方式而安立为二者,这就是“二”的意思。所谓“缘二有触”,在别处是说缘眼、色等二法而有眼触等,但在这里则说内处和外处,据说这叫作“大二”。这里的意思是:在别处,依“缘眼及色生眼识,三者和合为触”等语,说缘眼与色……乃至意与法这二法而有眼触等。但在这里,依“此身”一语,将依止眼等的其余诸法一并纳入,使眼等之身作为整体取为“内处”,又将“外名色”一语所说的色等所缘整体地取为“外处”,说缘这些内处和外处而有触,因此这就是“大二”。巴利
586.Katthaci sutte. Ekadhammamūlikaṃ desananti avijjātaṇhāsu ekoyeva dhammo mūlaṃ etissāti ekadhammamūlikā, taṃ, tattha ekaṃ eva dhammaṃ mūlaṃ katvā paṭiccasamuppādadesanaṃ desetīti attho. Upanisīdati phalaṃ etthāti upanisā, kāraṇaṃ, avijjā upanisā etesanti avijjūpanisā. Assādānupassinoti upādāniyesu tebhūmakadhammesu visayabhūtesu assādetabbato assādasaññitaṃ sukhasomanassaṃ anupassanasīlassa. Appahīnāvijjatāya bālalakkhaṇayogena bālassa. Evanti avijjānivutattā, taṇhāsaṃyuttattā ca. Ayaṃ kāyoti ayaṃ mamañceva tumhākañca paccakkhabhūto saviññāṇakakāyo khandhapañcakaṃ. ‘‘Saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti (mahāva. 1; udā. 1) vacanato phassakāraṇañcetaṃ vuccatīti āyatanacchakkaṃ vā. Samudāgatoti uppanno. Bahiddhā ca nāmarūpanti bahiddhā saviññāṇakakāyo khandhapañcakaṃ, saḷāyatanāni vā. Itthetanti itthaṃ etaṃ. Attano ca paresañca pañcakkhandhā dvādasāyatanāni dvārālambanabhāvena vavatthitāni dvayaṃ nāmāti attho. Dvayaṃ paṭicca phassoti aññattha cakkhurūpādīni dvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā, idha pana ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni, mahādvayaṃ nāma kiretanti vuttaṃ. Ayamettha adhippāyo – aññattha ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.44; 4.60; kathā. 465) cakkhu ceva rūpā ca…pe… mano ceva dhammā cāti vuttāni dvayāni paṭicca cakkhusamphassādayo vuttā. Idha pana ‘‘ayañceva kāyo’’ti cakkhādinissaye sesadhamme cakkhādinissite eva katvā vuttaṃ cakkhādikāyaṃ ekattena ‘‘ajjhattikāyatana’’nti gahetvā, ‘‘bahiddhā ca nāmarūpa’’nti vuttaṃ rūpādiārammaṇaṃ ekatteneva ‘‘bāhirāyatana’’nti tāni ajjhattikabāhirāni āyatanāni paṭicca phasso vutto, tasmā mahādvayametanti.
这样区分之后,应当说明这个意思:自己和他人的五蕴、六处。所谓“此身”,是指自己的、有所依的眼等,也就是自己的五蕴;所谓“在外之名色”,是指他人的色等。同样,此身是自己的六内处,在外之名色是他人的外处。如果不这样理解,只把内处说成“此身”,那么内处就成了自己的五蕴,这样一来,用五蕴来说明自己和他人的做法就说不通了。“六处”就是六种触的因;由这些作为因的处所生起的触,愚人被这触所触,便感受苦乐。用“等”字,还应接上“或其中任何一种”,以及“诸比丘,被无明所障、与渴爱相应的智者”等经文。因为在这部经里,世尊把“行”只当作依止于无明和渴爱,用“身”这个词统摄了识、名色、六处,又把此身中六处的触也只当作依止于它,借此显示受的特殊缘,从而为愚人和智者开示了以过去世的无明与渴爱为根本、以受为终点的缘起。接着,为了显示愚人和智者的差别——巴利
Evañca katvā attano ca parassa ca pañcahi khandhehi, chahi āyatanehi cāti ayamattho dīpetabbovāti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Ayaṃ kāyo’’ti hi vuttāni sanissayāni cakkhādīni attano pañcakkhandhā, ‘‘bahiddhā nāmarūpa’’nti vuttāni rūpādīni paresaṃ. Tathā ayaṃ kāyo attano cha ajjhattikāni āyatanāni, bahiddhā nāmarūpaṃ paresaṃ bāhirānīti. Aññathā ajjhattikāyatanamatte eva ‘‘ayaṃ kāyo’’ti vuttena ajjhattikāyatanāneva attano pañcakkhandhā hontīti attano ca paresañca pañcahi khandhehi dīpanā na sambhaveyyāti. Saḷevāyatanānīti saḷeva phassakāraṇāni, yehi kāraṇabhūtehi āyatanehi uppannena phassena phuṭṭho bālo sukhadukkhaṃ paṭisaṃvedeti. Ādi-saddena ‘‘etesaṃ vā aññatarena. Avijjānīvaraṇassa, bhikkhave, paṇḍitassa taṇhāya sampayuttassā’’tiādi (saṃ. ni. 2.19) yojetabbaṃ. Imasmiñhi sutte saṅkhāre avijjātaṇhānissite eva katvā kāyaggahaṇena viññāṇanāmarūpasaḷāyatanāni gahetvā tasmiṃ kāye saḷāyatanānaṃ phassaṃ taṃnissitameva katvā vedanāya visesapaccayabhāvaṃ dassentena bhagavatā bālapaṇḍitānaṃ atītaddhāvijjātaṇhāmūlako vedanānto paṭiccasamuppādo dassito. Puna ca bālapaṇḍitānaṃ visesaṃ dassentena –
比丘们,愚人被无明遮住,又与渴爱相应,这个身体就是这样形成的。而那个愚人的无明还没有断除,他的渴爱也还没有灭尽。这是什么原因呢?比丘们,因为愚人从来没有为了正确灭尽苦而修梵行。所以,愚人在身体坏散之后,还会再投生到某个身体中去;既然还会受身,我就说他不能从生……乃至……苦中解脱出来。巴利
‘‘Yāya ca, bhikkhave, avijjāya nivutassa bālassa, yāya ca taṇhāya sampayuttassa ayaṃ kāyo samudāgato, sā ceva avijjā bālassa appahīnā, sā ca taṇhā aparikkhīṇā. Taṃ kissa hetu? Na, bhikkhave, bālo acari brahmacariyaṃ sammā dukkhakkhayāya. Tasmā bālo kāyassa bhedā kāyūpago hoti, so kāyūpago samāno na parimuccati jātiyā…pe… dukkhasmāti vadāmī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.19) –
先指出:由受生起的、具无明的渴爱,再把取和有说成依于它们,然后用“趣向身体”等说法来说明生等,这样就是从现世因生起开始,以两种根本来讲缘起;反过来,对智者来说,则是从现世因灭尽开始,以两种根本来讲逆缘起。巴利
Vedanāpabhavaṃ sāvijjaṃ taṇhaṃ dassetvā, upādānabhave ca tannissite katvā ‘‘kāyūpago hotī’’tiādinā jātiādike dassentena paccuppannahetusamuṭṭhānato pabhuti ubhayamūlavasena paṭiccasamuppādo vutto, tabbipariyāyena ca paṇḍitassa paccuppannahetuparikkhayato pabhuti ubhayamūlako paṭilomapaṭiccasamuppādoti.
587 “充满”就是增长,“积聚”是它的意思。因为无明是导向恶趣之业的特殊条件,所以说它“寻得不可得者”;同样,因为它不是所可得者的特殊条件,所以说“不寻得可得者”。使依于自身的眼识等的转起与生起即是“处”。正因为处于迷乱状态、没有通达,所以它使未知的成为未知。它让人在无边际中奔跑——依照字音增加、变易、变异、毁灭、界义差别这五种语言解释法,取a、vi、ja三个音,省略其余字音,再加上第二个ja音,所以说为“avijjā”(无明)。说完文义之后,为了显示它的本质义,又说了“又”等话。对于眼识等的依处和所缘,无明无法了知“这是依处,这是所缘”,所以说无明是它们的覆盖者。正因为它覆盖了依处和所缘的本质,也就覆盖了无明等作为缘起、老死等作为缘生的本质,因此应当知道,这是覆盖缘起与缘生。巴利
587.Pūretunti vaḍḍhetuṃ, upacinitunti attho. Duggatigāmikammassa visesapaccayattā avijjā ‘‘avindiyaṃ vindatī’’ti vuttā, tathā visesapaccayo vindiyassa na hotīti ‘‘vindiyaṃ na vindatī’’ti ca. Attanissitāni katvā cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ pavattanaṃ uppādanaṃ āyatanaṃ. Sammohabhāveneva anabhisamayabhūtattā aviditaṃ aññātaṃ karoti. Antavirahite javāpetīti vaṇṇāgamavipariyāyavikāravināsadhātuatthavisesayogehi pañcavidhassa niruttilakkhaṇassa vasena a-kāra vi-kāra ja-kāre gahetvā aññesaṃ vaṇṇānaṃ lopaṃ, ja-kārassa ca dutiyassāgamaṃ katvā ‘‘avijjā’’ti vuttaṃ. Byañjanatthaṃ vatvā sabhāvatthaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ vatthārammaṇāni ‘‘idaṃ vatthu, idaṃ ārammaṇa’’nti avijjāya ñātuṃ na sakkāti avijjā tappaṭicchādikā vuttā. Vatthārammaṇasabhāvachādanato eva avijjādīnaṃ paṭiccasamuppādabhāvassa, jarāmaraṇādīnaṃ paṭiccasamuppannabhāvassa ca chādanato paṭiccasamuppādapaṭiccasamuppannacchādanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
不拒绝就是不做拒绝、不排斥。助益的意思就是缘的意思,就像钵食等对于身体那样。巴利
Apaccakkhitvāti paccakkhānaṃ akatvā apaṭikkhipitvā. Upakārakaṭṭho paccayaṭṭho yathā piṇḍapātādi sarīrassa.
“造作有为”的意思是:它怎样成为有为,就那样去造作。通过“行”这个词所包含的诸行,就是由“行”这个词所涵盖的诸行。虽然“无明缘行”中的行也是由“行”这个词所涵盖的,但那些行在这段教说中是主要的,所以另外单独说了;因此在“两种”这里,应当从由“行”这个词所涵盖的诸行中排除掉能造作的“行”,然后把其余由“行”这个词所涵盖的诸行包括进来。或者,“由‘行’这个词所涵盖的诸行”是总说,其中一部分就是这里要解释的“无明缘行”,所以应当知道,这是为了涵盖一切要解释的内容而说为两种。像“首先止息语行”等所说的,是寻、伺、入出息、想、受等语行等,而不是“无明缘行”中所说的身思等。巴利
Saṅkhatamabhisaṅkharontīti yathā saṅkhataṃ hoti, evaṃ abhisaṅkharonti. Saṅkhārasaddaggahaṇena āgatā saṅkhārā saṅkhārasaddena āgatasaṅkhārā. Yadipi avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārāpi saṅkhārasaddena āgatā, te pana imissā desanāya padhānāti visuṃ vuttā, tasmā ‘‘duvidhā’’ti ettha saṅkhārasaddena āgatasaṅkhāresu abhisaṅkharaṇakasaṅkhāraṃ vajjetvā tadaññe saṅkhārasaddena āgatasaṅkhārā yojetabbā. Saṅkhārasaddena āgatasaṅkhārāti vā samudāyo vutto. Tadekadesā ca idha vaṇṇetabbabhāvena gahitā avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, tasmā vaṇṇetabbasabbasaṅgāhakavasena duvidhatā vuttāti veditabbā. ‘‘Paṭhamaṃ nirujjhati vacīsaṅkhāro’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.464) vitakkavicāraassāsapassāsasaññāvedanāvacīsaṅkhārādayo vuttā, na avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāresu vuttā kāyasañcetanādayo.
被称为“有为行”,是因为它们各自被自己的缘所造作。虽然一切由缘所生的事物都是有为的,但注释书里说“由业所生的具有更殊胜的有为性”,意思是说:在由业所生、属于三地异熟业生色的法中,由于业像是直接面对自己的果而说“这是我的果”那样把它们造作出来,所以它们的有为性更为殊胜。然而,巴利原文中并没有这样的说法,所以只说“那些也……都归摄在这里面”。“诸行无常”这句话所说的,是以两种等起方式生起的一切法。被称为“能造作的行”,是因为它能造作自己的果。使身加行生起的那种精进,就是身精进。“造作的”,指的是加行的力量。巴利
Saṅkhatasaṅkhārā nāma yathāsakaṃ paccayehi saṅkhatattā. Satipi paccayanibbattānaṃ sabbesampi saṅkhatabhāve ‘‘mametaṃ phala’’nti tatthābhimukhena viya kammunā nibbattitattā tebhūmakavipākakaṭattārūpesu sātisayo saṅkhatabhāvoti adhippāyena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 2.587) kammanibbattānaṃ abhisaṅkhatasaṅkhāratā vuttā. Pāḷiyaṃ pana tathā āgataṭṭhānassa abhāvato ‘‘tepi …pe… ettheva saṅgahaṃ gacchantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Aniccā vata saṅkhārāti vuttā ubhuādisamuṭṭhānāpi sabbadhammā. Abhisaṅkharaṇakasaṅkhāroti vuccati attano phalassa abhisaṅkharaṇato. Kāyapayogasamuṭṭhāpanavīriyaṃ kāyikavīriyaṃ. Abhisaṅkhārassāti payogavegassa.
造作语言,就是语行。以身被造作,就是身行。以心被造作,或者造作心,就是心行。简略地说,应当知道一切也都按各自的情况在造作或被造作,因此称为行。上面所说的,就是指行的含义、缘的含义等。巴利
Vācaṃ saṅkharotīti vacīsaṅkhāro. Kāyena saṅkharīyatīti kāyasaṅkhāro. Cittena saṅkharīyati, cittaṃ vā saṅkharotīti cittasaṅkhāro. Saṅkhepato pana sabbepi yathārahaṃ saṅkharonti, saṅkharīyantīti ca saṅkhārāti veditabbā. Vuttanti saṅkhāraṭṭhapaccayaṭṭhādimāha.
倾向,是指因为只以单一对象为所缘,所以心朝向所缘。战栗,是指渴求,或者因为渴爱的灼烧而动摇。执取,是指牢牢地抓取。有,是就生有而说的。令有,是指业有。诸蕴的死没就是死亡,所以说“以此而死”。苦受是生起之苦、住立之苦,因此说“以两种方式破坏”。疲厌,是疲倦、沮丧。巴利
Namatīti ekantasārammaṇatāya ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namati. Paritassatīti pipāsati, taṇhāparitāpatāya vā vicalati. Upādiyatīti daḷhaṃ ādiyati. Bhavatīti upapattibhavaṃ sandhāyāha. Bhāvayatīti kammabhavaṃ. Cuti khandhānaṃ maraṇanti ‘‘maranti etenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhā vedanā uppādadukkhā, ṭhitidukkhāti ca katvā ‘‘dvedhā khaṇatī’’ti vuttaṃ. Āyāso parissamo visādo.
“已说方法的显示”是指按照已经说明的方式来做开示。“唯”这个词,既表示不混杂,比如“唯是厅堂”等说法;也表示没有剩余,比如“唯是盎嘎和摩揭陀”等说法。所以它两种含义都能表达。其中,“不混杂”是指没有乐,因为在这里并没有任何脱离生灭的东西。“全部的”是指属于一切有等处的,也是指遍及一切时间的。巴利
Niddiṭṭhanayadassananti yathāniddiṭṭhavidhisandassanaṃ. Kevala-saddo asammissavācako ca hoti ‘‘kevalā sālayo’’tiādīsu, niravasesavācako ca ‘‘kevalā aṅgamagadhā’’tiādīsu, tasmā dvidhāpi atthaṃ vadati. Tattha asammissassāti sukharahitassa. Na hi ettha kiñci uppādavayarahitaṃ atthi. Sakalassāti sabbabhavādigatassa, sabbakālikassa ca.
588 在“从特相一种等”这句话里,“等”这个字应当分别适用于每一项,为了说明这一点,论师说“从特相等”。它使相应法或具有该法的人迷惑,所以以迷惑为作用。它覆盖了所缘的自性并被执取,所以以覆盖为现起。由于“从漏生起,无明生起”这一说法,它以漏为近因。为了产生结生而蓄积、作努力,所以以蓄积为作用;或者,聚集就是蓄积。因为其自性是思,所以它作为思而被执取,因此以思为现起。它以先行于名色的方式生起,所以以先行性为作用。它与前世连结而被执取,所以以结生为现起。它与识一起,并且彼此相应,所以以相应为作用。以平等的方式结合就是相应。没有各别存在就是无分别。色因为没有相应的缘故而散开,所以以散开为作用。正因为如此,被碾磨的米等会散开,变成粉末而破碎。名法有时也有善等状态,为了区别于那个,所以说“以无记为现起”。就像“无思、无记”那里一样,这里应当理解为无所缘或无记。以处为特相,就是接触的特相;或者,诸来之伸展的特相。由于见能各自取自己的对象,所以以见为作用。不过在《迷惑除遣》中说“以见等为作用”。以基地和门为现起,是指根据情况作为识界和意识界的基地与门。这里,执取基地是就眼等五者而言。由于不善果报的舍受是不可意的,所以为苦所摄;另一种是可意的,所以为乐所摄;因此说“以苦乐为现起”。渴爱以苦的集起为特相。由于“处处欢喜”这一说法,所以以欢喜为作用。心或人对色等不满足的状态被执取,所以以不满足的状态为现起。以不舍为作用,是因为执著于渴爱和见。渴爱的坚固状态成为欲取,其余的成为见而现起,所以以渴爱的坚固和见为现起。应当根据业有和生有来配释有的特相等。巴利
588. ‘‘Lakkhaṇekavidhādito’’ti ettha ādi-saddo paccekaṃ parisamāpetabboti dassento āha ‘‘lakkhaṇādito’’ti. Sampayutte, taṃsamaṅgipuggale vā sammohayatīti sammohanarasā. Ārammaṇasabhāvassa chādanaṃ hutvā gayhatīti chādanapaccupaṭṭhānā. ‘‘Āsavasamudayā avijjāsamudayo’’ti (ma. ni. 1.103) vacanato āsavapadaṭṭhānā. Paṭisandhijananatthaṃ āyūhanti byāpāraṃ karontīti āyūhanarasā. Rāsikaraṇaṃ vā āyūhanaṃ. Cetanāsabhāvattā cetanā hutvā gayhatīti cetanāpaccupaṭṭhānā. Nāmarūpassa purecārikabhāvena pavattatīti pubbaṅgamarasaṃ. Purimabhavena saddhiṃ ghaṭanaṃ hutvā gayhatīti paṭisandhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Viññāṇena saha, aññamaññañca sampayujjatīti sampayogarasaṃ. Samaṃ pakārehi yogo sampayogo. Visuṃ abhāvo avinibbhogo. Rūpaṃ sampayogābhāvato vikiratīti vikiraṇarasaṃ. Tato eva hi pisiyamānā taṇḍulādayo vikiranti, cuṇṇībhūtā viddhaṃsanti, nāmassa kadāci kusalādibhāvopi atthīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘abyākatapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Acetano abyākato’’ti (visuddhi. 1.311; vibha. aṭṭha. 173) ettha viya anārammaṇatā vā abyākatatā daṭṭhabbā. Āyatanalakkhaṇanti ghaṭṭanalakkhaṇaṃ, āyānaṃ tananalakkhaṇaṃ vā. Dassanassa yathāsakaṃ visayaggahaṇassa karaṇato dassanarasaṃ. ‘‘Dassanādirasa’’nti pana sammohavinodaniyaṃ vuttaṃ. Vatthudvārabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānaṃ yathārahaṃ viññāṇamanoviññāṇadhātūnanti adhippāyo. Vatthuggahaṇañcettha cakkhādipañcakāpekkhaṃ. Akusalavipākupekkhāya aniṭṭhabhāvato dukkhena, itarāya iṭṭhabhāvato sukhena saṅgahitattā ‘‘sukhadukkhapaccupaṭṭhānā’’ti vuttaṃ. Dukkhasamudayattā hetulakkhaṇā taṇhā. ‘‘Tatratatrābhinandinī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.91, 460; saṃ. ni. 5.1081; vibha. 203; mahāva. 14) vacanato abhinandanarasā. Cittassa, puggalassa vā rūpādīsu atittabhāvo hutvā gayhatīti atittabhāvapaccupaṭṭhānā. Amuñcanarasaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhābhinivesavasena. Taṇhādaḷhattaṃ hutvā kāmupādānaṃ, sesāni diṭṭhi hutvā upaṭṭhahantīti taṇhādaḷhattadiṭṭhipaccupaṭṭhānaṃ. Kammupapattibhavavasena bhavassa lakkhaṇādayo yojetabbā.
589 在“由痴等所成”这一说法中,“等”这个字涵盖了不随觉等。对于苦等,因为无智而有不实行;对于不净等,因为净等颠倒而有邪实行。或者,依与见不相应而有不实行,依与见相应而有邪实行。关于门与所缘,即从门、从所缘而言,因为在六门、六所缘中转起。不过这种区分并不只是无明才有,在其他缘起支中的非色法也能找到,所以说“于一切”。巴利
589.Mohādibhāvatoti ettha ādi-saddena ananubodhādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Dukkhādīsu aññāṇavasena appaṭipatti, asubhādīsu subhādivipallāsavasena micchāpaṭipatti. Diṭṭhivippayuttavasena vā appaṭipatti, diṭṭhisampayuttavasena micchāpaṭipatti. Dvārārammaṇatoti dvārato, ārammaṇato ca chasu dvāresu, chasu ārammaṇesu ca pavattanato. Ayaṃ pana vibhāgo na avijjāya eva, aññesupi paṭiccasamuppādaṅgesu arūpadhammānaṃ labbhatīti āha ‘‘sabbesupī’’ti.
在“异熟法性等性”这一表述里,这里的“等”字涵盖了非有学非无学性、所结性等状态。所谓“转起四生”,是指由四生所摄的生命体得以生起。巴利
Vipākadhammadhammādibhāvatoti ettha ādi-saddena nevasekkhānāsekkhasaṃyojaniyādibhāve saṅgaṇhāti. Catuyonisaṃvattanatoti catuyonipariyāpannattabhāvanibbattanato.
在“世间、分别等所成”这一表述中,这里的“等”字涵盖了无记、有缘、有为等性质。在“有因、无因等”这一表述中,这里的“等”字涵盖了有行、无行等种种差别。巴利
Lokiyavibhāgādibhāvatoti ettha ādi-saddena abyākatasappaccayasaṅkhatādibhāve saṅgaṇhāti. Sahetukāhetukāditoti ādi-saddena sasaṅkhārāsaṅkhārādibhede saṅgaṇhāti.
名色虽然通常是依现在世来说的,但就像现在是如此,过去和未来也是如此。所以说“过去等三种”,因为属于过去、未来这两世的名色,也应当按这个理路来把握。巴利
Kāmaṃ nāmarūpaṃ paccuppannaddhavasena vuccati, tathāpi yathā paccuppannaṃ, evaṃ atītānāgatampīti addhadvayapariyāpannassāpi nayato gahetabbattā vuttaṃ ‘‘atītādito tividha’’nti.
“生起与会合之处”,是指识以及和识相应的那些法生起、运作的地方。“由净色与识”这个读法是合适的。不过也有人读成“由识等”。如果按省略的方式来理解,连外处也被包含在内,那就应当知道,外处是被“等”这个字涵盖进去的。
“非二者之行境”,说的是意处。因为无色法没有质碍,所以没有处所上的远近可言,因此不说意处的行境是意处已到达或未到达。
关于触等:这里触首先从“触碰”这一自性来说,以及从世间有漏等性质来说,算作一种。按有对触和增语触的区分,以及按有因等性质来分,算作两种。按三有所摄、与三受相应,以及按无因、二因、三因来分,算作三种。按生和趣来分,算作四种,也算作五种。巴利
Sañjātisamosaraṇaṭṭhānatoti viññāṇataṃsampayuttadhammānaṃ uppattipavattidesabhāvato. ‘‘Bhūtappasādaviññāṇato’’ti pāṭho yutto. ‘‘Viññāṇādito’’ti pana paṭhanti. Ekasesanayena bāhirāyatanassāpi saṅgahe sati ādi-saddena tassa saṅgahitatā daṭṭhabbā. Nobhayagocaranti manāyatanamāha. Na hi arūpadhammānaṃ desavasena āsannatā, dūratā vā atthi aviggahattā, tasmā manāyatanassa gocaro manāyatanaṃ sampatto, asampatto vāti na vuccati. Phassādīnampīti ettha phasso tāva phusanasabhāvato, lokiyasāsavādibhāvato ca ekavidho. Paṭighasamphassaadhivacanasamphassabhedato, sahetukādibhāvato ca duvidho. Bhavattayapariyāpannato, vedanāttayasampayogato , ahetukaduhetukatihetukato ca tividho. Yonigativasena catubbidho, pañcavidho ca.
受以领纳为特相,从世间、有漏等性质来说是一种。从五门、意门的区别来说有两种。从乐受等的区别来说有三种。从生处、趣处的角度来说有四种、五种。从六种所缘的区别来说有六种。巴利
Vedanā anubhavanalakkhaṇato, lokiyasāsavādibhāvato ca ekavidhā. Pañcadvārikamanodvārikabhedato duvidhā. Sukhādibhedato tividhā. Yonigativasena catubbidhā, pañcavidhā ca. Chaḷārammaṇabhedato chabbidhā.
渴爱,因为它是世间生起的原因,所以算一种。按与见相应或不相应,分两种。按欲渴爱、有渴爱、无有渴爱的区别,分三种。按四种圣道所应断除,分四种。按对色等的欢喜等状态,分五种。按六种渴爱身的区别,分六种。巴利
Taṇhā lokassa samudayabhāvato ekavidhā. Duvidhā diṭṭhisampayuttavippayuttabhāvato. Tividhā kāmabhavavibhavataṇhābhedato. Catubbidhā catumaggapaheyyato. Pañcavidhā rūpābhinandanādibhāvato. Chabbidhā chataṇhākāyabhedato.
取有一种分法:从它坚固执取的性质来说,是一种。按渴爱和见解的区分来说,是两种。从它作为三有近依的性质来说,是三种。按欲取等的区分来说,是四种。从它能导致投生五趣来说,是五种。巴利
Upādānaṃ ekavidhaṃ daḷhaggāhabhāvato. Duvidhaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhibhedato. Tividhaṃ bhavattayūpanissayabhāvato. Catubbidhaṃ kāmupādānādibhedato. Pañcavidhaṃ pañcagatisaṃvattanato.
有分为一种,因为它是世间有漏等状态。分为两种,因为按业有和生有来区分。分为三种,因为按欲有等来区分。分为四种,因为以四取为缘。分为五种,因为能导致投生五趣。分为六种,因为按欲界业有等来区分。分为七种,因为可归入七识住。分为八种,因为按以四取为缘的业有等来区分。分为九种,因为按欲有等来区分。巴利
Bhavo ekavidho lokiyasāsavādibhāvato. Duvidho kammupapattibhedato. Tividho kāmabhavādibhedato. Catubbidho caturupādānapaccayato. Pañcavidho pañcagatisaṃvattanato. Chabbidho kāmakammabhavādibhedato. Sattavidho sattaviññāṇaṭṭhitisaṅgahato. Aṭṭhavidho caturupādānapaccayakammabhavādibhedato. Navavidho kāmabhavādibhedato.
生只有一种,因为在各处有中,它都是最初结生的状态。有两种,因为可以归入色蕴和行蕴。有三种,因为包含在三种有中。按生和趣来分,有四种和五种。依照这个道理,老、死等支的一种乃至多种状态,也应当知道。巴利
Jāti ekavidhā tattha tattha bhave paṭhamābhinibbattibhāvato. Duvidhā rūpakkhandhasaṅkhārakkhandhasaṅgahato. Tividhā bhavattayapariyāpannato. Yonigativasena catubbidhā, pañcavidhā ca. Iminā nayena jarāmaraṇādīnampi ekavidhādibhāvo veditabbo.
590 由于愁等也被包含在内,为了避免支数过多的过失,应当知道支的确定是“只有十二支”。因为愁等并不是以支的身份被说到的,而是为了通过果来显示因——也就是无明这个根本支——才说到它们。对于被老死所逼迫的愚者,这些愁等才会生起,所以说愁等以老死为因;但并不是说在“被身体的苦受所触”等经文里已经包含了老死相和苦,而是为了说明那些以老死为相、被老死所逼的人会生起愁等。然而,因为愁等只是和老死一起被总括,所以它们以生为缘而生起是合理的。如果以老死为缘,那无明也应该一起被总括进去;但以生为缘,老死和愁等就生起,因此在那里,老死被确定地作为一支而摄受。愁等则在色有等当中不存在,所以不是确定性的,只是为了用明显的果来显示无明才被摄受。由此,当未来有生时,作为其随后结生之因的无明就被显示出来,从而显示了有轮的无间断。经文也应当被看作是在证明“无明是愁等之因”这个义理,而不是仅仅证明愚者的愁等以老死为相。因为通过“无闻凡夫”这个词,显示了无明是愁等之因,而不是仅仅以老死为相的苦才是苦。巴利
590. Sokādīnampi gahitattā aṅgabahuttappasaṅge ‘‘dvādasevā’’ti aṅgavavatthānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Na hi sokādayo aṅgabhāvena vuttā, phalena pana kāraṇaṃ avijjaṃ mūlaṅgaṃ dassetuṃ te vuttā. Jarāmaraṇabbhāhatassa hi bālassa te sambhavantīti sokādīnaṃ jarāmaraṇakāraṇatā vuttā, na pana ‘‘kāyikāya dukkhāya vedanāya phuṭṭho’’ti ca sutte jarāmaraṇanimittañca dukkhaṃ saṅgahitanti taṃ tannimittānaṃ jarāmaraṇabbhāhatassa sambhave sādhakabhāvena vuttaṃ. Yasmā pana jarāmaraṇeneva sokādīnaṃ ekasaṅkhepo kato, tasmā tesaṃ jātipaccayatā yujjati. Jarāmaraṇapaccayabhāve hi avijjāya ekasaṅkhepo kātabbo siyā. Jātipaccayā pana jarāmaraṇaṃ , sokādayo ca sambhavantīti tattha jarāmaraṇaṃ ekantikaṃ aṅgabhāvena gahitaṃ. Sokādayo pana rūpabhavādīsu abhāvato anekantikā kevalaṃ pākaṭena phalena avijjānidassanatthaṃ gahitā. Tena anāgate jātiyā sati tato parāya paṭisandhiyā hetuhetubhūtā avijjā dassitāti bhavacakkassa avicchedo dassito hotīti. Suttañca sokādīnaṃ avijjā kāraṇanti etasseva atthassa sādhakaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, na sokādīnaṃ bālassa jarāmaraṇanimittatāmattassa. ‘‘Assutavā puthujjano’’ti hi vacanena avijjā sokādīnaṃ kāraṇanti dassitā, na ca jarāmaraṇanimittameva dukkhaṃ dukkhanti.
还有一种理解方式:老死也是缘,不然十二支就说不圆满。那么,老死是谁的缘呢?是愁等法的缘。如果是这样,为什么不说“以老死为缘,愁等生起”,而说“以生为缘,有老死,愁等也生起”呢?因为即使被其他苦法触动,那些愁等也会生起,所以对尚未断除结缚的人来说,老死作为它们的缘并不是决定性的,因此只说以生为缘。或者,用“老死”这个词已经把生有包含进来了。因为所执取诸蕴的成熟——寿命的减损、诸根的成熟——就是老,它们的坏灭就是死。当生有存在时,在那里所造作积集的、或是过去旧的业,就是业有;在业等现前时,死后立刻产生结生,所以生有是生的缘。因此,老死也因为具有作为生之缘的性质,而属于缘起。然而,因为“以有为缘,有生”这一句里已经包含了生有作为生的缘,所以按照所说方式的含摄,就不再另说“以老死为缘,有生”。这样,由于老死作为缘的性质也得以成立,它也就是缘起,应当知道十二支的确定性由此建立。因此说“唯有十二支”等。这是针对“依说示的差别”等所说的义释而说的。巴利
Aparo nayo jarāmaraṇampi paccayo, aññathā dvādasaṅgāni na paripūrenti. Kassa pana so paccayo? Sokādīnaṃ. Yadi evaṃ kasmā ‘‘jarāmaraṇapaccayā sokādayo sambhavantī’’ti avatvā ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ, sokādayo ca sambhavantī’’ti vuttanti? Yasmā tadaññenapi dukkhadhammena phuṭṭhassa te sambhavanti, tasmā appahīnasaṃyojanassāpi tesaṃ tappaccayatā na ekaṃsikāti jātipaccayatāva vuttā. Atha vā jarāmaraṇaggahaṇena upapattibhavo saṅgahito. Upādinnakkhandhaparipāko hi āyuno saṃhāni, indriyānaṃ paripāko ca jarā, tesañca bhedo maraṇanti. Sati ca upapattibhave tattha katupacitaṃ, porāṇaṃ vā kammaṃ kammabhavo, kammādiupaṭṭhāne cutianantaraṃ paṭisandhiṃ janetīti upapattibhavo jātiyā paccayo, tasmā jarāmaraṇampi jātiyā paccayatāya paṭiccasamuppādo. Yasmā pana ‘‘bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti ettheva upapattibhavassa jātiyā paccayatā saṅgahitā, tasmā vuttapariyāyasaṅgahato ca ‘‘jarāmaraṇapaccayā jātī’’ti na vuttaṃ. Evaṃ jarāmaraṇassāpi paccayabhāvasiddhito paṭiccasamuppādatāti dvādasaṅgatā vavatthitāti veditabbā. Tenāha ‘‘dvādasevā’’tiādi. Ayaṃ tāvāti ‘‘desanābhedato’’tiādinā vuttaṃ atthasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ sandhāyāha.
无明缘行这一句的论注释巴利
Avijjāpaccayāsaṅkhārapadakathāvaṇṇanā
591 这个“然而”是指接下来要说的内容。在经典中,通过“诸比丘,什么是无明?就是对苦的无知”等语句,说明了无明存在于四种处所,所以说“依经教的方式”。而在《法集论》的“安立品”中,对于经典里在四种处所所说的无明,又依据它在八种处所中的作用来加以说明,为了通过解释其含义来阐明这一点,先以“依阿毗达摩的方式”开始,然后说了“因为已说”等内容。应当毫无遗漏地加以分别,因为分别就是阿毗达摩的方式。应把“在八种处所中的无知”引出来并与之连接。在其余处所,指的是在苦、集以及过去世等之中。依所缘,也就是依作为所缘的方式。在这里,就是在“对苦的无知”等这样的文句中。它,就是指无明。已生起,指未被断除而存在,更何况是当下现起的。为了显示“遮蔽”这个词所说的遮蔽方式,所以说了“不让人通达真实自味之相”。应当被品尝、应当被通达的自性就是味,自己的味就是自味,真实、如实的自味就是真实自味,也就是以“逼迫之义”等所说的苦谛的种种差别以及过去世等,因为应当被了知,所以是真实自味之相。它不让人通达、不让人现前了知那个。巴利
591.Ayaṃ panāti idāni vakkhamānaṃ. ‘‘Katamā ca, bhikkhave, avijjā dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.103) suttantesu catuṭṭhānikā avijjā vuttāti ‘‘suttantapariyāyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nikkhepakaṇḍe (dha. sa. 1106) pana suttantesu catūsu ṭhānesu kathitāya eva avijjāya aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu kiccajātito kathitattā tadatthavaṇṇanāvasena vibhāvanaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘abhidhammapariyāyenā’’ti ārabhitvā ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Ahāpetvā vibhajitabbaṃ. Vibhajanañhi abhidhammapariyāyo. ‘‘Aṭṭhasu ṭhānesu aññāṇa’’nti ānetvā taṃ sambandhitabbaṃ. Sesaṭṭhānesūti dukkhasamudayesu, pubbantādīsu ca. Ārammaṇavasenāti ārammaṇakaraṇavasenāpi. Idhāti imasmiṃ ‘‘dukkhe aññāṇa’’ntiādike pāṭhe. Sāti avijjā. Uppannāti asamūhatuppannā, pageva paccuppannā. ‘‘Paṭicchādetvā’’ti ettha vuttaṃ paṭicchādanākāraṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na detī’’ti vuttaṃ. Rasitabbo paṭivijjhitabbo sabhāvo raso, attano raso saraso, yāthāvo yathābhūto saraso yāthāvasaraso, yo ‘‘pīḷanaṭṭho’’tiādinā (paṭi. ma. 2.8) vutto dukkhasaccappabhedā eva ca pubbantādayo, so eva lakkhitabbattā yāthāvasarasalakkhaṇaṃ. Taṃ paṭivijjhituṃ paccakkhato jānituṃ na deti.
“那两者”是指过去和未来,也就是已经过去的五蕴和还没有到来的五蕴。又因为具有过去与未来两部分的性质,所以由现时分所成的中间部分就被称为“过去与未来”。这是对缘起所生诸法——也就是“这是无明,这些是行”——以直接现见的方式来了知的显示。“在此”是指在苦等这些法当中。无明虽然也以执取苦等为所缘的方式生起,但应当知道:就像在灭和道那里,无明无法把它们作为所缘,于是以遮蔽它们、对想了知者遮蔽的方式生起;在非灭道诸法中,则以作为执取灭和道之因的状态生起,使人无法如实通达它们;在苦等当中也是如此。正如所说:“正是在这里,唯是以遮蔽的方式被意指的。”以苦等为行境,它是使人盲目的黑暗;作为贪等盲目黑暗的因,它是一种不显现、无知的状态。巴利
Tadubhayanti pubbantañceva aparantañca atītaṃ, anāgatañca khandhapañcakaṃ. Pubbantāparantabhāgavantatāya vā paccuppannaddhabhūto majjhanto pubbantāparanto. Ayaṃ avijjā ime saṅkhārāti idappaccayatāpaṭiccasamuppannadhammesu paccakkhato jānanākāradassanaṃ. Etthāti etesu dukkhādīsu. Yadipi avijjā dukkhādīsu ārammaṇakaraṇavasenapi pavattati, yathā pana nirodhamagge ārammaṇaṃ kātuṃ asakkontī te jānitukāmassa tappaṭicchādanavasena, anirodhamaggesu nirodhamaggaggahaṇakāraṇabhāvena ca pavattamānā te yāthāvato paṭivijjhituṃ na deti, evaṃ dukkhādīsupīti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭicchādanavaseneva idhādhippetā’’ti. Dukkhādivisayo andhatamakaro, lobhādīnañca andhatamakarānaṃ paccayabhūto adassanākāro aññāṇaṃ.
592 “福行等”指的是福行这一类。其中,“福”的意思是:净化自己的心相续,使它远离非福之果和苦的杂染,所以叫福。或者也可以说:以利益和安乐为动机去行福,通过完成这个福行,就满足了行者的心愿,或者产生了值得受人供养的状态,所以叫福。因此,从词源上说,应当理解福既是“充实者”,也是“产生值得供养状态者”。而福本身,因为具有造作自己果报的意义,所以也是“行”,因此叫“福行”。与福相反的叫“非福”,应当理解非福行就是上面所说的反面。由于远离定的敌对法,远到极点,所以不为所动;又因为它造作不动的存在,所以叫“不动行”。由身体生起,或从身体发起,或属于身体的行,叫“身行”。语行和心行也是同样的道理。其中,第一种三法是根据《遍寻求经》等来引用的。那里确实说:“如果造作福行,识就趣向福……”第二种三法是根据《分别经》来引用的。那里说:“比丘们,有三种行。哪三种?身行、语行、心行。”巴利
592.Puññādayoti puññābhisaṅkhārādayo. Tattha punāti attano santānaṃ apuññaphalato, dukkhasaṃkilesato ca sodhetīti puññaṃ. Hitasukhajjhāsayena puññaṃ karotīti tannipphādanena kārakassa ajjhāsayaṃ pūreti, pujjabhavaṃ nibbattetīti vā puññaṃ. Iti pūrako, pujjanibbattako ca niruttinayena puññanti veditabbo. Puññañca so attano phalassa abhisaṅkharaṇaṭṭhena abhisaṅkhāro cāti puññābhisaṅkhāro. Puññapaṭipakkhato apuññanti vuttavipariyāyena apuññābhisaṅkhāro veditabbo. Samādhipaccanīkānaṃ atidūratāya na iñjati, aniñjañca bhavaṃ abhisaṅkharotīti āneñjābhisaṅkhāro. Kāyena pavattito, kāyato vā pavatto, kāyassa vā saṅkhāroti kāyasaṅkhāro. Vacīcittasaṅkhāresupi eseva nayo. Tattha paṭhamattiko parivīmaṃsanasuttādivasena gahito. Tattha hi ‘‘puññaṃ ce saṅkhāraṃ abhisaṅkharoti, puññūpagaṃ hoti viññāṇa’’ntiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.51) āgataṃ. Dutiyattiko vibhaṅgasuttavasena. Tattha hi ‘‘tayome, bhikkhave, saṅkhārā. Katame tayo? Kāyasaṅkhāro vacīsaṅkhāro cittasaṅkhāro’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.28) vuttaṃ.
“广说”等句,是从自相和分类两方面来说明福行等。“唯依修习而生起,不依布施和持戒”,这是显示此处所包含的福业事。这样说来,无色界的思也被说为“唯依修习而生起”。然而有人说,“唯依修习”这个限定词排除了神通思,这并不合理。因为就像它们以无明为缘一样,它们也应被承认为福行。否则,神通心的生起就不会被归入福业事中,而说它“既非善也非福业事”也就不合理了。“杀生等”中的“等”字,不只是摄取其余那些恶业道,而应当理解为无一遗漏地摄取一切恶业。巴利
Vitthārato panātiādi puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ sarūpato, pabhedato ca vibhāvanaṃ. Bhāvanāvaseneva pavattā, na dānasīlavasenāti tattha labbhamānaṃ puññakiriyavatthuṃ dasseti. Evañca katvā arūpāvacaracetanāpi ‘‘bhāvanāvasenevapavattā’’ti vuttā. Ye pana ‘‘bhāvanāvasenevā’’ti avadhāraṇena abhiññācetanaṃ nivattetīti vadanti, tadayuttaṃ tāsampi avijjāpaccayatāya viya puññābhisaṅkhārabhāvassa ca icchitattā. Aññathā abhiññācittuppādassa puññakiriyavatthūsu asaṅgaho eva siyā, na ca yuttaṃ ‘‘kusalañca puññakiriyavatthuñca na hotī’’ti. Pāṇātipātādīti ādi-saddena na tadavasiṭṭhaakusalakammapathānaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ, atha kho anavasesaakusalakammassāpi gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ.
“在其余诸法当中”指的是身行等。福行等正在生起时,是透过这些门而生起的,这样说就是为了显示它们从门而生起。为什么说“二十种思”呢?如果能够引发身表和语表的善与不善思,被称为身行和语行,那么照这样说来,神通思也是善的,也同样生起,就应该说它具有语行的性质——针对这一责难,才说了“神通思”等话。“在此”是指在摄取身行、语行时,或者在摄取身思、语思时。“未被摄取”是指在注释书中没有被摄取,即“神通思不是识的缘”。那为什么不是呢?难道它不也是善的、属于异熟法吗?确实如此,但在渴爱和无明尚未断尽的相续中,由于它是带着造作而运转的,所以说它是善的、是异熟法,并不是说它能产生异熟。如果它能产生异熟,那也只能产生色界的异熟,因为不同地的业不会产生不同地的异熟。而且它只能产生与自己相似的所缘和立足处的异熟,《心生起品》中说,色界异熟只与业相似的所缘相应。然而色界异熟不可能以欲界等地的所缘为所缘,而神通思恰恰只是以欲界等地的所缘为所缘。因此可以知道,它不产生异熟。神通是修遍处所生起的第四禅定所带来的利益。正如经中所说:“他这样心得定之后……”所以,神通是与定果相似的,但它并不产生果报。就像布施、持戒的利益是在那一生中获得助缘一样,神通也不产生异熟。巴利
Itaresu panāti kāyasaṅkhārādīsu. Puññābhisaṅkhārādayo pavattamānā imehi dvārehi pavattantīti dvārato pavattidassanatthaṃ. ‘‘Samavīsati cetanā’’ti kasmā vuttaṃ, yadi kāyavacīviññattiyo samuṭṭhāpentiyo kusalākusalacetanā kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīsaṅkhāroti ca vuccanti, evaṃ sante abhiññācetanāyapi kusalāya tathā pavattāya vacīsaṅkhārabhāvo vattabboti codanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘abhiññācetanā’’tiādi. Etthāti kāyavacīsaṅkhāraggahaṇe, kāyavacīsañcetanāggahaṇe vā. Na gahitāti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ na gahitā ‘‘abhiññācetanā viññāṇassa paccayo na hotī’’ti. Kasmā pana na hoti, nanu sāpi kusalā, vipākadhammā cāti? Saccametaṃ, anupacchinnataṇhāvijjamāne pana santāne sabyāpārappavattiyā tassā kusalatā, vipākadhammatā ca vuttā, na vipākuppādanena. Sā pana vipākaṃ uppādentī rūpāvacarameva uppādeyya. Na hi aññabhūmikaṃ kammaṃ aññabhūmikaṃ vipākaṃ uppādetīti. Attanā sadisārammaṇaṃ tiṭṭhānikameva ca uppādeyya cittuppādakaṇḍe rūpāvacaravipākassa kammasadisārammaṇasseva vuttattā. Na ca rūpāvacaravipāko parittādiārammaṇo atthi, abhiññācetanā ca parittādiārammaṇāva hoti. Tasmā vipākaṃ na uppādetīti viññāyati. Kasiṇesu ca uppāditassa catutthajjhānasamādhissa ānisaṃsabhūtā abhiññā. Yathāha ‘‘so evaṃ samāhite citte’’tiādi (dī. ni. 1.244-245; ma. ni. 1.384-386, 431-433; pārā. 12). Tasmā samādhiphalasadisā sā, na ca phalaṃ deti. Dānasīlānisaṃsabhūto tasmiṃ bhave paccayalābho viyāti sāpi vipākaṃ na uppādetīti.
“就像神通思那样,掉举思也不是(语行)。”——因为把掉举俱行的法单独提出来之后,经中说“了知它们异熟的智是义无碍解智”(《分别论》725),所以这一点需要讨论。不过,那个讨论在下面蕴分别注释的不善法讨论中已经讨论过了,因此应当按那里讨论的方式来理解。
另外,在这里,有些人以分别的方式说:即使没有见与修习,对于那些凡夫和有学圣者来说,既然他们应当由见与修习来修证,那么在他们生起这些(不善法)的时候,那些能够被他们断除的不善法,就被称为“见所断”和“修所断”。然而,凡夫没有修习,所以不存在“修所断”的考虑。因此,对他们来说,那些正在生起、却不能被见所断的不善法,也不被称为“修所断”。如果它们被称为“修所断”,那么见所断的法岂不是会以所缘缘、所缘增上缘、亲依止缘等某种条件,在有些时候成为某些修所断法的缘吗?然而在《发趣论》中,并没有说见所断的法以任何缘为修所断法的缘。
但对于有学圣者来说,由于修习存在,那些能够被修习所断的法,就是“修所断”。正因如此,对有学圣者而言,见所断的法由于已被舍弃、已被吐弃、已解脱、已断除、已远离、已根除、已彻底根除,所以不再可爱、不再可欢喜。正因为已被断除,它们不会成为喜悦之因、不散乱之因,也不会产生忧恼和掉举;因此,它们不会成为那些(有学圣者)的所缘缘、所缘增上缘,也不会成为自然亲依止缘。因为圣者不会依止已断除的烦恼而生起贪等烦恼。巴利
‘‘Yathā ca abhiññācetanā, evaṃ uddhaccacetanāpi na hotī’’ti idaṃ uddhaccasahagatadhamme visuṃ uddharitvā ‘‘tesaṃ vipāke ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti (vibha. 725) vuttattā vicāretabbaṃ. Sā pana vicāraṇā heṭṭhā khandhaniddesavaṇṇanāyaṃ akusalakathāyaṃ vicāritā evāti tattha vicāritanayeneva veditabbā. Apicettha yadeke vibhajja vadanti, dassanabhāvanānaṃ abhāvepi yesaṃ puthujjanānaṃ, sekkhānañca dassanabhāvanāhi bhavitabbaṃ, tesaṃ taduppattikāle tehi pahātuṃ sakkuṇeyyā akusalā dassanena pahātabbā, bhāvanāya pahātabbāti ca vuccanti. Puthujjanānaṃ pana bhāvanāya abhāvā bhāvanāya pahātabbacintā natthi. Tena tesaṃ pavattamānā dassanena pahātuṃ asakkuṇeyyāpi bhāvanāya pahātabbāti na vuccanti. Yadi vucceyyuṃ, dassanenapahātabbā bhāvanāyapahātabbānaṃ kesañci kenaci kadāci ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatiupanissayapaccayehi paccayo bhaveyyuṃ? Na ca paṭṭhāne dassanenapahātabbā bhāvanāyapahātabbānaṃ kenaci paccayena paccayoti vuttā. Sekkhānaṃ pana vijjamānā bhāvanāya pahātuṃ sakkuṇeyyāti bhāvanāya pahātabbā. Teneva sekkhānaṃ dassanena pahātabbā, cattattā vantattā muttattā pahīnattā paṭinissaṭṭhattā ukkheṭitattā samukkheṭitattā assāditabbā, abhinanditabbā ca na honti. Pahīnatāya eva somanassahetubhūtā, avikkhepahetubhūtā ca na domanassaṃ, uddhaccañca uppādentīti na te tesaṃ ārammaṇaārammaṇādhipatibhāvaṃ, pakatūpanissayabhāvañca gacchanti. Na hi pahīne upanissāya ariyo rāgādikilese uppādeti.
确实这样说过:“以入流道所断除的烦恼,不再随行、不再回返、不再返回……乃至……以阿拉汉道……不再返回。”(《大义释》80;《小义释·慈童问分释》27)但不能说“凡夫不能用见来断除,其余的人不以任何缘为缘”,因为《发趣论》中说过:“贪著于见、欢喜于见,缘于此而生起贪、见、疑、掉举。缘于疑而生起疑、见、掉举。”(《发趣论》1.1.407)这是说见和疑是掉举的所缘缘。这里所说的“掉举”,是指掉举俱行心的生起。正因如此,在增上缘分别中只说:“以见为重而贪著、欢喜,以彼为重而生起贪、生起见。”(《发趣论》1.1.415)只说了这些,并没有说“生起掉举”。因此,虽然见所断和修所断的烦恼不应以过去等状态来论说,但对于那些应当通过见和修习使其不再生起的法,在凡夫中生起的、观待于见而能由见来断除的,就是见所断;在有学者中生起的、观待于修习而能由修习来断除的,就是修所断。巴利
Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘sotāpattimaggena ye kilesā pahīnā, te kilese na puneti na pacceti na paccāgacchati…pe… arahattamaggena…pe… paccāgacchatī’’ti (mahāni. 80; cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 27). Na ca puthujjanānaṃ dassanena pahātuṃ sakkuṇeyyā, itaresaṃ na kenaci paccayena paccayo hontīti na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘diṭṭhiṃ assādeti abhinandati, taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjati, diṭṭhi, vicikicchā, uddhaccaṃ uppajjati. Vicikicchaṃ ārabbha vicikicchā , diṭṭhi, uddhaccaṃ uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.407) diṭṭhivicikicchānaṃ uddhaccārammaṇapaccayabhāvassa vuttattā. Ettha hi uddhaccanti uddhaccasahagatacittuppādaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā adhipatipaccayaniddese ‘‘diṭṭhiṃ garuṃ katvā assādeti abhinandati, taṃ garuṃ katvā rāgo uppajjati, diṭṭhi uppajjatī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.415) ettakameva vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘uddhaccaṃ uppajjatī’’ti. Tasmā dassanabhāvanāhi pahātabbānaṃ atītādibhāvena na vattabbattepi yādisānaṃ tāhi anuppattidhammatā āpādetabbā, tesu puthujjanesu vattamānā dassanaṃ apekkhitvā tena pahātuṃ sakkuṇeyyā dassanena pahātabbā, sekkhesu vattamānā bhāvanaṃ apekkhitvā tāya pahātuṃ sakkuṇeyyā bhāvanāya pahātabbā.
在这些当中,应当通过修习断除的(烦恼)因为缺少助伴,不会产生果报,所以并没有说“应当通过修习断除的思”具有不同刹那的业缘状态。但是,对于缺乏应当被观待的见与修习的凡夫来说,心中生起的对自己财物的欲贪等,以及和掉举俱行的心生起,由于三结和与它们同组的烦恼尚未被断除,助伴没有穷尽,所以不能否认它们能产生果报。因此,《分别论》中说了掉举俱行法的果报。如果是这样,那些缺乏应当被观待的见与修习的不善法,岂不是会变成“既不是见所断也不是修所断”而不可说了吗?不会变成这样。因为《法集论·三法论母》中把不可断的法说为“既不是见所断也不是修所断”,而不善法具有与不可断法相反的性质。巴利
Tesu bhāvanāya pahātabbā sahāyavirahā vipākaṃ na janayantīti bhāvanāya pahātabbacetanāya nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvo na vutto, apekkhitabbadassanabhāvanārahitānaṃ pana puthujjanesu uppajjamānānaṃ sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgādīnaṃ, uddhaccasahagatacittuppādassa ca saṃyojanattayatadekaṭṭhakilesānaṃ anupacchinnatāya aparikkhīṇasahāyānaṃ vipākuppādanaṃ na sakkā paṭisedhitunti uddhaccasahagatadhammānaṃ vipāko vibhaṅge vutto. Yadi evaṃ, apekkhitabbadassanabhāvanārahitānaṃ akusalānaṃ nevadassanena-nabhāvanāyapahātabbatāya navattabbatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, appahātabbānaṃ ‘‘nevadassanena-nabhāvanāya pahātabbā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 9) vuttattā, appahātabbaviruddhasabhāvattā ca akusalānaṃ.
那么,这些法在这个三法分类里是不是也会变成应称为“不可说”呢?不会。因为《心生起品》里讲到的十二种不善心生起,已经被两个词项涵盖进去了。就像在“已生”三法里,虽然从时间角度来说,过去法并不被涵盖,但因为从法的方面一切有为法都已被涵盖,所以并没有因为以心生起和色之性所取而说它们是“不可说”,因为在以心生起和色之性所取者中根本没有“不可说”。同样,在这里,因为以心生起之性所取者中也没有未被涵盖的“不可说”,所以应当知道,并没有说它们具有“不可说性”。因为,如果在某个地方确实存在某种心生起必然是不可说的,那么在那里它们就会有第四种分类,就像在所说的那些词项里一样,在那里也把应分开配入的心生起分开来配入:“可能有不可说、小所缘”等等(《法集论》1422)。由于无此事,所以在“已生”三法里以及在这里都没有那样说。巴利
Evampi te imasmiṃ tike ‘‘navattabbā’’ti vattabbā āpajjantīti? Nāpajjanti, cittuppādakaṇḍe dassitānaṃ dvādasaakusalacittuppādānaṃ dvīhi padehi saṅgahitattā. Yathā hi dhammavasena sabbe saṅkhatadhammā saṅgahitāti uppannattike kālavasena asaṅgahitāpi atītā ‘‘navattabbā’’ti na vuttā cittuppādarūpabhāvena gahitesu navattabbassa abhāvā, evamidhāpi cittuppādabhāvena gahitesu navattabbassa asaṅgahitassa abhāvā navattabbatā navuttāti veditabbā. Yattha hi cittuppādo koci niyogato navattabbo atthi, tattha tesaṃ catuttho koṭṭhāso atthīti yathāvuttapadesu viya tatthāpi bhinditvā bhajāpetabbacittuppāde bhinditvā bhajāpeti ‘‘siyā navattabbā parittārammaṇā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 1422). Tadabhāvā uppannattike, idha ca tathā na vuttā.
或者,就像在色界里,因为三大种与有对法性质相同,所以说它们是有对的。正如经中说:“对于无想有情,依靠一个无见有对的大种,而有二个大种;依靠二个大种,而有一个大种。”同样,凡夫心中生起的、与修习所断性质相同的法,是否也可以称为修习所断呢?这不会导致“不可说”的过失。如果这样成立的话,凡夫心中生起的修习所断法,比如对自己财物的欲贪等,就成为对他人财物的欲贪等的亲依止缘,而贪也是贪和见的增上缘——这个道理就成立了。然而,就像在色界里,因为三大种不可触,所以从胜义上说并非有对;同样,凡夫心中生起的、不具备应被观待的修习的对自己财物的欲贪等,从胜义上说并非修习所断,因此没有说修习所断具有异刹那业缘性。也没有说见所断是修习所断的任何一种缘。因为以见所断为缘的烦恼,在见道之后就不再生起。而对于以见所断为缘的掉举相应法,见道所做的只是让它缺少同伴而已,并没有使其任何状态具有因见道而不再生起的法性,所以说它完全属于修习所断。因此,当有那样的同伴时,说它能产生异熟;没有同伴时,说它不产生异熟,这并不矛盾。巴利
Atha vā yathā sappaṭighehi samānasabhāvattā rūpadhātuyaṃ tayo mahābhūtā sappaṭighāti vuttā. Yathāha ‘‘asaññasattānaṃ anidassanasappaṭighaṃ ekaṃ mahābhūtaṃ paṭicca dve mahābhūtā, dve mahābhūte paṭicca ekaṃ mahābhūta’’nti , evaṃ puthujjanānaṃ pavattamānā bhāvanāya pahātabbasamānasabhāvā bhāvanāya pahātabbāti vucceyyunti? Natthi navattabbatāpasaṅgo. Evañca sati puthujjanānaṃ pavattamānāpi bhāvanāya pahātabbā sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgādayo parabhaṇḍe chandarāgādīnaṃ upanissayapaccayo, rāgo ca rāgadiṭṭhīnaṃ adhipatipaccayoti ayamattho laddho hoti. Yathā pana aphoṭṭhabbattā rūpadhātuyaṃ tayo mahābhūtā na paramatthato sappaṭighā, evaṃ apekkhitabbabhāvanārahitā puthujjanesu vattamānā sakabhaṇḍe chandarāgādayo na paramatthato bhāvanāya pahātabbāti bhāvanāya pahātabbānaṃ nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayatā na vuttā. Na ca dassanenapahātabbā bhāvanāyapahātabbānaṃ kenaci paccayena paccayoti vuttā. Ye hi dassanena pahātabbapaccayā kilesā, na te dassanato uddhaṃ pavattanti. Dassanena pahātabbapaccayassapi pana uddhaccasahagatassa sahāyavekallamattameva dassanena kataṃ, na tassa koci bhāvo dassanena anuppattidhammataṃ āpāditoti tassa ekantabhāvanāyapahātabbatā vuttā. Tasmā tassa tādisasseva sati sahāye vipākuppādanavacanaṃ, asati ca vipākānuppādanavacanaṃ na virujjhatīti.
另一些论师说:这一切都只是那些老师们的个人想法而已。为什么呢?因为与掉举相应的心生起,一向都是要靠修习才能断除的。世尊确实这样说过:“哪些法是靠修习断除的?与掉举相应的心生起。”如果他们认为这个说法成立,那么就像在“过去所缘三法”那一段里,先说了“决定没有未来所缘”,然后再加以分别说明一样,这里也应该先说“决定没有靠修习断除的”,然后再说“与掉举相应的可能是靠修习断除的,也可能不可说”。他们为了证明自己的观点而引用的“如果他们说”等推理,也是不合理的。为什么呢?因为以见所断之法为所缘的贪、见、疑、掉举,它们本身就是见所断的,这正是他们所承认的。他们引用巴利文“与掉举相应的心生起”这句话,又以《增上缘》解说中没有单独列出掉举为理由来证明自己的观点,但这个理由站不住脚,因为在《发趣论》中可以看到还有别的相关文句。比如,在分别“过去法对现在法”“未来法对现在法”以所缘缘为缘时,举出了他心智;而在分别“现在法对现在法”时,虽然也可以找到他心智,却没有把它列出来。巴利
Tayidaṃ sabbaṃ tesaṃ ācariyānaṃ ahopurisikāmattanti apare. Kasmā? Uddhaccasahagatassa ekantena bhāvanāya pahātabbattā. Evañhi vuttaṃ bhagavatā ‘‘katame dhammā bhāvanāya pahātabbā? Uddhaccasahagato cittuppādo’’ti (dha. sa. 1406). Yadi hi taṃ icchitaṃ siyā, yathā atītārammaṇattike ‘‘niyogā anāgatārammaṇā natthī’’ti (dha. sa. 1433) vatvā vibhajja vuttaṃ, evamidhāpi ‘‘niyogā bhāvanāya pahātabbā natthī’’ti vatvā ‘‘uddhaccasahagato siyā bhāvanāya pahātabbo, siyā na vattabbo’’ti vadeyya. Yā ca taṃ samatthentena ‘‘yadi vucceyyu’’ntiādinā yutti vuttā, sāpi ayutti. Kasmā? Yasmā dassanena pahātabbārammaṇānaṃ rāgadiṭṭhivicikicchāuddhaccānaṃ dassanena pahātabbabhāvo eva icchitoti. Yaṃ pana uddhaccaggahaṇena pāḷiyaṃ uddhaccasahagato cittuppādo vuttoti vatvā taṃ sādhetuṃ adhipatipaccayaniddese uddhaccassa anuddharaṇaṃ nibandhanaṃ vuttaṃ, tampi anibandhanaṃ paṭṭhāne sāvasesapāṭhadassanato. Tathā hi ‘‘atīto dhammo paccuppannassa dhammassa, anāgato dhammo paccuppannassa dhammassa ārammaṇapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 2.18.2) etesaṃ vibhaṅge cetopariyañāṇaggahaṇaṃ katvā ‘‘paccuppanno dhammo paccuppannassa dhammassā’’ti etassa vibhaṅge labbhamānampi na uddhaṭaṃ.
对于应当通过修行断除的法给予异熟果报这件事,应当审察见所断的法成为修所断法的助伴这一机制。究竟是像无明等那样,仅仅因为布施、持戒等的生起,就依其本身具有给予异熟的能力,从而使见所断的法成为修所断法的助伴呢?还是像烦恼那样,对于业的结生给予助力呢?这里应当这样理解:如果是第一种立场,那么由于见所断已被断除,在有学圣者的心相续中现起的修所断法就变成了唯作,就像在已断除无明、渴爱、慢的心相续中现起的布施等一样。如果是第二种立场,那么它也就成了见所断,因为它还没有超越堕入恶趣的本性。因此,应当依照前面所审察的方式,在不违背巴利文和注释书的前提下,了知这里关于与掉举相应者给予异熟的意义抉择。巴利
Bhāvanāya pahātabbassa vipākadānaṃ pati dassanena pahātabbassa sahāyabhāvūpagamanaṃ vicāretabbaṃ. Kiṃ avijjādi viya dānasīlādīnaṃ uppattiyāyeva vipākadānasāmatthiyā ṭhānavasena dassanenapahātabbaṃ bhāvanāyapahātabbassa sahāyabhāvaṃ upagacchati, udāhu kilesā viya kammassa paṭisandhidānaṃ patīti? Kiñcettha – yadi tāva purimo pakkho pahīnadassanappahātabbattā sekkhasantāne pavattino bhāvanāpahātabbassa kiriyabhāvo āpajjati pahīnāvijjātaṇhāmāne santāne pavattadānādi viya. Atha dutiyo, tassāpi dassanenapahātabbatā āpajjati apāyagamanīyasabhāvānativattanato, tasmā heṭṭhā vicāritanayeneva uddhaccasahagatassa vipākadānaṃ pati pāḷiyā, aṭṭhakathāya ca avirujjhanavasenettha atthavinicchayo veditabbo.
这“掉举思”也包括在内。“对于识的缘性”是指对于完整的异熟识的缘性。如果它应当被排除,那为什么又说“二十种思”呢?为了说明其中的理由,他说“然而,以无明为缘,所有这些都成为”。这也是在说明神通思也具有缘性。如果这样的话,就应该和神通思一起说成二十一种?不是的,因为不这样说的理由已经说过了。而那一点也正是对另一种思不加以说明的理由——对于同类中的一种思不加说明,是考虑到某个理由而略去不说;由此表明,即使说了,也(表明它)不应说。这个三法就是身行等三法。前一个三法就是福行等三法。“进入”:怎样进入呢?福行分为八种欲界思:对于远离身恶行的人,可以是身行;对于远离语恶行的人,可以是语行;而在意门中生起的十三种思,既是福行,也是心行。非福行:以身恶行的方式发生时,可以是身行;以语恶行的方式发生时,可以是语行;离开这两个门而只在意门发生时,可以是心行。不动行也是这样。如此,第二个三法就进入前一个三法之中。因此说:“从义理上说,应当知道无明的缘性就是依福行等本身而说的。”巴利
Sāpīti uddhaccacetanāpi. Viññāṇassa paccayabhāveti sampuṇṇassa vipākaviññāṇassa paccayabhāve. Yadi apanetabbā, kasmā ‘‘samavīsati cetanā’’ti vuttanti tassa kāraṇaṃ dassento āha ‘‘avijjāpaccayā pana sabbāpetā hontī’’ti. Abhiññācetanāyapi paccayabhāvaṃ dasseti. Yadi evaṃ abhiññācetanāya saha ekavīsatīti vattabbaṃ, na, tathā avacanassa vuttakāraṇattā. Taṃ pana itarāvacanassāpi kāraṇanti samānarūpāya ekissā avacane yaṃ kāraṇaṃ apekkhitvā ekā na vuttā, tena kāraṇena vuttāyapi avattabbataṃ dasseti. Ayaṃ tikoti kāyasaṅkhārattiko. Purimattikanti puññābhisaṅkhārattikaṃ. Pavisatīti kathaṃ pavisati. Puññābhisaṅkhāro hi aṭṭhakāmāvacaracetanāpabhedo kāyaduccaritato viramantassa siyā kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīduccaritato viramantassa siyā vacīsaṅkhāro, manodvāre pana uppannā terasapi cetanā puññābhisaṅkhāro ca hoti cittasaṅkhāro ca. Apuññābhisaṅkhāropi kāyaduccaritavasena pavattiyaṃ siyā kāyasaṅkhāro, vacīduccaritavasena pavattiyaṃ siyā vacīsaṅkhāro, dve dvārāni muñcitvā manodvāre pavattiyaṃ siyā cittasaṅkhāro, āneñjābhisaṅkhāro cāti evaṃ dutiyattiko purimattikameva pavisati. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘atthato puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃyeva vasena avijjāya paccayabhāvo veditabbo’’ti.
593 “无明存在故行存在”,意思是:因为无明存在,所以诸行存在。确实,如果没有无明,诸行任何时候都不会生起。现在为了显示无明的这种存在,他说“无知未断”。以此表明,这里“无明存在”是指它尚未被道所灭尽,而不是说它仅仅还在持续存在。这个含义在前面已经说明过了。而“称为无明”这句话,则排除了智之非有等含义。因为这里的“a-”前缀,在“无因法”“无比丘住处”等说法中,可以看到是用来否定与彼事的关联。这里显示的是“无”:“无因法”等中,否定的是与因的关联。因为缘所生法是与缘相关联的,所以“无缘所生”即否定其与缘的关联,在这里被显示出来。“无见法”是否定其自性;因为“见”即是可被看见性。然而眼识不见可见者,因此是否定其可执取性。同样,“无漏法”也是如此。“无碍法、无境法”是否定其作用。“无色法、非心所法”是否定其存在;因为在这里显示的是与此不同的情况。“非人”是否定其仅为人;人性不存在,而显示的是其他同类者,这里暗示的是相似性。“非沙门而自称沙门、非子”同样是否定其可尊敬的功德;因为这里显示的是呵责。“尊者无病否、无腹之女”是否定其不丰盈。“未生法”是否定其同类存在;因为过去法已曾生起,生起法由缘的一部分所生起而具有已开始生起的性质,而离时者存在故与已生法相随顺,更何况现在法,因此这里了知的是与彼相违的状态。“无学法”是否定其未终结;因为这里显示的是彼之终结。然而,由于这些含义不可能存在,通过排除法,如同与善法相敌对的法是不善法,同样,与明相敌对的是无明,因此应知与智相敌对的法是无知。巴利
593.Avijjābhāvebhāvatoti avijjāya atthibhāve saṅkhārānaṃ bhāvato. Na hi avijjāya asati kadāci saṅkhārā sambhavanti. Idāni taṃ avijjāya bhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘aññāṇaṃ appahīnaṃ hotī’’ti āha. Tena maggena anirodho idha avijjāya atthibhāvo, na dharamānatā evāti dasseti. Svāyamattho heṭṭhā vibhāvitoyeva. ‘‘Avijjāsaṅkhāta’’nti ca iminā ñāṇābhāvādiṃ nivatteti. Ayañhi a-kāro ‘‘ahetukā dhammā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 2) abhikkhuko āvāso’’tiādīsu (cūḷava. 76) taṃyoganivattiyaṃ dissati. Abhāvo hettha dīpito. ‘‘Appaccayā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 7) taṃsambandhitānivattiyaṃ. Paccayuppannañhi paccayasambandhīti appaccayuppannattāti taṃsambandhitā ettha jotīyati. ‘‘Anidassanā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 9) taṃsabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Nidassanañhi daṭṭhabbatā. Atha cakkhuviññāṇaṃ nidassanaṃ na passatīti taggahetabbatānivattiyaṃ. Tathā ‘‘anāsavā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 15). ‘‘Appaṭighā dhammā (dha. sa. dukamātikā 10), anārammaṇā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 55) taṃkiccanivattiyaṃ. ‘‘Arūpino dhammā (dha. sa. tikamātikā 11), acetasikā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. dukamātikā 57) tabbhāvanivattiyaṃ. Tadaññathā hi ettha pakāsīyati. ‘‘Amanusso’’ti (dī. ni. 2.321) tabbhāvamattanivattiyaṃ. Manussattamattaṃ natthi, aññaṃ samānanti sadisatā hettha sūcīyati. ‘‘Assamaṇo samaṇapaṭiñño (a. ni. 3.13, 27; pu. pa. 91, 124), aputto’’ti tathā sambhāvanīyaguṇanivattiyaṃ. Garahā hi ettha ñāyati. ‘‘Kacci bhoto anāmayaṃ (jā. 1.15.146; 2.20.129), anudarā kaññā’’ti tadanappabhāvanivattiyaṃ. ‘‘Anuppannā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 17) taṃsadisabhāvanivattiyaṃ. Atītānañhi uppannapubbattā, uppādidhammānañca paccayekadesanibbattiyā āraddhuppādabhāvā, kālavinimuttassa ca vijjamānattā uppannānukūlatā, pageva paccuppannānanti tabbidhurabhāvo ettha viññāyati. ‘‘Asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 11) tadapariyosānanivattiyaṃ. Tanniṭṭhānañhettha pakāsīyati. Imesaṃ pana atthānaṃ asambhavato pārisesena yathā kusalapaṭipakkhā dhammā akusalā, evaṃ vijjāpaṭipakkhā avijjāti katvā ñāṇapaṭipakkho dhammo aññāṇanti veditabbaṃ.
愚人执取“轮回是乐”的想法,把轮回当成快乐的观念牢牢抓住。可是在智者看来,轮回本身就是苦,是苦苦、变易苦、行苦,只应当被认定为苦。这里就是通过这种执取乐想,来显示渴爱在轮回中是怎样活动的。“开始”就是产生、生起的意思。“以渴爱为装饰”是说,渴爱用“乐”“美”等想法把有为法装点起来、打扮起来,这就是“装饰”的意思。愚人不知道渴爱正是苦的起因,于是心怀恐惧,这样祈愿:“愿我身体坏灭、死后,能投生到刹帝利大富者一类人当中。”他就是用这种方式来装点身行。或者也可以把“以渴爱为装饰”理解为“成为渴爱的随从”:诸行把渴爱所依靠的眼等、色等造作出来,再交给具足这些条件的人,把它们奉献给渴爱,就好像是渴爱的随从一样。所谓“种种趣”,比如梵天界等。用成百上千头牲畜绑缚起来、令人恐惧的婆阇佩耶祭等祭祀,就是这一类。“为不死而行的苦行”,是指为了求得不死而采取的难行苦行;或者是指心里想着“愿我成为不死者,或成为天神,或成为某类天神”而奉行的誓愿之行;也可以理解为:因苦性而死为杀者,故致死之苦行称不死苦行。就像在“见”这个词上要理解“未见”一样,在“死”这个词上也要这样理解“不死”。巴利
Sukhasaññāyagahetvā dukkhadukkhavipariṇāmadukkhasaṅkhāradukkhatāhi viññūhi dukkhantveva gahetabbaṃ saṃsāradukkhaṃ sukhanti saññāya abhinivisitvā, etena tattha taṇhāpavattiṃ dasseti. Ārabhatīti nibbatteti. Taṇhāparikkhāreti taṇhāya ‘‘sukhaṃ subha’’ntiādinā saṅkhate parikkhate, alaṅkateti attho. Taṇhā hi dukkhassa samudayoti ajānanto bālo ‘‘aho vatāhaṃ kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā khattiyamahāsālānaṃ sahabyataṃ upapajjeyya’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.442) paritassanto kāyasaṅkhāre parikkharoti. Taṇhāparikkhāreti vā taṇhāya parivārabhūte. Taṇhāvatthuṃ hi cakkhādiṃ, rūpādiñca abhisaṅkharitvā taṃsamaṅgīnaṃ dentā saṅkharā taṇhāya upanentā tassā parivārā viya hontīti. Gativisese brahmalokādike. Anekasatapasubaddhabhiṃsano vājapeyyādiko yañño. Amaraṇatthāti gahitā dukkarakiriyā amaratapo. Amaro vā devo vā bhaveyyaṃ, devaññataro vāti pavattitā vatacariyā amaratapo. Dukkhattā vā maro mārako tapo amaratapo. Diṭṭhe adiṭṭhasaddo viya mare amarasaddo daṭṭhabbo.
福行被说成和堕崖相似,因为它能产生从生等开始的各种堕落之苦。用“产生大热恼”这句话,是从燃烧的意义上显示福果和草火炬相似。接着“少味”这个“ca”字,还包含了剥皮、贯穿、肢解、折断等等。所谓“以彼为缘”,就是成为那种具有变易苦性质的善趣果报的缘。福果以可意和味著的方式被执取,就像灯焰和涂了蜜的刀刃。而以彼(福果)为目的的福行,被说成和扑向它、舔舐它相似。就像“触到这年轻、柔软、毛发细软的女遍行者的手臂是快乐的”等等所说的那样,因为以乐想而不观察不净的本质,某些欲乐享受就像愚童玩粪;因为被烦恼制伏,就像被忿怒等制伏、不能自主而想死的人服毒一样,在现在造作的刹那和未来受果的刹那都是可厌的、是苦的,就这样发起非福行。或者,与贪俱行的应配合为像玩粪一样,与嗔俱行的应配合为像服毒一样。又像虽然有可怕的鬼城,却因为欲乐圆满而成为乐颠倒的原因一样,无色界的果报因为无间断、因为生灭不被觉察而相续长久、因为变易不被执取,虽然本质是行变易苦,却成为常等颠倒的原因,所以应说它们和鬼城相似,而趋向它们则和不动行相似。巴利
Jātiādipapātadukkhajananato maruppapātasadisatā puññābhisaṅkhārassa vuttā. ‘‘Mahāpariḷāhajanika’’nti iminā anudahanaṭṭhena tiṇukkāsadisataṃ puññaphalassa dasseti. Appassādatañcāti ca-saddena adhikuṭṭanavinivijjhanaaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tappaccayanti tassa vipariṇāmadukkhasabhāvassa sugatiphalassa paccayabhūtaṃ. Ramaṇīyabhāvena ca assādabhāvena ca gayhamānaṃ puññaphalaṃ dīpasikhāmadhulittasatthadhārāsadisaṃ. Tadattho ca puññābhisaṅkhāro taṃnipātalehanasadiso vutto. ‘‘Sukho imissā paribbājikāya taruṇāya mudukāya lomasāya bāhāya samphasso’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.469) sukhasaññāya asubhabhāvassa asallakkhaṇeneva ekaccakāmaparibhogoti bālo viya gūthakīḷanaṃ, kilesābhibhūtatāya kodhāratiabhibhūto asavaso maritukāmo viya visakhādanaṃ sampati kiriyākhaṇe, āyatiṃ phalakkhaṇe ca jigucchanīyaṃ, dukkhañca apuññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ārabhati. Lobhasahagatassa vā gūthakīḷanasadisatā, dosasahagatassa visakhādanasadisatā yojetabbā. Sabhayassāpi pisācanagarassa kāmaguṇasamiddhiyā sukhavipallāsahetubhāvo viya āruppavipākānaṃ nirantaratāya, anupalakkhiyamānauppādavayānaṃ dīghasantānatāya agayhamānavipariṇāmānaṃ saṅkhāravipariṇāmadukkhabhūtānampi niccādivipallāsahetubhāvoti, tesaṃ pisācanagarasadisatā, tadabhimukhagamanasadisatā ca āneñjābhisaṅkhārassa yojetabbā.
正因为无明存在,诸行才存在;无明不存在,诸行就不存在。为了用经文来证明前面已经按顺向和逆向简要讲过的道理——也就是“诸行以无明为缘”,于是引出了“此亦已说”等经文。其中,“avidvā”就是无知的人。“avijjāgato”就是具有无明的人,意思是还没有断除无明的人。巴利
Avijjābhāvatova saṅkhārabhāvo, na abhāvatoti saṅkhārānaṃ avijjāpaccayabhāve saṅkhepena anvayato, byatirekato ca vuttamatthaṃ suttena samatthetuṃ ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādinā suttapadaṃ ābhataṃ . Tattha avidvāti aviddasu. Avijjāgatoti avijjāya samannāgato, appahīnāvijjoti adhippāyo.
发趣缘论的注释巴利
Paṭṭhānapaccayakathāvaṇṇanā
594 “Tāva”是一个期待下文的小品词,它表明“无明是诸行的缘”这一句暂时已经成立,但还有另一层内容需要说明。为了阐明“还有需要说明的内容”所指向的义理——所谓缘法,就是某些法的缘,以及以何种方式成为缘,由于这两方面都有多种情形,缘也就有多种形态——于是针对无明也可能如此,便问“对哪些行,以何种方式成为缘”,由此引出了福行等多种行。无明是这些行的缘,但并非对一切行都以同一种方式成为缘,因此应当说明“对这些行,是以这样的方式成为缘”,这就是其含义。“Tatra”是指在那种缘的状态中。虽然以“对哪些行”等语是从不共的角度发问,但这只是举一例而总摄全体,因此应当理解为:十二缘起支各自对其所生之法成为缘的状态。为了显示这一点,或者在被问及无明的缘的状态时,想借此机会一并解答一切缘法成为缘的状态,便以“因为世尊……”开头,首先依照经文的理路来显示缘。在这里,关联是:世尊宣说了二十四缘。其要旨是:应当依据这二十四缘来理解无明等成为缘的状态。巴利
594.Tāvāti vattabbantarāpekkho nipāto, tena ‘‘avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ paccayo’’ti idaṃ tāva siddhaṃ, idaṃ pana aparaṃ vattabbanti dasseti. ‘‘Idaṃ pana vattabba’’nti yamatthaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, taṃ dassetuṃ paccayadhammā nāma yesaṃ paccayā honti, yathā vā paccayā honti, tadubhayesaṃ bahubhāvato anekadhāva paccayā hontīti avijjāyapi taṃ āsaṅkanto pucchi ‘‘katamesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ kathaṃ paccayo hotī’’ti, puññābhisaṅkhārādayo bahū saṅkhārā vuttā. Avijjā ca tesaṃ paccayo hoti, na sabbesaṃ ekadhāva hoti, tasmā imesaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ evaṃ paccayo hotīti idaṃ vattabbanti attho. Tatrāti tasmiṃ paccayabhāve. Yadipi ‘‘katamesaṃ saṅkhārāna’’ntiādinā asādhāraṇato pucchā āraddhā, ekadesena pana samudāyopalakkhaṇametanti dvādasannaṃ paṭiccasamuppādaṅgānaṃ yathāsakaṃ paccayuppannānaṃ paccayabhāvo vattabboti taṃ dassetuṃ, avijjāya vā paccayabhāve pucchite tappasaṅgena sabbesampi paccayadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvaṃ visajjetukāmo paccaye tāva pāḷinayeneva dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavatā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha ca bhagavatā catuvīsati paccayā vuttāti sambandho. Tesaṃ vasena avijjādīnaṃ paccayabhāvo veditabboti adhippāyo.
如果有人说“它既是因,又是缘”,这样说可能会让人把“因”和作为增上缘等的缘都抓取进来。为了阻止这种理解,所以接着说“作为因而成为缘”。但这样一来,同样的毛病还是会出现,于是又说“这是说以因的状态而为缘”。由此表明:这里并不是用“因”这个词来抓取某个法,而是抓取了法的一种特定能力。因为正是就它与“缘”这个词指向同一对象这一点,才说“它既是因也是缘”以及“作为因而成为缘”。这样说了之后,在后面的经文里,就以“因、因缘……以因缘为缘”等方式,说明每一个法都是以那种因的状态等资助方式,对相应的法起资助作用。而在《阿毗达摩义注》中,则通过“凡一个法不舍弃另一个法而安住或生起,它就是那个法的缘”,以及“以根本义而资助的法是因缘”等对法集的解说,可以看出:并没有离开法之外的另一套所谓“法的能力”,而是就着法本身来阐明法的能力。在这里也是一样,用“它既是因也是缘”来显示:正是就着法本身来显示法的能力。因为“因缘”这类标题,并不像“善”等标题那样以法为主体,而是以诸法的资助状态为主体。巴利
‘‘Hetu ca so paccayo cā’’ti iminā vacanena hetuno, adhipatipaccayādibhūtassa ca gahaṇaṃ siyāti taṃ nivārento āha ‘‘hetu hutvā paccayo’’ti. Evampi so eva doso āpajjatīti puna āha ‘‘hetubhāvena paccayoti vuttaṃ hotī’’ti. Tena na idha hetusaddena dhammaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ, atha kho dhammassa sattiviseso gahitoti dasseti. Tassa hi paccayasaddassa ca samānādhikaraṇataṃ sandhāya ‘‘hetu ca so paccayo ca, hetu hutvā paccayo’’ti ca vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā parato pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘hetū hetu…pe… hetupaccayena paccayo’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.1) tena tena hetubhāvādiupakārena tassa tassa dhammassa upakārakattaṃ vuttaṃ. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘yo hi dhammo yaṃ dhammaṃ appaccakkhāya tiṭṭhati vā uppajjati vā, so tassa paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā), ‘‘mūlaṭṭhena upakārako dhammo hetupaccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā) ca evamādinā dhammapaṭṭhānaniddesena dhammato aññā dhammasatti nāma natthīti dhammeheva dhammasattivibhāvanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Idhāpi vā ‘‘hetu ca so paccayo cā’’ti dhammeneva dhammasattiṃ dasseti. Na hi ‘‘hetupaccayo’’tiādiko uddeso kusalādiuddeso viya dhammappadhāno, atha kho dhammānaṃ upakārakabhāvappadhānoti.
用“同样的方法”这句话,是把“以那种状态作为缘”这个道理类推到所缘等缘上:它既是所缘,又是缘,所以叫所缘缘;作为所缘而成为缘;以所缘的状态成为缘,这就是它的含义。并不是仅仅把它当作持业释来看待。巴利
‘‘Eseva nayo’’ti iminā tabbhāvena paccayabhāvaṃ ārammaṇādīsu atidisati ‘‘ārammaṇañca taṃ paccayo cāti ārammaṇapaccayo, ārammaṇaṃ hutvā paccayo, ārammaṇabhāvena paccayoti attho’’ti, na kammadhārayamattaṃ.
595 “语句的组成部分”是指成立式的组成部分。因为成立以语句为本质,能让别人知道他们原本不知道的意思,所以在世间被普遍认为是“成立”。正如研究论证道理的人所说:具备组成部分这一特征、以语句为本质的,就是成立;而主张、理由等语句,则是成立的组成部分。在“主张、理由”等当中,指的是主张、理由、实例、应用、结论。与实例同法、能成立所立之义的,就是理由。在“异类的理由”等说法中,理由是指任何具有原因特征的东西,或者具有能使人理解的特征的东西。通过“等”这个字,也应该把后者包括进来。而能使人理解的特征,则已经被“语句的组成部分”这一说法涵盖进去了。虽然“根本”本身也确实具有原因的特征,就是原因,但这里所说的“原因”指的是缘因。“根本”是因中的因,因为根本是原因中的一种特殊情形,所以另外单独提出来。“Etīti”是对这个词的含义的说明,意思是“进行”,这是生起和住立共同适用的说法。因此说“住立或生起”。因为有些缘只帮助住立,比如后生缘;有些只帮助生起,比如无间缘等;有些则对两者都帮助,比如因缘等。巴利
595.Vacanāvayavoti sādhanāvayavaṃ sandhāyāha. Vacanasabhāvañhi sādhanaṃ paresaṃ aviditatthañāpanato loke sādhananti pākaṭaṃ paññātaṃ. Tathā hi naṃ avayavalakkhaṇaṃ, vacanasabhāvañca sādhanaṃ, avayavapakkhādīni vacanāni sādhananti ca ñāyavādino vadanti. Paṭiññā, hetūtiādīsūti paṭiññā, hetu, udāharaṇa, upanaya, nigamanāni. Udāharaṇasādhammiyā sādhyasādhanaṃ hetu. Virūpo hetūti ca evamādīsu kāraṇaṃ yaṃ kiñci kāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ, sampāpakalakkhaṇampi vā. Ādi-saddena tassāpi saṅgahetabbatāya, ñāpakalakkhaṇaṃ pana vacanāvayavaggahaṇena gahitaṃ. Kāmaṃ mūlampi kāraṇalakkhaṇaṃ kāraṇameva, kāraṇanti panettha paccayahetu gahito. Mūlanti hetuhetūti kāraṇavisesavisayattā mūlassa visuṃ gahaṇaṃ. Etīti etassa atthavacanaṃ vattatīti, tañca uppattiṭṭhitīnaṃ sādhāraṇavacanaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘tiṭṭhati vā uppajjati vā’’ti. Ekacco hi paccayo ṭhitiyā eva upakārako hoti yathā pacchājātapaccayo, ekacco uppattiyā eva yathā anantarādiko, ekacco ubhayassa yathā hetuādayo.
“以资助为特征”这句话,应当理解为:以法来显示法的资助能力。所谓“Hinoti patiṭṭhāti etthāti hetu”,意思是“它使人趋向、又在此安住,所以叫因”。由于词根有多种含义,“hi”这个词根应当像“mūla”(根本)一词那样,理解为有“安住”的意思。或者也可以这样理解:就像树木依靠作为其业之根源、向上输送养分的根,而得以达成、运转、增长、繁茂它的果实一样,依此作为行为之因,向上输送养分,使果得以达成——所以叫“hetu”(因)。能造作自己的果,所以叫“kāraṇa”(原因)。像展示一样给予,所以叫“nidāna”(因由)。诸法从它而生起,所以叫“sambhava”(生起之源)。诸法从它而发出,所以叫“pabhava”(发出之源)。应当知道,其余的词与“缘”“因”等词也是同义的。即便如此,“因”这个词是就原因的特定种类而言,“缘”这个词是就原因的一般范围而言——为了说明这一点,所以说“以根本义……”等。因的含义和缘的含义,前面已经详细广说了,现在为了简略显示,所以说“简言之……因缘”。巴利
Upakārakalakkhaṇoti ca dhammena dhammasattiṃ upakāraṃ dassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Hinoti patiṭṭhāti etthāti hetu, anekatthattā dhātusaddānaṃ hi-saddo mūlasaddo viya patiṭṭhattho veditabbo. Hinoti vā etena kammanidānabhūtena uddhaṃ ojaṃ atiharantena mūlena viya pādapo tappaccayaṃ phalaṃ gacchati pavattati vuddhiṃ viruḷhiṃ āpajjatīti hetu. Attano phalaṃ karotīti kāraṇaṃ. Nidadāti dassentaṃ viya hotīti nidānaṃ. Sambhavati taṃ etasmāti sambhavo. Pabhavati etasmāti pabhavoti paccayahetusaddehi itaresampi samānatthatā veditabbā. Evaṃ santepi kāraṇavisesavisayo hetusaddo, kāraṇasāmaññavisayo paccayasaddoti dassento ‘‘mūlaṭṭhenā’’tiādimāha. Hetuattho, paccayaṭṭho ca heṭṭhā papañcavasena vuttoti taṃ saṅkhippaṃ dassento āha ‘‘saṅkhepato…pe… hetupaccayo’’ti.
就像稻种、谷种等,是让各自的作物成就为稻、谷等的成因;宝石等发光体,本身具有青等颜色,是成就青等光色的成因。同样,因缘也是随其所应,让与它相应的诸法成就为善等性质的成因。为了说明这个道理,论师说了“那稻等……”等话。而“诸阿阇梨”是指雷瓦达阿阇梨。“若如此”的意思是:如果因缘是善等状态的成就因,那么在这种情况下,它就不成立、不成就。正如善因和不善因不足以让它们所生起的色成为善或不善,同样,无记因也不足以让它们所生起的色成为无记。因为那些色法依其自性本身就是无记,所以说“它并不成就那些法的善等状态”。然而,因缘确实是那些法的缘,所以说“并非不是缘”。现在,为了用圣典来证明这个道理,说了“因为圣典中说……”等话。“离此”的意思是:离开这个能成就无记状态的因——也就是没有因——无记状态依其自性就已经成立;这就是论师想要表达的意图。巴利
Yathā sālivīhibījādīni taṃtaṃosadhīnaṃ sālivīhiādibhāvassa sādhakāni, maṇiādippabhāvatthūni ca nīlādivaṇṇāni nīlādippabhāsādhakāni, evaṃ hetupaccayo yathārahaṃ attanā sampayuttadhammānaṃ kusalādibhāvassa sādhakoti imamatthaṃ dasseti ‘‘so sāliādīna’’ntiādinā. Ācariyānanti ca revatācariyaṃ sandhāyāha. Evaṃ santeti hetupaccayo yadi kusalādibhāvasādhako, evaṃ sati. Na sampajjati na sijjhati. Yathā kusalākusalahetu taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa kusalākusalabhāvāya na pariyatto, evaṃ abyākatopi hetu taṃsamuṭṭhānarūpassa abyākatabhāvāya. Sabhāveneva hi taṃ abyākatanti āha ‘‘na hi so tesaṃ kusalādibhāvaṃ sādhetī’’ti. Hetupaccayo ca tesaṃ hotiyevāti āha ‘‘na ca paccayo na hotī’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ pāḷiyā samatthetuṃ ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Vinā etenāti etena hetunā abyākatabhāvasādhakena vinā ahetukattā, abyākatabhāvo siddho sabhāvenevāti adhippāyo.
比丘们,对于如理作意的人来说,尚未生起的善法会生起,已经生起的善法会增长广大。从这类经文(《增支部》1.67)可以证明:善的状态是系属于如理作意的。因此论主说“善的状态系属于如理作意”。也正是通过这一点,显示出了不善性和无记性也像善性一样并不系属于因。然而有些人可能会这样想:“就像无因之因的不善性一样,有因之因的善性等也是依自性而有的;而其余那些与因相应的法,它们的善性等则是系属于因的。”为了回应这种想法,论主说了“如果……”等话。无贪可以是善的,也可以是无记的。如果无贪依自性就是善的,那么由于它是善的自性,它就不应该是无记的;如果它是无记的,那么由于它是无记的自性,它就不应该是善的,就像无贪的自性不会变成无嗔一样。然而,因为无贪在两种情况下都可以存在,所以,正如当信等相应法在两种情况下都存在时,应当去寻找它们的善性等是系属于因的,而不是依自性而有的;同样,在诸因当中,善性等也应当被理解为系属于其他法,而不是依自性而有的。因此,所谓“在相应的诸因中,善性等是依自性而有的”这种说法是不成立的。而那种被寻求的善性等,实际上是系属于如理作意等的。因此,正如在诸因中一样,在相应法中,善性等也是系属于如理作意等的,而不是系属于因的——这就是论主的意图。巴利
‘‘Yoniso, bhikkhave, manasi karoto anuppannā ceva kusalā dhammā uppajjanti, uppannā ca kusalā dhammā abhivaḍḍhantī’’tiādi (a. ni. 1.67) vacanehi kusalabhāvassa yonisomanasikārappaṭibaddhatā siddhāti āha ‘‘yonisomanasikārappaṭibaddho kusalabhāvo’’ti. Eteneva akusalaabyākatabhāvāpi kusalabhāvo viya na hetupaṭibaddhāti dassitaṃ hoti. Yaṃ paneke maññeyyuṃ ‘‘ahetukahetussa akusalabhāvo viya sahetukahetūnampi sabhāvatova kusalādibhāvo, aññesaṃ taṃsampayuttānaṃ hetupaṭibaddho’’ti, tassa uttaraṃ vattuṃ ‘‘yadi cā’’tiādimāha. Alobho kusalo vā siyā abyākato vāti yadi alobho sabhāvato kusalo, so kusalasabhāvattā abyākato na siyā. Atha abyākato taṃsabhāvattā kusalo na siyā alobhasabhāvassa adosattābhāvo viya. Yasmā pana ubhayathāpi hoti, tasmā yathā ubhayathā hontesu saddhādīsu sampayuttesu hetupaṭibaddhaṃ kusalādibhāvaṃ pariyesetha, na sabhāvato, evaṃ hetūsupi kusalāditā aññapaṭibaddhā pariyesitabbā, na sabhāvatoti yaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘sampayuttahetūsu sabhāvatova kusalādibhāvo’’ti, taṃ na yujjati. Sā pana pariyesiyamānā yonisomanasikārādipaṭibaddhā hotīti hetūsu viya sampayuttesupi yonisomanasikārādipaṭibaddho kusalādibhāvo, na hetupaṭibaddhoti siddhaṃ hotīti adhippāyo.
像“根扎得深”这样的话,是用“根”来显示“像根一样”的意思。因此才说“以成就善安立的状态”。这个(因)在问分中已经被列为七种:善法对善法、善法对无记法、善法对善与无记法、不善法对不善法、不善法对无记法、不善法对不善与无记法、无记法对无记法。然而,在显示因的作用时说“诸因对与因相应的诸法,以及对由它们所生的诸色,以因缘为缘”,这里第一个“因”字是单独指出的缘法说明,通过它显示了:以因的身份来帮助,就是因缘性。第二个(因字)是对缘所生法的限定,通过它显示:并不是任何相应法的诸因都以因缘为缘,而只是与因相应的(法)才如此。难道不是因为“相应”一词有所观待,所以在第二个“因”字不存在时,由于没有指出其他应被观待的对象,就能知道“诸因自身以因缘为缘于与它们相应者”这个意思吗?这并非绝对。因为“因”字单独指出时,只用在“以因缘为缘”这一处;当它被这样理解时,那时它并不是“相应”的限定语,于是就会变成:任何与相应有关的法都被包括进去了。难道不是像说“无色食对相应诸法、无色根对相应诸法”时,即使没有第二个“食”字、“根”字,也只会被理解为与食、根相应者吗?这里也应如此吗?不对,因为食、根并没有需要排除的相应法。正因为没有需要排除的对象,那里即使没有第二个“食”“根”字,也只会被理解为与它们相应者,所以没有那样做;而这里却有需要排除的对象,因此必须加上第二个“因”字。即便如此,“诸因对与因相应者”这句话中,由于没有把“与因相应者”限定为“就是那相应的因”,岂不是会变成:任何因都对任何与因相应的法以因缘为缘?并不会这样,因为那个单独指出的“因”字,又被说成是相应的限定语。正是为了这个目的,即使没有第二个“因”字,与因相应的状态已经成立,仍然采用了它。巴利
Viruḷhamūlā viyāti etena mūlāni viya mūlānīti dasseti. Tenevāha ‘‘suppatiṭṭhitabhāvasādhanenā’’ti. Svāyaṃ ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, kusalo dhammo abyākatassa, kusalo dhammo kusalābyākatassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa, akusalo dhammo abyākatassa, akusalo dhammo akusalābyākatassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassā’’ti evaṃ sattadhā pañhāvāre niddiṭṭho. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ hetukiccaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetū hetusampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ, taṃsamuṭṭhānānañca rūpānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.1), tattha paṭhamo hetusaddo paccattaniddiṭṭho paccayadhammaniddeso, tenassa hetubhāvena upakārakatā hetupaccayatāti dasseti. Dutiyo paccayuppannavisesanaṃ, tena na yesaṃ kesañci sampayuttakānaṃ hetū hetupaccayena paccayo, atha kho hetunā sampayuttānamevāti dasseti. Nanu ca sampayuttasaddassa sāpekkhattā dutiye hetusadde avijjamānepi aññassa apekkhitabbassa aniddiṭṭhattā hetū attanāva sampayuttakānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayoti ayamattho viññāyatīti? Nāyamekanto. Hetusaddo hi paccattaniddiṭṭho ‘‘hetupaccayena paccayo’’ti ettheva byāvaṭo yadā gayhati, na tadā sampayuttavisesanaṃ hotīti sampayuttaavisiṭṭhā ye keci gahitā bhaveyyunti. Nanu ca yathā ‘‘arūpino āhārā sampayuttakānaṃ dhammānaṃ, arūpino indriyā sampayuttakānaṃ dhammāna’’nti ca vutte dutiyena āhāraggahaṇena, indriyaggahaṇena ca vināpi āhārindriyasampayuttakāva gayhanti, evamidhāpi siyāti? Na, āhārindriyāsampayuttassa vajjetabbassa abhāvato. Vajjetabbābhāvato hi tattha dutiye āhārindriyaggahaṇe asatipi taṃsampayuttakāva gayhantīti taṃ na kataṃ, idha pana vajjetabbaṃ atthīti kattabbaṃ dutiyaṃ hetuggahaṇaṃ. Evampi ‘‘hetū hetusampayuttakāna’’nti ettha hetusampayuttakānaṃ so eva sampayuttakahetūti visesanassa akatattā yo koci hetu yassa kassaci hetusampayuttassa hetupaccayena paccayoti āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati, paccattaniddiṭṭhasseva hetuno puna sampayuttavisesanabhāvena vuttattā. Etadatthameva hi vināpi dutiyena hetusaddena hetusampayuttabhāve siddhepi tassa gahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
或者,如果没有第二个“因”这个词,就可能这样理解:对于与因相应的事物,它们以因缘作为缘,而不是诸因本身以因缘作为缘。为了阻止这种理解,才说了那个词。这样一来就表明:凡是获得与因相应状态的,所有那些因,以及其他事物,诸因都以因缘作为缘。然而,因为因、禅、道只是以安立等状态存在,不依赖其他法,不像食和根那样一定有所依赖,所以只在因、禅、道这些地方加上了第二个“因”等词。而食和根则一定依赖所食、所支配的对象,所以即使没有第二个“食”“根”词,它们自身就能限定所食的、所支配的食根状态,以及其他相应法,因此那里没有加。在这里,由于第二个“因”词已经限定了缘生法是由因限定的,也限定了作为缘的相应诸因和其他法,所以不需要再特别限定。因此应当知道,在《问分》中“善因对相应的蕴”等处,没有加第二个“因”词。巴利
Atha vā asati dutiye hetusadde hetusampayuttakānaṃ hetupaccayena paccayo, na pana hetūnanti evampi gahaṇaṃ siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ so vutto. Tena hetusampayuttabhāvaṃ ye labhanti, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ hetūnaṃ, aññesampi hetū hetupaccayena paccayoti dassitaṃ hoti. Yasmā pana hetujhānamaggā patiṭṭhāmattādibhāvena aññadhammanirapekkhā, na āhārindriyā viya sāpekkhā eva, tasmā etesveva dutiyaṃ hetādiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Āhārindriyā pana āharitabbaīsitabbāpekkhā eva, tasmā te vināpi dutiyena āhārindriyaggahaṇena attanā eva āharitabbe, īsitabbe ca āhārindriyabhūte, aññe ca sampayuttake paricchindantīti taṃ tattha na kataṃ. Idha ca dutiyena hetuggahaṇena paccayuppannānaṃ hetunā, paccayabhūteneva ca sampayuttānaṃ hetūnaṃ, aññesañca paricchinnattā puna visesena kiccaṃ natthīti pañhāvāre ‘‘kusalā hetū sampayuttakānaṃ khandhāna’’ntiādīsu dutiyaṃ hetuggahaṇaṃ na katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
596 以所缘的状态,也就是以境界的状态,即以可被缘取的状态,这就是它的意思。通过“ārabhitvāpi”中的“pi”这个词,显示出这样的意思:并未只停留在色处等所缘中的某一个,由于“缘取任何法”这一说法不限定,已经说过一切色处……乃至一切法处都是所缘缘,所以在按色等类别区分的六类有为、无为、施设法中,没有任何一法不是所缘缘。这个所缘缘的状态,前面已经阐明过了。缘取就是执取。因为只以所缘为依凭才能生起,没有所缘就不可能生起,所以说“必定缘取”。这个所缘缘应当知道有九种:善法对善法、善法对不善法、善法对无记法;不善法对不善法、不善法对善法、不善法对无记法;无记法对无记法、无记法对善法、无记法对不善法。巴利
596.Ārammaṇabhāvenāti visayabhāvena, ālambitabbabhāvenāti attho. Ārabhitvāpīti pi-saddena imamatthaṃ dasseti – rūpāyatanādimatte yasmiṃ kismiñci ekasmiṃ aṭṭhatvā ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ ārabbhā’’ti (paṭṭhā 1.1.2) aniyamena sabbarūpāyatanānaṃ…pe… sabbadhammāyatanānañca ārammaṇapaccayabhāvassa vuttattā rūpādibhedena chabbidhesu saṅkhatāsaṅkhatapaññattidhammesu na koci dhammo ārammaṇapaccayo na hotīti. Svāyaṃ ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo heṭṭhā vibhāvito eva. Ālambitvāti gahetvā. Ekantasārammaṇabhāvato anārabbha pavatti eva natthīti āha ‘‘ārabbhevā’’ti. Svāyaṃ ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, kusalo dhammo akusalassa, kusalo dhammo abyākatassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa, kusalassa, abyākatassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassa, kusalassa, akusalassā’’ti evaṃ navappakāro veditabbo.
597 以“最胜”之义,就是处于主导地位。对于依靠自身而存在的事物,作为其保障的法就是增上。它以主导的地位运作。比如“有欲求的人有什么事办不成呢”等等,在依先前造作与亲依止而生起的心生起时,欲等成为主导、成为最胜,使相应法成就、使其随自己掌控而运转;相应法也随它们的力量而转,因为以低劣等状态随顺它们,所以它们成为增上缘。应当受到尊重的所缘,对于倾向、朝向、偏向于它的享受、观察以及道果,也像是以自身之力使其运转一样,成为缘。因此,应当看到:这是以对依靠自身而存在的事物作保障的方式提供帮助,所以是增上缘。欲增上:就是名为欲的增上,当以欲为主导、以欲为最胜而使心生起时,对所生起的想要去做的欲,安立这个名字。其余诸项也是同样的道理。那么,为什么不像因缘分别中说的“因对于因相应法”那样,在这里说“增上对于增上相应法”,而是以“欲增上对于欲相应法”等方式来说呢?因为同一刹那中不存在。因为两三个因可以在同一刹那中作为因缘,以根之义提供帮助的状态不会舍弃。而增上是以最胜之义提供帮助,同一刹那中不可能有多个最胜者。因此,即使它们同时生起,在同一刹那中也没有增上缘的性质,所以不说“增上对于增上相应法”,而是以“欲增上对于欲相应法”等方式来说。巴利
597.Jeṭṭhakaṭṭhenāti pamukhabhāvena. Attādhīnānañhi patibhūto dhammo adhipati. So tesaṃ pamukhabhāvena pavattati. ‘‘Chandavato kiṃ nāma na sijjhatī’’tiādikaṃ purimābhisaṅkhārūpanissayaṃ labhitvā uppajjamāne cittuppāde chandādayo dhurabhūtā jeṭṭhakabhūtā sampayuttadhamme sādhayamānā vase vattayamānā hutvā pavattanti, sampayuttadhammā ca tesaṃ vasena vattanti hīnādibhāvena tadanuvattanato, tena te adhipatipaccayā honti. Garukātabbampi ārammaṇaṃ tanninnapoṇapabbhārānaṃ assādanapaccavekkhaṇamaggaphalānaṃ attano vase vattayamānaṃ viya paccayo hoti. Tasmā ayaṃ attādhīnānaṃ patibhāvena upakārakattā adhipatipaccayoti daṭṭhabbo. Chandādhipatīti chandasaṅkhāto adhipati, chandaṃ dhuraṃ chandaṃ jeṭṭhakaṃ katvā cittuppattikāle uppannassa kattukamyatāchandassetaṃ nāmaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Kasmā pana yathā hetupaccayaniddese ‘‘hetū hetusampayuttakāna’’nti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.1) vuttaṃ, evamidha ‘‘adhipatī adhipatisampayuttakāna’’nti avatvā ‘‘chandādhipati chandasampayuttakāna’’ntiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.3) nayena vuttanti? Ekakkhaṇe abhāvato. Hetavo hi dve tayopi ekakkhaṇe hetupaccayā honti, mūlaṭṭhena upakārakabhāvassa avijahanato. Adhipati pana jeṭṭhakaṭṭhena upakārako, na ca ekakkhaṇe bahū jeṭṭhakā honti. Tasmā ekato uppannānampi tesaṃ ekakkhaṇe adhipatipaccayabhāvo natthīti ‘‘adhipatī adhipatisampayuttakāna’’nti avatvā ‘‘chandādhipati chandasampayuttakāna’’ntiādinā nayena vuttaṃ.
凡对哪种法,就称为“法”,也就是任何一种所缘法。以尊重之心来对待,就是以恭敬、尊重的心态,或者以品味、享受的心态,把它当作值得尊重、应当获得、不应舍弃、不应轻视的对象。那些法,就是那些应当被尊重的法。对于那些,就是对于那些应当被尊重的法。以增上缘而言,就是以所缘增上缘。这个增上缘简要来说有十种:善法对于善法,通过俱生和所缘两种方式;对于不善法,只通过所缘;对于无记法,通过俱生和所缘;对于善法和无记法,只通过俱生——这是以善根为出发点的四种。不善法对于不善法,通过俱生和所缘;对于无记法,只通过俱生;同样,对于不善法和无记法,也只通过俱生——这是以不善根为出发点的三种。无记法对于无记法,通过俱生和所缘;对于善法,只通过所缘;同样,对于不善法,也只通过所缘——这是以无记根为出发点的三种。在这里应当知道,俱生增上有七种,所缘增上有七种。巴利
Yaṃ yaṃ dhammanti yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇadhammaṃ. Garuṃ katvāti garukāracittīkāravasena vā assādanavasena vā garukārikaṃ laddhabbaṃ avijahitabbaṃ anavaññātaṃ katvā. Te te dhammāti te te garukātabbā dhammā. Tesaṃ tesanti taṃtaṃgarukārakadhammānaṃ. Adhipatipaccayenāti ārammaṇādhipatipaccayena. Svāyaṃ ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa sahajātārammaṇehi, akusalassa ārammaṇeneva, abyākatassa sahajātārammaṇehi, kusalābyākatassa sahajātenevāti kusalamūlā cattāro, akusalo dhammo akusalassa sahajātārammaṇehi, abyākatassa sahajāteneva, tathā akusalābyākatassāti akusalamūlā tayo, abyākato dhammo abyākatassa sahajātārammaṇehi, kusalassa ārammaṇeneva, tathā akusalassāti abyākatamūlā tayo’’ti saṅkhepato dasappakāro adhipatipaccayo. Ettha ca sattadhā sahajātādhipati, sattadhā ārammaṇādhipati veditabbo.
598 598. “障碍”:就是中间,意思是障碍者。“它没有中间”:就是无间;它既是无间,又是缘,所以叫无间缘。有人用“义无间是无间缘,时无间是等无间缘”等种种方式加以铺陈,写出没有实质的长篇文字。就像无有缘和离去缘是依令生起、给予机会的差别状态而说的,无间缘和等无间缘不是这样,它们是依心的定律因的状态而说的。为了显示那个心的定律因的状态,所以开始说“此即是”等。其中,“意识界”等,以“等”字显示:推度之后有确定,死亡之后有结生——任何心之后生起任何心,这种各自相续生起的定律,是由各自助缘等而差别的前前心之力所成就的。巴利
598. Antarāyatīti antaraṃ, byavadhāyakanti attho. Nāssa antaraṃ vijjatīti anantaro, anantaro ca so paccayo cāti anantarapaccayo. ‘‘Atthānantaratā anantarapaccayo, kālānantaratā samanantarapaccayo’’tiādinā bahudhā papañcayanti, asāraṃ ganthavitthāraṃ karonti. Yathā pavattiokāsadānavisesabhāvena natthivigatapaccayā vuttā, na evaṃ anantarasamanantarapaccayā, ete pana cittaniyamahetubhāvena vuttāti taṃ cittaniyamahetubhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yo hi esā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha manoviññāṇadhātūtiādi cittaniyamoti ettha ādi-saddena santīraṇānantarā voṭṭhabbanaṃ, cutianantarā paṭisandhīti yassa yassa cittassa anantarā yaṃ yaṃ cittaṃ uppajjati, tassa tassa tadanantaruppādaniyamo taṃtaṃsahakāripaccayavisiṭṭhassa purimapurimacittasseva vasena ijjhatīti dasseti.
“义无间”是指:以某种法的义来说没有间隔。“时无间”是指:以时间的差别来说没有间隔。“诸师”在这里同样是指雷瓦达师而说的。“于此”是指在那个时无间的等无间缘状态中,或者是指在前面所说的那种矛盾中。“然而因为被修习之力所遮止”:这里的意思是,比如一棵树被刺伤时,明明有能力开花却不开花;一旦把刺去掉,就以同样的能力开花了。同样,在这里,因为被修习之力所遮止,明明有能力生起却不生起;当那个遮止消失后,就以同样的能力生起了。对方说“时无间不存在”,是因为被七天等时间隔开了。我们则说“有时间间隔”是存在的。难道不是有人会质疑说“时间在胜义上根本不存在”吗?所以论主预先回应这种疑问,说了“时无间……执取”这一段。巴利
Atthānantaratāyāti atthena kenaci dhammena anantaratāya. Kālānantaratāyāti kālabhedena anantaratāya . Ācariyānanti idhāpi revatācariyameva sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tatthāti tasmiṃ kālānantaratāya samanantarapaccayabhāve, tasmiṃ vā yathāvuttavirodhe. Bhāvanābalena pana vāritattāti ettha yathā rukkhassa vedhe dinne pupphituṃ samatthasseva pupphanaṃ na hoti, vedhe pana apanīte tāya eva samatthatāya pupphanaṃ hoti, evamidhāpi bhāvanābalena vāritattā samuṭṭhāpanasamatthasseva asamuṭṭhāpanaṃ, tasmiñca apagate tāya eva samatthatāya samuṭṭhāpanaṃ hotīti adhippāyo. Tampi vacanaṃ kālānantaratā natthi sattāhādinā kālena antaritabhāvato. Etadeva ‘‘kālantaritatā atthi’’ icceva vadāma. Nanu ca kālo nāma koci paramatthato natthīti vadeyyāti āsaṅkanto āha ‘‘kālānantara…pe… laddhī’’ti.
这里应当理解成:差别只在字句上,不在义理上。就像“积集”“相续”“施设”“言说”这些词,它们的差别只在声音和字句上,不在所要表达的意义上——这就是论主的意图。正因如此,为了显示字句上的差别,才说了“如何”等话。其中,因为前法灭与后法生之间没有间隔,所以能够无间断地生起,这就是无间缘的状态。由于不像色聚那样具有形状,而且缘与缘所生法并不同时安住,所以没有“这个在这个下面、上面、横向”的区分;把它们当作与自己是同一体,善巧地以无间的方式生起的能力,就是等无间缘的状态。所谓“生起的能力”,应当这样理解:诸法没有造作,当某一法以某种方式灭去或正在存在时,就会生起具有种种特殊性的法,那种方式本身就叫作“生起的能力”。而且,所谓时间施设,只是依据诸法的转起而假立的。因此,对于从非想非非想处、灭尽定、果等至出定者,从无想有情天死亡者,以及前一生之死与后一生之结生,由于灭与生之间没有间隔,所以没有时间的间隔。因为在它们之间,并没有非色法的转起可以依之而说有时间间隔,而色法的转起也不能成为非色法转起的间隔,因为二者属于不同的种类。色法与名法的相续,因为彼此性质完全不同,虽然以互相资助的方式生起,却仍然是各自独立的。而在同一相续中,前后法之间正在转起的法,因为属于那一相续,所以能成为间隔。可是在非想非非想处果等至中间,并没有那样的法,而“不存在”本身也不能成为间隔,因为它就是不存在。所以,就像前一个速行心之后紧接着后一个速行心、前一个有分之后紧接着后一个有分那样,无间断就是善巧的无间。应当这样理解:非想非非想处死者等也有这种生起的能力。在这里,以生起为缘的状态,对于无间缘等来说是显而易见的,所以说的是“生起的能力”。然而,对于现在法,若以过去、未来的界限来把握,就说不上“生起”;对于它们,经中以“过去法以无间缘为缘,对现在法为缘”等说法,说明了无间缘等的状态。因此可以知道,那并不只是以生起为条件。因为不像取善法等那样,取现在法并不是没有界限的。所以,只有具足生起者才可能被取。正因如此,在过去三法中,并没有“缘所依”等章。它的分类应知有七种:善法对善法、善法对无记法、不善法对不善法、不善法对无记法、无记法对无记法、无记法对善法、无记法对不善法。巴利
Byañjanamattatovettha nānākaraṇaṃ paccetabbaṃ, na atthatoti upacayasantatiadhivacananiruttipadānaṃ viya saddatthamattato nānākaraṇaṃ, na vacanīyatthatoti adhippāyo. Teneva saddatthavisesaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādimāha. Tattha purimapacchimānaṃ nirodhuppādantarābhāvato nirantaruppādanasamatthatā anantarapaccayabhāvo. Rūpakalāpānaṃ viya saṇṭhānābhāvato, paccayapaccayuppannānaṃ sahāvaṭṭhānābhāvato ca ‘‘idamito heṭṭhā, uddhaṃ, tiriya’’nti vibhāgābhāvā attanā ekattamiva upanetvā suṭṭhu anantarabhāvena uppādanasamatthatā samanantarapaccayatā. Uppādanasamatthatāti ca abyāpārattā dhammānaṃ yasmiṃ yadākāre niruddhe, vattamāne vā sati taṃtaṃvisesavanto dhammā honti, tassa sova ākāro vuccatīti daṭṭhabbo. Dhammānaṃ pavattimattameva ca upādāya kālavohāroti nirodhā vuṭṭhahantassa nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaphalasamāpattīnaṃ asaññabhavā cavantassa, purimacutipacchimapaṭisandhīnañca nirodhuppādanirantaratāya kālantaratā natthi. Na hi tesaṃ antarā arūpadhammappavatti atthi, yaṃ upādāya kālantaratā vucceyya, na ca rūpadhammappavatti arūpadhammappavattiyā antaraṃ karoti aññasantānattā. Rūpārūpasantatiyo hi dve aññamaññaṃ visadisasabhāvattā aññamaññūpakārabhāvena pavattamānāpi visuṃyeva honti. Ekasantatiyañca purimapacchimānaṃ majjhe pavattamānaṃ taṃsantatipariyāpannatāya antarakārakaṃ hoti. Tādisañca kiñci nevasaññānāsaññāyatanaphalasamāpattīnaṃ majjhe natthi, na ca abhāvo antarakārako hoti abhāvattā eva. Tasmā javanānantarassa javanassa viya, bhavaṅgānantarassa bhavaṅgassa viya ca nirantaratā suṭṭhu anantaratā hotīti tathā uppādanasamatthatā nevasaññānāsaññāyatanacutīnampi daṭṭhabbā. Uppattiyā paccayabhāvo cettha anantarapaccayādīnaṃ pākaṭoti uppādanasamatthatāva vuttā . Paccuppannānaṃ pana dhammānaṃ pubbantāparantaparicchedena gahitānaṃ uppajjatīti vacanaṃ alabhantānaṃ ‘‘atīto dhammo paccuppannassa dhammassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 2.18.4) anantarādipaccayabhāvo vuttoti na so uppattiyā evāti viññāyati. Na hi kusalādiggahaṇaṃ viya paccuppannaggahaṇaṃ aparicchedaṃ. Yato uppattimattasamaṅgino eva gahaṇaṃ siyā. Teneva ca atītattike paṭiccavārādayo na santīti. Tassa ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, kusalo dhammo abyākatassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa, akusalo dhammo abyākatassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassa, abyākato dhammo kusalassa, abyākato dhammo akusalassā’’ti sattadhā bhedo veditabbo.
599 正在生起的事物,与生起之性同时,在这里也应当看到:通过明显的生起之缘,也显示了住立之缘,否则灯的比喻就不成立。因为灯对光明的住立也是缘,并不只是对生起才是缘。缘所生法以俱生的方式提供帮助,这就是俱生缘。入胎刹那指结生刹那。因为在那个刹那,名色就像从另一个世界来到这里、进入母胎等一样地生起,所以那个刹那称为入胎刹那。这里所说的色,特指心所依处。因为心所依处对名法是俱生缘,名法对心所依处也是俱生缘。心与心所指转起时的四蕴,因为在结生刹那没有心生色。有色法是指心所依处而说的。在这里,虽然前面说了入胎刹那的名色,但并不能因此就排除色法在其他刹那作为俱生缘,所以为了排除这种误解才说了这句话。于某时的意思是某些时候,由此说明:某些作为依处的有色法,在某些结生时,排除了其他色法以及依处在转起时对非色法先前未被排除的俱生缘关系。本来应该说某时或于某时,却不那样说,而是改变了格的变化来说。因此,某时是宾格单数,与有色法关联时成为主格复数,与时关联时成为处格单数,应当知道这是为了阐明这些关系。而且,通过前面一个蕴与依处对三个蕴等的说法,在应当说与名结合的依处才是名的缘时,后面则显示了单独的依处也应当这样说。应当知道这个俱生缘有九种:善法对善法、对无记法、对善与无记法;不善法对不善法、对无记法、对不善与无记法;无记法对无记法;善与无记法对无记法;不善与无记法对无记法。巴利
599.Uppajjamānova saha uppādanabhāvenāti etthāpi uppattiyā paccayabhāvena pākaṭena ṭhitiyāpi paccayabhāvaṃ nidassetīti daṭṭhabbaṃ, aññathā padīpanidassanaṃ na yujjeyya. Padīpo hi pabhāsassa ṭhitiyāpi paccayo, na uppattiyā eva. Paccayuppannānaṃ sahajātabhāvena upakārakatā sahajātapaccayatā. Okkantikkhaṇeti paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Tasmiṃ hi khaṇe nāmarūpaṃ okkantaṃ viya paralokato āgantvā idha mātukucchiādiṃ pavisantaṃ viya uppajjati, tasmā so khaṇo okkantikkhaṇoti vuccati. Ettha ca rūpanti hadayavatthuyeva adhippetaṃ. Tañhi nāmassa, nāmañca tassa sahajātapaccayo hoti. Cittacetasikāti pavattiyaṃ cattāro khandhā paṭisandhikkhaṇe cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ abhāvato. Rūpino dhammāti hadayavatthuṃ sandhāyāha. Tattha yadipi pubbe ‘‘okkantikkhaṇe nāmarūpa’’nti vuttaṃ, tathāpi tena khaṇantare sahajātapaccayabhāvo rūpadhammānaṃ na nivāritoti tannivāraṇatthamidaṃ vuttanti gahetabbaṃ. Kiñci kāleti keci kismiñci kāleti attho, tena rūpino dhammā keci vatthubhūtā kismiñci paṭisandhikāleti aññesaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ, vatthuno ca pavattiyaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ sahajātapaccayabhāvaṃ pubbe anivāritaṃ nivāreti. Evañca katvā ‘‘kiñci kāla’’nti vā ‘‘kismiñci kāle’’ti vā vattabbe tathā avatvā vibhattivipallāsaṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Tena kiñcīti upayogekavacanaṃ. ‘‘Rūpino dhammā’’ti etena sambandhe paccattabahuvacanaṃ jāyati. ‘‘Kāle’’ti etena sambandhe bhummekavacananti dīpitanti veditabbaṃ. Purimena ca ‘‘eko khandho, vatthu ca tiṇṇannaṃ khandhāna’’nti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.419) ādivacanena nāmasahitaṃ eva vatthu nāmassa paccayoti vattabbe āpanne itarena kevalassa ca tathāvattabbataṃ dasseti. Svāyaṃ sahajātapaccayo ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, abyākatassa, kusalābyākatassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa , abyākatassa, akusalābyākatassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassa, kusalābyākato dhammo abyākatassa, akusalābyākato dhammo abyākatassā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.419) navavidho veditabbo.
600 对自己有助益的法,其助益性就是相互缘。就像三脚架那样。这里的助益性只能从相互的角度来看,不能从俱生等角度来看。因为有些法虽然是俱生等缘,却不是相互缘;而且离开俱生等缘法,相互缘也无法生起。同样,有些法既是俱生等缘,也是相互缘。如果仅仅是对自己助益者的助益性就算相互缘,那么以先生、后生的方式起助益作用的依处和诸蕴也应该成为相互缘,但这是不被认可的。所以说“助益性只能从相互的角度来看”。应当知道,这个缘对法的生起和住立都起助益作用。这个相互缘有三种,应当知道:善法对善法、不善法对不善法、无记法对无记法。巴利
600. Attano upakārakassa upakārakatā aññamaññapaccayatā. Tathā hissa tidaṇḍaṃ nidassitaṃ. Upakārakatā ca aññamaññatāvaseneva daṭṭhabbā, na sahajātatādivasena. Sahajātādipaccayo hontoyeva hi koci aññamaññapaccayo na hoti, na ca sahajātādipaccayadhammehi vinā imassa pavatti atthi. Tathā hi sahajātādipaccayo ca hontoyeva hi koci aññamaññapaccayo hoti. Yadi ca attano upakārakassa upakārakatāmattaṃ aññamaññapaccayo siyā, purejātapacchājātabhāvena upakārassa upakārakā vatthukhandhā aññamaññapaccayā siyuṃ, na ca taṃ icchitaṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘upakārakatā ca aññamaññavaseneva daṭṭhabbā’’ti. Ayañca uppattiyā, ṭhitiyā ca upakārakoti veditabbo. Ayaṃ pana ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassā’’ti tividho veditabbo.
601 就像树木等依靠大地,地界以支撑的方式成为其余诸界的依靠;眼等诸根以依止的方式帮助眼识等,就像画布等是绘画的依靠;诸蕴也以依止的方式成为各自所依诸蕴的依靠。因为正是依靠地界,其余诸界才能像所造色一样,各自完成自己的作用。巴利
601. Taruādīnaṃ pathavī viya adhiṭṭhānākārena pathavīdhātu sesadhātūnaṃ, cakkhādayo cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ upakārakā cittakammassa paṭādayo viya nissayākārena khandhādayo taṃtaṃnissayānaṃ khandhādīnaṃ. Pathavīdhātuyaṃ patiṭṭhāya eva hi sesadhātuyo upādārūpāni viya yathāsakaṃ kiccaṃ karonti.
以“支撑的方式”是指以作为基础的方式。这里应当知道:这些法以那种特别依赖它而运作的状态,就是它们的基础方式。因为诸法被称为不能离开其立足处而存在,所以,眼等诸法以支撑的方式提供助益,这一点也是完全讲得通的。确实,一旦抛开前面所说的那种特别依赖它而运作的状态,那么在眼等诸法当中,就不可能另有什么无色法对没有色法之处的支撑方式。虽说凡是缘于某一种法而有的种种法生起,它们全都依赖那种法而运作;然而,由于某种特定的缘的状态,当眼等诸法迟钝或敏锐时,眼识等法恰好随着那种状态而运作——这就是这里所说的“它们依赖它而运作”的特定状态已经成立。这样,虽然缘的状态在总体上相同,但从所缘缘与依止缘的对比中,其差别就显示出来了。这个道理在前面已经说明过了。
然而,关于“第六”这里,不能说“有色法在某个时候对无色法”。这里能成立的是“某些有色法”。为了指出那些法,就列举了“眼处”等。所谓“色”,是就心所依处而说的。
这个依止缘有十三种。如何呢?从俱生来说,有三种善根;同样有三种不善根;但在无记根当中,则可得前生缘。因为无记法对无记法既是俱生缘,也是前生缘;对善法只是前生缘;同样对不善法也是前生缘;善无记对善法有俱生和前生二缘,对无记法则只有俱生缘;不善无记也是如此。这样共十三种。巴利
Adhiṭṭhānākārenāti ādhārākārena. Ādhārākāro cettha tesaṃ sātisayaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāya veditabbo. Yato bhūtāni aniddisitabbaṭṭhānāni vuccanti, evañca katvā cakkhādīnampi adhiṭṭhānākārena upakārakatā suṭṭhu yujjati. Na hi yathāvuttaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāvisesaṃ muñcitvā añño cakkhādīsu adesakānaṃ arūpadhammānaṃ adhiṭṭhānākāro sambhavati. Yadipi yaṃ yaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca ye ye dhammā uppajjanti, tesaṃ sabbesaṃ tadadhīnavuttibhāvo. Yena pana paccayabhāvavisesena cakkhādīnaṃ paṭumandabhāvesu cakkhuviññāṇādayo tadanuvidhānākāreneva pavattanti, svāyamidha tesaṃ tadadhīnavuttitāsiddho visesoti. Evañhi paccayabhāvasāmaññe satipi ārammaṇapaccayato nissayapaccayassa viseso vibhāvito hoti. Svāyaṃ nayo heṭṭhā pakāsitova. Chaṭṭho panāti ettha ‘‘rūpino dhammā arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ kismiñci kāle’’ti idaṃ na labbhati. Yaṃ panettha labbhati ‘‘rūpino dhammā kecī’’ti, tattha te eva dhamme dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhāyatana’’ntiādi niddiṭṭhaṃ. Yaṃ rūpanti hadayavatthuṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ayaṃ pana nissayapaccayo terasavidho. Kathaṃ? Sahajātato kusalamūlā tayo, tathā akusalamūlā, abyākatamūlesu pana purejātaṃ labbhati. Abyākatañhi abyākatassa sahajātampi paccayo hoti, purejātampi kusalassa purejātameva, tathā akusalassa, kusalābyākataṃ sahajātapurejātato kusalassa, sahajātato eva abyākatassa, tathā akusalābyākata’’nti evaṃ terasa.
602 因为它是依那个而运作的,所以说它依止自己的果。先说“无论什么原因,都是依止”,然后指出其中强有力的依止就是“亲依止”。它作为强有力的原因而提供帮助,也就是以所缘的方式、以无间地能生起随顺之心的能力,以及纯粹作为强有力的原因来提供帮助。因此说“它”等。巴利
602.Tadadhīnavuttitāya attano phalena nissitoti yaṃ kiñci kāraṇaṃ nissayoti vatvā tattha yo bhuso nissayo, taṃ upanissayoti niddhāreti. Balavakāraṇabhāvena upakārakoti ārammaṇabhāvavasena anantaraṃ anurūpacittuppādanasamatthatāvasena, kevalañca balavantaṃ kāraṇaṃ hutvā upakārako. Tenāha ‘‘so’’tiādi.
在这其中,布施已,就是舍弃了应当布施的东西。或者,以什么样的思来布施,那个思就是布施。已施,就是让那个思变得清净、纯净。受持戒已,就是按照五戒、十戒等方式受持常戒。这里只显示了受持离,而自然离和断除离因为在世间并不以戒的名称而为人所知,所以没有说。虽然没有说,但它们确实是所缘缘。在这其中,断除离只是有学者的善的所缘,不是其他人的。斋戒业,就是像不杀生、不偷盗这样所说的伍波萨他戒。尊重它并观察,就是像上面所说的那样,有学也好,凡夫也好,都观察那个善,阿拉汉也照样观察它。因为对阿拉汉来说,过去所作的善仍然是善。然而,用来观察的心,叫做唯作心。因此在善对善这个章节里不包含它。往昔所惯行的,因为已施、已作是就近期所作而说的,由此应当知道,这里说的是非近期所作的,或者是为了显示布施等之外的其余欲界善而说这话。从禅那出定已,就是入禅定的人从禅那出定。也有从禅那出定已这样的原文。有学的种姓,是就入流者而说的。因为他观察种姓。清净,则是就一来者和不来者而说的。因为他们的心叫做清净。有学,就是入流者、一来者、不来者。从道出定已,就是通过超越道、果、有分而从自己所得的道出定,但纯粹只从道出定而观察,是没有的。以等字,收摄了观察善为无常、苦、无我这样的说法等等。虽然不分别种种差别而作了分别,但为了显示这也是所缘增上与所缘亲依止的差别,所以说了在这其中等等。巴利
Tattha dānaṃ datvāti deyyadhammaṃ cajitvā. Yāya vā cetanāya so diyyati, sā cetanā dānaṃ. Datvāti taṃ cetanaṃ pariyodapetvā visuddhaṃ katvā. Sīlaṃ samādiyitvāti pañcaṅgadasaṅgādivasena niccasīlaṃ gaṇhitvā. Iminā samādānaviratiyeva dassitā, sampattaviratisamucchedaviratiyo pana loke ‘‘sīla’’nti apākaṭattā na vuttā. Kiñcāpi na vuttā, ārammaṇapaccayo pana hontiyeva. Tattha samucchedavirati sekkhānaṃyeva kusalassa ārammaṇaṃ hoti, na itaresaṃ. Uposathakammanti ‘‘pāṇaṃ na hane, na cādinnamādiye’’ti (su. ni. 402) evaṃ vuttaṃ uposathasīlaṃ. Taṃ garuṃ katvā paccavekkhatīti taṃ yathāvuttaṃ kusalaṃ sekkhopi puthujjanopi paccavekkhati, arahāpi taṃ paccavekkhateva. Arahatopi hi pubbe kataṃ kusalaṃ kusalameva. Yena pana cittena paccavekkhati, taṃ kiriyacittaṃ nāma hoti. Tasmā ‘‘kusalo kusalassā’’ti imasmiṃ adhikāre na labbhati. Pubbe suciṇṇānīti ‘‘datvā katvā’’ti hi āsannakatāni vuttāni, iminā na āsannakatānīti veditabbāni, dānādīhi vā sesāni kāmāvacarakusalāni dassetuṃ idaṃ vuttaṃ. Jhānā vuṭṭhahitvāti jhānaṃ samāpanno jhānato vuṭṭhahitvā. ‘‘Jhānaṃ vuṭṭhahitvā’’tipi pāḷi. Sekkhā gotrabhunti sotāpannaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. So hi gotrabhuṃ paccavekkhati. ‘‘Vodāna’’nti idaṃ pana sakadāgāmianāgāmino sandhāya vuttaṃ. Tesañhi taṃ cittaṃ vodānaṃ nāma hoti. Sekkhāti sotāpannasakadāgāmianāgāmino . Maggā vuṭṭhahitvāti maggaphalabhavaṅgātikkamavasena attanā paṭiladdhamaggā vuṭṭhahitvā, suddhamaggatoyeva pana vuṭṭhāya paccavekkhaṇaṃ nāma natthi. Ādi-saddena ‘‘kusalaṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.404) evamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yadipi nānattaṃ akatvāva vibhatto, tathāpi idampi ārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayānaṃ visesoti dassetuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
这些心和心所的无间缘与无间亲依止缘,在安立方式上确实有差别。因为前者是依无记法而转起的,后者也依善法等而转起,所以那种安立上的差别,从实质上说也归于同一,因为在一切心生起中,这两者都是必须具备的。虽然如此等语,是为了显示无间缘与无间亲依止缘之间的差别。正如等语,则是为了显示无间亲依止缘能够成立。巴利
Nesaṃ cittacetasikānaṃ anantarapaccayaanantarūpanissayānaṃ nikkhepaviseso atthi. Yasmā purimo abyākatadhammavasena pavatto, itaro kusalādivasenapīti sopi nikkhepaviseso atthato ekībhāvameva gacchati sabbesupi cittuppādesu tadubhayassa icchitabbattā. Evaṃ santepītiādi anantaraanantarūpanissayānaṃ visesadassanaṃ. Yathā hītiādi anantarūpanissayassa sambhavadassanaṃ.
在这里,“pa”是一个前缀,它通过自身能够生起果的作用,显示出“善加造作”的含义。这样一来,所造作的也就成为在自己相续中所造作的,所以说“在自己相续中”等等。而“作”有两种:完成和亲近。为了说明这一点,才说“已完成的或”等等。其中,完成是指通过因缘聚合而使果生起。亲近则是指以依附于身体的方式受用亲近,以及以了知、认知等方式使所缘成为亲近。正因为如此,即使是未来的时节圆满等,通过所缘亲近而被亲近,也可以说是本性亲依止;更何况过去和现在的呢。因为即使是现在,也有“依止现在的时节、食物、住处而生起禅那”这样的说法,所以现在法也能获得本性亲依止的地位。所谓“就是以本性”,是指不混杂其他缘,唯独以自己的自性。所谓“亲依止”,是指作为强有力的因。其种种分类,应按照问分中所说的方式来理解。然而在缘分中——巴利
Pakatoti ettha pa-kāro upasaggo, so attano phalassa uppādanasamatthabhāvena suṭṭhukatataṃ dīpeti. Tathā ca kataṃ attano santāne kataṃ hotīti āha ‘‘attano santāne’’tiādi. Karaṇañca duvidhaṃ nipphādanaṃ, upasevanañcāti taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘nipphādito vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nipphādanaṃ hetupaccayasamodhānena phalassa nibbattanaṃ. Upasevanaṃ pana kāye allīyāpanavasena upayogūpasevanaṃ, vijānanasañjānanādīnaṃ vasena ārammaṇūpasevanañca. Teneva anāgatānampi utusampadādīnaṃ ārammaṇūpasevanena upasevitānaṃ pakatūpanissayatā vuttā hoti, pageva atītapaccuppannānaṃ. Paccuppannassāpi hi ‘‘paccuppannaṃ utubhojanaṃ senāsanaṃ upanissāya jhānaṃ uppādetī’’tiādivacanato (paṭṭhā. 2.18.8) pakatūpanissayabhāvo labbhatīti. Pakatiyā evāti paccayantarasaṅkararahitena attano sabhāveneva. Upanissayoti balavakāraṇaṃ katvā. Anekappakārato pabhedo veditabbo pañhāvāre āgatanayena. Paccayavāre pana –
前面的善法,通过亲依止缘,成为后面善法的缘;前面的善法,通过亲依止缘,也成为后面某些不善法的缘,成为无记法的缘;不善法通过亲依止缘,成为不善法的缘,也成为某些善法的缘;不善法通过亲依止缘,成为无记法的缘;无记法通过亲依止缘,成为无记法的缘,成为善法的缘,成为不善法的缘;人、住所等,也通过亲依止缘成为缘。巴利
‘‘Purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ kusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ upanissayapaccayena paccayo, purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ akusalānaṃ dhammānaṃ kesañci, kusalā abyākatānaṃ, akusalā akusalānaṃ, kusalānaṃ kesañci, akusalā abyākatānaṃ, abyākatā abyākatānaṃ, abyākatā kusalānaṃ, abyākatā akusalānaṃ , puggalopi, senāsanampi upanissayapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.9).
在这里,凡是前法对后法成为无间依止缘的,这些前法对那一切后法都决定成为缘,绝不会对某些法时而成、时而不成。因此,在能找到无间依止缘的地方,不能说“某些”,所以没有那样说。然而,凡是前法对后法成为所缘依止缘或本性依止缘的,这些前法对那些后法,并非对一切都决定成为缘:对那些有强力条件阻碍其生起的后法,它们就不成为缘;对其他的后法,则成为缘。因此,在找不到无间缘的地方,才说“某些”。已经成立的诸缘法,对于应当由它们生起的那些缘所生法而言,才说“某些”——这里的意思就是这个。巴利
Tattha ye purimā yesaṃ pacchimānaṃ anantarūpanissayo honti, te tesaṃ sabbesampi ekanteneva honti, na kesañci kadāci. Tasmā yesu padesu anantarūpanissayo labbhati, tesu ‘‘kesañcī’’ti na sakkā vattunti na vuttaṃ. Ye pana purimā yesaṃ pacchimānaṃ ārammaṇūpanissayo vā pakatūpanissayo vā honti, te tesaṃ, na sabbesaṃ ekantena honti. Yesaṃ uppattivibandhakā paccayā balavanto honti, tesaṃ na bhavanti, itaresaṃ bhavanti. Tasmā yesu padesu anantarapaccayo na labbhati, tesu ‘‘kesañcī’’ti vuttaṃ. Siddhānaṃ paccayadhammānaṃ yehi paccayuppannehi bhavitabbaṃ, tesaṃ ‘‘kesañcī’’ti ayamettha attho.
对于遍施设来说,因为它不具备作为所缘依止缘的性质,所以除遍施设外,连同一部分施设在内的一切法皆为所缘依止缘。刚刚灭去的心与心所这一聚,是无间依止缘。按善、不善、异熟、唯作、色这五类来分,则有五种本性依止缘。这就是这里的简要说明。详细内容应当从《发趣论注》中了知。巴利
Kasiṇapaññattiyā ārammaṇūpanissayatābhāvato ekaccāya paññattiyā saddhiṃ sabbo dhammo ārammaṇūpanissayo, anantarātīto cittacetasikarāsi anantarūpanissayo, kusalākusalavipākakiriyārūpavasena pañcavidho pakatūpanissayoti ayamettha saṅkhepo. Vitthāro pana paṭṭhānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ veditabbo.
603 “最初”是指比缘所生法更早。因为这种前生缘,只有依色法才能成立,而缘所生法只是无色法。所以说“以现存的状态来帮助”。那些依止、所缘等行相而特出,但如果没有“前生”这个状态,就不能成为帮助的依处和所缘;以“前生”的方式成为帮助,就是前生缘性。这样,在依处前生和所缘前生这两种前生缘里,“眼处”等是就依处来说的,“色所缘”等是就所缘来说的。巴利
603.Paṭhamataranti paccayuppannato puretaraṃ. Ayañhi purejātapaccayo rūpadhammavaseneva labbhati. Paccayuppanno ca arūpadhammāyeva. Tenāha ‘‘vattamānabhāvena upakārako’’ti. Nissayārammaṇākārādīhi visiṭṭhā purejātabhāvena vinā upakārakabhāvaṃ agacchantānaṃ vatthārammaṇānaṃ purejātākārena upakārakatā purejātapaccayatā. Evaṃ vatthārammaṇavasena duvidhe purejātapaccaye ‘‘cakkhāyatana’’ntiādi vatthuvasena vuttaṃ, ‘‘rūpārammaṇa’’ntiādi ārammaṇavasena.
这里说“某种色”,是指心所依处。其中,“某时”是就生起的时间来说的;“依某时”是就结生的时间来说的。对于那些没有所缘前生就不能生起的眼识等,通过说明所缘前生,也就等于说明了:在意门中,凡是依靠所缘前生而生起的,作为其所缘缘的一切色法——无论是粗色还是细色——都是所缘前生。正如《问分》中所说:“有学或凡夫以所缘前生观眼为无常、苦、无我”等等。“无记法对无记法以前生缘为缘,无记法对善法以前生缘为缘,无记法对不善法以前生缘为缘”,以无记为根本的有这三种。它们又各自分为依处前生和所缘前生两种。巴利
Yaṃ rūpanti hadayavatthuṃ sandhāyāha. Tattha ‘‘kiñci kāle’’ti pavattikālavasena vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kiñci kālena’’ iti paṭisandhikālavasena. Yāni ārammaṇapurejātena vinā na vattanti, tesaṃ cakkhuviññāṇādīnaṃ ārammaṇapurejātadassanena manodvārepi yaṃ yaṃ ārammaṇapurejātena vattati, tassa tassa ārammaṇapaccayabhūtaṃ sabbaṃ rūparūpaṃ ārammaṇapurejātanti dassitameva hoti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ pañhāvāre ‘‘ārammaṇapurejātaṃ sekkhā vā puthujjanā vā cakkhuṃ aniccato dukkhato anattato vipassantī’’tiādi (paṭṭhā. 1.1.424). ‘‘Abyākato dhammo abyākatassa dhammassa purejātapaccayena paccayo, abyākato dhammo kusalassa dhammassa purejātapaccayena paccayo, abyākato dhammo akusalassa dhammassa purejātapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.424) abyākatamūlakā tayova vārā. Te ca paccekaṃ vatthupurejātaṃ, ārammaṇapurejātanti dvidhā vibhattā.
604 对于缘所生法,如果它先已成立,那么缘法就是后来才生起的,所以说“前生的”。而这个道理只在色法上成立,不在无色法上成立,所以说“色法的”。如果缘所生法早就已经生起了,那后生法怎么还能有缘性呢?回答说:“因为它能资助。”那些离开了后生法就不能成为相续不断之因的法,对于以“后生”这种方式来帮助它们的法来说,这种帮助具有不相应等特殊形态,这就是后生缘性。同样,一切缘的帮助作用,都应该结合各自不同的缘的形态来理解。以“犹如秃鹫雏鸟之身依求食之思”等语,显示依意思食而转起的无色法资助色身。因此不说“犹如求食”,而取“思”。这里说的“身”,是指由四因所生的大种及所造色所构成的色身。总之,除了色法以外,无差别的无色蕴是后生缘。它按性类分为善、不善、异熟、唯作四种,应当如此了知。巴利
604. Paccayuppannadhammassa puretaraṃ siddhabhāve sati paccayadhammassa pacchājātatāti vuttaṃ ‘‘purejātāna’’nti. Ayañca nayo rūpadhammesu eva labbhati, na arūpadhammesūti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpadhammāna’’nti. Yadi paccayuppannadhammā puretarameva jātā, kathaṃ paccayabhāvoti āha ‘‘upathambhakattenā’’ti. Pacchājātena hi vinā santānāvicchedahetubhāvaṃ agacchantānaṃ dhammānaṃ ye pacchājātākārena upakārakā, tesaṃ sā vippayuttākārādīhi visiṭṭhā upakārakatā pacchājātapaccayatā. Evaṃ sabbapaccayānaṃ paccayantarākāravisiṭṭhā upakārakatā yojetabbā. ‘‘Gijjhapotakasarīrānaṃ āhārāsācetanā viyā’’ti etena manosañcetanāhāravasena pavattamānehi arūpadhammehi rūpakāyassa upatthambhitabhāvaṃ dasseti. Teneva ‘‘āhārāsā viyā’’ti avatvā cetanāggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Kāyassāti catusamuṭṭhānikabhūtupādāyarūpasaṅkhātassa rūpakāyassa. Saṅkhepato ṭhapetvā rūpadhamme avisiṭṭho arūpakkhandho pacchājātapaccayo. So jātivasena kusalo, akusalo, vipāko, kiriyāti catubbidhoti veditabbaṃ.
605 605. 以善等性,通过与自己相似的加行,把应当做的事一再地做、令其持续,这就是“习行”的含义;或者,令自己成就与自己相似的本性,也就是熏习。就像“前前精勤”一样,即如学习、听闻、记持等前前的反复练习。不过在这三者当中,“前前”应当理解为紧挨着过去的。那么,为什么这里不像无间缘那样,用“前前的善法对后后的无记法”等说法,与不同种类一起来说明呢?因为不能令自己的趣向被把握。不同种类的法以习行的功德令善巧有力的状态成就时,并不能令称为善等性的自己的趣向被把握。因此,不与它们一起说明;只有那些通过称为熏习的习行功德,能令善巧有力状态殊胜的、称为善等性的自己的趣向被把握的法,才与同类一起说明。应当这样理解。巴利
605. Kusalādibhāvena attanā sadisassa payogena karaṇīyassa punappunaṃ karaṇaṃ pavattanaṃ āsevanaṭṭho, attasadisasabhāvatāpādanaṃ vāsanaṃ vā. Purimapurimābhiyogo viyāti uggahaṇasavanadhāraṇādipurimāpurimāsevanā viya. Tīsu pana etesu purimā purimāti samanantarātītā daṭṭhabbā. Kasmā panettha anantarapaccaye viya ‘‘purimā purimā kusalā dhammā pacchimānaṃ pacchimānaṃ abyākatāna’’ntiādinā bhinnajātiyehi saddhiṃ niddeso na katoti? Attano gatiṃ gāhetuṃ asamatthattā. Bhinnajātikā hi bhinnajātikānaṃ āsevanaguṇena paguṇabalavabhāvaṃ sampādentā attanova kusalādibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ gatiṃ gāhetuṃ na sakkuṇanti. Tasmā tehi saddhiṃ niddesaṃ akatvā ye yesaṃ vāsanāsaṅkhātena āsevanaguṇena paguṇabalavabhāvavisiṭṭhaṃ attano kusalādibhāvasaṅkhātaṃ gatiṃ gāhetuṃ samatthā, tesaṃ tehi samānajātikeheva saddhiṃ niddeso katoti daṭṭhabbo.
那么,为什么果报无记没有被纳入呢?因为没有习行的缘故。果报无记是依业力而达到果报状态、被业所转化之后才生起的,它没有努力、很微弱,无法通过习行的功德来把握和修习自己的本性,既不能令其他果报生起,也不能在取得前一个果报的力量之后再生起,而只是像被业力之势抛掷而落下一样生起。所以,在果报中无论从哪方面说都没有习行,因此没有被纳入。即使它是在善、不善、唯作之后立刻生起的,由于它系属于各自的业而运转,也仍然不具备习行的功德,因此善法等也不能成为它的习行缘。而且,由于种类不同,这些法根本不会对它施加习行。不过,从地或所缘来说,并不存在种类不同的问题,所以小的善唯作对于大的善唯作、以行为为所缘的善对于以涅槃为所缘的善,确实可以成为习行缘。这个习行缘在“善法对善法、不善法对不善法、无记法对无记法以习行缘为缘”中,只说了这三种情况。通过“无记”这一项,除转向之外的唯作诸法也被纳入了。巴利
Atha vipākābyākataṃ kasmā na gahitaṃ? Āsevanābhāvato. Vipākābyākatañhi kammavasena vipākabhāvappattaṃ kammapariṇāmitaṃ hutvā pavattamānaṃ nirussāhaṃ dubbalaṃ santaṃ āsevanaguṇena attano sabhāvaṃ gāhetvā paribhāvetvā neva aññaṃ vipākaṃ pavatteti, na ca purimavipākānubhāvaṃ gahetvā uppajjati, atha kho kammavegakkhittaṃ patitaṃ viya hutvā uppajjati. Tasmā sabbathāpi vipāke āsevanā natthīti na gahitaṃ. Kusalākusalakiriyānantaraṃ uppajjamānampi sakammapaṭibaddhavuttitāya āsevanaguṇaṃ na gaṇhātīti kusalādayopi tassa āsevanapaccayo na honti. Nānājātikattāpi cete tassa āsevanādhānaṃ na karonteva. Bhūmito, pana ārammaṇato vā nānājātikatā nāma natthīti parittakusalakiriyā mahaggatakusalakiriyānaṃ, saṅkhārārammaṇañca kusalaṃ nibbānārammaṇassa āsevanapaccayo hotiyeva. Svāyaṃ ‘‘kusalo dhammo kusalassa, akusalo dhammo akusalassa, abyākato dhammo abyākatassa āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.426) tidhāva vutto. Abyākataggahaṇena āvajjanavajjitā kiriyadhammā gahitā.
606 心的作用就是心的造作,意思是造业。就像身和语的作用是表,心的作用就是思。正因为这个思,在已生起造作性这一殊胜状态的相续中,当其余诸缘和合时,对于正在生起的果报色法和业生色法,也以那个相续的殊胜状态、以造作性而成为助益。因为正是由于那种造作性在转起,那些色法才得以转起,否则就不会。至于对俱生法,以造业的造作性而转起并成为助益,那还用说吗?所谓业,指的正是思业。因为与思相应的贪欲等,并不成为业缘。即使具有果报法的性质,由于除思之外的诸法没有那种自性,果报的思也确实是俱生业缘。这个业缘按种类分为四种,这一切都应当说明。巴利
606.Cittapayogo cittakiriyā, āyūhananti attho. Yathā hi kāyavacīpayogo viññatti, evaṃ cittapayogo cetanā. Tena hi sā uppannakiriyatāvisiṭṭhe santāne sesapaccayasamāgame pavattamānānaṃ vipākakaṭattārūpānampi teneva santānavisesena kiriyābhāvena upakārikā hoti. Tassa hi kiriyābhāvassa pavattattā tesaṃ pavatti, na aññathā. Sahajātānaṃ pana āyūhanakiriyābhāvena pavattamānā upakārikāti kiṃ vattabbaṃ. Kammanti ca cetanākammameva adhippetaṃ. Na hi cetanāsampayuttaṃ kammaṃ abhijjhādi kammapaccayo hoti. Satipi vipākadhammabhāve cetanāvajjānaṃ ataṃsabhāvattā vipākāpi cetanā sahajātakammapaccayo hotiyeva, svāyaṃ kammapaccayo jātivasena catubbidhoti sabbaṃ vattabbaṃ.
607 “无精进、寂静的状态”这句话,是用那些有精进、属于果报法性的善与不善法来对比,说明果报的状态虽然在所缘等方面看起来相似,其实并不相同。因为果报不能靠精进努力来达成,或者说,在其他缘都具足时,它只凭业的已作性就能生起,所以它是“无精进、寂静的状态”,并不是指烦恼止息的寂静。正因为它的状态如此寂静,有分等才难以被了知。即使在五门中,通过速行的生起,可以了知对色等的执取,但仅仅是转向、领受、推度的果报,确实难以了知。“为了无精进、寂静的状态”,意思是:为了达到这种无精进、寂静的状态。这是为了说明,那些以果报为缘的非果报色法,也随顺于果报而生起。“生起”等说法,是依据《问分》的方式而说。在《缘分别》中,则是以“果报的四非色蕴,互相以异熟缘为缘”等方式出现。应当了知,这里是依据那些决定性以果报为异熟缘的法,来显示其中的道理。因为在无色界中,果报并不像在欲界和色界地那样,成为色的缘。巴利
607.‘‘Nirussāhasantabhāvenā’’ti etena saussāhehi vipākadhammadhammehi kusalākusalehi sārammaṇādibhāvena sadisānampi asadisaṃ vipākabhāvaṃ dasseti. So hi vipākānaṃ payogena asādhetabbatāya payogena, aññathā vā sesapaccayesu siddhesu kammassa kaṭattā eva sijjhanato nirussāho santabhāvo hoti, na kilesavūpasantabhāvo. Tathāsantabhāvato eva hi bhavaṅgādayo duviññeyyā. Pañcadvārepi hi javanappavattiyā rūpādīnaṃ gahitatā viññāyati, abhinipātasampaṭicchanasantīraṇamattā pana vipākā duviññeyyā eva. Nirussāhasantabhāvāyāti nirussāhasantabhāvatthāya. Etena tappaccayavantānaṃ avipākānampi rūpadhammānaṃ vipākānukūlaṃ pavattiṃ dasseti. Pavattetiādi pañhāvāranayaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Paṭiccavāre pana ‘‘vipākā cattāro khandhā arūpino aññamaññaṃ vipākapaccayena paccayo’’tiādinā (paṭṭhā. 1.1.14) āgatā. Ettha ca yesaṃ ekantena vipāko vipākapaccayo hoti, tesaṃ vasena nayadassanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi āruppe kāmarūpabhūmīsu viya vipāko rūpassa paccayo hoti.
608 608. 即使诸食有令生的作用,资益性仍然是它们的主要功能,所以说“以对色与非色法的资益性”。因为即使有令生的作用,非色食的资益性仍然存在,对能令食生色生起的色食来说也是如此。对于能资益四生色的色食来说,即使没有令生的作用,资益性也存在;但如果没有资益性,诸食就不会有令生的作用,所以资益性是主要的。或者,食在令生的同时,也以不间断的方式资益而令生,因此资益的状态本身就是食的状态,所以说“以资益性”。不过有些人说:“色食对自己所生的色不是食缘,对其他所生的色才是,因此说‘以资益性’。”其他人不认可这种说法,他们认为:“如果说食是色的缘,却不是食缘,这是自相矛盾的。”在这里,色食只是色法的食缘。非色食也是色法的食缘。而且,不仅仅是对心生色,有时对业生色也是如此,为了说明这一点,所以说“在《问分》中”等。巴利
608. Satipi janakabhāve upatthambhakattaṃ āhārānaṃ padhānakiccanti āha ‘‘rūpārūpānaṃ upatthambhakattenā’’ti. Upatthambhakattañhi satipi janakatte arūpīnaṃ āhārānaṃ, āhārajarūpasamuṭṭhāpakarūpāhārassa ca hoti. Asatipi catusamuṭṭhānikarūpūpatthambhakarūpāhārassa, asati pana upatthambhakatte āhārānaṃ janakattaṃ natthīti upatthambhakattaṃ padhānaṃ. Atha vā janayamānopi āhāro avicchedavasena upatthambhento janetīti upatthambhanabhāvo eva āhārabhāvoti ‘‘upatthambhakattenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Keci pana ‘‘rūpāhāro attanā janitassa āhārapaccayo na hoti, aññena janitassa hoti, tasmā ‘upatthambhakattenā’ti vutta’’nti vadanti. Taṃ ‘‘āhāro rūpassa paccayo honto āhārapaccayo na hotīti viruddhameta’’nti apare nānujānanti. Rūpāhāro cettha rūpadhammānaṃ eva āhārapaccayo hoti. Arūpāhārā pana rūpadhammānampi āhārapaccayo honti. Tañca kho na kevalaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānameva, atha kho kadāci kaṭattārūpānampīti dassetuṃ ‘‘pañhāvāre panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
609 609. 这里所谓“以增上的意义”,并不是像增上缘的诸法那样,以压制、克服而转起的沉重状态为增上;而是说:在见等作用中,眼识等随顺于眼等;在活命时,业生色与非色法在存活中随顺于命根;在思惟时,相应法随顺于意;在乐等状态中,乐等随顺于乐等;在胜解、策励、现前、不散乱、了知中,在“我将知未知”的转起中,在明知中,在已知的状态中,则是信等俱生法随顺于信等。如此,在以上种种各自的作用中,以眼等为缘的诸法随顺于眼等。因为在那些作用中,眼等有主宰力,而以它们为缘的诸法,则借着随顺它们而在其中转起。那么,为什么这里没有取女根和男根呢?难道它们不也随顺于性相等吗?确实随顺,但不是从缘的角度。因为正如命根和食是那些法的缘,是它们的守护者和支持者,作为有缘和不离去缘;而女性状态和男性状态却不会以任何方式对性相等有所助益而成为缘。它们只是在依各自的缘而转起的性相等中,成为执取“这是女人”等的缘;除此之外,因为在与它们俱存的相续中不以其他方式转起,所以说性相等随顺于它们,并称它们为根。因此,没有说它们是根缘。应当知道,在这里,“眼等”是就非色法而言,乐根和苦根也被“眼等”一词所涵盖。巴利
609.Adhipatiyaṭṭhenāti ettha na adhipatipaccayadhammānaṃ viya pavattinivārake abhibhavitvā pavattanena garubhāvo adhipatiyaṭṭho, atha kho dassanādikiccesu cakkhuviññāṇādīhi, jīvane kammajarūpehi arūpadhammehi ca jīvantehi, manane sampayuttadhammehi, sukhitādibhāve sukhitādīhi, adhimokkhapaggahūpaṭṭhānāvikkhepapajānanesu, ‘‘anaññātaṃ ñassāmī’’ti pavattiyaṃ ājānane, aññātāvibhāve ca saddhādisahajātehīti evaṃ taṃtaṃkiccesu cakkhādipaccayehi dhammehi cakkhādīnaṃ anuvattanīyatā. Tesu hi kiccesu cakkhādīnaṃ issariyaṃ, tappaccayānañca tadanuvattanena tattha pavatti. Kasmā panettha itthipurisindriyadvayaṃ na gahitaṃ, nanu cetampi liṅgādīhi anuvattīyatīti? Saccaṃ anuvattīyati, na pana paccayabhāvato. Yathā hi jīvitāhārā yesaṃ paccayā honti, tesaṃ anupālakaupatthambhakā , atthiavigatapaccayabhūtā ca honti, na evaṃ itthipurisabhāvā liṅgādīnaṃ kenaci pakārena upakārakā honti. Yato paccayā siyuṃ, kevalaṃ pana yathāsakehi eva paccayehi pavattamānānaṃ liṅgādīnaṃ yathā itthiādiggahaṇassa paccayabhāvo hoti, tato aññenākārena taṃsahitasantāne appavattito liṅgādīhi anuvattanīyatā, indriyatā ca tesaṃ vuccati. Tasmā na tesaṃ indriyapaccayabhāvo vutto. Cakkhādayo arūpadhammānaṃyevāti ettha sukhindriyadukkhindriyānipi cakkhādiggahaṇena gahitānīti daṭṭhabbāni.
610 成为以相为所缘之近审察的寻等,以寻等的作用近取所缘之后,再加以审察、观察,或者加以思惟——这就是寻等特有的作用,也就是“审察”的含义。虽然说了“除了双五识以及苦受、乐受这两种”,但通过“七禅支”这句话,应当知道这是在排除舍与心一境性这两种不属于禅支的情况。
如果是这样,仅仅靠“七禅支”这句话就已经成立了,为什么还要说“除了苦受、乐受这两种”呢?这是为了说明:在五种受的区分中,苦受和乐受完全没有禅支的性质,因为它们在禅支的场合中已经被排除掉了;或者说,是为了说明:苦受和乐受虽然也可以有禅支的名称,但它们完全没有作为禅那缘的性质。
至于舍和心一境性,虽然它们也有不作为禅那缘的情况,但并非没有作为禅那缘的情况,所以在这里把它们全都纳入七禅支中。这里“全都”这个说法,应当理解为涵盖一切善等分类,而不是涵盖一切心生起的情况。
对于那些持“除了双五识以及三种受”这种文本的人,应当知道上面所说的考察,只是就心一境性而言的。巴利
610. Lakkhaṇārammaṇūpanijjhānabhūtānaṃ vitakkādīnaṃ vitakkanādivasena ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā nijjhānaṃ pekkhanaṃ, cintanaṃ vā vitakkādīnaṃyeva āveṇiko byāpāro upanijjhāyanaṭṭho. ‘‘Ṭhapetvā dvipañcaviññāṇe sukhadukkhavedanādvaya’’nti vatvāpi ‘‘satta jhānaṅgānī’’ti vacanena ajhānaṅgānaṃ upekkhācittekaggatānaṃ nivattanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘satta jhānaṅgānī’’ti eteneva siddhe ‘‘ṭhapetvā sukhadukkhavedanādvaya’’nti kasmā vuttaṃ? Vedanābhedesu pañcasu sukhadukkhadvayassa ekantena ajhānaṅgabhāvadassanatthaṃ jhānaṅgaṭṭhāne niddiṭṭhattā, satipi vā jhānaṅgavohāre vedanābhedadvayassa ekantena jhānapaccayattābhāvadassanatthaṃ. Upekkhācittekaggatānaṃ pana yadipi jhānapaccayattābhāvo atthi, najhānapaccayabhāvo pana natthīti sabbānipi satta jhānaṅgānīti ettha gahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Tattha ‘‘sabbānipī’’ti vacanaṃ sabbakusalādibhedasaṅgaṇhanatthaṃ, na pana sabbacittuppādagatasaṅgaṇhanatthanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yesaṃ pana ‘‘ṭhapetvā dvipañcaviññāṇe vedanāttaya’’nti pāṭho, tesaṃ yathāvutto vicāro cittekaggatāvaseneva veditabbo.
611 “从何处”或“从任何处”,意思是或正确、或错误。至于“在问分中”等语,虽然在缘的解说里已经通过“从那生起”的把握方式令这个含义得以知晓,但为了表明在问分中是直接就其自身而摄取的,所以才这样说。而“这两种……不可得”,应当知道这是省略了“如其次第”这一说法。不过,在《发趣论注》中说:“这两种——禅那缘和道缘——在无因心中不可得。”那么,这怎么会不矛盾呢?这是就意图而言。这里的意思其实是:这两种缘只是在无因心中不可得,并不是在有因心中不可得;这样说,是为了表明在有因心中并非不可得,而不是为了表明在无因心中不可得。因为这样理解时就可以知道:在无因心中,并没有在一切情况下都阻止任何一者获得。因此,在有寻的无因心中,禅那缘的存在是被认可的。因为在《法集论》的意界等摄无空变中,正是由于那种不可得,禅那才没有被列出;针对那种不可得,才说禅那缘在无因心中也不可得。正如在有因心生起时,寻等对俱生法具有强有力的凝聚为一的作用,也就是审察作用,而在无因心生起时则不是这样。但在这里,即使审察很微弱,只要还有一点点,就不能说它没有助成作用。因此,承认在有寻的无因心中也有禅那缘,而说:“但这两种——禅那缘和道缘——在双五识的无因心中不可得。”所谓缘论,是依据《发趣论》而说的,不是依据《法集论》而说的。巴利
611.Yato tato vāti sammā vā micchā vāti attho. Pañhāvāre panātiādi yadipi paccayaniddese taṃsamuṭṭhānaggahaṇena so attho ñāpito eva, pañhāvāre pana sarūpeneva gahitoti dassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Ete pana dvepi…pe… na labbhanti ‘‘yathāsaṅkhya’’nti vacanaseso veditabbo. Paṭṭhānaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘dvepi jhānamaggapaccayā ahetukacittesu na labbhantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tenassa kathamavirodhoti? Adhippāyavasena . Ayañhi tattha adhippāyo – ahetukacittesu eva jhānamaggapaccayā na labbhanti, na sahetukacittesūti sahetukacittesu alābhābhāvadassanatthaṃ vuttaṃ, na ahetukacittesu lābhābhāvadassanatthanti. Evañhi atthe gayhamāne ahetukacittesu katthaci kassaci lābho na nivāritoti viññāyati. Tena savitakkāhetukacittesu jhānapaccayassa sambhavo anuññāto hoti. Tattha hi yena alābhena dhammasaṅgaṇiyaṃ manodhātuādīnaṃ saṅgahasuññatavāresu jhānaṃ na uddhaṭaṃ, taṃ alābhaṃ sandhāya jhānapaccayassapi ahetukacittesu alābho vutto. Yathā hi sahetukacittuppādesu vitakkādīnaṃ sahajāte saṅkaḍḍhitvā ekattagatabhāvakaraṇaṃ upanijjhāyanabyāpāro balavā, na tathā ahetukacittuppādesūti. Idha pana dubbalampi upanijjhāyanaṃ yadi kiñcimattampi atthi, na tena upakārakatā na hotīti savitakkāhetukacittesupi jhānapaccayaṃ anujānantena ‘‘ete pana dvepi jhānamaggapaccayā dvipañcaviññāṇāhetukacittesu na labbhantī’’ti (paṭṭhā. aṭṭha. paccayuddesavaṇṇanā) vuttaṃ. Paccayakathā nāma samantapaṭṭhānanissitā, na dhammasaṅgaṇīnissitāti.
612 612. 平等而不乖违,正确地,或者说由于与各种方式相应、达到同一状态而具有助成作用,这就是相应缘。那么,什么是与各种方式相应呢?回答说:“所谓同一依处、同一所缘、同一生起、同一灭尽。”其中,如果只说“那些同一依处者是相应的”,那么对于不可分离的色法来说,一个大种是其余大种及所造色的依止缘,因此它们就成了同一依处;或者,如果认为眼等所依的大种“它们有一个依处,这些(法)依止于其中,所以是同一依处”,那就会导致它们也成为相应的。为了防止这个过失,所以举出“同一所缘”。如果说“那些同一依处且同一所缘者是相应的”,那么对于临终附近的领受、推度等心,也会导致它们成为相应的,所以举出“同一生起”。如果说“那些同一依处、同一所缘、同一生起者是相应的”,那么,不同灭尽者是否也具有这三种特征,还是只有同一灭尽者呢?在这样考察时,为了显示只有同一灭尽者才具有这样的特征,所以说了“同一灭尽”。巴利
612. Samaṃ avisamaṃ, sammā, saha vā pakārehi yuttatāya ekībhāvūpagamena viya upakārakatā sampayuttapaccayatā. Kā pana sā pakārehi yuttatāti āha ‘‘ekavatthukaekārammaṇaekuppādekanirodhasaṅkhātenā’’ti. Tattha ye ekavatthukā, te sampayuttāti ettake vuccamāne avinibbhogarūpesu ekaṃ mahābhūtaṃ sesamahābhūtupādārūpānaṃ nissayapaccayo hoti, tena tāni ekavatthukāni, cakkhādinissayabhūtāni vā bhūtāni ekaṃ vatthu etesu nissitanti ekavatthukānīti kappentassa tesaṃ sampayuttatāpatti siyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ ekārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ. Ye ekavatthukā, ekārammaṇā ca, te sampayuttāti evampi cutiāsannānaṃ sampaṭicchanasantīraṇādīnaṃ sampayuttatā āpajjeyyāti ekuppādaggahaṇaṃ. Ye ekavatthukekārammaṇekuppādā, te sampayuttāti kiṃ pana nānānirodhāpi evaṃtividhalakkhaṇā honti, udāhu ekanirodhā evāti vicāraṇāyaṃ ekanirodhā eva evaṃlakkhaṇā hontīti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘ekanirodhā’’ti vuttaṃ.
如果反过来讲,说“同一灭尽的法是相应的”,那么在同一刹那灭尽的色法和非色法之间,也会变成有相应关系,所以才说“同一生起”。但即便如此,不相离色也有同一生起、同一灭尽,这样它们也会被当成是相应的。为了防止这个过失,就加上“同一所缘”。那些成为同一所缘、又同一生起、同一灭尽的法才是相应的,而这个道理只适用于同一依处的法,不适用于不同依处的法,为了说明这一点,就加上“同一依处”。那些同一依处、同一所缘、同一生起、同一灭尽的法才是相应的,这个“同一依处”是针对五蕴有的情况来说的。但在无色界里,依处根本就不存在,哪里还有机会说同一依处呢?巴利
Paṭilomato vā ekanirodhā sampayuttāti vuccamāne ekasmiṃ khaṇe nirujjhamānānaṃ rūpārūpadhammānaṃ sampayuttatā āpajjeyyāti ‘‘ekuppādā’’ti vuttaṃ. Evampi avinibbhogarūpānaṃ atthi ekuppādekanirodhatāti tesampi sampayuttatā āpajjeyyāti tannivāraṇatthaṃ ekārammaṇaggahaṇaṃ. Ye ekārammaṇā hutvā ekuppādekanirodhā, te sampayuttāti ayañca nayo ekavatthukesu eva labbhati, na nānāvatthukesūti dassanatthaṃ ekavatthukaggahaṇaṃ. Ye ekavatthukekārammaṇekuppādekanirodhā, te sampayuttāti pañcavokārabhavāpekkhāya cetaṃ ekavatthukaggahaṇaṃ. Āruppe pana vatthuyeva natthīti kuto ekavatthukaggahaṇassa avasaro.
613 613. 虽然诸法是相互关联而同类相应的,但由于它们彼此不相应、不相混杂、各各不同,所以能提供助益,这就是不相应缘。而且,这种不相应性不能像相应缘那样,从互为缘与缘生法的角度来理解,而应当各别看待。因为在相应缘那里,诸无色法因种类相同而平等共处;而在这里,色法与无色法因种类不同而彼此有别。因此说“虽相应……不相应缘”。并非对于不依依处、俱生、后生而相应的色等法,即使它们不相应而以所缘等方式提供助益,就说不相应缘存在。比如,依照“依处以不相应缘对诸蕴为缘,俱生善蕴对心所生色为缘,后生善蕴对此先前已生之身以不相应缘为缘”等说法,依处以及依靠俱生、后生之力而相应的,才有不相应缘的状态;不相合的则没有。如果问:既然如此,为什么不说色对色有不相应缘呢?回答:色与色虽然不可分离,但就像它们之间不存在相应一样,也不存在不相应,所以它们没有不相应缘。正如所说:“由四种情况而有相应,由四种情况而有不相应。”因为对于能相应的无色法对色,以及色对它们,可能会生起是否有相应的疑惑,所以才说它们彼此之间有不相应缘。然而,色对色并没有相应关系,因此不说它们有不相应缘。巴利
613. Aññamaññaṃ sambandhatāya yuttānampi samānānaṃ vippayuttabhāvena visaṃsaṭṭhatāya nānattūpagamena upakārakatā vippayuttapaccayatā. Ayañca vippayuttatā na sampayuttapaccayatāya viya aññamaññaṃ paccayapaccayuppannadhammavasena gahetabbā, atha kho visuṃyeva. Tattha hi arūpadhammānaṃ samānajātiyatāya samadhuraṃ, idha rūpārūpadhammānaṃ vijātiyatāya vidhuraṃ. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yuttānampi…pe… vippayuttapaccayatā’’ti. Na hi vatthusahajātapacchājātavasena ayuttānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ ārammaṇādibhāvena upakārakānaṃ vippayuttānampi vippayuttapaccayatā atthi. Yathā hi ‘‘vatthu khandhānaṃ vippayuttapaccayena paccayo, sahajātā kusalā khandhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ, pacchājātā kusalā khandhā purejātassa imassa kāyassa vippayuttapaccayena paccayo’’tiādivacanato (paṭṭhā. 1.1.434) vatthunā, sahajātapacchājātavasena ca yuttānaṃ atthi vippayuttapaccayabhāvo, na evaṃ ayuttānaṃ atthīti. Yadi evaṃ rūpānaṃ rūpehi kasmā vippayuttapaccayo na vuttoti? Rūpānaṃ rūpehi satipi avinibbhoge sampayogo viya vippayogo (dhātu. 3) natthīti na tesaṃ vippayuttapaccayatā. Vuttañhi ‘‘catūhi sampayogo, catūhi vippayogo’’ti. Sampayujjamānānañhi arūpānaṃ rūpehi, rūpānañca tehi siyā sampayogāsaṅkāti tesaṃ aññamaññaṃ vippayuttapaccayatā vuttā. Rūpānaṃ pana rūpehi sampayogo natthīti na tesaṃ vippayuttapaccayatā vuttā.
有色法对无色法,以及无色法对有色法——这里所说的“无色”,应当理解为指四种蕴。因为在无色法中,只有这四种蕴对俱生和前生的色法构成不相应缘。而涅槃,就像它不作为无色法的相应缘一样,也不作为色法的不相应缘。因为经中说:“由四种情况而有相应,由四种情况而有不相应。”所以,在无色法中,只有四种蕴具有不相应缘的性质。在《问分》中也这样说:“俱生的善蕴以不相应缘为缘,对心所生起的色法……”等等。而“有色法”这个词,应当理解为指心所依处以及眼等处。因为在色法中,只有这六种依处才是无色蕴的不相应缘。色处等虽然是所缘法,也是不相应法,但它们并不是不相应缘。什么原因呢?因为对它们不存在“是否相应”的疑惑。无色蕴生起时,就像从眼等依处内部冒出来一样,因此可能会产生这样的疑惑:“这些究竟与那些是相应的,还是不相应的?”然而,所缘法对于依止依处而生起的法来说,仅仅作为所缘而已,所以对它们没有“是否相应”的疑惑,因此它们不是不相应缘。正因为存在“是否相应”的疑惑,依处才成为不相应缘。这在《问分》中也说过:“依处以不相应缘为缘,对善蕴……依处以不相应缘为缘,对不善蕴……眼处以不相应缘为缘,对眼识界……”等等。应当如此了知这不相应缘。这不相应缘应了知为五种:从俱生和后生来说,以善对无记,同样以不善对无记;从俱生、前生和后生来说,以无记对无记;从依处前生来说,以无记对善,同样以无记对不善——善根一种、不善根一种、无记根三种。巴利
Rūpino dhammā arūpīnaṃ dhammānaṃ, arūpinopi rūpīnanti ettha arūpaggahaṇaṃ catunnaṃ khandhānaṃ vasena veditabbaṃ. Arūpadhammesu hi cattāro eva khandhā sahajātapurejātānaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ vippayuttapaccayā honti. Nibbānaṃ pana yathā arūpadhammānaṃ sampayuttapaccayo na hoti, evaṃ rūpadhammānaṃ vippayuttapaccayo na hoti. ‘‘Catūhi sampayogo, catūhi vippayogo’’ti (dhātu. 3) hi vuttaṃ. Tasmā arūpadhammesu catunnaṃ khandhānameva vippayuttapaccayatā. Vuttañca pañhāvāre ‘‘sahajātā kusalā khandhā cittasamuṭṭhānānaṃ rūpānaṃ vippayuttapaccayena paccayo’’tiādi (paṭṭhā. 1.1.434). Rūpino dhammāti cetaṃ hadayavatthuno ceva cakkhādīnañca vasena veditabbaṃ. Rūpadhammesu hi cha vatthūniyeva arūpakkhandhānaṃ vippayuttapaccayo. Rūpāyatanādayo pana ārammaṇadhammā kiñcāpi vippayuttadhammā, vippayuttapaccayo pana na honti. Kiṃ kāraṇā? Sampayogāsaṅkābhāvato. Arūpakkhandhā hi cakkhādīnaṃ vatthūnaṃ abbhantarato nikkhamantā viya uppajjantīti siyā tattha āsaṅkā ‘‘kiṃ nu kho ime imehi sampayuttā, udāhu vippayuttā’’ti? Ārammaṇadhammā pana vatthusannissayena uppajjamānānaṃ ārammaṇamattaṃ hontīti natthi tesu sampayogāsaṅkāti na te vippayuttā. Sampayogāsaṅkāsabbhāvato vatthūniyeva vippayuttapaccayā honti. Vuttampi cetaṃ pañhāvāre ‘‘vatthu kusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ vippayuttapaccayena paccayo, vatthu akusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ, cakkhāyatanaṃ cakkhuviññāṇadhātuyā’’tiādi. Svāyaṃ vippayuttapaccayo ‘‘sahajātapacchājātato kusalena abyākataṃ, tathā akusalena abyākataṃ, sahajātapurejātapacchājātato abyākatena abyākataṃ, vatthupurejātato abyākatena kusalaṃ, tathā akusalanti kusalamūlamekaṃ, akusalamūlamekaṃ, abyākatamūlāni tīṇī’’ti pañcavidho veditabbo.
614 “以现在相”是指以现在的自性。借此遮止了“我有已作的恶业,有为自己利益而行的人”等语中所说的、以已生起而可被认知为其相的那种“有性”。虽然也有令生的作用,但这里以支持作用为主,是以“有性”来作助益,所以说“以支持性”。应当知道,这种支持性,是依处、所缘、俱生等共同以“有性”来作助益。为了用巴利圣典本身显示“已列出七种纲目”所说的意义,所以说“如所说”等。其中,以“四无色蕴”等,是依俱生显示有缘;以“眼处”等,是依前生显示;以“依止某色”等,是依俱生和前生显示。这样,这段文句就是依俱生有缘和前生有缘而来的。巴利
614.Paccuppannalakkhaṇenāti paccuppannasabhāvena. Tena ‘‘atthi me pāpakammaṃ kataṃ, atthi puggalo attahitāya paṭipanno’’ti (pu. pa. catukkauddesa 24) ca evamādīsu vuttaṃ nibbattitūpalabbhamānatālakkhaṇaṃ atthibhāvaṃ nivāreti. Satipi janakatte upatthambhakattappadhānā atthibhāvena upakārakatāti āha ‘‘upatthambhakattenā’’ti. Idañca upatthambhakattaṃ vatthārammaṇasahajātādīnaṃ sādhāraṇaṃ atthibhāvena upakārakattanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Sattadhā mātikā nikkhittā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ pāḷiyā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘yathāhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ‘‘cattāro khandhā arūpino’’tiādinā sahajātavasena atthipaccayodassito , ‘‘cakkhāyatana’’ntiādinā purejātavasena, ‘‘yaṃ rūpaṃ nissāyā’’tiādinā sahajātapurejātavasena. Evamayaṃ pāṭho sahajātapurejātaatthipaccayavaseneva āgato.
在其他地方,为了说明“从那里又以另一种方式而来”,说了“然而在问论部分”等话。这通过后生、食、根等方式,也阐明了它是有缘的状态。然而应当知道,在前面的读法中,开示是有余的。如果存在那些法的缘,那么由于它们与那些法一起、在更早或更晚生起的状态中,都不具备俱生等缘的状态,所以食和根也得不到俱生等类别;而那种不存在,应当依照这些法的自性来看待。这个有缘,以十三种方式存在,即:“从俱生而言,善法对善法;从俱生与后生而言,善法对无记法;仅从俱生而言,善法对善法与无记法”——这是善根三种,不善根同样。然而从俱生、前生、后生、食、根而言,无记法对无记法;从依处与所缘的前生而言,无记法对善法,对不善法同样。从俱生与前生而言,善法与无记法对善法;从俱生、前生、后生、食、根而言,善法与无记法对无记法;从俱生与前生而言,不善法与无记法对不善法;从俱生、前生、后生、食、根而言,不善法与无记法对无记法。简要地说,有缘以善、不善、异熟、作用、色这五种方式存在,涅槃不是有缘。因为凡是因有性之不存在而不能作助益,获得有性后才作助益的,那才是有缘。涅槃对于以涅槃为所缘的诸法,并不是先以自身无有的状态不能作助益、后来获得有性才作助益;再者,有缘性是就与生等有为法相关联的诸法而言,是与那种以无有状态作助益相违的作助益状态,涅槃并不属此,因此涅槃不是有缘。巴利
Aññattha pana tato aññathāpi āgatoti dassetuṃ ‘‘pañhāvāre panā’’tiādimāha. Taṃ tena pacchājātāhārindriyavasenāpi atthipaccayattaṃ vibhāveti. Purimapāṭhe pana sāvasesā desanā katāti veditabbaṃ. Sati ca yesaṃ paccayā honti, tehi ekato, puretaraṃ, pacchā ca uppannabhāve sahajātādipaccayattābhāvato āhāro, indriyañca sahajātādibhedaṃ na labhanti, tadabhāvo ca tesaṃ dhammasabhāvavasena daṭṭhabbo. Svāyaṃ atthipaccayo ‘‘sahajātato kusalena kusalaṃ, sahajātapacchājātato kusalena abyākataṃ, sahajātato eva kusalena kusalābyākatanti kusalamūlā tayo, tathā akusalamūlā. Sahajātapurejātapacchājātāhārindriyato pana abyākatena abyākataṃ, vatthārammaṇapurejātato abyākatena kusalaṃ, tathā akusalaṃ. Sahajātapurejātato kusalañca abyākatañca kusalassa, sahajātapurejātapacchājātāhārindriyato kusalañca abyākatañca abyākatassa, sahajātapurejātato akusalañca abyākatañca akusalassa, sahajātapurejātapacchājātāhārindriyato akusalañca abyākatañca abyākatassā’’ti evaṃ terasavidho. Saṅkhepena kusalākusalavipākakiriyarūpavasena pañcavidho atthipaccayo, na nibbānaṃ. Yo hi atthibhāvābhāvena anupakārako atthibhāvaṃ labhitvā upakārako hoti, so atthipaccayo hoti. Nibbānañca nibbānārammaṇānaṃ na attano atthibhāvābhāvena anupakārakaṃ hutvā atthibhāvalābhena upakārakaṃ hotīti, uppādādiyuttānaṃ vā natthibhāvopakārakatāviruddho upakārakabhāvo atthipaccayatāti, na nibbānaṃ atthipaccayo hoti.
615 对于以所缘等为条件而现起的众多触等法来说,它们不可能同时并存,所以当某一个触等集合存在时,第二个就不会有;而当它不存在时,第二个才会有。因此,它是通过这种“不存在”的方式提供帮助,这就是无有缘性。虽然先前那些心的不存在状态也存在,但并不是通过那种不存在状态来帮助它们;只有紧接着生起的心,因为无法以自己存在的状态获得生起的机会,就像是以不存在的状态让出机会一样来提供帮助,所以说“通过给予生起机会来提供帮助”。这里说的“现前者”,就是指现在者。巴利
615. Ārammaṇe phusanādivasena pavattamānānaṃ phassādīnaṃ anekesaṃ sahabhāvo natthīti ekasmiṃ phassādisamudāye sati dutiyo na hoti, asati pana hotīti tena natthibhāvena upakārakatā natthipaccayatā. Satipi purimataracittānaṃ natthibhāve na tena tāni natthibhāvena upakārakāni, anantarameva pana attano atthibhāvena pavattiokāsaṃ alabhamānaṃ natthibhāvena okāsaṃ dadamānaṃ viya upakārakaṃ hotīti ‘‘pavattiokāsadānena upakārakā’’ti āha. Paṭuppannānanti paccuppannānaṃ.
“它们就是如此”这句话,是用来说明:无有缘和离去缘这两种法,从法的本质上来说并没有差别。即便如此,仅仅因为“不存在”这一点而起到帮助作用、给出机会,这就是无有缘的性质;对于那些由于自性未离去而未现行的法,因为自性离去而起到帮助作用,这就是离去缘的性质。而“无有”是指灭尽之后什么都不存在,“离去”是指已经达到了灭尽,这就是它们两者的区别。巴利
‘‘Te evā’’ti etena natthivigatapaccayānaṃ dhammato visesābhāvamāha. Evaṃ santepi abhāvamattena upakārakatā okāsadānaṃ natthipaccayatā, sabhāvāvigamena appavattamānānaṃ sabhāvavigamena upakārakatā vigatapaccayatā. Natthitā ca nirodhānantarā suññatā, vigatatā nirodhappattatāti ayametesaṃ viseso.
“而有缘法本身就是”里的“而”字,是总括的意思。它要说明的是:并非只有无有缘和离去缘在法性上没有差别,有缘和未离去缘同样如此。即使这些缘在法性上没有差别,但以“存在”的状态、以自性存在而提供帮助,就是有缘性;以自性尚未离去、尚未达到灭尽而提供帮助,就是未离去缘性。所以,即使在法性没有差别的情况下,也应当了解诸缘的状态有差别。因为世尊如实彻知了一切法的功能差别之后,才宣说了二十四缘的差别。因此,应当对法主生起信心,生起“这些法有如此差别”的闻所成智,再通过思所成智和修所成智,为体证它们而努力修行。巴利
Atthipaccayadhammā eva cāti ca-saddo sampiṇḍanattho. Tena na kevalaṃ natthivigatapaccayā eva dhammato avisiṭṭhā, atha kho atthiavigatapaccayāpīti imamatthaṃ dīpeti. Yadipime paccayā dhammato avisiṭṭhā, tathāpi atthitāya sasabhāvatāya upakārakatā atthipaccayatā, sabhāvāvigamena nirodhassa appattiyā upakārakatā avigatapaccayatāti paccayabhāvaviseso dhammāvisesepi veditabbo. Dhammānañhi samatthatāvisesaṃ sabbaṃ yāthāvato abhisambujjhitvā bhagavatā catuvīsatipaccayavisesā vuttāti dhammassāmimhi saddhāya ‘‘evaṃ visesā ete dhammā’’ti sutamayañāṇaṃ uppādetvā cintābhāvanāmayehi tadabhisamayāya yogo karaṇīyo.
在这里,所缘缘、无间缘、等无间缘、亲依止缘、前生缘、习行缘、相应缘、无有缘、离去缘,只是非色法的缘;后生缘只是色法的缘;其余十四种缘则是色法与非色法两者的缘。巴利
Ettha ca ārammaṇaanantarasamanantaraupanissayapurejātaāsevanasampayuttanatthivigatapaccayā arūpadhammānaṃyeva, pacchājātapaccayo rūpadhammānaṃyeva, itare cuddasa rūpārūpadhammānaṃ.
因缘、无间缘、等无间缘、习行缘、后生缘、业缘、异熟缘、禅那缘、道缘、相应缘、无有缘、离去缘,这些只是非色法的缘;前生缘只是色法的缘。在这两类当中,除了所缘缘和亲依止缘,其余的都归入上述两类;而所缘缘和亲依止缘这两种,也可以是概念法的自性。巴利
Hetuanantarasamanantarāsevanapacchājātakammavipākajhānamaggasampayuttanatthivigatapaccayā arūpadhammā eva, purejātapaccayo rūpameva, ubhayaṃ ārammaṇūpanissaye ṭhapetvā sesā, te dve paññattisabhāvāpi honti.
无间缘、等无间缘、习行缘、无有缘、离去缘,这些只是过去的。所缘缘、所缘增上缘、所缘亲依止缘,通于三时,也离于时。业缘依过去和现在,属于两种时。其余十五种只是现在的。巴利
Anantarasamanantarāsevananatthivigatapaccayā atītā eva. Ārammaṇārammaṇādhipatiārammaṇūpanissayā tikālikā, kālavinimuttā ca. Kammapaccayo atītapaccuppannavasena dvikāliko. Sesā pañcadasa paccuppannāva.
同样地,无间缘、等无间缘、无间亲依止缘、本性亲依止缘、习行缘、异刹那业缘、无有缘、离去缘,这些缘只是能生的,不是支持的。后生缘只是支持的,不是能生的。其余的缘既是能生的,也是支持的。这一差别也应当了知。巴利
Tathā anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayapakatūpanissayāsevanapaccayā, nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayo, natthivigatapaccayā cāti ime paccayā janakā eva, na upatthambhakā. Pacchājātapaccayo upatthambhako eva, na janako . Sesā janakā ca upatthambhakā cāti ayampi viseso veditabbo.
无明缘行这一句的注释巴利
Avijjāpaccayāsaṅkhārapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
616 “于诸缘中”是简别中的处格。两种,即按两种方式。多种,即依所缘缘等分为十七种。巴利
616.Paccayesūti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Duvidhā dvippakārena. Anekadhāti sattarasadhā ārammaṇapaccayādivasena.
以神通心,是指与被称为他心智、宿住随念智、未来分智这些神通共同生起的心。在了知有痴心的时候,是指了知他人和自己的有痴之心的时候。凡是以无明为先导的不善活动,一切灾祸,全都以痴为根源;通过显示无明的过患,为了超越无明而希求还灭,这就是这里的意思。对于那两种福行,因被无明所迷惑,是指被遮蔽了生存过患的无明所迷惑。那些福,就是前面所说的欲界福和色界福。它们以亲依止缘为缘,这就是其中的关联。巴利
Abhiññācittenāti cetopariyapubbenivāsaanāgataṃsañāṇasaṅkhātāhi abhiññāhi sahagatacittena. Samohacittajānanakāleti paresaṃ, attano ca samohassa cittassa jānanakāle. Avijjāpubbaṅgamā akusalappavattiyo yā kāci vipattiyo, sabbā tā mohamūlikāti ca avijjāya ādīnavadassanena avijjāsamatikkamatthāya vivaṭṭābhipatthanāyāti attho. Dvinnampi tesaṃ puññābhisaṅkhārānaṃ. Avijjāsammūḷhattāti bhavādīnavappaṭicchādikāya avijjāya sammūḷhattā. Tāneva puññānīti tāneva yathāvuttāni kāmāvacararūpāvacarapuññāni. Upanissayapaccayena paccayo hotīti sambandho.
“贪等”是指贪、见、疑、掉举、忧。因为与无明相应,所以应当知道:在贪等令人贪著味染的时候,贪等的生起是以无明为所缘而发生的。若把味染看得重要,就应当把它和与贪、见相应的无明连接起来理解。味染就是贪,与它不相离的就是见;因此应当知道,单凭“味染”这个说法,就已经说明了把上述无明看得重要的见。再者,经典中以贪等本身的具体内容来说时,就显示了与它们相应的行以无明为所缘等。“不见过患者”,就是在杀生等事上不见过患的人。为了统摄无明之无所缘者、第一速行,以及所缘、增上、无间等缘语中未说到的和已说到的一切,所以经文说“任何”。巴利
Rāgādīnanti rāgadiṭṭhivicikicchuddhaccadomanassānaṃ. Avijjāsampayuttattā rāgādīnaṃ rāgādiassādanakālesu avijjaṃ ārabbha uppatti veditabbā. Garuṃ katvā assādanaṃ rāgadiṭṭhisampayuttāya eva avijjāya yojetabbaṃ. Assādanañca rāgo, tadaviyuttā ca diṭṭhīti assādanavacaneneva yathāvuttaṃ avijjaṃ garuṃ karontī diṭṭhi ca vuttāti veditabbā. Rāgādīhi ca pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato vuttehi taṃsampayuttasaṅkhārassa avijjārammaṇāditaṃ dasseti. Anādīnavadassāvinoti pāṇātipātādīsu na ādīnavadassino. Avijjāya anārammaṇassa, paṭhamajavanassa ca ārammaṇādhipatianantarādipaccayavacanesu avuttassa, vuttassa ca sabbassa saṅgaṇhanatthaṃ ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti āha.
所谓“按照前面所说的方式”,是指在福行中,依希求超越有的角度所说的那样。巴利
Vuttanayenāti samatikkamabhavapatthanāvasena puññābhisaṅkhāre vuttanayena.
617 “然而,这又怎么说呢?”等等,提问者的意思是:在“以无明为缘,诸行生起”这句话里,如果认定“确实生起”,这不合理,因为如果其他诸缘没有和合,诸行就不会生起。同样,如果认定“唯是诸行”,也不合理。为什么?因为也应该期望其他缘所生之法由此生起。由于这句话本身含有确定之意,即使采取“唯以无明为缘,诸行生起”这种确定说法,也同样有这个过失。为什么?因为贪等、业、因、取、依处、所缘、作意等其他诸缘也确实可得。其中,“单一”是指无伴,也就是不依赖其他因。其他诸缘也是共作因。想在此指出过失的提问者问难,阿阇梨知道后说“然而,这又怎么说呢?”在此,关于无明离缘与具缘这两种情况,究竟该说什么呢?那些责难是不圆满的,你先把剩下的说出来吧。堕入单一因论,这是所说的过失的牵连。因为单一因论是所不喜欢的,由于一切处一切时都能生起,以及成为同一类无差别,所以(有此过失)。巴利
617.Kiṃ panāyantiādinā codakassa ayamadhippāyo – ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā sambhavantī’’ti ettha sambhavanti evāti avadhāraṇaṃ na yujjati , avasesapaccayasamavāyābhāve saṅkhārānaṃ sambhavābhāvato. Tathā saṅkhārā evāti avadhāraṇampi na yujjati. Kasmā? Aññesañca paccayuppannadhammānaṃ sambhavassa tato icchitabbattā. Vākyassa avadhāraṇaphalattā avijjāpaccayā eva saṅkhārā sambhavantīti avadhāraṇe gayhamānepi ayaṃ doso. Kasmā? Yasmā lobhādikammanidānaupādānavatthārammaṇamanasikārādayo aññepi paccayā labbhantiyevāti. Tattha ekāti asahāyā, kāraṇantaranirapekkhāti attho. Aññepi paccayā sahakārikāraṇabhūtā. Dosamettha vattukāmo codako pucchatīti ñatvā ācariyo āha ‘‘kiṃ panetthā’’ti. Ettha avijjāya paccayantarena rahitabhāve ca sahitabhāve ca kiṃ pana vattabbaṃ, asamattā te codanā, avasiṭṭhañca tāva kathehīti vuttaṃ hoti. Ekakāraṇavādo āpajjatīti dosappasaṅgo vutto. Aniṭṭho hi ekakāraṇavādo sabbattha sabbakālaṃ sambhavāpattito, ekasadisāsabhāvāpattito ca.
因为“一非一”等三种情形都不成立,所以按照剩下的可能,只有在“非一非多”这第四种情形成立时,说明一因一果才有意义,因此并非不合理,而是完全合理。一果不能从一因产生,多果也不能从一因产生;从多因也不能产生一果——这就是这里的关联。巴利
Yasmā ekaṃ na ekatotiādīsu tīsu pakāresu avijjamānesu pārisesena anekato anekamevāti etasmiṃ catutthe eva pakāre vijjamāne ekahetuphaladīpane attho atthi, tasmā na nupapajjati upapajjatiyeva. Ekaṃ phalaṃ ekato natthi, anekampi ekato natthi. Anekatopi ekaṃ phalaṃ no atthīti sambandho.
开示一一因与一一果:所谓“以无明为缘而有诸行”,这是开示单一因;“以行为缘而有识”,这是开示单一果。如此,在各处都作了一一因与一一果的开示。巴利
Ekekahetuphaladīpananti ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ekahetudīpanaṃ, ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti ekaphaladīpananti evaṃ tattha tattha ekekahetuphaladīpanaṃ kataṃ.
随顺所化者,就是随顺所化者的意乐。开示单一之因与单一之果,或是出于导师说法的善巧,或是出于所化众生的意乐。而这两者的原因,在于各处所应说的义理是最胜、明显且不共的。诸佛世尊达到了说法的善巧,对于应说的义理,即使有多种法门可以宣说,也随自己的意乐选取一种来说法,这就是随顺说法善巧。而在其中,用哪种法门能让哪些所化者觉悟,就用那种法门使他们觉悟,这就是随顺所化者的意乐。巴利
Veneyyānaṃ anurūpatoti veneyyānaṃ ajjhāsayassa anurūpato. Ekasseva hetuno, phalassa ca dīpanā satthu desanāvilāsato vā veneyyapuggalānaṃ ajjhāsayato vā. Tadubhayassa panettha kāraṇaṃ tattha tattha desetabbassa atthassa padhānatā, pākaṭatā, asādhāraṇatā ca. Desanāvilāsappattā ca buddhā bhagavanto te desetabbe atthe bahūsupi pariyāyesu labbhamānesu yathārucitaṃ gahetvā dhammaṃ desenti, sā desanāvilāsānurūpatā. Tattha pana yena pariyāyena ye veneyyā bujjhanti, teneva tesaṃ bodhanaṃ, sā veneyyajjhāsayānurūpatā.
依触而确定受,意思是:就像经文里说的“比丘们,缘于乐受之触,生起乐受”等等,以及“缘于眼和诸色而生起眼识,三者和合就是触,以触为缘而有受”等等。也就是说,随顺于乐受之触等、眼触等,来确定乐受等、眼触所生受等。
这段话的意思是:即使眼和诸色等条件相同,但因为触不同,乐受等就不会颠倒错乱;即使诸色和作意等条件相同,但因为眼等接触的不同,眼触所生受等也不会颠倒错乱;即使其他缘都相同,但因为眼触不同,乐受等和眼触所生受等的粗显与微细等就不会混淆。
对于上面所说的触,乐受等作为果报的不颠倒的缘性,就是依受而确定触。或者,通过因和果的差别,来确定果和因的差别,因此在这两方面都有决定性的运作。这就是这里所说的意思。巴利
Yathāphassaṃvedanāvavatthānatoti ‘‘sukhavedanīyaṃ, bhikkhave, phassaṃ paṭicca uppajjati sukhā vedanā’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 4.129), ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; 3.421, 425, 426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-44; 2.4.60; kathā. 465, 467) ca sukhavedanīyaphassādicakkhusamphassādianurūpena sukhavedanādicakkhusamphassajāvedanādīnaṃ vavatthānato. Samānesupi hi cakkhurūpādīsu phassavasena sukhādivipariyāyābhāvato, samānesu rūpamanasikārādīsu cakkhādisaṅghaṭṭanavasena cakkhusamphassajādivipariyāyābhāvato, aññapaccayasāmaññepi cakkhusamphassavasena sukhādicakkhusamphassajādīnaṃ oḷārikasukhumādisaṅkarābhāvato cāti attho. Yathāvuttaphassassa sukhādīnaṃ aviparīto paccayabhāvo eva yathāvedanaṃ phassavavatthānaṃ. Kāraṇaphalavisesena vā phalakāraṇavisesanicchayo hotīti ubhayatthāpi nicchayo pavatthānanti vutto.
“业等”是指业食、时节等,它们是不明显的,因为以痰(药)平息疾病为喻。而痰的稀薄等状态,才是痰本身明显的因。这里要说明的是:无明被显示为诸行的因,这就是上下文的关系。由于经中说“随观乐味者,渴爱增长”,也就是《相应部》所说:“诸比丘,对于会成为结缚的诸法,随观乐味者,渴爱增长;以渴爱为缘有取,以取为缘有有。”这部经已经说到渴爱是行的因,这就是它的意思。再者,为了显示无明也是它的因,所以又说“也由于‘无明集则漏集’的说法”。或者说,作为四种取的渴爱,以及欲漏和见漏,是行的因,它们以无明为因,这已经很明显;但为了显示无明也是行的因,所以通过这两部经来显示无明是诸行的明显之因。“随观乐味者”这句话,显示的是:具有覆藏有的过患这一作用的无明,是渴爱的因。因为无明,所以才造作福行等;由于无明是行的因这一点很明显,所以就说无明的状态本身就是行的因。又因为漏尽者没有诸行,而且福行等的共同因是所依、所缘等,所以应当这样理解:覆藏福有之过患的无明,是福行等的不共因。正是由于这一点,在“无明缘行,行缘识”等处,是以主要性、明显性、不共性这三项原则来说明一一对应的因果关系;而在一切“触缘受,受缘渴爱”等处,则应当理解为:根据所化众生的意乐,教示正法之目的。巴利
Kammādayoti kammaāhārautuādayo apākaṭā semhapaṭikārena rogavūpasamanato. Semhassa mandabhāvādinā ca semhaṃyeva pākaṭaṃ kāraṇaṃ. Ayamidha avijjā saṅkhārānaṃ hetubhāvena dīpitāti sambandho. Assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhatīti vacanatoti ‘‘saṃyojaniyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino taṇhā pavaḍḍhati, taṇhāpaccayā upādānaṃ, upādānapaccayā bhavo’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53) iminā suttena taṇhāya saṅkhārakāraṇabhāvassa vuttattāti attho. Puna tassāpi avijjāya kāraṇanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘avijjāsamudayā āsavasamudayoti ca vacanato’’ti āha . Taṇhā vā caturupādānabhūtā kāmāsavadiṭṭhāsavā ca saṅkhārassa kāraṇanti pākaṭā avijjāhetukāti suttadvayenāpi avijjāya pākaṭaṃ saṅkhārānaṃ kāraṇabhāvameva dasseti. ‘‘Assādānupassino’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.53) hi vacanena bhavādīnavappaṭicchādanakiccā avijjā taṇhāya kāraṇanti dassitā hoti. Yasmā avidvā, tasmā puññābhisaṅkhārādike abhisaṅkharotīti avijjāya saṅkhārakāraṇabhāvassa pākaṭattā aviddasubhāvova saṅkhārakāraṇabhāvena vutto. Khīṇāsavassa saṅkhārābhāvato, asādhāraṇattā ca puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ sādhāraṇakāraṇāni vatthārammaṇādīnīti puññabhavādīnavappaṭicchādikā avijjā puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ asādhāraṇaṃ kāraṇanti vā attho daṭṭhabbo. Eteneva ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā, saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1; mahāva. 1; netti. 24) ettha pana padhānattā, pākaṭattā, asādhāraṇattāti ekekahetuphaladīpanaparihāravacanena sabbattha ‘‘phassapaccayā vedanā, vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’tiādīsu bodhaneyyajjhāsayavasena dhammassa bodhanasaṅkhātaṃ payojanaṃ veditabbaṃ.
618 “一向不可爱果”这句话,是用来说明它与无明相违;“有过失”这句话,则是用来说明它与无明不同类。因为福行和不动行具有可爱异熟和无可指责的本性,所以与无明相违,并且与它不同类。接着“怎么会不合理”等话是回应,用来说明所谓“一向不可爱果”等作为原因的教示并不是绝对的。这里的意思是:你用“既然如此”等话提出的责难,就异熟来说是对的,因为带来不可爱异熟的因不会产生可爱之果,带来可爱异熟的因也不会产生不可爱之果。然而,这里说的是缘所生法与缘性相法之间的法性决定,而在这一点上,由于这种决定性有多种多样,并没有固定不变的规则,所以说“相违”等。巴利
618.‘‘Ekantāniṭṭhaphalāyā’’ti etena viruddhabhāvaṃ, ‘‘sāvajjāyā’’ti etena vijātiyabhāvaṃ avijjāya joteti. Puññāneñjābhisaṅkhārā hi iṭṭhavipākatāya, anavajjasabhāvatāya ca tassā viruddhā, vijātiyā cāti. Kathaṃ na yujjissatītiādi samādhānaṃ, tena yvāyaṃ ekantāniṭṭhaphalatādihetupadeso, tassa anekantikataṃ dasseti. Ayaṃ hettha adhippāyo – yāyaṃ tayā codanā ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādinā katā, sā yuttā vipākaṃ pati. Na hi aniṭṭhavepakkaṃ kāraṇaṃ iṭṭhaṃ phalati, iṭṭhavepakkaṃ vā aniṭṭhaṃ. Yasmā panettha paccayuppannadhammānaṃ paccayabhāvalakkhaṇadhammānaṃ dhammatā adhippetā, tatra cāyaṃ niyamo natthi vicittarūpattā tassāti. Tenāha ‘‘viruddho cā’’tiādi.
这里,“诸法”指具有自性之法。“处”指状态。因此,“处相违”就是与存在性相违。不过有些论师说是“结生等之处”。若这样,那么“前心是后心的处相违缘”这句话就不能一概成立了。因为对有分来说,有分也是无间缘;对速行来说,速行也是无间缘;而工巧等心并没有结生等之处,所以那不是这里所要表达的意思。业对色是自性相违缘,因为名与色相违,有所缘与无所缘等也相违。乳等对酪等,是因为甘味、酸味等自性相违。光明以不识别的作用,对具有识别作用的识,是自性相违缘。糖等以不迷醉的作用,对具有迷醉作用的漏,也是自性相违缘。巴利
Tattha dhammānanti sabhāvadhammānaṃ. Ṭhānanti avaṭṭhānaṃ. Tasmā ṭhānaviruddhoti atthitāviruddho. Keci pana ‘‘paṭisandhiādīniṭhānānī’’ti vadanti. Evaṃ sati ‘‘purimacittaṃ pacchimacittassa ṭhānaviruddho paccayo’’ti nayidaṃ ekantikaṃ siyā. Bhavaṅgampi hi bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayo, javanaṃ javanassa, na ca sippādīnaṃ paṭisandhiādiṭṭhānaṃ atthi, tasmā na taṃ idha adhippetaṃ. Kammaṃ rūpassa namanaruppanavirodhā, sārammaṇānārammaṇādivirodhā ca sabhāvaviruddho paccayo . Khīrādīni dadhiādīnaṃ madhurambilarasādisabhāvavirodhā. Avijānanakicco āloko vijānanakiccassa viññāṇassa. Amadanakiccā ca guḷādayo madanakiccassa āsavassa.
“牛毛、羊毛顺逆等”里面,说到“牛毛、羊毛顺逆”时,应当知道是指草,而“绵羊”是指红色的母山羊。“角”是指芦苇。“酪、芝麻粉、糖球”是指药草。“苔藓”是指稻秧。“母骡”是指驴骡。像这样等等,都由“等”这个字涵盖进去。因为无明并不只是果报,所以,即使是有苦果报的无明,作为有不苦果报的福行、不动行的缘,也并非不合理。这就是其中的意思。巴利
Golomāvilomādītiādīsu golomāvilomāni dubbāya, avīti ca rattā eḷakā veditabbā. Visāṇaṃ sarassa. Dadhitilapiṭṭhaguḷāni bhūtiṇakassa. Sevālaṃ taṇḍuleyyakassa, kharavaḷavā assatarassāti evamādi ādi-saddena saṅgahito. Yasmā vipākā eva na, tasmā dukkhavipākāyapi avijjāya adukkhavipākānaṃ puññāneñjābhisaṅkhārānaṃ paccayattaṃ na na yujjatīti attho.
即使无明并非那些行的异熟,但由于它本身带有过失,所以它只作为与它不相违、与它相似的非福行的缘,而不是其他行的缘。为了阻止这种责难,所以说:“相违与不相违,相似与不相似,诸法的缘已成立。”因此,为了使这个含义清楚明了,便说出了“如是此无明”等话。巴利
Tadavipākattepi sāvajjatāya tadaviruddhānaṃ, taṃsadisānañca apuññābhisaṅkhārānameva paccayo, na itaresanti etassa pasaṅgassa nivāraṇatthaṃ ‘‘viruddho cāviruddho ca, sadisāsadiso tathā. Dhammānaṃ paccayo siddho’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmā tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ karonto ‘‘iti ayaṃ avijjā’’tiādimāha.
619 不取“在一切处,诸蕴的坏灭就是死”这句话为死没。这里所说的“死”,是指在各个存在处等当中,色等诸蕴那被称为“死”的最终坏灭,而不能如实了知这一点。“有情”是指实际存在的有情。转移到另一个身体,就是与另一个身体结合。巴利
619.Sabbattha khandhānaṃ bhedo maraṇanti cutiṃ aggaṇhantoti idha cuti nāma tattha tattha bhavādīsu rūpādīnaṃ khandhānaṃ maraṇasaññito carimo bhedoti yāthāvato ajānanto. Sattassa sato vijjamānasseva. Dehantarasaṅkamanaṃ aññena kāyena samāgamo.
“在一切处诸蕴的显现”,是指在各个存在处等当中,诸蕴最初生起。“新身体的显现”,这里是指舍弃衰老的身体之后,属于来世的新身体生起。就像有些人所说的那样:巴利
Sabbattha khandhānaṃ pātubhāvoti tattha tattha bhavādīsu khandhānaṃ paṭhamābhinibbatti. Navasarīrapātubhāvoti idha jiṇṇassa sarīrassa nikkhepe paralokapariyāpannassa navakāyassa uppādo. Yatheke vadanti –
“ 就像人扔掉破旧的衣服,
人会去拿其他新衣;
于此弃舍衰老之身,
如是执取崭新之自体。”巴利
‘‘Vatthāni jiṇṇāni yathā pahāya, Navāni gaṇhāti naro parāni; Nikkhippa dehaṃ idha jiṇṇamevaṃ, Gaṇhāti attābhinavaṃ sukhesī’’ti.
这个“有情”,指的就是这个“我”——被认定为所有者、居住者、造作者和感受者。“有情死去”“有情投生”也是同样的道理。在这三个地方,“等”这个字涵盖了自在天所造、梵天所造等各种说法。巴利
Ayaṃ sattoti ayamattā, yo sāmī, nivāsī, kārako, vedako cāti adhippeto. Sattomarati, satto upapajjatīti etthāpi eseva nayo. Tīsupi ṭhānesu ādi-saddena issarakuttabrahmakuttādivikappanaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
自性相,就是恼坏、领纳等作用,或者就是坚硬、触碰等自身的性质。共相,就是无常等。在诸行中执取我、我所,意思是在色等诸法里,把其中一部分执取为我,把另一部分执取为我所。巴利
Sabhāvalakkhaṇanti’ruppanānubhavanādiṃ, kakkhaḷaphusanādisabhāvameva vā. Sāmaññalakkhaṇanti aniccatādiṃ. Saṅkhāre attato attaniyatoti rūpādīsu ekaccaṃ attato, tadaññaṃ attaniyato.
有人认为“我”能知,就像迦毗罗派等所主张的那样;有人认为“我”不能知,就像迦那陀派和邪命外道等所主张的那样。因为迦那陀派也认为,从自性上说,“我”并不能知;只有当它与觉性这一功德结合时,才能知。所谓“他自己做,也让别人做”,意思是:那个在别处感受苦乐的就是他本人,他自己造作福业和非福业,也让别人去造作,而不是另有一个人在做。所谓“使成就”,是指通过产生二微尘等,以及随意愿使之圆满。所谓“他”,就是指被执为自我的有情。所谓“具根者”,就是具备眼等诸根,以此说明六处的生起运作。这一切都是为了让执持邪见的人明白:依缘而起的无明等法,各自完成自己的作用后,他便迷惑了——正是从这个角度才这样说。就像用不可切断的线穿过不可破坏的摩尼宝珠一样,前后确定不移,这就是“决定”;由决定,或者说决定本身就是“结合”“会合”,称为“决定结合”。依这种决定结合,在诸有中成熟,达到人、天、鸟等状态,就是“决定结合之有成熟”。他们又解释说:依决定、结合,以及被称为“有”的自性而成熟,达到种种不同的状态,这就是“决定结合之有成熟”的意思。巴利
Attā jānāti vāti vikappeti kāpilādayo viya. Na jānāti vāti kāṇādājīvikādayo viya. Kāṇādopi hi attā sabhāvena na jānāti. Yadā buddhiguṇena saṃyujjati, tadā jānātīti icchati. So eva karoti ca kāreti cāti yo parattha sukhadukkhaṃ anubhavati, so eva puññāpuññaṃ sayaṃ karoti, aññañca kāreti, na aññoti adhippāyo . Saṇṭhapentāti dviaṇukādiuppādanavasena, icchāvasena ca sampādentā. Soti attasaññito satto. Indriyasampannoti cakkhādīhi indriyehi samannāgato, tena saḷāyatanappavattiṃ dasseti. Sabbañhetaṃ yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānānaṃ avijjādīnaṃ kiccaṃ attano byāpāraṃ katvā diṭṭhigatiko vimuyhatīti dassanavasena vuttaṃ. Acchejjasuttāvutābhejjamaṇīnaṃ viya pubbāpariyavavatthānaṃ niyati, niyatiyā, niyati eva vā saṅgati samāgamo niyatisaṅgati, tāya bhāvesu pariṇatā manussadevavihaṅgādibhāvaṃ pattā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatā. Niyatiyā, saṅgatiyā, bhāvasaṅkhātena sabhāvena ca pariṇatā nānappakārataṃ pattā niyatisaṅgatibhāvapariṇatāti ca atthaṃ vadanti.
为了说明这个意思——凭借这些分别,无明使心成为不善,并让众生在福行等种种行当中的任何一处生起活动——所以才说“他被无明所蒙蔽”等等。“行道”就是靠近、前往。巴利
Etehi ca vikappanehi avijjā akusalaṃ cittaṃ katvā satte puññādīsu saṅkhāresu yattha katthaci pavattetīti imamatthaṃ dassento āha ‘‘so avijjāya andhīkato’’tiādi. Paṭipajjatīti upasaṅkamati.
“没有引导者”,是指缺少能帮助自己证得阿拉汉道的善友;或者说,以阿拉汉道智为终结的智慧,能清楚地展示什么是正道、什么是邪道,引导众生走向涅槃,所以叫“引导者”。离开了这种引导,就是“没有引导者”。“了知法”,是指依靠亲近善人,了知能开示四圣谛的经典等法;或者也可以说,是以道智了知一切法中最殊胜的涅槃法。不过,另外三谛的现观虽然与这道智同时发生,但因为它是依于那了知而有的,所以这里把它说成像先前一样。“寂静而行”:由证得最上道,无明完全止息而成为寂静者,住于有余涅槃界,直至证得无余涅槃界,为利益有情而维持其身、游行,以现法乐住而住。巴利
Apariṇāyakoti arahattamaggasampaṭipādakakalyāṇamittarahito, arahattamaggañāṇāvasānaṃ vā ñāṇaṃ samavisamaṃ dassetvā satte nibbānaṃ nayatīti pariṇāyakaṃ, tena rahito apariṇāyako. Dhammaṃ ñatvāti sappurisūpassayena catusaccappakāsakaṃ suttādidhammaṃ ñatvā, maggañāṇeneva vā sabbadhammapavaraṃ nibbānadhammaṃ ñatvā. Taṃjānanāyattaṃ pana sesasaccattayābhisamayaṃ samānakālampi taṃ purimakālaṃ viya katvā vuttaṃ. Upasanto carissatīti aggamaggādhigamena sabbaso avijjūpasamā upasanto saupādisesanibbānadhātuyaṃ ṭhito yāva anupādisesanibbānadhātupatti, tāva sattānaṃ hitacariyāya attabhāvaṃ pavattento carissati, diṭṭhadhammasukhavihārehi viharissatīti attho.
行缘识句的详细展开注释巴利
Saṅkhārapaccayāviññāṇapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
620 对于前面所说的“以行为缘而生起”的那个识,它只应该是业所生的,所以说“包含了三十二种世间果报识”。但在《界论》里,在“不相应所摄、非所摄”的句目解说中这样说:“那些与以行为缘的识不相应的法,那些与以六处为缘的触不相应的法,那些与以触为缘的受不相应的法,这些法被多少蕴……所摄?这些法撇开无为法(就蕴方面而言),被一蕴、十一处、十一界所摄。不被多少所摄?不被四蕴、一处、七界所摄。”(界论466)根据这段话,就把一切识、触、受都收摄进来了。如果在这里识、触、受是有分的,那么回答就应该像“果报法”(法集论·三法母论3)那样来回答。所以应当知道,那里的意趣是:按照阿毗达摩分别的方式,收摄了以行为缘的识等。无明缘行在阿毗达摩分别(分别论243)中被说为四地的善行和不善行,因此应当看出,这里所收摄的正是那个。至于有,在《界论》中为了显示业有和生有的差别,并没有按照阿毗达摩分别的方式来收摄;这样做了之后,在那里没有举出“以取为缘而有”,而是按照“业有”等的方式(界论66)举出了有。巴利
620. Yathāvuttasaṅkhārapaccayā uppajjamānaṃ taṃ kammanibbattameva bhavituṃ arahatīti ‘‘bāttiṃsa lokiyavipākaviññāṇāni saṅgahitānī’’ti āha. Dhātukathāyaṃ pana vippayuttena saṅgahitāsaṅgahitapadaniddese ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇena ye dhammā, saḷāyatanapaccayā phassena ye dhammā, phassapaccayā vedanāya ye dhammā vippayuttā, te dhammā katihi khandhehi…pe… saṅgahitā? Te dhammā asaṅkhataṃ khandhato ṭhapetvā ekena khandhena, ekādasahi āyatanehi, ekādasahi dhātūhi saṅgahitā. Katihi asaṅgahitā? Catūhi khandhehi, ekenāyatanena, sattahi dhātūhi asaṅgahitā’’ti (dhātu. 466) vacanato sabbaviññāṇaphassavedanāpariggaho kato. Yadi hi ettha viññāṇaphassavedanā sappadesā siyuṃ, ‘‘vipākā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. tikamātikā 3) imassa viya visajjanaṃ siyā. Tasmā tattha abhidhammabhājanīyavasena saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇādayo gahitāti adhippāyo veditabbo. Avijjāpaccayā saṅkhāro ca abhidhammabhājanīye (vibha. 243) catubhūmakakusalasaṅkhāro, akusalasaṅkhāro ca vuttoti eso eva dhātukathāyaṃ gahitoti daṭṭhabbo. Bhavo pana dhātukathāyaṃ kammūpapattibhavavisesadassanatthaṃ na abhidhammabhājanīyavasena gahito, evañca katvā tattha ‘‘upādānapaccayā bhavo’’ti anuddharitvā ‘‘kammabhavo’’tiādinā (dhātu. 66) nayena bhavo uddhaṭo.
这里只是针对世间异熟意识而说“有二十二种”。“以六识”:就是按照所强调的眼识等六识。那么,为什么这里只取世间异熟识呢?回答说:“因为出世间异熟识在流转的讨论中不适用。”如果是这样,那为什么在《界论》中,在“由行缘识,那些与识不相应的法”等(界论362)里,也取了出世间异熟识呢?那是由于随顺法的教导,在阿毗达摩的教说中,像异熟三法(法集论·三法论母3)那样,以无余地统摄一切异熟法的方式来说的。而经教的教导则是随顺性的教导,所以应当在那里把流转和还灭无混杂地显示出来。因此,作为对此义的解释,在流转的讨论中只取了世间异熟识。正因如此,才说“在流转的讨论中不适用,所以没有取”。巴利
Lokiyavipākamanoviññāṇameva sandhāyāha ‘‘bāvīsatividhaṃ hotī’’ti. Chahi viññāṇehīti yathāadhikatehi cakkhuviññāṇādīhi chahi viññāṇehi. Kasmā panettha lokiyavipākaviññāṇasseva gahaṇaṃ katanti āha ‘‘lokuttarāni pana vaṭṭakathāya na yujjantī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā dhātukathāyaṃ ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇena ye dhammā vippayuttā’’tiādīsu (dhātu. 362) lokuttaravipākānampi gahaṇaṃ katanti? Taṃ yathādhammasāsanattā abhidhammadesanāya vipākattike (dha. sa. tikamātikā 3) viya anavasesavipākadhammasaṅgaṇhanavasena vuttaṃ. Suttantadesanā pana yathānulomadesanāti tattha pavattinivattiyo asaṅkarato dassetabbā. Tasmā tadatthasaṃvaṇṇanāti katvā pavattikathāyaṃ lokiyavipākaviññāṇāniyeva gahitāni. Tenevāha ‘‘vaṭṭakathāya na yujjantīti na gahitānī’’ti.
业以怎样的方式造作,才能够在产生果报时起作用,就以那样的方式造作,才被称为“已积集”。这里是在取那种能够产生异熟的诸行,所以说“在已积集业不存在时”。所谓“因”,是以排除对立面为主的表达,因此这里取的是“不存在”这一面,意思是:业存在时它才存在,业不存在时它就不存在——这就是这段话的用意。然而,正如识以行为缘这一点还没有成立,它的异熟性并非如此(并非没有成立)。但异熟性是已经成立的,所以说“因为是异熟”。他就是通过识的异熟性来成立识以行为缘这一点。为了成立这一点,才说“在已积集业不存在时,异熟也不存在”,为了展开说明这个意思,又说了“又,异熟……”等话。如果异熟能够不依赖业就生起,那么一切众生即使已经投生到梵天,在各自异熟没有生起机会的地方,鼻识等以及大异熟识也应该生起。所谓“异熟”,是随顺“识”这个词而用的中性表达,意思是“一切异熟识”。巴利
Yathā kataṃ kammaṃ phaladāne samatthaṃ hoti, tathā kataṃ ‘‘upacita’’nti vuccatīti vipākadānayogyameva saṅkhāraṃ gaṇhanto ‘‘upacitakammābhāve’’ti āha. Hetu nāma byatirekappadhānanti abhāva-ggahaṇaṃ, tena kamme sati bhāvato, asati abhāvatoti ayamettha adhippāyo . Yathā panassa viññāṇassa saṅkhārapaccayatā na siddhā, na evaṃ vipākabhāvo. So pana siddhoti katvā āha ‘‘vipākaṃheta’’nti. Tena viññāṇassa vipākabhāvena saṅkhārapaccayattaṃ sādheti. Tassa pana sādhanatthaṃ ‘‘upacitakammābhāve vipākābhāvato’’ti vuttanti taṃ vivaranto ‘‘vipākañcā’’tiādimāha. Yadi uppajjeyyāti yadi kammanirapekkho vipāko uppajjeyya. Sabbesaṃ sattānaṃ brahmattaṃ upagatānaṃ ghānādiviññāṇāni mahāvipākaviññāṇānīti tassa tassa vipākassa anokāse ṭhitānampi. Vipākānīti viññāṇāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso, sabbavipākaviññāṇānīti attho.
行有多种,按二十九种思的差别来分;识也有多种,因为有三十二种。并不是一切行都能作为一切识的缘,所以说“以哪种行为缘,生起哪种识?”这里说的“识”,是取识的共同含义来说的。虽然在蕴的解说中也已经列举了这些识,但那太简略了,而且在那里也没有说明它们以行为缘的关系。因此,为了详细说明它们在转起、结生以及各种存在中的运作方式,就开始说“以欲界福行为缘……”等。“意识”这个词中,处格表示限定。“大果报”是中性词,是就识而说的。如果读作“大果报”,那就应当联系“意识界”来理解。巴利
Saṅkhārā bahū ekūnatiṃsacetanābhedato, viññāṇāni ca bahūni bāttiṃsavidhattā, na ca sabbato sabbānīti āha ‘‘katarasaṅkhārapaccayā kataraviññāṇanti ce’’ti. ‘‘Viññāṇa’’nti ca idaṃ viññāṇasāmaññaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Kāmaṃ khandhaniddesepi (visuddhi. 2.451 ādayo) imāni viññāṇāni niddiṭṭhāni, taṃ pana atisaṃkhittaṃ, na ca tattha nesaṃ saṅkhārapaccayatā vibhāvitāti taṃ pavattiyaṃ, paṭisandhiyañca bhavādīsu pavattanākāravasena vitthārato dassetuṃ ‘‘kāmāvacarapuññābhisaṅkhārapaccayā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Manoviññāṇeti niddhāraṇe bhūmmaṃ. Mahāvipākānīti viññāṇāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Mahāvipākāti pana pāṭhe manoviññāṇadhātuyoti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
621 以行蕴为缘,是指以某种行蕴作为缘的方式。“某种识”就是“种种识”,这两处都应当理解为省略了重复的词。“生起”这个说法,只是表明识在因缘条件下的存在,并不是指生起的特殊方式。为了说明这一点,就说“应当知道它是这样生起的”。即使在梵天,当不悦意的色等境界出现时,不善果报的眼识等有时也会生起,所以说“这十三种……生起”。其中,五蕴的展开在这里详细展开,所以叫“五蕴”,它就是“有”,即在五蕴有之中。确实,即使所指的事物不同,也可以构成别义复合词,比如“胸毛”。或者,由依缘而生起的五蕴所构成,所以叫“五蕴”,它就是“有”,其余和前面一样。巴利
621.Yaṃsaṅkhārapaccayāti yassa yassa saṅkhārassa paccayabhāvena. Yaṃ viññāṇanti ‘‘yaṃ yaṃ viññāṇa’’nti evaṃ ubhayattha āmeḍitalopo daṭṭhabbo. ‘‘Hotī’’ti iminā kāraṇabhāve viññāṇassa sabbhāvamattaṃ paveditaṃ, na pavattivisesoti taṃ dassento ‘‘evaṃ pavatti veditabbā’’ti āha . Brahmānampi aniṭṭharūpādiāpāthagamane akusalavipākacakkhuviññāṇādīni kadāci uppajjantīti ‘‘imāni terasa…pe… pavattantī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ vokāro vitthāro etthāti pañcavokāro, so eva bhavo, etasmiṃ pañcavokārabhave. Hoti hi bhinnādhikaraṇānampi aññapadatthasamāso yathā ‘‘urasilomo’’ti. Atha vā yathāpaccayaṃ pavattamānehi pañcahi khandhehi vokarīyatīti pañcavokāro, so eva bhavoti sabbaṃ pubbe viya.
为了详细解释“只在转起时转起”这个简要说法的含义,就开始说“如何……”等等。巴利
‘‘Pavattiyaññeva pavattantī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘katha’’ntiādi āraddhaṃ.
有人说,“大多数情况下,是在与贪相应的速行结束时”——这是指在与嗔、疑、掉举相应的(速行)之后,不会生起与喜俱行的心。这种说法不应采纳。因为经中说:“他贪著于眼、欢喜于眼,缘于此而生起贪、生起见……生起疑、生起掉举;当不善(心)灭去后,果报彼所缘便生起。”如果所缘是可意的,喜俱彼所缘并非不会生起。另一些人说,在速行中关于彼所缘的确定,是就喜俱之后唯生起喜俱而说的,这需要进一步考察,因为在舍俱善、不善速行之后,也应当承认有喜俱彼所缘。实际上,他们只是不承认在舍俱唯作速行之后会有喜俱彼所缘。巴利
‘‘Yebhuyyena lobhasampayuttajavanāvasāne’’ti idaṃ paṭighavicikicchuddhaccasampayuttānantaraṃ somanassasahagatassa anuppajjanatoti keci, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. ‘‘Cakkhuṃ assādeti abhinandati, taṃ ārabbha rāgo uppajjati, diṭṭhi uppajjati…pe… vicikicchā uppajjati, uddhaccaṃ uppajjati, akusale niruddhe vipāko tadārammaṇatā uppajjatī’’ti vacanato. Iṭṭhaṃ ce ārammaṇaṃ, somanassatadārammaṇaṃ na na uppajjatīti. Javanena tadārammaṇaniyame somanassasahagatānantaraṃ somanassasahagatāneva sandhāya vuttanti apare, taṃ vicāretabbaṃ upekkhāsahagatakusalākusalajavanānantarampi somanassatadārammaṇassa icchitabbattā. Upekkhāsahagatakiriyājavanānantarameva hi somanassatadārammaṇaṃ na icchanti.
然而,因为三因速行结束时,有时候彼所缘是无因的,所以才说“大多数”。有些人认为:速行的所缘只存在一个心识刹那,那时彼所缘只生起一次,因此说“一次或”。另一些人则认为:彼所缘的作用是领受速行的所缘,当所缘只存在一个心识刹那、接近坏灭时,彼所缘就不生起。因此应当知道,这里说“一次或”就像说“二夜三夜”一样,只是随顺语句的表达方式,实际上彼所缘只生起两次。在“二夜三夜”(《巴吉帝亚》50)那句话里,因为没有“或”字,仅仅为了语句顺畅而取“二夜”,这是说得通的。但这里“无间三夜之见或”的“或”字表示选择的意思,所以“一次或”是就偶尔只生起一次的情况而说的,应当这样理解。正因为如此,《破愚暗》为了说明彼所缘只生起一次的情况需要审察,才说:“然而在心路计算中,于一切门,在彼所缘方面只出现两个心路。”(《分别义注》227)巴利
Yasmā pana tihetukajavanāvasāne ca kadāci ahetukaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ hoti, tasmā ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Yasmā ekacittakkhaṇāyukaṃ javanārammaṇaṃ hoti, tadā tattha ekameva tadārammaṇaṃ hotīti katvā ‘‘sakiṃ vā’’ti vuttanti keci. Apare pana tadārammaṇaṃ nāma javanārammaṇānubhavanakiccaṃ, taṃ ekacittakkhaṇike tathā āsannabhede ārammaṇe nuppajjati. Tasmā ‘‘sakiṃ vā’’ti idaṃ dirattatirattādi viya vacanasiliṭṭhatāvasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ, dvikkhattumeva pana uppajjatīti. ‘‘Dirattatiratta’’nti (pāci. 50) ettha hi vā-saddassa abhāvā vacanasiliṭṭhatāmattena dirattaggahaṇaṃ katanti yujjati. ‘‘Nirantaraṃ tirattadassanatthaṃ vā’’ti idha pana vā-saddo vikappattho vuttoti sakiṃ eva ca kadāci pavattiṃ sandhāya ‘‘sakiṃ vā’’ti vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Teneva hi sammohavinodaniyaṃ sakiṃ tadārammaṇappavattiyā vicāretabbataṃ dassentena ‘‘cittappavattigaṇanāyaṃ pana sabbadvāresu tadārammaṇe dve eva cittavārā āgatā’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 227) vuttaṃ.
在这里,“在心路生起的计算中”这句话,是针对果报的讨论里,就强力色等所缘而说的心路生起的计算。因为在那个讨论中,确实只说了两种彼所缘生起的心路。正是针对这一点,这里也说“然而在阿毗达摩注疏中,关于彼所缘,提到了两个心路”。在阿毗达摩注疏中说“以不确定的所缘、处、作用而生起”,这是没有提及门而直接说的;这是为了对紧接着后面所说的有因异熟识作同样的说明,才这样说的。因为无因的两种等作为有分,本身就有门;而作为死心和结生心,则被称为有分,且不从其他门生起,所以不能说它们有确定或不确定的门。巴利
Tattha cittappavattigaṇanāyanti vipākakathāyaṃ balavarūpādiārammaṇe vuttaṃ cittappavattigaṇanaṃ sandhāyāha. Tattha hi dveva tadārammaṇuppattivārā vuttā . Tadeva hi sandhāya idhāpi vuttaṃ ‘‘abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tadārammaṇe dve cittavārā āgatā’’ti. Abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ aniyatārammaṇaṭṭhānakiccā hutvā pavattantīti (vibha. aṭṭha. 227) dvāraṃ anāmasitvā eva vuttaṃ, taṃ anantaraṃ parato vuttasahetukavipākaviññāṇānaṃ sadisasaṃvaṇṇanaṃ kātukāmatādhippāyena vuttaṃ. Ahetukadvayādīnañhi bhavaṅgabhūtānaṃ sayameva dvārattā, cutipaṭisandhibhūtānañca bhavaṅgasaṅkhātena, aññena ca dvārena anuppattito niyataṃ, aniyataṃ vā dvāraṃ etesanti na sakkā vattunti.
无因的两种(心)——即作为推度和彼所缘的——是有门可得的,而且那门是不确定的。因此,在涵盖它们时说:“以不确定的门、所缘、处、作用而转起。”正因为如此,在这里,对于作为彼所缘的大果报(心),也有门可得,所以在那里也取了门。巴利
Ahetukadvayassa pana santīraṇatadārammaṇabhūtassa dvāraṃ labbhati, tañca aniyatanti tampi gaṇhanto ‘‘aniyatadvārārammaṇaṭṭhānakiccā hutvā pavattantī’’ti āha. Teneva cettha mahāvipākānampi tadārammaṇabhūtānaṃ dvāraṃ labbhatīti tatthāpi dvāraggahaṇaṃ kataṃ.
一个有情所生起的色界果报,是在地遍等某个所缘上生起的,它不会在别的所缘上生起,所以说色界果报有固定的所缘。其余那些是无色界果报识。固定地没有依处,所以叫固定无依处。因为只在破除遍相后的虚空等所缘上生起,所以是固定所缘。“其中”是指在转起之中。“它的”是指三十二种果报识的。那些种种行,就是前面所说的福行等行。以业缘,是指异刹那业缘;以亲依止缘,是指自然亲依止缘。巴利
Ekassa sattassa pavatto rūpāvacaravipāko pathavīkasiṇādīsu yasmiṃ ārammaṇe pavatto, tato aññasmiṃ tassa pavatti natthīti rūpāvacarānaṃ niyatārammaṇatā vuttā. Itarāni āruppavipākaviññāṇāni. Niyataṃ avatthukānīti niyatāvatthukāni. Kasiṇugghāṭimākāsādīsuyeva ārammaṇesu pavattanato niyatārammaṇāni. Tatrāti pavattiyaṃ. Assāti bāttiṃsavidhassa vipākaviññāṇassa. Te te saṅkhārāti yathāvuttā puññābhisaṅkhārādisaṅkhārā. Kammapaccayenāti nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayena. Upanissayapaccayenāti pakatūpanissayapaccayena.
622 622. 这样显示了在转起中的识转起之后,为了显示结生中的识转起,而说了“然而所说的”等话。其中,“以相应的结生”是指以相应的结生作用。而那相应的性质,他之后自己会说明。由一有连接另一有,在这里就叫结生。考虑到它即使没有心也仍然存在,所以问了“有多少结生”之后,又问“有多少结生心”。“以何心、于何处”是指以什么心、在什么有中。巴利
622. Evaṃ pavattiyaṃ viññāṇappavattiṃ dassetvā paṭisandhiyaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ pana vutta’’ntiādimāha. Tattha anurūpāya paṭisandhiyāti anurūpena paṭisandhikiccena. Taṃ pana anurūpataṃ sayameva vakkhati. Bhavantarena bhavantarassa sandhānaṃ idha paṭisandhīti taṃ acittakampi atthevāti katvā ‘‘kati paṭisandhiyo’’ti pucchaṃ katvāpi ‘‘kati paṭisandhicittānī’’ti pucchā katā. ‘‘Kena katthā’’ti kena cittena kasmiṃ bhave.
这里说的“其中”,是指在十九种结生心里。“与善果报的无因意识界”是连接关系。天界里没有无因结生,所以用“人间”来限定。“中性者等”的“等”字,也包括口吃者等。不过有些论师说:某些无因结生者虽然诸根完具,却也稍微有审察的习性,所以这一类也被这里的“等”字所包含。“简略而言”就是概括地说,意思是:不区分“某某结生以某某为所缘”。巴利
Tatthāti tesu ekūnavīsatiyā paṭisandhicittesu. Kusalavipākāya ahetukamanoviññāṇadhātuyāti sambandho. Natthi devesu ahetukā paṭisandhīti ‘‘manussaloke’’ti visesanaṃ. Napuṃsakādīnanti ādisaddena mammādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Keci pana ekacce ahetukapaṭisandhikā avikalindriyā hutvā thokaṃ vicāraṇapakatikāpi hontiyeva, tasmā tādisānampi idha ādisaddena saṅgahoti vadanti. Saṅkhepatoti samāsato, asukāya paṭisandhiyā asukaṃ ārammaṇanti vibhāgaṃ akatvāti attho.
“其余的”是指:五种色界结生,以及初无色界和第三无色界这两种,也就是除了前面所说的之外,剩下这七种结生。以现在为所缘的死亡心并不存在,因为它只在结生的所缘上生起。“于两种所缘中”是指依过去所缘和不可说所缘这两种所缘。巴利
Sesānanti rūpāvacarā pañca, paṭhamatatiyāruppā dveti imāsaṃ vuttāvasesānaṃ sattannaṃ paṭisandhīnaṃ. Paccuppannārammaṇaṃ cuticittaṃ nāma natthi paṭisandhiārammaṇe eva pavattanato. Dvīsu ārammaṇesūti atītanavattabbavasena dvīsu ārammaṇesu.
623 “那些”是指过去所造的业。“他的”是指临近死亡的人。“悬现”是说,就像傍晚时分大山峰的影子落在地面上一样,在他的心里悬现、显现出来。“当它灭尽时”是指当那个死亡心灭尽时,就在它灭尽的紧接着的刹那。“即彼”是指前面所说的速行心路中作为所缘的那个。在无明、渴爱等烦恼还没有被断除的情况下,业等才会显现;由于这个原因,心相续就倾向于、朝向另一个存在,所以说“由未断烦恼之力所牵引转变”。因为当相续被牵引转变时,作为其中一部分的结生心也同样被牵引转变了,但若没有一部分被牵引转变,相续的被牵引转变也不存在。不过在一切情况下都可以判定:倾向于恶趣结生的死亡前的速行是不善的,倾向于善趣结生的则是善的。经中说:“比丘们,如果识住立时执着于相的滋味,或执着于随相的滋味,假如在那时命终,就有这种可能:他会投生到两种趣中的某一种,或是地狱,或是畜生趣。”因此,不善是恶趣结生的亲依止缘,善则是善趣结生的亲依止缘。至于阿拉汉,因为一切烦恼都已彻底断除,一切对存在的关切都已止息,所以业等的相不再显现。因此,即使业还存在,也因为得不到助缘而不产生结生。巴利
623.Tānīti pubbe katāni kammāni. Assāti āsannamaraṇassa puggalassa. Olambantīti sāyanhe mahantānaṃ pabbatakūṭānaṃ chāyā viya bhūmiyaṃ tassa citte avalambanti upatiṭṭhanti. Tasmiṃ niruddheti tasmiṃ cuticitte niruddhamatte tassa nirodhasamanantarameva. Tadevāti taṃyeva yathāvuttajavanavīthiyā ārammaṇabhūtaṃ. Avijjātaṇhādīsu kilesesu anupacchinnesveva kammādino upaṭṭhānaṃ, tañca ārabbha cittasantānassa bhavantaraninnapoṇapabbhāratā hotīti āha ‘‘anupacchinnakilesabalavināmita’’nti. Santāne hi vināmite tadekadesabhūtaṃ paṭisandhicittañca vināmitameva hoti, na ca ekadesavināmitabhāvena vinā santānassa vināmitatā atthīti. Sabbattha pana duggatipaṭisandhininnāya cutiyā purimajavanāni akusalāni, itarāya ca kusalānīti nicchinanti. ‘‘Nimittassādagadhitaṃ vā, bhikkhave, viññāṇaṃ tiṭṭhamānaṃ tiṭṭhati, anubyañjanassādagadhitaṃ vā, tasmiṃ ce samaye kālaṃ karoti, ṭhānametaṃ vijjati, yaṃ dvinnaṃ gatīnaṃ aññataraṃ gatiṃ upapajjeyya nirayaṃ vā tiracchānayoniṃ vā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 4.235) hi vuttaṃ, tasmā akusalaṃ duggatiyaṃ, kusalañca sugatiyaṃ paṭisandhiyā upanissayo hotīti. Arahato pana sabbaso kilesānaṃ upacchinnattā paṭippassaddhasabbabhavussukkatāya kammādinimittaṃ na upaṭṭhahati, tato vijjamānampi kammaṃ aladdhasahāyattā paṭisandhiṃ na janeti.
所谓“依所说的那种业”,是指依恶业的力量;意思是“由那业所呈现出来的”。说“地狱等处的火焰色等”,是就与那些景象相似来说的。因为那时并不是那地狱火的色等本身出现在他面前。其中,“火焰色等”的“等”字,包含了灰河、辛波利林、剑叶林等的色。“地狱等”的“等”字,则包含了饿鬼、畜生经常活动的处所所摄的色。它出现在意门中,意思是:由业力所呈现的色处,就像做梦的人所见的那样,也像天眼所见的那样,只在意门中成为所缘。一次转向、五次速行、两次彼所缘,这就是三种路心。巴利
Vuttappakārakammavasenāti pāpakammavasena, tadupaṭṭhāpitanti adhippāyo. ‘‘Narakādīsu aggijālavaṇṇādika’’nti idaṃ taṃsadisatāvasena vuttaṃ. Na hi so eva nirayaggivaṇṇādi tadā tassa āpāthaṃ āgacchati. Tattha aggijālavaṇṇādikanti ādi-saddena vettaraṇīsimbaliasipattavanādivaṇṇaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Narakādīsūti pana ādi-saddena petatiracchānānaṃ nibaddhasañcaraṇaṭṭhānapariyāpannavaṇṇaṃ. Manodvāre āpāthamāgacchatīti kammabalena upaṭṭhāpitavaṇṇāyatanaṃ supinaṃ passantassa viya, dibbacakkhussa viya ca manodvāre eva gocarabhāvaṃ gacchati. Ekaṃ āvajjanaṃ, pañca javanāni, dve tadārammaṇānīti tīṇi vīthicittāni.
成为贪等之因的低劣所缘,这里指的是适合作为不善果报之所缘的不可爱所缘。因为那个所缘也能通过思惟的力量而成为贪的因。或者说,对于能产生不善果报的业所俱生的贪等,以及与那些相似的临终速行思所俱生的贪等来说,它们作为因的性质本身就是低劣性。因为那个所缘成为能产生事后追悔的业的所缘,从业力的角度来说是不可爱的,所以它应当是不善果报的所缘。如果不是这样,那么在可爱所缘上生起的不善业的果报,就不会以不善业相为所缘了。因为不善果报不应该成为具有可爱所缘者。巴利
Rāgādihetubhūtaṃ hīnamārammaṇanti akusalavipākassa ārammaṇaṃ bhavituṃ yuttaṃ aniṭṭhamārammaṇamāha. Tampi hi saṅkappanavasena rāgassāpi hetu hotīti. Akusalavipākajanakakammasahajātānaṃ vā taṃsadisāsannacutijavanacetanāsahajātānañca rāgādīnaṃ hetubhāvo eva hīnatā. Tañhi pacchānutāpajanakakammānamārammaṇaṃ kammavasena aniṭṭhaṃ akusalavipākassa ārammaṇaṃ bhaveyya. Aññathā ca iṭṭhārammaṇe pavattassa akusalakammassa vipāko akusalakammanimittārammaṇo na bhaveyya. Na hi akusalavipāko iṭṭhārammaṇo bhavituṃ arahatīti.
在五门中,现在来到境前的、属于现在的业相,是在临近所造业所缘的相续中生起的,应当看作与它相似。如果不是这样,那同一个业相就会成为令结生所缘现起的东西,它本身也会成为能结生的。可是,临终速行并不像结生的近行那样,不能说它们既不让结生所缘生起,又能成为能结生的。因为经中说“由已作、已积集故”(《法集论》431)。而且那时,它们如果像在同一路心中那样运转,怎么能算是已作、已积集呢?那时它们并没有被享受。世间速行也不像出世间速行那样,具有同一路心的果报。经中在“或者他先前造过能感苦受的恶业,或者后来造过能感苦受的恶业,或者临命终时成就、执取了邪见。因此,他身坏命终之后,投生到苦界、恶趣、堕处、地狱”(《中部》3.303)等文中说到:临命终时已成就、已执取的邪见,以及与正见俱生的思,能给予结生;而不是说微弱的五门速行能使邪见或正见被成就、被执取。正如《迷惑冰消》中所说:“因为这一切了知善不善法乃至临终的作用,都只是意门心所做,不是五门心所做,所以在执行这一切作用时,俱生速行的路心是被否定的。”巴利
Pañcadvāre ca āpāthaṃ āgacchantaṃ paccuppannaṃ kammanimittaṃ āsannakatakammārammaṇasantatiyaṃ uppannaṃ, taṃsadisañca daṭṭhabbaṃ. Aññathā tadeva paṭisandhiārammaṇūpaṭṭhāpakaṃ, tadeva ca paṭisandhijanakaṃ bhaveyya. Na ca paṭisandhiyā upacārabhūtāni viya, etasmiṃ tayā pavattitabbanti paṭisandhiyā ārammaṇaṃ anuppādentāni viya ca pavattāni cutiāsannāni javanāni paṭisandhijanakāni bhaveyyuṃ. ‘‘Katattā upacitattā’’ti (dha. sa. 431) hi vuttaṃ. Tadā ca taṃsamānavīthiyaṃ viya pavattamānāni kathaṃ katūpacitāni siyuṃ? Tadā na assāditāni. Na ca lokiyāni lokuttarāni viya samānavīthiphalāni honti. ‘‘Pubbe vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, pacchā vāssa taṃ kataṃ hoti pāpakammaṃ dukkhavedanīyaṃ, maraṇakāle vāssa hoti micchādiṭṭhi samattā hoti samādinnā. Tena so kāyassa bhedā paraṃ maraṇā apāyaṃ duggatiṃ vinipātaṃ nirayaṃ upapajjatī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 3.303) sutte maraṇakāle samattāya samādinnāya micchādiṭṭhiyā, sammādiṭṭhiyā ca sahajātacetanāya paṭisandhidānaṃ vuttaṃ, na ca dubbalehi pañcadvārikajavanehi micchādiṭṭhi, sammādiṭṭhi vā samattā hoti samādinnā. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sammohavinodaniyaṃ ‘‘sabbampi hetaṃ kusalākusaladhammapaṭivijānanādicavanapariyosānaṃ kiccaṃ manodvārikacitteneva hoti, na pañcadvārikenāti sabbassapetassa kiccassa karaṇe sahajavanakāni vīthicittāni paṭikkhittānī’’ti (vibha. aṭṭha. 766).
在这里,因为五门心识不能了知任何法,所以说“诸法以意为前导”(《法句经》1-2),也就是说它连一个善法或不善法都不能了知。对于那些随着详细认知过程的展开而有乐受或苦受跟随的心路过程,这些过程在五门中是被排除的。善业和不善业的执取也是如此。然而,在彼所缘之后命终,以及紧接着结生,只属于意门,并不包含在俱生速行路心之中——应当知道,正是基于这个用意,这里才说五门彼所缘之后命终、紧接着结生。其中,对于在色法等所缘中、还剩五个心刹那寿命时生起的结生,说“以现在为所缘的结生心,对以现在为所缘的有分,以无间缘为缘”;对于还剩一个心刹那寿命时生起的结生,则说“以现在为所缘的结生心,对以过去为所缘的有分,以无间缘为缘”。巴利
Tattha hi na kiñci dhammaṃ paṭivijānātīti ‘‘manopubbaṅgamā dhammā’’ti (dha. pa. 1-2) evaṃ vuttaṃ ekampi kusalaṃ vā akusalaṃ vā na paṭivijānātīti ca vuttaṃ. Yesaṃ paṭivibhāvanappavattiyā sukhaṃ vā dukkhaṃ vā anveti, tesaṃ sā pavatti pañcadvāre paṭikkhittā. Kusalākusalakammasamādānañca tādisamevāti. Tadārammaṇānantaraṃ pana cavanaṃ, tadanantarā ca upapatti manodvārikā eva hoti, na sahajavanakavīthicittapariyāpannāti iminā adhippāyena idha pañcadvārikatadārammaṇānantarā cuti, tadanantarā paṭisandhi ca vuttāti daṭṭhabbā. Tattha avasesapañcacittakkhaṇāyuke rūpādimhi uppannaṃ paṭisandhiṃ sandhāya ‘‘paccuppannārammaṇaṃ upapatticittaṃ paccuppannārammaṇassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti, avasesaekacittakkhaṇāyuke ca uppannaṃ paṭisandhiṃ sandhāya ‘‘paccuppannārammaṇaṃ upapatticittaṃ atītārammaṇassa bhavaṅgassa anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti ca vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
624 在黑分里安立白分:这里,就像先前说“恶业或业相”的黑分时,说了“无过失业或业相”的白分一样;同样,在说“属于恶趣的结生心,以及地狱等处火焰色等的恶趣相”的黑分时,就应安立白分:“属于善趣的结生心,以及在人间称为如红毯般的母胎色,在天界称为如花园、宫殿、如意树等色的善趣相”。这样安立白分之后,其余一切都应依照前面的方式来了知。“以过去、现在为所缘”:依业与业相,是以过去为所缘;依母胎色等善趣相,是以现在为所缘。巴利
624.Kaṇhapakkhe sukkapakkhaṃ ṭhapetvāti ettha yathā pubbe ‘‘pāpakammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā’’ti vutte kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘anavajjakammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā’’ti sukkapakkho vutto, evaṃ ‘‘duggatipariyāpannaṃ paṭisandhicittaṃ, narakādīsu aggijālavaṇṇādikaṃ duggatinimitta’’nti ca vutte kaṇhapakkhe ‘‘sugatipariyāpannaṃ paṭisandhicittaṃ, manussaloke rattakambalasadisamātukucchivaṇṇasaṅkhātaṃ, devaloke vā uyyānavimānakapparukkhādivaṇṇasaṅkhātaṃ sugatinimitta’’nti evaṃ sukkapakkhaṃ ṭhapetvā sesaṃ sabbaṃ purimanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Atītapaccuppannārammaṇāyāti kammakammanimittavasena atītārammaṇāya, mātukucchivaṇṇādisugatinimittavasena paccuppannārammaṇāya.
625 关于“而那确实”:前面说到“无过失业或业相”时,作了一种不确定的表述,那就是“而那确实”。对于广大果报来说,由于其以自身的业为所缘,只有业相会必然地现前。关于“或纯粹的”:是指以广大业相为所缘的速行路心,它没有彼所缘,这就是它的意思。不过,这个速行路心应当看作像是广大果报的近行。有些人则说这个路心是以广大(果报)为终结的。关于“或以不可说为所缘”:这是就色界结生,以及无色界的第一和第三结生而说的。第二和第四(无色结生)则已经被“以过去为所缘”的说法涵盖进去了。巴利
625.Tañca khoti yadetaṃ ‘‘anavajjakammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā’’ti aniyamanaṃ kataṃ, tañca kho. Kammanimittameva āpāthamāgacchati ekantato attano kammārammaṇatāya mahaggatavipākassa. Suddhāya vāti mahaggatakammanimittārammaṇāya javanavīthiyā, tadārammaṇarahitāyāti attho, sā pana javanavīthi mahaggatavipākassa upacāro viya daṭṭhabbā. Keci pana tañca vīthiṃ mahaggatāvasānaṃ vadanti. ‘‘Navattabbārammaṇā vā’’ti idaṃ rūpāvacarapaṭisandhiṃ, āruppesu ca paṭhamaṃ, tatiyañca sandhāya vuttaṃ. Dutiyacatutthā pana atītārammaṇavacaneneva gahitā.
所谓“母胎色等”,是指色本身以趣相的方式出现。其中,声音首先因为是未执取的,又属于善趣,所以没有在注疏中以趣相的方式出现,这样说是合理的;但香等为什么没有被提到,则需要进一步考察。巴利
Mātukucchivaṇṇasaṅkhātantiādinā vaṇṇo eva gatinimittabhāvena āgato. Tattha saddo tāva anupādinnabhāvena sugatipariyāpannatāya gatinimittabhāvena aṭṭhakathāsu nāgatoti yuttametaṃ, gandhādīnaṃ pana anāgamane kāraṇaṃ vīmaṃsitabbaṃ.
在“亲爱的孩子,这是为了你而作佛供养”这类情形里,是依前思而成为功德。他们说,即使是在最后一个速行中现起的,也是如此。巴利
Ayaṃ tāta tavatthāya buddhapūjā karīyatītiādīsu pubbacetanāvasena puññaṃ hoti. Sabbantimajavane vattamānassāpīti vadanti.
626 “依照这一理路,从无色界命终后的无间结生也应了知”:为什么这样说呢?难道在“依地遍禅那等而获得广大心、住于善趣者”这类说法中,这种结生不已经被包含了吗?不是的,因为那里只说了色界命终后的无间结生。因为在那一说法中,通过“地遍等相或广大心现在意门,或现在眼门、耳门”等语句,可以知道只说了色界命终后的无间结生。或者,即使按照随应的方式去配属,这种结生在那里也被包含了,可是无色界命终之后无间,并不会有色界结生。而且在无色界中,从上地命终之后无间,不会有更下、更下的结生,所以从第四无色界命终,不会有以不可说为所缘的结生。因此,从那里命终,就在那里有以过去为所缘的结生;而在欲界,则有以过去、现在为所缘的结生。其他的结生则应随应配属:无色界结生以过去、不可说为所缘,欲界结生以过去、现在为所缘。为了显示这一差别,才单独把它举出来。巴利
626.‘‘Etenānusārena āruppacutiyāpi anantarā paṭisandhi veditabbā’’ti idaṃ kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ‘‘pathavīkasiṇajjhānādivasena paṭiladdhamahaggatassa sugatiyaṃ ṭhitassā’’ti evamādike eva naye ayampi paṭisandhi avaruddhāti? Na, tattha rūpāvacaracutianantarāya eva paṭisandhiyā vuttattā. Tattha hi ‘‘pathavīkasiṇādikaṃ vā nimittaṃ mahaggatacittaṃ vā manodvāre āpāthaṃ āgacchati, cakkhusotānaṃ vā’’tiādinā tena vacanena rūpāvacaracutiyā eva anantarā paṭisandhi vuttāti viññāyati. Athāpi yathāsambhavayojanāya ayampi paṭisandhi tattheva avaruddhā, arūpāvacaracutianantarā pana rūpāvacarapaṭisandhi natthi. Arūpāvacare ca uparūpari cutiyā anantarā heṭṭhimā heṭṭhimā paṭisandhi natthīti catutthāruppacutiyā navattabbārammaṇapaṭisandhi natthi. Tena tato tattheva atītārammaṇā, kāmāvacare ca atītapaccuppannārammaṇā paṭisandhi. Itarāhi ca yathāsambhavaṃ atītanavattabbārammaṇā āruppapaṭisandhi, atītapaccuppannārammaṇā ca kāmāvacarapaṭisandhi yojetabbāti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ visuṃ uddharaṇaṃ kataṃ.
627 627. 这样,依所缘来说:一种欲界善趣的死,有两种恶趣结生;恶趣的死,有两种善趣结生;欲界善趣的死,依两种、一种、两种的差别——也就是依欲界、色界、无色界——共有五种善趣结生;色界的死,同样有五种;无色界的两种死,各自依欲界与无色界的两种,共有八种结生,这些都已被显示出来。然而,一种恶趣死的恶趣结生,并没有被显示为有两种,为了显示这一点,才说了“然而,对于住于恶趣者”等话。巴利
627. Evaṃ ārammaṇavasena ekavidhāya kāmāvacarasugaticutiyā duvidhā duggatipaṭisandhi, duggaticutiyā duvidhā sugatipaṭisandhi, kāmāvacarasugaticutiyā dviekadvippakārānaṃ kāmarūpārūpānaṃ vasena pañcavidhā sugatipaṭisandhi , rūpāvacaracutiyā tatheva pañcavidhā, duvidhāya āruppacutiyā paccekaṃ dvinnaṃ dvinnaṃ kāmāruppānaṃ vasena aṭṭhavidhā ca paṭisandhi dassitā. Duggaticutiyā pana ekavidhāya duggatipaṭisandhi duvidhā na dassitā, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘duggatiyaṃ ṭhitassa panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathā vuttā pana –
二、二、五、五、八、二,依有与所缘之别而分;
此诸结生与死心同类,都计二十四种。巴利
Dve dve pañcātha pañcaṭṭha, dve bhavālambabhedato; Cutiyā tādisāyetā, catuvīsati sandhiyo. (vibha. mūlaṭī. 227);
628 由“已作欲界善业故”等语(《法集论》431)可知,异刹那业缘的状态就是前面已经说明的那种;为了显示它其实就是亲依止缘,所以接着说“已说”等语。巴利
628. ‘‘Kāmāvacarassa kusalassa kammassa katattā’’tiādinā (dha. sa. 431) nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayabhāvo heṭṭhā dassitappakāroti upanissayabhāvameva dassento ‘‘vuttañheta’’ntiādimāha.
在这里,识与作为依止缘的色同时生起,所以识与那色是混合的;没有那色,就是不混合。这里,众生因为同属一种生类而互相混合,所以叫“生”。因为依善行和恶行而应当去、应当到达,所以叫“趣”。在这里安住,就是“住”;识的安住,就是“识住”。“异身异想”等,就是住处,因为那是众生应当居住的地方,所以叫“众生居”。由于无想众生居在这里不可能存在,所以说“依众生居来说有八种”。巴利
Nissayapaccayabhūtena rūpena sahapavattiyevettha viññāṇassa tena missitā, tadabhāvo amissitā. Yavanti ettha sattā ekajātisamanvayena aññamaññamissitā hontīti yoniyo. Sucaritaduccaritavasena gantabbā pāpuṇitabbāti gatiyo. Tiṭṭhati etthāti ṭhiti, viññāṇassa ṭhiti viññāṇaṭṭhiti. Nānattakāyanānattasaññītiādiāvāso eva sattehi āvasitabbato sattāvāso. Asaññasattāvāsassa idha asambhavato ‘‘sattāvāsavasena aṭṭhavidhaṃ hotī’’ti vuttaṃ.
629 在“除了天生黄门的结生”这里,还应当说“除了初劫的结生”。因为那种结生确实也是在没有性的情况下生起的。巴利
629.Aññatra jātipaṇḍakapaṭisandhiyāti ettha paṭhamakappikapaṭisandhiyāpīti vattabbaṃ. Sāpi hi bhāvena vināva uppajjatīti.
“Omatoti”的意思是卑下、低劣,也就是“avakaṃsa”(下贱)的意思。“Ādinā”指的是在“混合、不混合”这一对中最初说到的“混合识”。说“最少有二个或三个十法聚生起”,这是就胎生者的情况说的。但在别的地方,则有许多色聚同时生起。即使在梵天的身体里,也有许多色聚同时生起,其范围可达好几俱卢舍,所以色法超过三十种。有些人认为,出生当天的山羊的毛是“生羊毛”;另一些人认为,生在雪山地区的良种山羊的毛是“生羊毛”;还有人认为,从胎中剖取出来的山羊毛是“生羊毛”。在这些趣中,这些生是可能有的;在那些趣中,则不可能有。这样,就是依照诸趣来说明生之可能性的差别。巴利
Omatoti avamato, avakaṃsatoti attho. Ādināti ‘‘missaṃ amissa’’nti etasmiṃ duke ādimhi vuttena missaviññāṇena. Omato dve vā tayo vā dasakā uppajjantīti gabbhaseyyakānaṃ vasena vuttaṃ. Aññattha pana aneke kalāpā saha uppajjanti. Brahmattabhāvepi hi anekagāvutappamāṇena aneke kalāpā saha uppajjantīti tiṃsato adhikāneva rūpāni honti. Tadahujātaeḷakassa lomaṃ jātiuṇṇāti keci. Himavantappadese jātimantaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇāti apare. Gabbhaṃ phāletvā gahitaeḷakalomaṃ jātiuṇṇāti aññe. Imāsu gatīsu imā yoniyo sambhavanti, imāsu na sambhavantīti evaṃ yonīnaṃ gativasena sambhavabhedo.
630 “除了地居天”这一句,是针对投生方式(胎的类别)的区分来说的,因为地居天和人类相似。由于前面说“前三种生类并非存在”,通过否定三种生类,就认可了最后一种生类,所以从义理上说,这已经是自然成立的。“三种趣”是指人、饿鬼、畜生这三种趣,因为这一点在前面还没有提到过。巴利
630.Bhummavajjesūti bhummadevānaṃ vajjanaṃ yonivibhāgaṃ pati tesaṃ manussasadisattā. Yoniyotisso purimikā na hontīti yonittayapaṭikkhepena pacchimā yoni anuññātāti atthato āpannameva hoti. Gatittayeti manussapetatiracchānasaññite gatittaye. Tañhi ettha pubbe anāmaṭṭhaṃ.
“ca”这个词有“集合未说之义”,为了说明这一点,才说了“以ca字”等话。那么,为什么在烧渴饿鬼当中,不存在卵生、胎生、湿生这三种生呢?因为不可能。由于他们恒常处于病苦之中,所以没有淫欲,因此他们不是卵生等。有人说,因为他们的子宫中有火焰,胎儿无法在母胎中安住。又说,他们出生时身体被火焰烧灼,所以在湿润之处以及花等当中没有出生的可能,因此他们也没有湿生。因此说“他们确实只有化生”。巴利
Ca-saddo avuttasamuccayatthoti dassetuṃ ‘‘ca-saddenā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Kasmā pana nijjhāmataṇhikapetesu purimikā tisso yoniyo na santīti? Asambhavato. Tāsañhi niccāturabhāvato kāmasevā natthīti na tā aṇḍajādayo honti. Kucchiyaṃ tāsaṃ gabbho nāvatiṭṭhati jālasabbhāvatoti keci. Aggijālāya santappamānasarīrā etā nibbattantīti allaṭṭhānesu, pupphādīsu ca sambhavābhāvato saṃsedajatāpi tāsaṃ natthevāti vadanti. Tenāha ‘‘opapātikā eva hi te hontī’’ti.
在色界梵天中,先说“化生类”这一表达,是用“化生类”来限定色界梵天。“在色界梵天中”是依处格,“在化生者中”是限定格。因此,通过“在化生类中”这一通称所说,再用“在色界梵天中”这一特称来限定其中的一部分。
关于“眼十法、耳十法、心所依十法以及命九法”这里,有些人这样说:以眼七法、耳七法、心所依七法以及命六法这四种色聚来计算,在色界结生识生起时,有二十七种色法生起,因为在色界中,香、味、食被否定。为了证明这一点,他们说:巴利圣典中确实说过“在色界投生的刹那,除了其他众生之外,诸天神的五处显现,五种界显现”(《分别论》1015-1016)。同样,又说“色界有六处、九界”,这是为了从总摄一切的角度,显示那里存在的处与界。而在《论事》中,像鼻处等一样,香处等在那里也被否定,说“那里有鼻处吗?是的。那里有香处吗?不应这样说”(《论事》520)。而且,不能像地界等与触处无关那样,说香、味与香处、味处无关,因为如同地等自性脱离可触性一样,香、味的自性也脱离香处、味处的状态,所以不存在。如果因为不是鼻触等的因,就不叫它们“处”,那么“界”这个词是表示无众生、无命的,所以以“香界”“味界”称之,并无不可。而且,它们的法之状态是必须承认的,因为除了持自性等相之外,别无其他判准。诸法的处之状态是决定性的,正如《双论》中说:“法是处吗?是的。”(《双论》1.处双论.13)因此,即使它们没有香处、味处的状态,也应说它们具有某种处的状态。如果它们具有异于香、味自性的其他自性,就如地等的自性异于所触之性那样,那么它们便应归摄于法处。然而,既然它们具有香、味的自性以及处的状态,“既是香又是处,即为香处;既是味又是处,即为味处”这一结论便无可避免,因此不能否定它们具有香处、味处的状态。而由“三食”之说,可知那里并无段食。因此,应以不违背巴利圣典的方式计算色法的数目。如此一来,法性才不致被违逆。有人如是说。巴利
Rūpībrahmesu tāva opapātikayonikesūti opapātikayonikehi rūpībrahme niddhāreti. Rūpībrahmesūti hi adhikaraṇe bhummaṃ, opapātikesūti niddhāraṇe. Tena ‘‘opapātikayonikesū’’ti sāmaññato vuttarāsito ‘‘rūpībrahmesū’’ti visesena tadekadesaṃ niddhāreti. Cakkhusotavatthudasakānaṃ, jīvitanavakassa cāti ettha keci ‘‘cakkhusotavatthusattakānaṃ, jīvitachakkassa cāti catunnaṃ kalāpānaṃ vasena rūpabhave paṭisandhiviññāṇena saha sattavīsati rūpāni uppajjanti, tattha gandharasāhārānaṃ paṭikkhittattā’’ti kāraṇaṃ vatvā taṃ samatthentā ‘‘pāḷiyañhi ‘rūpadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe ṭhapetvā aññasattānaṃ devānaṃ pañcāyatanāni pātubhavanti, pañca dhātuyo pātubhavantī’ti (vibha. 1015-1016) vuttaṃ, tathā ‘rūpadhātuyā cha āyatanāni, nava dhātuyo’ti sabbasaṅgahakavasena tattha vijjamānāyatanadhātuyo dassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Kathāvatthumhi ca ghānāyatanādīnaṃ viya gandhāyatanādīnañca tattha bhāvo paṭikkhitto ‘atthi tattha ghānāyatananti? Āmantā. Atthi tattha gandhāyatananti? Na hevaṃ vattabbe’tiādinā (kathā. 520). Na ca aphoṭṭhabbāyatanānaṃ pathavīdhātuādīnaṃ viya agandharasāyatanānaṃ gandharasānaṃ tattha bhāvo sakkā vattuṃ, phusituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāvinimuttassa pathavīādisabhāvassa viya gandharasāyatanabhāvavinimuttassa gandharasasabhāvassa abhāvā. Yadi ca ghānasamphassādīnaṃ kāraṇabhāvo natthīti ‘āyatanānī’ti te na vucceyyuṃ, dhātusaddo pana nissattanijjīvavācakoti ‘gandhadhātu rasadhātū’ti avacane kāraṇaṃ natthi, dhammabhāvo ca tesaṃ ekantena icchitabbo sabhāvadhāraṇādilakkhaṇato aññassa abhāvā. Dhammānañca āyatanabhāvo ekantiko yamake vutto ‘dhammo āyatananti? Āmantā’ti (yama. 1.āyatanayamaka.13). Tasmā tesaṃ gandharasāyatanabhāvābhāvepi koci āyatanabhāvo vattabbo. Yadi ca phoṭṭhabbabhāvato añño pathavīādibhāvo viya gandharasabhāvato añño tesaṃ koci sabhāvo siyā, tesaṃ dhammāyatanasaṅgaho. Gandharasabhāve pana āyatanabhāve ca sati ‘gandho ca so āyatanañca gandhāyatanaṃ, raso ca so āyatanañca rasāyatana’nti idamāpannamevāti gandharasāyatanabhāvo ca na sakkā nivāretuṃ. ‘Tayo āhārā’ti ca vacanato kabaḷīkārāhārassa tattha abhāvo viññāyati. Tasmā yathā pāḷiyā avirodho hoti, tathā rūpagaṇanā kātabbā. Evañhi dhammatā na vilomitā hotī’’ti vadanti.
这里要说明:色界众生因为没有鼻处和舌处,所以香和味虽然存在,却不执行“处”的作用。因此,经典中没有提到它们,而说“五处出现”(《分别论》1015)、“六处”(《分别论》992)等;又说“三食”,是因为没有可吞咽的食物,所以不执行被称为食素第八色生起的、称为“食”的作用,但并不是完全没有香、味和食素。这样一来,由于能缘者和作用都不存在,所缘和具有作用的法就没有被宣说。因为在任何存在界中,如果没有能缘者,那么即使所缘存在,它也不能在究竟意义上成为“处”,所以不被宣说,就像在色界中,地界、火界、风界虽然存在,却不以触处的方式被宣说一样。反之,如果某处有所宣说,那是因为那里有能缘者,所以在究竟意义上宣说它作为处的状态,就像在色界中宣说色处一样。巴利
Ettha vuccate – rūpāvacarasattānaṃ ghānajivhāyatanābhāvato vijjamānāpi gandharasā āyatanakiccaṃ na karontīti te anāmasitvā pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘pañcāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1015), ‘‘cha āyatanānī’’ti (vibha. 992) ca ādi vuttaṃ, ‘‘tayo āhārā’’ti ca ajjhoharitabbassa āhārassa abhāvena ojaṭṭhamakarūpasamuṭṭhāpanasaṅkhātassa āhārakiccassa akaraṇato, na sabbena sabbaṃ gandharasānaṃ, ojāya ca abhāvato. Iti visayino, kiccassa ca abhāvena visayo, kiccavā ca dhammo na vutto. Yasmiñhi bhave visayī natthi, tasmiṃ taṃhetuko nippariyāyena visayassa āyatanabhāvo natthīti vijjamānassāpi avacanaṃ yathā tattheva rūpabhave pathavītejovāyodhātūnaṃ phoṭṭhabbāyatanabhāvena. Yassa pana yattha vacanaṃ, tassa tattha visayīsabbhāvahetuko nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo vutto yathā tattheva rūpāyatanassa.
如果所缘的究竟处是以能缘者的存在为因,那么无想众生为什么会有二处出现呢?因为无想众生没有眼处,而由于他们没有眼处,他们的色处对其他众生来说就不是所缘了吗?这并不矛盾。按照在色界对有想众生不宣说香处等的意图,色处也不应被宣说,因此无想众生应只说一处。然而,当依据各自的根与境来宣说那些究竟上有处状态的法时,由于色界有想众生没有香等,所以不把它们单独宣说为处;但为了不超出法的自性,又因为它们是意识所缘的对象,所以把它们归入法处,在经典中说“五处”(《分别论》1015)。正是为了这个意义,才通称为“法处”,或者把它们作为附带项目而说“五处”。巴利
Yadi visayīsabbhāvahetuko visayassa nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo, kathamasaññasattānaṃ dve āyatanāni pātubhavantīti, asaññasattānañhi cakkhāyatanaṃ natthi, acakkhāyatanabhāvena ca nesaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ aññesaṃ avisayoti? Nāyaṃ virodho. Yena adhippāyena rūpadhātuyaṃ saññīnaṃ gandhāyatanādīnaṃ avacanaṃ, tena rūpāyatanassāpi avacananti asaññīnaṃ ekaṃ āyatanaṃ vattabbaṃ. Yathāsakañhi indriyagocarabhāvāpekkhāya yesaṃ nippariyāyena āyatanabhāvo atthi, tesu niddisiyamānesu tadabhāvato rūpadhātuyaṃ saññīnaṃ gandhādike visuṃ āyatanabhāvena avatvā dhammasabhāvānativattanato, manoviññāṇassa ca visayabhāvūpagamanato dhammāyatanantogadhe katvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti pāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 1015) vuttaṃ. Etadatthañhi ‘‘dhammāyatana’’nti sāmaññato nāmakaraṇaṃ, piṭṭhivaṭṭakāni vā tāni katvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti vuttaṃ.
为了显示这一理路——即以“无想众生的色处”那样的用意而说,那么对有想众生也应当把香等分别摄取——论中才说“无想众生天有二处出现”(《分别论》1017)。因为在那里纵然没有自己的根,色的“色处”自性也丝毫未被超越,所以它仍旧只被称为色处。通过显示这一理路,把香等三处也纳入进来,这个道理就显示出来了:有想众生有八处,无想众生有五处。应当这样接受;否则,在色界中由于无法触知地等,梵天神就连说话的声音也不会有。因为若不撞击、不接触,声音就无从产生;而具有可触自性的法,也不可能在一切地方都不可触知;如果色有之中没有被称作触处的三大种,色处等也就不能存在。因此,地等在那里虽然可以被触知,但众生没有身根,所以不说它们具有触处的性质。这样成立之后,色界中它们“有对”的说法也就得以成立。正如所说:“无想众生,依一种无见有对的大种,而有二种大种”等等(《发趣论》2.22.20)。巴利
Yena ca pana adhippāyena asaññīnaṃ rūpāyatanaṃ vuttaṃ, tena saññīnampi gandhādīnaṃ visuṃ gahaṇaṃ kātabbanti imassa nayassa dassanatthaṃ ‘‘asaññasattānaṃ devānaṃ dve āyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1017) vuttaṃ. Asatipi hi tattha attano indriye rūpassa vaṇṇāyatanasabhāvātikkamo natthevāti taṃ rūpāyatanantveva vuccati. Iminā ca nayadassanena gandhādīni tīṇi pakkhipitvā saññīnaṃ aṭṭha āyatanāni, asaññīnaṃ pañcāti ayamattho dassito hoti. Evañcetaṃ sampaṭicchitabbaṃ, aññathā rūpaloke phusituṃ asakkuṇeyyatāya pathavīādīnaṃ brahmānaṃ vacīghoso eva na siyā. Na hi paṭighaṭṭanānighaṃsamantarena saddappavatti atthi, na ca phusanasabhāvānaṃ katthaci aphusanabhāvatā sakkā viññātuṃ, phoṭṭhabbāyatanasaṅkhātassa ca bhūtattayassa abhāve rūpabhave rūpāyatanādīnampi sambhavo eva na siyā. Tasmā phusituṃ sakkuṇeyyatāyapi pathavīādīnaṃ tattha kāyindriyābhāvena tesaṃ phoṭṭhabbabhāvo na vutto. Evañca katvā rūpadhātuyaṃ tesaṃ sappaṭighavacanañca samatthitaṃ hoti. Vuttañhi ‘‘asaññasattānaṃ anidassanasappaṭighaṃ ekaṃ mahābhūtaṃ paṭicca dve mahābhūtā’’tiādi (paṭṭhā. 2.22.20).
所谓“有对”,是指三大种对于身净色,通过撞击其所依的大种而现前;但这里指的是那(有对)的自性。而那(有对)对于不可能被触及的自性,因为没有撞击,所以不存在。如果在没有能缘者的地方,取了色处而说“二处”,那为什么不取香处等而说“五处”呢?这是为了显示理趣而施设的教示,这个意思前面已经说过了。或者,那里唯宣说色处,有时是就其他地的众生的净色所缘境而言,并不是因为其他处不存在,也不是因为即使以异门来说也不具处性。因为无想众生的色处,能成为同层面居住的广果天以及上地居的净居天净色的所缘境,而香与味则不能,所以唯独不宣说它们,这是合理的。在《论事》中,也对那些承认香处等胜义存在的人进行了反驳。巴利
Paṭigho ca nāma bhūtattayassa kāyappasādaṃ pati tannissayabhūtaghaṭṭanādvārena abhimukhabhāvo, idha pana taṃsabhāvatā. So ca phusituṃ asakkuṇeyyasabhāvassa ghaṭṭanāya abhāvato natthi. Yadi tattha asatipi visayini rūpāyatanaṃ gahetvā ‘‘dve āyatanānī’’ti vuttaṃ, atha kasmā gandhāyatanādīni gahetvā ‘‘pañcāyatanānī’’ti na vuttanti? Nayadassanavasena desanā pavattāti vuttovāyamattho. Atha vā tattha rūpāyatanasseva vacanaṃ kadāci aññabhūmikānaṃ pasādassa visayabhāvaṃ sandhāya, na pana itaresaṃ abhāvato, nāpi pariyāyenapi āyatanabhāvābhāvato. Asaññīnañhi rūpāyatanaṃ samānatalavāsīnaṃ vehapphalānaṃ, uparibhūmikānañca suddhāvāsānaṃ pasādassa visayabhāvaṃ gacchati, na pana gandharasāti tesaṃyeva tattha avacanaṃ yuttaṃ. Kathāvatthumhi ca nippariyāyena gandhāyatanādīnaṃ atthibhāvaṃ paṭijānantaṃ sandhāya paṭisedho kato.
就算这段话并没有说明香处等不存在,难道就没有别的说法能说明它们存在吗?并非如此,因为注释书里已经明确判定它们存在。凡是注释书的话不与巴利圣典相冲突,它就和巴利圣典一样可以作为标准,因为它来自无可指责的师承,一直流传至今。这里或许有人会问:不与巴利圣典相冲突的注释书话可以当作标准,但这段话不是冲突了吗?并非如此,因为已经说明它并不冲突。为了显示眼等处以及依它们而生的识是众生空,世尊宣说了界教法;既然以处的方式说到的那些法也显示了它们的界性,那么不另外说它们的界性也是合理的。因此应当知道,这里按照眼十法等来计算色法,是以不与巴利圣典相冲突的方式进行的,在这里不该有“这违背了法性”的疑虑。巴利
Yadipi cetaṃ vacanaṃ tattha gandhāyatanādīnaṃ abhāvavibhāvanaṃ na hoti, atthibhāvadīpanampi pana aññavacanaṃ natthevāti? Nayidamevaṃ, aṭṭhakathāsu tattha nesaṃ atthibhāvassa niddhāretvā vuttattā. Yañhi aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ pāḷiyā na virujjhati, taṃ pāḷi viya pamāṇabhūtaṃ agarahitāya ācariyaparamparāya yāvajjatanā āgatattā. Tattha siyā – yaṃ pāḷiyā na virujjhati aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ, taṃ pamāṇaṃ, idaṃ pana virujjhatīti? Nayidamevaṃ, yathā na virujjhati, tathā paṭipāditattā. Cakkhādīnaṃ āyatanānaṃ, tannissayānañca viññāṇānaṃ sattasuññatāsandassanatthaṃ bhagavato dhātudesanāti āyatanabhāvena vuttānaṃyeva dhātubhāvadīpanato dhātubhāvassāpi tesaṃ avacanaṃ yujjati eva. Tasmā yathā pāḷiyā avirodho hoti, tathā cakkhudasakādivasena idha rūpagaṇanā katāti na ettha dhammatāvilomanāsaṅkāya okāsoti veditabbaṃ.
在其他湿生和化生的生类中,除了色界梵天之外,对其他化生者和湿生者应当这样理解其关联。这里“其他”一词是用来限定化生的,不是用来限定湿生的,因为那样限定不成立。只有存在可能、又有例外情况时,才有修饰词与被修饰词的关系。在欲界诸天中,结生时以及整个生命期间,因为始终能按前面所说的相续获得色法,所以说“那些色法在诸天中恒常存在”。因为他们任何时候都不会诸根残缺,也不会成为无性根者。以“眼是它们十法的圆满”来说,称为眼十法聚;或者,以不共通的眼为特征的十法聚,称为眼十法聚。其余各聚也是如此,即像眼十法聚那样,其余十法聚也应这样组合来理解。为了详细解释“在湿生和化生生类中,最低限度有三十种”这一简要说法,说了“然而最低限度……”等话,但这与巴利圣典不一致。因为巴利圣典中并没有说欲界湿生和化生的无鼻者有结生。在《法心分别》中确实说:“在欲界结生刹那,有的人十一处现起,有的人十处现起,有的人另外十处现起,有的人九处现起,有的人七处现起”,但没有说“八处现起”。如果无鼻者也能结生,那就应该三次说“十处现起”,也应该三次说“九处现起”,但圣典并没有这样说。巴利
Aññesu saṃsedajaopapātikayonikesūti rūpībrahme pana ṭhapetvā aññesu opapātikesu, saṃsedajesu cāti evamettha sambandho veditabbo. Opapātikavisesanañhettha aññaggahaṇaṃ, na saṃsedajavisesanaṃ asambhavato. Sati hi sambhave, byabhicāre ca visesanavisesitabbatā hoti. Kāmāvacaradevesu sabbakālaṃ paṭisandhipavattīsu yathāvuttāya santatiyā rūpānaṃ labbhanato vuttaṃ ‘‘tāni ca niccaṃ devesū’’ti. Na hi te kadācipi vikalindriyā, abhāvakā ca hontīti. Cakkhu nesaṃ dasannaṃ pūraṇoti katvā cakkhudasako nāma, asādhāraṇena vā cakkhunā lakkhito dasako cakkhudasako. Evaṃ sesāti yathā cakkhudasako vutto, evaṃ sesāpi dasakā yojetvā veditabbā. ‘‘Saṃsedajūpapātayonīsu , avakaṃsato tiṃsā’’ti saṅkhepena vuttamatthaṃ vivaranto ‘‘avakaṃsato panā’’tiādimāha, taṃ panetaṃ pāḷiyā na sameti. Na hi pāḷiyaṃ kāmāvacarānaṃ saṃsedajopapātikānaṃ aghānakānaṃ upapatti vuttā. Dhammahadayavibhaṅge hi ‘‘kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavanti, kassaci dasāyatanāni, kassaci aparāni dasāyatanāni, kassaci navāyatanāni, kassaci sattāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vuttaṃ, na vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti (vibha. 1007). Yadi hi aghānakassāpi upapatti siyā, tikkhattuṃ ‘‘dasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā, tikkhattuñca ‘‘navāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti, na ca taṃ vuttaṃ.
这里,“在投生那一刻”指的是结生的刹那。“十一处”是指诸根完备的人,除去声处,共十一种处。“某人有时有十处”是指盲人,除去眼处。“另外的十处”是指聋人,除去耳处。“九处”是指又盲又聋的人,除去眼处和耳处。“七处”是就胎生者而言的,依色、香、味、身、触、意、法这些处来说。如果眼、耳、鼻根缺失的人也能投生,那他就应该有八处,但经典里并没有说“有八处现起”。所以,根本不存在眼、耳、鼻根都缺失的人。而且,如果有无鼻者的投生,那就还得再说一次“有些人还有其他十处现起”。如果真是那样,那么正如对又盲又聋的人说过一次“有些人有九处现起”,对盲而无鼻的人、聋而无鼻的人,也应当说“有些人有其他九处现起,有些人还有其他九处现起”——这就是其中的意思。同样地,关于界等现起的问题,也应当这样阐述。在这里,“最高有七十种色法”这句话,是在“湿生与化生之生类”中结合两种生类来说的;但“最低限度有三十种色法”这句并非如此。这一句只应结合湿生来说明。因为同一个语法连接所连接的内容,其中一部分也能获得关联,所以这句话是就湿生的天生盲者、聋者、无鼻者、非男非女者而言的:依舌十法聚、身十法聚、心所依十法聚,有三十种色法生起。它并不是就化生而说的。这就是这部义注在这里的意图。巴利
Tattha upapattikkhaṇeti paṭisandhikkhaṇe. Ekādasāti paripuṇṇāyatanassa saddāyatanavajjāni ekādasa āyatanāni. Kassaci dasāyatanānīti andhassa cakkhāyatanavajjāni. Aparāni dasāyatanānīti badhirassa sotāyatanavajjāni. Navāyatanānīti andhabadhirassa cakkhusotāyatanavajjāni. Sattāyatanānīti gabbhaseyyakassa rūpagandharasakāyaphoṭṭhabbamanodhammāyatanavasena vuttaṃ. Yadi cakkhusotaghānavikalopi uppajjeyya, tassa aṭṭhevāyatanāni siyuṃ, na ca vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti. Tasmā nattheva cakkhusotaghānavikalo. Sati ca aghānakūpapattiyaṃ punapi ‘‘kassaci aparānipi dasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyā. Tathā ca sati yathā andhabadhirassa vasena ‘‘kassaci navāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti ekavāraṃ vuttaṃ, evaṃ andhāghānakassa, badhirāghānakassa ca vasena ‘‘kassaci aparāni navāyatanāni, kassaci aparānipi navāyatanāni pātubhavantī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti attho. Evaṃ dhātupātubhāvādipañhānipi vattabbānīti vadanti. Ettha ca yathā ‘‘sattati ukkaṃsatotha rūpānī’’ti padaṃ ‘‘saṃsedajūpapātayonīsū’’ti ettha yonidvayavasena yojīyati, na evaṃ ‘‘avakaṃsato tiṃsā’’ti idaṃ. Idaṃ pana saṃsedajayonivaseneva yojetabbaṃ. Ekayoganiddiṭṭhassāpi ekadeso sambandhaṃ labhatīti saṃsedajassa jaccandhabadhiraaghānakanapuṃsakassa jivhākāyavatthudasakānaṃ vasena tiṃsa rūpāni uppajjantīti vuttaṃ, na opapātikassāti ayamettha aṭṭhakathāyamadhippāyo.
不过,有人这样说:“《大义注》里讲:对化生的天生盲人、聋人、无鼻者、非男非女者,按舌十法聚、身十法聚、心所依十法聚来算,有三十种色法生起。”这种说法不能采纳,因为那是因疏忽而写错的文句。正因如此,《处双论》的注释里说:“在欲界中,并没有无鼻的化生者。如果有的话,就该说‘某些人有八处现起’了。”另一些人则说:“从‘某些人有十一处现起’一直到‘某些人有九处现起’,这段经文是针对化生者说的。所以,前后两处义注并不矛盾,能够成立。这样一来,这个义释与前面所说的经文也确实完全吻合、一致。”至于有些人说:“用‘化生’这个词,湿生也被包括进去了。因为在《法心分别》里,对‘在欲界结生刹那,某些人有十一处现起’等解说中,只用了‘化生的诸饿鬼’等说法来指化生,并没有提到湿生。”——对此应当知道,那是把诸处齐全的湿生者归入化生来说的。所以义注中说:“湿生的生类,按诸处齐全和诸处不齐全两种情况,归入化生来说。”或者说,是为了用主要的生类来显示一切诸处齐全的生类,才说“诸化生者”。但在这里,为了直接显示两种生类本身,并且为了只就湿生生类来显示色法最低限度的生起,所以不把另一种(湿生)归入化生生类,而说“湿生、化生之生类”。这一切都要经过审慎考察之后再采纳。巴利
Ye pana ‘‘opapātikassa jaccandhabadhiraaghānakanapuṃsakassa jivhākāyavatthudasakānaṃ vasena tiṃsa rūpāni uppajjantīti mahāaṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutta’’nti vadanti, taṃ na gahetabbaṃ. So hi pamādapāṭho. Evañca katvā āyatanayamakavaṇṇanāyaṃ ‘‘kāmadhātuyaṃ pana aghānako opapātiko natthi. Yadi bhaveyya, ‘kassaci aṭṭhāyatanāni pātubhavantī’ti vadeyyā’’ti (yama. aṭṭha. āyatanayamaka 18-21) vuttaṃ. Apare panāhu ‘‘kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavantīti yāva ‘kassaci navāyatanānī’ti pāḷi opapātike sandhāya vuttā. Tasmā pubbenāparaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ avirodho siddho. Tathā ca yathāvuttapāḷiyā ayamatthavaṇṇanā aññadatthu saṃsandati sametiyevā’’ti. Yaṃ paneke vadanti ‘‘opapātikaggahaṇena saṃsedajāpi saṅgayhanti. Tathā hi dhammahadayavibhaṅge ‘kāmadhātuyā upapattikkhaṇe kassaci ekādasāyatanāni pātubhavantī’tiādīnaṃ (vibha. 1007) niddese ‘opapātikānaṃ petāna’ntiādinā (vibha. 1009) opapātikaggahaṇameva kataṃ, na saṃsedajaggahaṇa’’nti, taṃ paripuṇṇāyatanānaṃyeva saṃsedajānaṃ opapātikesu saṅgahaṇavasena vuttanti veditabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘saṃsedajayonikā paripuṇṇāyatanāparipuṇṇāyatanabhāvena opapātikasaṅgahaṃ katvā vuttā’’ti, padhānāya vā yoniyā sabbaṃ paripuṇṇāyatanayoniṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘opapātikānanti vutta’’nti ca, idha pana yonidvayaṃ sarūpeneva pakāsetuṃ, saṃsedajayonivaseneva ca avakaṃsato rūpapavattiṃ dassetuṃ opapātikayoniyā itaraṃ asaṅgahetvā ‘‘saṃsedajūpapātayonīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ sabbaṃ vīmaṃsitvā gahetabbaṃ.
至于在最高和最低之间,就是指前面所说的“七十、三十”这些色法最高和最低界限的中间范围。应当依照相应的情况来理解这种分别:在恶趣中,盲人因为缺少眼十法聚而有六种,同样地,聋人因为缺少耳十法聚而有六种,而盲聋人则因为缺少眼和耳十法聚而有五种,应当按这样的方式来了知。至于这里应当说明的内容,前面已经说过了。巴利
Ukkaṃsāvakaṃsānaṃ pana antareti ‘‘sattati, tiṃsā’’ti evaṃ vuttānaṃ rūpassa ukkaṃsāvakaṃsaparicchedānaṃ majjhe. Anurūpato vikappo veditabboti apāyesu andhassa cha cakkhudasakābhāvato, tathā badhirassa sotadasakābhāvato, andhabadhirassa pana pañca cakkhusotadasakābhāvatoti evamādinā nayena veditabbo. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ vuttamevāti.
631 死与结生之间,依蕴等而彼此相同,就是无差别;彼此不同,就是差别。巴利
631. Cutipaṭisandhīnaṃ khandhādīhi aññamaññasamānatā abhedo. Asamānatā bhedo.
“所缘也无差别”这句话,是就四种无色界的情况说的:从某一处死后,就在那一处投生。可是在下面,或者在色界里,并没有这样的投生。从无色界死后投生到下面,只会在欲界发生,而且在那里也一定是三因结生。不过他们说,从色界死后,也可能是二因结生。以非广大外所缘为所缘的死心之后,紧接着生起以广大内所缘为所缘的第二、第四无色界结生。因为这里只是显示了法门的纲要,所以把没有说到的也都总摄起来说:“这暂且只是就无色界来说的法则。”由于色界、无色界者的近行定力量强,从那里死后不会投生到恶趣,所以说“从一分善趣死后”。在“一分恶趣结生”这里,应该探究“一分”这个词的用意。这里的意思可能是:在“异身异想”那段里说到的某些堕恶趣者,他们的结生是三因等类的,因为他们是堕恶趣的状态,就把他们的结生看作“恶趣结生”,并且认为这种结生可以从一切善趣死后发生,而不是只从一分善趣死后发生;为了排除这个意思,才说“一分恶趣”。因为只有从一分善趣死后才有恶趣结生,不是从一切善趣死后都有。或者,恶趣结生有两种:紧接一分善趣死后的,和紧接恶趣死后的。其中,为了排除后一种,只取前一种,所以说“一分恶趣结生”。无因死心之后的有因结生,应该结合二因和三因来理解。因为像蛙天子等人那样,无因死心之后也有三因结生。巴利
Ārammaṇatopiabhinnāti catūsu āruppesu tato tato cavitvā tattha tattheva upapajjantassa vasena vuttaṃ. Tatheva pana heṭṭhā, rūpabhave vā upapatti natthi. Arūpabhūmito cavitvā heṭṭhā upapatti nāma kāmabhave eva, tatthāpi tihetukapaṭisandhi eva. Rūpabhavato pana cuto duhetukopi hotīti vadanti. Amahaggatabahiddhārammaṇāya cutiyā anantarā mahaggataajjhattārammaṇā dutiyacatutthāruppapaṭisandhi. Evaṃ nayamattassa dassitattā vuttaṃ, avuttañca sabbaṃ saṅgahetvā āha ‘‘ayaṃ tāva arūpabhūmīsuyeva nayo’’ti. Rūpārūpāvacarānaṃ upacārassa balavatāya tato cavitvā duggatiyaṃ upapatti natthīti ‘‘ekaccasugaticutiyā’’ti āha. Ekaccaduggatipaṭisandhīti ettha ekaccaggahaṇassa payojanaṃ maggitabbaṃ. Ayaṃ panettha adhippāyo siyā – nānattakāyanānattasaññīsu vuttā ekacce ca vinipātikā tihetukādipaṭisandhikā, tesaṃ paṭisandhiṃ vinipātikabhāvena ‘‘duggatipaṭisandhī’’ti gahetvā sabbasugaticutiyā ca sā paṭisandhi hoti, na ekaccasugaticutiyā evāti tannivattanatthaṃ ekaccaduggatiggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Apāyapaṭisandhi eva hi ekaccasugaticutiyā hoti, na sabbasugaticutiyāti. Atha vā duggatipaṭisandhi duvidhā ekaccasugaticutiyā anantarā, duggaticutiyā cāti. Tattha pacchimaṃ vajjetvā purimaṃyeva gahetuṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘ekaccaduggatipaṭisandhī’’ti. Ahetukacutiyā sahetukapaṭisandhīti duhetukā ca tihetukā ca yojetabbā. Maṇḍūkadevaputtādīnaṃ viya hi ahetukacutiyā tihetukapaṭisandhipi hotīti.
对于每一个(死心与结生)各自相反的情况,都应按照相应配合的方式来搭配,意思是:在“从某一类善趣死,有某一类恶趣结生”等种种不同的分类中,凡是能配合的,比如“从某一类恶趣死,有某一类恶趣结生”等等,就应当一一这样搭配。因为只着眼于“能配合”这一点,所以用了中性词来表达。或者也可以把“应搭配”理解为表示状态的说法。然而,在“非广大外所缘死心之后,有广大内所缘”等情况下,就不应作相反方向的搭配。因为在无色地,并不存在广大内所缘的死心之后,有非广大外所缘的结生。“四蕴的无色死心无间之后,有五蕴的欲界结生”这一条的相反搭配,本身就已经自行搭配好了。“过去所缘的死心之后,有现在所缘的结生”这一条则根本没有相反的情况。差别的不同分类已经这样详细地显示出来了,而同一分类中的无差别情况,则应在每一个不同分类中,就依照那里死心与结生的搭配方式来理解,比如“从五蕴的欲界死,有五蕴的欲界……乃至……从无寻无伺死,有无寻无伺”。至于四蕴之后有四蕴,本身就已经自行搭配好了。依照这个道理就能理解,所以在五蕴等当中,没有显示同一分类中的无差别情况。巴利
Tassatassa viparītato ca yathāyogaṃ yojetabbanti ‘‘ekaccasugaticutiyā ekaccaduggatipaṭisandhī’’tiādīsu bhedavisesesu ‘‘ekaccaduggaticutiyā ekaccaduggatipaṭisandhī’’tiādinā yaṃ yaṃ yujjati, taṃ taṃ yojetabbanti attho. Yujjamānamattāpekkhanavasena napuṃsakaniddeso kato. Yojetabbanti vā bhāvatthatā daṭṭhabbā. ‘‘Amahaggatabahiddhārammaṇāya mahaggataajjhattārammaṇā’’tiādīsu pana viparītayojanā na kātabbā. Na hi mahaggataajjhattārammaṇāya cutiyā arūpabhūmīsu amahaggatabahiddhārammaṇā paṭisandhi atthi. ‘‘Catukkhandhāya āruppacutiyā anantarā pañcakkhandhā kāmāvacarapaṭisandhī’’ti etassa vipariyāyo sayameva yojito. ‘‘Atītārammaṇāya cutiyā paccuppannārammaṇā paṭisandhī’’ti etassa ca vipariyāyo natthi eva. Bhedaviseso eva ca evaṃ vitthārena dassito, abhedaviseso pana ekekasmiṃ bhede tattha tattheva cutipaṭisandhiyojanāvasena veditabbo ‘‘pañcakkhandhāya kāmāvacaracutiyā pañcakkhandhā kāmāvacarā…pe… avitakkaavicārāya avitakkāvicārā’’ti. Catukkhandhāya pana catukkhandhā sayameva yojitā. Eteneva nayena sakkā viññātunti pañcakkhandhādīsu abhedaviseso na dassitoti.
632 所谓“如是”,即依照上面所说的方式。这个识之所以生起,是依于与无明等俱行的行——那行与因相应——方获得其缘。由于外道所设想的支配者并不存在,所以它只是色法与无色法而已。因此说“不是有情,不是命者”。所谓“往生”,只是依世俗言说而如此称呼;从究竟义上说,意思不过是依诸缘和合、以另一种存在形态而生起罢了。因此说“而彼……”等。“从彼无因”,即在那里没有因。“依人死结生次第”,即从人死之后,依人结生的次第。这样,“明显”的取用便成为两者的限定语。这里所说的明显,应依那时临近的诸蕴来理解,如“正在死时,正在结生时”等说法那样。或者,“依人死结生次第”指从人死后,依任何一种结生次第。因为下文将会说“或贪著依止而喜乐,或不喜乐”。巴利
632.Itīti evaṃ vuttappakārena. Etaṃ viññāṇaṃ avijjādisahakārikāraṇasahitassa saṅkhārassa vasena laddhappaccayaṃ. Bāhirakakappitassa adhipatiṭṭhanakassa abhāvato rūpārūpadhammamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘na satto na jīvo’’ti. Upetīti vuccati tathāvohāramattaṃ, atthato pana paccayasāmaggiyā bhavantarabhāvena uppajjanamattanti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘tassa cā’’tiādi. Tato hetuṃ vināti tattha hetuṃ vinā. Manussacutipaṭisandhikkamenāti manussacutito manussapaṭisandhikkamena. Evañhi pākaṭaggahaṇaṃ ubhayavisesanaṃ hoti. Pākaṭatā cettha tadāsannakkhandhavasena veditabbā ‘‘cavamāne upapajjamāne’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.247) viya. Manussacutipaṭisandhikkamenāti vā manussacutito yassa kassaci paṭisandhikkamena. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘nissayaṃ assādayamānaṃ vā anāssādayamānaṃ vā’’ti (visuddhi. 2.632).
“自然”是指本性,意思是寿行已经耗尽。“加害”是指自己或别人所做的斩首等伤害。一切肢体和关节的连结,就是“一切肢体关节的连结”,也就是那些能切断它们的东西。“集会”是指崩坏、发生。心脏部位也逐渐干枯,几乎不剩什么,身体就更不用说了,所以说“在逐渐干枯的身体中”。因此又说“依止于那一刹那残余的心脏所依处”。“在眼等灭去时”这句话,是抱着这样的意图说的:就像胎生者的诸处是次第生起的,灭去也是次第的;或者是针对进入极其微弱的状态而说“灭去”,并不是指无余灭尽。因为前面已经说明,在五门识的无间也有死亡发生。而且在《双论》中,通过“若眼处灭去,他的意处也灭去吗?是的。若意处灭去,他的眼处也灭去吗?有心而无眼者死殁时,他们的意处灭去,但眼处不灭去。有眼者死殁时,他们的意处和眼处都灭去”等文句,说明了眼处等是与死心同时灭去的。巴利
Sarasenāti sabhāvena, parikkhīṇāyusaṅkhāratāyāti attho. Upakkamenāti attanā, parena vā katena sīsacchedanādiupakkamena. Sabbesaṃ aṅgapaccaṅgasandhīnaṃ bandhanāni sabbaṅgapaccaṅgasandhibandhanāni, tesaṃ chedakānaṃ. Sannipātanti patanaṃ pavatti. Hadayappadesopi anukkamena sussitvā appāvaseso hoti, pageva kāyoti āha ‘‘kamena upasussamāne sarīre’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘taṅkhaṇāvasesahadayavatthusannissita’’nti. ‘‘Niruddhesu cakkhādīsū’’ti idaṃ gabbhaseyyakānaṃ āyatanānaṃ anupubbuppatti viya nirodhopi anupubbato hotīti adhippāyena vuttaṃ, atimandabhāvūpagamanataṃ vā sandhāya ‘‘niruddhesū’’ti vuttaṃ, na anavasesanirodhaṃ. Pañcadvārikaviññāṇānantarampi hi pubbe cuti dassitā. Yamake ca ‘‘yassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nirujjhati, tassa manāyatanaṃ nirujjhatīti? Āmantā. Yassa vā pana manāyatanaṃ nirujjhati, tassa cakkhāyatanaṃ nirujjhatīti? Sacittakānaṃ acakkhukānaṃ cavantānaṃ tesaṃ manāyatanaṃ nirujjhati, no ca tesaṃ cakkhāyatanaṃ nirujjhati. Sacakkhukānaṃ cavantānaṃ tesaṃ manāyatanañca nirujjhati, cakkhāyatanañca nirujjhatī’’tiādinā (yama. 1.āyatanayamaka.120) cakkhāyatanādīnaṃ cuticittena saha nirodho vuttoti.
“只是心所依处”是指心所依处这个范围而已。因为身根并不是依靠心所依处才生起的。那时的心所依处,也像被烈日暴晒的嫩棕榈叶一样,几乎不剩什么了,所以他们说“依止于那一刹那残余的心所依处”。不过,由于其他所依处已经无法执行各自的功能,那时的心识就只是依止于心所依处,因此说“依止于那一刹那残余的心所依处”。杀母之类的业,或者与之类似的广大业,叫做重业。反复造作、经常做的,是惯行业。临终时所做的,或者无论什么时候做了而清晰地忆念起来的,是近死业。先前所做、将在以后某一生中受报的,是已作业。由这些业所得到的残余无明等,成为识的缘,所以叫“已得残余之缘”,也就是行。这是说那些已经获得感果机会、随所积累而成熟的善与不善思。所谓业相,是指造业时所缘取的那个事物,那就是业相。即使是在过去百千俱胝劫以前所造的业,到了将要感果的时候,也会前来显现,或者显现为业,或者显现为业相。所谓趣相,是在将要投生之处显现的一种色。对于应当投生到地狱的众生来说,那趣相就是前面说过的“火焰之色”等等。无明所遮蔽的过患,就在于那些业等境界成为结生识的所缘,从而成为它生起之处。巴利
Hadayavatthumatteti hadayavatthupadesamatte. Na hi hadayavatthuṃ nissāya kāyindriyaṃ pavattati. Hadayavatthupi tadā ātape pakkhittaharitatālapaṇṇaṃ viya appāvasesaṃ hotīti ‘‘taṅkhaṇāvasesahadayavatthusannissita’’nti vuttanti vadanti. Itaravatthūnaṃ pana sakiccāsamatthatāya kevalaṃ hadayavatthusannissitameva, tadā viññāṇaṃ hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṅkhaṇāvasesahadayavatthusannissita’’nti. Mātughātādi, mahaggatamaññaṃ vā tādisaṃ garukaṃ nāma. Samāsevitaṃ abhiṇhaso kataṃ. Āsannaṃ maraṇakāle kataṃ, yadā tadā vā katampi paribyattaṃ hutvā anussaritaṃ. Pubbakataṃ aparāpariyāyavedanīyaṃ. Laddho avaseso avijjādiko viññāṇassa paccayo etenāti laddhāvasesapaccayo, saṅkhāro. Etena vipaccituṃ katokāsaṃ yathūpacitaṃ kusalākusalacetanamāha. Kammanimittaṃ nāma yaṃ vatthuṃ ārammaṇaṃ katvā āyūhanakāle kammaṃ āyūhati, taṃ. Atīte kappakoṭisatasahassamatthakepi hi kamme kate vipaccanakāle āgantvā kammaṃ vā kammanimittaṃ vā upatiṭṭhati. Gatinimittaṃ nāma nibbattanakaokāse eko vaṇṇo. So ca niraye nibbattanārahassa ‘‘aggijālavaṇṇādiko’’tiādinā heṭṭhā vuttoyeva. Avijjāpaṭicchāditādīnave tasmiṃ kammādivisaye paṭisandhiviññāṇassa ārammaṇabhāvena uppattiṭṭhānabhūte.
正是因为渴爱没有被断除,再加上先前生起的相续已经变成那样,识就朝向结生之处,倾向、斜向、偏向地运转起来,所以说“渴爱引导”。俱生行,是指与临近死心的速行识同时生起的思,或者也可以说是一切触等心所。它们把识投向那结生之处的业等对象上。意思是:它们就像投掷一样,以结生的方式让识安立在那对象上,并以此为因而运转。“彼”就是指那个识。通过死心、结生心以及临近这些识的相续,把识看成一体的,就说为“识”。所谓渴爱引导……而运转,这是在说明:引导、投掷、舍弃前一个所依、不执取后一个所依、无所依而转起,这些过程通过相续而属于同一个识,而不是另一个识。说“通过相续”的时候,也就驳斥了“就是这一个识在流转轮回,不是别的识”这种错误执著。因为虽然有多样性,但通过相续而成立同一性。在这里应当理解:前生身体所系缚的业等所缘,就像系在此岸树上的绳子;识就像那个人;渴爱就像那人想渡河;投掷行就像渡河的努力。又像那个人站到彼岸时,或者执取系在彼岸树上的某物,或者不执取,只是靠地面和自身的努力而站住;同样,这个识在五蕴有中会执取叫作心所依处的依止——也就是系缚于后有之身的东西,而在四蕴有中则不执取,只是靠与所缘相应的业而运转。其中“执取”就是得到、获得的意思。巴利
Taṇhāya appahīnattā eva, purimuppannāya ca santatiyā tathāpariṇatattā paṭisandhiṭṭhānābhimukhaṃ viññāṇaṃ ninnapoṇapabbhāraṃ hutvā pavattatīti āha ‘‘taṇhā nāmetī’’ti. Sahajātasaṅkhārāti cutiāsannajavanaviññāṇasahajātā cetanā, sabbepi vā phassādayo. Tasmiṃ paṭisandhiṭṭhāne kammādivisaye viññāṇaṃ khipanti. Khipantā viya tasmiṃ visaye paṭisandhivasena viññāṇapatiṭṭhānassa hetubhāvena pavattantīti attho. Tanti taṃ viññāṇaṃ. Cutipaṭisandhitadāsannaviññāṇānaṃ santativasena viññāṇanti upanītekattaṃ . Taṇhāya nāmiyamānaṃ…pe… pavattatīti namanakhipanapurimanissayajahanaaparanissayassādananissayarahitapavattanāni santativasena tassevekassa viññāṇassa honti, na aññassāti dasseti. Santativasenāti ca vadanto ‘‘tadevidaṃ viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsarati anañña’’nti (ma. ni. 1.396) imañca micchāgāhaṃ paṭikkhipati. Sati hi nānattanaye santativasena ekattanayo hotīti. Ettha ca orimatīrarukkhavinibaddharajju viya purimabhavattabhāvavinibaddhaṃ kammādiārammaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, puriso viya viññāṇaṃ, tassa mātikātikkamanicchā viya taṇhā, atikkamanapayogo viya khipanakasaṅkhārā, yathā ca so puriso paratīre patiṭṭhahamāno paratīrarukkhavinibaddhaṃ kiñci assādayamāno vā anassādayamāno vā kevalaṃ pathaviyaṃ sakabalapayogeheva patiṭṭhāti, evamidampi bhavantarattabhāvavinibaddhaṃ hadayavatthusaṅkhātaṃ nissayaṃ pañcavokārabhave assādayamānaṃ, catuvokārabhave anassādayamānaṃ vā kevalaṃ ārammaṇasampayuttakammeheva pavattati. Tattha assādayamānanti pāpuṇantaṃ, paṭilabhamānanti attho.
从“有等相续”这一说法来看:因为它是另一有的最初结生。或者,“有等”指的是有、生、趣、识住、有情居之另一,意思是连结这些。这个识并不是从别处来到这里的,因为它就是在这同一个有当中生起的。“业”,是指能引生结生的业。“行”,是指与临近死心的速行识相应的、具有投掷作用的行。“倾向”,是指以弯曲、倾向的方式生起的渴爱。“境”,是指业等。巴利
Bhavantarādipaṭisandhānatoti bhavantarassa aññabhavassa ādipaṭisandhānabhāvato. Bhavantarādayo vā bhavayonigativiññāṇaṭṭhitisattāvāsantarāni, tesaṃ paṭisandhānatoti attho. Tadetaṃ viññāṇaṃ nāpi idhāgataṃ imasmiṃyeva bhave uppannattā. Kammanti paṭisandhijanakaṃ kammaṃ. Saṅkhārāti cutiāsannajavanaviññāṇasahagatā khipanakasaṅkhārā. Natīti namanavasena pavattataṇhā. Visayo kammādi.
633 633. 声音、回声等虽然也是缘与缘生之性,但它们在相续中的关联并不明显,所以这里不讨论它们是一是异,而只是显示“无来、从过去之因而生”的缘起,因此说“在此”等语。所谓“以声等为因”,意思是:回声以声音为因,灯焰以另一灯焰等为因,印记以印章为因,影子以镜子和面孔等为因。它们“不前往他处而成”,是说它们不跑到声音等缘所在的地方去,而是以声音等为因,因为在生起之前它们并不存在。同样,这个结生识也不前往因所在的地方,而是以那个因为因,因为在生起之前它并不存在。因此,这个识并不是从因所在之处、从前世来到这里的,正如回声等并不是从声音等所在之处而来;也不是没有因就生起的,正如回声等并不是没有声音等而生起。这就是这段话的意思。另一种理解是:“不前往他处而成”,是说它们先前并不存在于缘所在的地方,之后也不前往他处以那个缘为因,因为它们在生起之前本来就不存在;但也不是不以声音等为缘。同样,这个结生识也应按照上面所说的方式来理解。巴利
633. Saddapaṭighosādīnaṃ satipi paccayapaccayuppannabhāve santānabandho na pākaṭoti tesaṃ ekattanānattabhāvaṃ anāmasitvā anāgamanātītahetusamuppādameva dassento ‘‘ettha cā’’tiādimāha. Saddādihetukāti ettha paṭighoso saddahetuko. Padīpo padīpantarādihetuko. Muddā lañchanahetukā. Chāyā ādāsādiabhimukhamukhādihetukā. Honti aññatra agantvāti saddādipaccayadesaṃ anupagantvā saddādihetukā honti tato pubbe abhāvā. Evaṃ idampi paṭisandhiviññāṇaṃ na hetudesaṃ gantvā taṃhetukaṃ hoti tato pubbe abhāvā. Tasmā na idaṃ hetudesato purimabhavato idhāgataṃ paṭighosādayo viya saddādidesato, nāpi tattha hetunā vinā uppannaṃ saddādīhi vinā paṭighosādayo viyāti attho. Atha vā honti aññatra agantvāti pubbe paccayadese sannihitā hutvā tato aññatra gantvā tappaccayā na honti uppattito pubbe abhāvā, nāpi saddādipaccayā na honti, evaṃ idampīti vuttanayeneva yojetabbaṃ.
没有单一性,因为即使在同一个相续里,也是别的识在生起。也不是多样性,因为相续是连结的,就像灯火一样。因为对于刹那的灯焰,依据相续上的同一性,才说它就是那同一个,而且它能完成作用;这里也应该这样理解。用“如果……”等话,说明在相续的连结中,不能执取绝对的单一性,也不能执取绝对的多样性,并且指出执取会有过失。通过“这个道理”这一指示,说明在种子和芽等一切因与果所生起的事物中,应当按各自的情况来套用。因为在这里,如果因识和果识是绝对同一,那么从人趣中就不会生到天趣。如果是绝对不同,那么造业者就得不到果报,于是像“红种子得红果实”这样的说法,以及“尊者,我过去曾是名叫罗希达沙的仙人”这样的言说就会消失。所以,在这里,对于相续连结中的因与果所生起的事物,不能接受、也不能执取绝对的同一性或绝对的多样性。在这里,通过否定绝对同一性,遮破“苦乐是自己造的”这一邪见;通过否定绝对多样性,遮破“苦乐是别人造的”这一邪见;通过宣说因与果的生起,遮破“无因生”这一邪见。巴利
Natthi ekatā ekasantānekattepi aññasseva viññāṇassa pātubhavanato. Nāpi nānatā santānabandhato padīpo viya. Khaṇikāya hi padīpajālāya santānekattaṃ upādāya so evāti vuccati, atthakiccañca sādheti, evamidhāpi daṭṭhabbaṃ. ‘‘Yadi hī’’tiādinā santānabandhe ekantaṃ ekatāya, nānatāya ca aggahetabbataṃ, gahaṇe ca dosaṃ dasseti. Esa nayoti atidesena bījaṅkurādīsu sabbahetuhetusamuppannesu yathāsambhavaṃ yojanā kātabbāti dasseti. Idhāpi hi hetuhetusamuppannaviññāṇānaṃ ekantamekatte sati na manussagatito devagati sambhūtā siyā. Ekantanānatte na kammavato phalaṃ siyā, tato ‘‘rattassa bījaṃ rattassa phala’’ntiādikassa viya ‘‘bhūtapubbāhaṃ, bhante, rohitasso nāma isi ahosi’’ntiādikassa (saṃ. ni. 1.107) vohārassa lopo siyā, tasmā ettha santānabandhesu hetuhetusamuppannesu na ekantamekatā vā nānatā vā upagantabbā na gahetabbā. Ettha ca ekantaekatāpaṭisedhena ‘‘sayaṃkataṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 227) imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nivāreti, ekantanānatāpaṭisedhena ‘‘paraṃkataṃ sukhaṃ dukkha’’nti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 227), hetuhetusamuppannatāvacanena ‘‘adhiccasamuppanna’’nti (vibha. mūlaṭī. 227) imaṃ diṭṭhiṃ nivāreti.
634 这里,“此处”是指果报生起的地方。“他者”是指不同于造作那个业的人。“从他处”是指不同于那个业所产生的地方。因为说过“唯是法性转入他世”,如果没有受用果报的人,那这个果报是谁的?这是对此提出的追问。“于彼”是指在上述那个追问中。巴利
634.Tatthāti phaluppattiṭṭhāne. Aññassāti yena taṃ kammaṃ kataṃ, tato aññassa. Aññatoti yaṃ taṃ kammaṃ nibbattitaṃ, tato aññato. ‘‘Dhammamattaṃ bhavantaramupetī’’ti (visuddhi. 2.632; vibha. aṭṭha. 227; mahāni. aṭṭha. 27; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 1.1.105) vuttattā phalassa upabhuñjake ca asati kassa taṃ phalaṃ siyāti anuyuñjeti. Tatrāti tasmiṃ yathāvutte anuyoge.
这里说的“此处”,是指同一个生命相续。意思是:那个业是在哪一堆法里造作的,果报就正是在那同一个相续里成熟。“这个道理”是指:因和果虽然在本质上各不相同,但因为它们以因果的关系而相连,所以不能说那个果是“别人的”,也不能说是“从别处来的”——就是为了说明这个道理。就像对芒果、枸橼等种子加以四种甘美汁或紫胶等加工处理一样。在这里,被加工的种子好比造业的有情,加工好比业,种子发芽等相续好比有情的结生识等相续。就像在那里生起的甘甜果实或红蕊果实,它的性质属于那颗种子本身,也是从那个加工而来的;同样应当知道,果报的性质属于造业的有情本身,也是从那个业而来的。在幼年身体上所做的学习知识、学技艺、用药,并不会转移到老年身体上去。然而依靠这些,知识的熟练、技艺的通达、身体的健康,会在老年身体上生起。而这些并不是属于别人的,因为它们是在那个相续所摄的老年身体上生起的;也不是没有那些学习等就能从别处来的,因为那些不存在时它们也就不存在。同样,在这里,相续中的那个果报,不是别人的,也不能说成是从别处来的——应当这样连接理解。通过这一点,说明诸行灭时果报也就灭,并不是要遮止其他的缘。巴利
Tatthāti ekasantāne. Yasmiṃ dhammapuñje kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tasseva santāneti attho. Etassa atthassāti hetuphalānaṃ atthato aññattepi teneva hetuphalabhāvena sambandhattā taṃ phalaṃ ‘‘aññassa, aññato’’ti vā na vattabbanti etassa atthassa. Catumadhuraalattakarasādibhāvanā ambamātuluṅgādibījānaṃ abhisaṅkhāro. Ettha ca abhisaṅkhataṃ bījaṃ viya kammavā satto, abhisaṅkhāro viya kammaṃ, bījassa aṅkurādippabandho viya sattassa paṭisandhiviññāṇādippabandho. Tatthuppannassa madhurassa rattakesarassa vā phalassa vā tasseva bījassa, tato eva ca abhisaṅkhārato bhāvo viya kammakārakasseva sattassa, taṃkammato eva ca phalassa bhāvo veditabbo. Bālasarīre kataṃ vijjāpariyāpuṇanaṃ, sippasikkhanaṃ, osadhappayogo ca na vuḍḍhasarīraṃ gacchanti. Atha ca tannimittaṃ vijjāpāṭavaṃ sippajānanaṃ, anāmayatā ca vuḍḍhasarīre honti, na ca tāni aññassa honti taṃsantatipariyāpanne eva vuḍḍhasarīre uppajjanato, na ca yathāpayuttena vijjāpariyāpuṇanādinā vinā tāni aññato honti tadabhāve abhāvato, evaṃ idhāpi santāne yaṃ phalaṃ, etaṃ nāññassa. Na ca aññatoti yojetabbaṃ. Etena ca saṅkhārābhāve phalābhāvameva dasseti, na aññapaccayanivāraṇaṃ karoti.
对于所说的内容,“在那里,我说”是补充说明的话。或者可以这样连接:在那里,如果没有受用者,受用者的假名仍然成立。所谓“phalati”即是假名,即phalatisammuti。巴利
Yampi vuttaṃ, tattha vadāmāti vacanaseso. Tattha vā upabhuñjake asati siddhā bhuñjakasammutīti sambandho. Phalatīti sammuti phalatisammuti.
所谓“称为树的诸法”,是指作为“树”这个假名的执取基础的四大种以及所造色法。所谓“因此”,是说:就像在诸蕴的相续中,当善或不善的思生起时,就有“行善、作恶”这种关于作者的说法;同样,当它的果报生起时,就有“感受乐、感受苦”这种关于受用者的说法。因此,在这里,除了诸蕴之外,并不存在任何另外叫做受用者的东西。巴利
Rukkhasaṅkhātānaṃ dhammānanti rukkhapaññattiyā upādānabhūtānaṃ bhūtupādāyadhammānaṃ. Tasmāti yasmā yathā khandhasantāne kusalākusalacetanuppattiyaṃ ‘‘puññaṃ karoti, pāpaṃ karotī’’ti kattuvohāro, evaṃ tassa phaluppattiyaṃ ‘‘sukhaṃ anubhavati, dukkhaṃ anubhavatī’’ti upabhuñjakavohāro, tasmā na ettha khandhavinimuttena aññena upabhuñjakena nāma koci attho atthīti.
635 “即使如此”是说:在并没有转移、却又显现出来,并且像前面说的那样避免了过失的情况下,这个道理才能成立。“唯在转起的刹那”是说,就在诸行正在转起的那一刹那。“转起之前”是说,在业开始积累的那一刹那之前;因为那时同样不存在,所以才这样说。“之后”是说,在达到异熟之后。巴利
635.Evaṃ santepīti asaṅkantipātubhāve tattha ca yathāvuttadosapariharaṇe sati, siddheti attho. Pavattikkhaṇeyevāti saṅkhārānaṃ pavattamānakkhaṇe eva. Pavattito pubbeti kammāyūhanakkhaṇato pubbe, avijjamānatāya samānattā evaṃ vuttaṃ. Pacchā cāti vipaccanappapattito pacchā ca.
如果未成熟的果报之缘与已成熟的果报之缘,其“已作性”是一样的,那么已成熟的果报之缘也应该还能产生果报。为了消除这个疑问,所以说“并非恒常能产生果报”。巴利
Avipakkavipākā katattā ce paccayā, vipakkavipākānampi katattaṃ samānanti tesampi phalāvahatā siyāti āsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ āha ‘‘na ca niccaṃ phalāvahā’’ti.
“非由于存在,或由于非存在”,通过这句话,他回应了那些依于存在和非存在而说的过失。对于担保的行为、买东西的行为或借债的行为,仅仅是做那个行为本身;正是这个行为本身,在交付那件事物、偿还财物、还债时成为缘,意思是说,如果不交付等,就没有结果。巴利
‘‘Navijjamānattā avijjamānattā vā’’ti etena vijjamānattaṃ, avijjamānattañca nissāya vuttadose pariharati. Tassā pāṭibhogakiriyāya, bhaṇḍakīṇanakiriyāya, iṇaggahaṇakiriyāya vā karaṇamattaṃ taṃkiriyākaraṇamattaṃ, tadeva tadatthaniyyātane paṭibhaṇḍadāne, iṇadāne ca paccayo hoti, aphalitaniyyātanādiphalanti attho.
636 这是为了消除痴——也就是在三十二种识当中,前面所说的诸行在结生和转起时的缘性若未经分别阐明,便会生起的转起之痴。巴利
636.Sammohavighātatthanti bāttiṃsāya viññāṇesu yathāvuttasaṅkhārānaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ, pavattiyañca paccayabhāve vibhajja avibhāvite pavattanakasammohassa apanayanatthaṃ.
在“福行”中,这是简别处格。“无差别地”是指不区分“三因者对三因者”等差别,而是从总体上、以集合的方式来说,这就是它的意思。在一切情况下,都应当以强力业作为亲依止缘来连接。“因为弱业不能成为亲依止缘”,这一点在《发趣论注》中已经说明了。关于“色界五种善思的差别”,应当特别说明“除了获得神通者”,或者不需要特别说明,因为在讨论果报的缘性时,不会涉及非果报的情况。神通思的非果报性,前面已经阐明过了。“而无差别地”在这里也是同样的道理。“五种果报识”应当引来连接。巴利
Puññābhisaṅkhāreti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Avisesenāti ‘‘tihetuko tihetukassā’’tiādikaṃ bhedaṃ akatvā sāmaññato, piṇḍavasenāti attho. Sabbattha upanissayapaccayo balavakammassa vasena yojetabbo. ‘‘Dubbalañhi kammaṃ upanissayapaccayo na hotī’’ti paṭṭhānasaṃvaṇṇanāya dassitametaṃ. Rūpāvacarapañcakusalacetanābhedoti ‘‘ṭhapetvā abhiññāppatta’’nti visesetvā vattabbaṃ, na vā vattabbaṃ vipākassa paccayabhāvakathāya avipākārahassa pasaṅgābhāvato. Abhiññācetanāya hi avipākatā heṭṭhā vibhāvitā eva. Avisesena panāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañcannaṃ vipākaviññāṇānanti ānetvā sambandhitabbaṃ.
“五者”是指眼识、耳识、领受意界,以及两种推度意识界,这五种。“同样地”是说它们也分作两种。可是,只在可爱所缘上生起的善异熟识,怎么会在地狱等恶趣中现起呢?所以他说“在地狱中,大目犍连长老……”等。长老确实在那里用神通化现下雨,暂时平息了地狱之火,然后为他们说法。巴利
Pañcannanti cakkhusotaviññāṇānaṃ, sampaṭicchanamanodhātuyā, dvinnaṃ santīraṇamanoviññāṇadhātūnañcāti etesaṃ pañcannaṃ. Tathevāti dvedhā eva. Kathaṃ pana iṭṭhārammaṇeyeva pavattanakāni kusalavipākaviññāṇāni duggatiyaṃ pavattantīti āha ‘‘niraye mahāmoggallānattherassā’’tiādi. Thero hi tattha iddhiyā vassaṃ nimminitvā katipayaṃ velaṃ nirayaggiṃ vūpasametvā tesaṃ dhammaṃ deseti.
这本身就是欲界的福行。但如果不加区分地说“福行”,那就是把欲界福行和色界福行两种合在一起总括来说。巴利
Sveva kāmāvacaro puññābhisaṅkhāro. Avisesena pana puññābhisaṅkhāroti kāmāvacaraṃ, rūpāvacarañcāti duvidhampi puññābhisaṅkhāraṃ ekajjhaṃ saṅgaṇhāti.
“十二不善思的差别”这里,把掉举相应的思摄取在内,看不出有什么理由,这一点需要考察。对于一种识,在结生时同样是缘,在转起时却不是——这是说,只有一种识在结生时被限定为缘,而不是在转起时。因为在转起时,七种识也都是缘,这就是这里的意旨。巴利
Dvādasākusalacetanābhedoti ettha uddhaccasahagatacetanāya gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ na dissati, vicāretabbametaṃ. Ekassa viññāṇassa tatheva paccayo paṭisandhiyaṃ, no pavatteti ekasseva paccayabhāvaniyamo paṭisandhiyaṃ, no pavatte. Pavatte hi sattannampi paccayoti adhippāyo.
色有中的四种,是指不善异熟的眼识、耳识、领受和推度。不过,这四种必定以不可爱为所缘。那么在色有中,又怎么会与不可爱所缘相应呢?所以说“然而那仅是……”等。“同样地,在欲界天中也没有不可爱的色等”,这是就多数情况而言。因为对天人们来说,多数现起的色等都是可爱的,只是偶尔才有不可爱。比如有些天人在前兆显现等时候,会有枯萎的花鬘等不可爱所缘的相应。巴利
Rūpabhavecatunnanti akusalavipākānaṃ cakkhusotaviññāṇasampaṭicchanasantīraṇānaṃ. Tāni pana ekantato aniṭṭhārammaṇāni, rūpabhave ca kathaṃ aniṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogoti āha ‘‘so ca kho’’tiādi. ‘‘Tathā kāmāvacaradevalokepi aniṭṭharūpādayo natthī’’ti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Bahulañhi tesaṃ iṭṭhā eva rūpādayo upaṭṭhahanti, kadāci aniṭṭhaṃ. Devānañhi kesañcideva pubbanimittapātubhāvakālādīsu milātamālādianiṭṭhārammaṇasamāyogo hotīti.
637 在有详细说明的地方,从这个有开始,论师想只作简要说明,于是说“从最初开始”。正因为如此,才说了“在两种有中”等等。人类当中也有一些是卵生、湿生的,因此考虑到这一点,说了“在四种生中”。以“同一身、同一想”这种共同性来说,属于第四禅地的众生,除了无想天和无色界之外,也都唯归入第四识住。这是福行。正如前面所说的那样,即“以不同刹那的业缘和亲依止缘为缘”所说。随其所应:在欲界和色界的二十一种善异熟中,十四种在结生时和转起时生起,七种只在转起时生起——这就是随其所应。巴利
637. Yattha vitthārappakāsanaṃ kataṃ, tato bhavato paṭṭhāya mukhamattappakāsanaṃ kātukāmo āha ‘‘ādito paṭṭhāyā’’ti. Teneva ‘‘dvīsu bhavesū’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Manussāpi keci aṇḍajā, saṃsedajā ca hontīti tadapekkhāya ‘‘catūsu yonīsū’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekattakāyaekattasaññitāsāmaññena catutthajhānabhūmikāpi asaññāruppavajjā catutthiṃyeva viññāṇaṭṭhitiṃ bhajanti. Esa puññābhisaṅkhāro. Vuttanayenevāti ‘‘nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayena ceva upanissayapaccayena cā’’ti vuttanayeneva. Yathāsambhavanti ekavīsatikāmāvacararūpāvacarakusalavipākesu cuddasannaṃ paṭisandhiyaṃ, pavatte ca, sattannaṃ pavatte evāti ayaṃ yathāsambhavo.
就是指被称为“异身、一想”的那一类。巴利
Tādiseyevāti nānattakāyaekattasaññīsaṅkhāteyeva.
“四种识”这句话,是联系“有”等来说的。不过,包含在四种识当中的三种识,应当把它们的缘的关系分别配到三种识住里去理解。在没有识的有情居处,虽然找不到“行缘识”,但它以行为因这一点仍然是成立的。因为在那里,福行确实以异刹那的业缘为缘,成为“所作色”的缘。另外,在这个只是简要说明的地方,福行等在恶趣等处生起时,作为善异熟等识的缘的关系,按照在“有”的部分已经说过的方式就可以了解,所以这里没有再说——应当这样理解。巴利
Catunnaṃ viññāṇānanti bhavādayo apekkhitvā vuttaṃ. Catūsu antogadhānaṃ pana tiṇṇaṃ viññāṇānaṃ tīsu viññāṇaṭṭhitīsu paccayabhāvo yojetabbo. Aviññāṇake sattāvāse saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇe alabbhamānepi tassa saṅkhārahetukattaṃ labbhateva. Tathā hi tattha puññābhisaṅkhāro kaṭattārūpānaṃ nānākkhaṇikakammapaccayena paccayo hoti. Etasmiñca mukhamattappakāsane puññābhisaṅkhārādīnaṃ duggatiādīsu pavattiyaṃ kusalavipākādiviññāṇānaṃ paccayabhāvo bhavesu vuttanayeneva viññāyatīti na vuttoti veditabbo.
“识缘名色”这一句的详细解说之注释巴利
Viññāṇapaccayānāmarūpapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
638 名与色的分别,就是按名和色各自的种类来区分。巴利
638.Vibhāgānāmarūpānanti nāmassa, rūpassa ca pabhedato.
在这里,先要说明“名”的分类。虽然识也确实属于名,但为了清楚区分缘与缘所生法、不让它们混在一起,所以说“受等三蕴因为朝向所缘而趋向,所以是名”。至于涅槃,在讨论它如何生起的这个地方,因为它不依靠任何缘,也没有“趋向”这种作用,所以根本不会牵扯进来。因为涅槃是以“名”的“命名”意义而称为名,并不是以“趋向”的意义而称为名。那些名和色,则是按乐等感受以及地等色法来区分的。巴利
Tattha nāmassa tāva pabhedaṃ dassentena kāmaṃ viññāṇampi nāmameva, paccayapaccayuppanne pana asaṅkarato dassetuṃ ‘‘ārammaṇābhimukhaṃ namanato vedanādayo tayo khandhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Nibbānassa panettha pavattikathāyaṃ appaccayattā, namanaṭṭhābhāvato ca pasaṅgo eva natthi. Nāmanaṭṭhena hi taṃ nāmaṃ, na namanaṭṭhena. Tesaṃ nāmarūpānaṃ sukhādivasena, pathavīādivasena ca vibhāgo.
“一个有情居”指的是无想有情居。在前四种以及无想有情居这五种当中。巴利
Ekaṃ sattāvāsanti asaññasattāvāsaṃ. Purimesu catūsu, asaññasattāvāse cāti pañcasu.
以“胎生”一词的摄取而摄取了胎生者,所以说“以及卵生”。应当理解为“以及卵生与无有者”。“相续之首”是指聚相续的根本。虽然变化色在结生刹那并不存在,但相色和分际色是存在的,因此为了排除那些在胜义上非成就的色法,而说“从实色来说”。“触”等法以行蕴的性质归为一类,所以说“二十三种法”。“除去”是指不取聚中其他的地等诸色,因为它们与所取之色有相同的相。巴利
Gabbhaseyyaggahaṇena jalābujā gahitāti ‘‘aṇḍajānañcā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṇḍajānañca abhāvakānanti yojetabbaṃ. Santatisīsānīti kalāpasantānamūlāni. Yadipi vikārarūpāni paṭisandhikkhaṇe na santi, lakkhaṇaparicchedarūpāni pana santīti tāni paramatthato aparinipphannānīti vajjento āha ‘‘rūparūpato’’ti. Phassādike saṅkhārakkhandhabhāvena ekattaṃ netvā ‘‘tevīsati dhammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Apanetvāti kalāpantaragate pathavīādike samānalakkhaṇatāya aggahetvā.
所谓“他们”,是指梵身天等类众生。所谓“详细地”,是说在四种相续之首中,不省略对色法的说明。巴利
Tesanti brahmakāyikādīnaṃ. Vitthārenāti catūsupi santatisīsesu rūpānaṃ asaṅkhipanena.
不过在欲有中,说到“其余的化生者”时,虽然欲有里并没有单独提到化生者,按理说“其余”这个说法就该没有着落;但应当知道,这是相对于卵生和胎生来说,化生和湿生就是其余的,所以才说“其余”。另一种理解是,在说了梵身天等化生者之后,是针对其余众生才说“其余的化生者”。而那些也包含无色界众生,所以说“在欲有中”。至于根未圆满者的名色,则随各自情况,可以按照“色与识混合解说”那里所说的方法,从法的数目来了知,所以这里没有说明——应当这样理解。巴利
Kāmabhave pana yasmā sesaopapātikānanti ettha kiñcāpi kāmabhave opapātikā vuttā na santi, yena sesaggahaṇaṃ sātthakaṃ bhaveyya, aṇḍajagabbhaseyyakehi pana opapātikasaṃsedajā sesā hontīti sesaggahaṇaṃ katanti veditabbaṃ. Atha vā brahmakāyikādikehi opapātikehi vuttehi sese sandhāya ‘‘sesaopapātikāna’’nti āha. Te pana arūpinopi santīti ‘‘kāmabhave’’ti vuttaṃ. Aparipuṇṇāyatanānaṃ pana nāmarūpaṃ yathāsambhavaṃ rūpamissakaviññāṇaniddese vuttanayena sakkā dhammagaṇanato viññātunti na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
与结生心同时转起的时节,来自与结生心同时生起的诸色中的火界。心所依处要到那一刹那才生起,因此结生心的依处显得微弱。在它们所吞下的食物所滋养的身体里,食生色变得很坚固——这就是其中的关联。“人”,正是由于处在母胎中的这个状态而隐没不现。从最低限度来说,只有时节生和心生共两个八法聚;说到有声音的时候,则说“最高限度是两个九法聚”。关于“前面”:前面所说的从两种相续等开始、到七法聚为止的色法,这里是就每一个心在三个刹那中生起而说的,因此说“前面……七十种”。两种声音,就是时节生和心生这两种。巴利
Paṭisandhicittena saha pavattaututoti paṭisandhicittena saha uppannarūpesu tejodhātuto. Hadayavatthuno taṅkhaṇuppannattā paṭisandhicittassa vatthudubbalatā. Tesaṃ ajjhoharitāhārena anugate sarīre āhārasamuṭṭhānaṃ suṭṭhaddhakanti sambandho. Naroti teneva mātukucchigatabhāvena tirokkho. Avakaṃsato dve aṭṭhakāneva utucittasamuṭṭhānāni hontīti sasaddakālaṃ sandhāya ‘‘ukkaṃsato dvinnaṃ navakāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Pubbeti yaṃ pubbe santatidvayādikaṃ sattakapariyosānaṃ rūpaṃ idha vuttaṃ, taṃ ekekassa cittassa tīsu tīsu khaṇesu uppajjamānameva vuttanti katvā āha ‘‘pubbe…pe… sattatividha’’nti. Duvidhampi tanti utusamuṭṭhānaṃ, cittasamuṭṭhānañcāti duvidhampi taṃ saddaṃ.
“安住”:是指以持续不断的状态而住,但它自己其实只住一个刹那。“确定在四方”:是指彼此头部交错,根部则确定在四个方向。就像彼此拥抱站立、却各自乘着不同车乘的人一样。巴利
Saṇṭhātunti addhaniyabhāvena ṭhātuṃ, attano pana khaṇamattaṃ tiṭṭhateva. Catuddisā vavatthāpitāti aññamaññaṃ saṃsaṭṭhasīsā mūlena catūsu disāsu vavatthāpitā. Aññamaññaṃ āliṅgetvā ṭhitā bhinnavāhanikā viya ca.
639 在五蕴有中,“当转起发生时”这句话,是就两件事而说的:一是不能生色的业所引生的五识转起之时,二是俱生识缘。因为在那时,只有名从它生起。但以业识为缘,那时也可以说两者都有;并且以随后生起的识为缘,色也得到了支持。“在无想有情中”等,则是就业识缘而说的。在五蕴有中,“当转起发生时”这句话,应当这样理解:它指的是——由与“生起有分等的业”不同的业使色生起的时刻、灭尽定的时刻,以及与“有分等生起之时”不同的其他时刻;这样说才合理。因为在有分等生起时,由那能生的业所生起的色,以及那异熟,可以说就是业识缘。即使不依赖俱生识缘,在转起中由业推动的色与名,也并非不依赖业识。“于一切处”指在结生时和转起时。归于俱生识缘的名色,以及归于业识缘的名色,应随各自的情况加以组合。“名与色,即名色”——这里,名色这个词中,以“名”这一部分而具有“名”这个词的同形,以“色”这一部分而具有“色”这个词的同形。因此,这是同形词的省略其余,即部分同形的省略;意思是,使用“名色”一词时,其他的名、色等词就隐而不现了。巴利
639.Pañcavokārabhave ca pavattiyanti rūpājanakakammajapañcaviññāṇappavattikālaṃ, sahajātaviññāṇapaccayañca sandhāyāha. Tadā hi tato nāmameva hotīti. Kammaviññāṇapaccayā pana tadāpi ubhayaṃ hotīti sakkā vattuṃ, pacchājātaviññāṇapaccayā ca rūpaṃ upatthaddhaṃ hotīti. Asaññesūtiādi kammaviññāṇapaccayaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Pañcavokārabhave ca pavattiyanti bhavaṅgādijanakakammato aññena rūpuppattikālaṃ, nirodhasamāpattikālaṃ, bhavaṅgādiuppattikālato aññakālañca sandhāya vuttanti yuttaṃ. Bhavaṅgādiuppattikāle hi taṃjanakena kammunā uppajjamānaṃ rūpaṃ, so ca vipāko kammaviññāṇapaccayo hotīti sakkā vattuṃ. Sahajātaviññāṇapaccayānapekkhampi hi pavattiyaṃ kammena pavattamānaṃ rūpaṃ, nāmañca na kammaviññāṇānapekkhaṃ hotīti. Sabbatthāti paṭisandhiyaṃ, pavatte ca. Sahajātaviññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpaṃ, kammaviññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpañca yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbaṃ. Nāmañca rūpañca nāmarūpañcāti ettha nāmarūpasaddo attano ekadesena nāmasaddena nāmasaddassa sarūpo, rūpasaddena ca rūpasaddassa, tasmā sarūpānaṃ ekasesoti ekadesasarūpekaseso, nāmarūpasaddassa ṭhānaṃ itaresañca nāmarūpasaddānaṃ adassananti attho.
与异熟不同的,是非异熟。既然它被视为有两种,那么这样连接就是恰当的。巴利
Vipākato aññaṃ avipākaṃ. Yato dvidhā mataṃ, tato yuttameva idanti yojetabbaṃ.
在“善等心刹那”这个说法里,“等”这个字应当理解为:正如在不善心和唯作心的刹那,在异熟心的刹那中,也包含了不生异熟的业所等起的(法)。不过,在异熟心刹那中,按照前面所说的方式,以行识为缘,这两者都是可以成立的。为了排除这类异熟心刹那,所以才说“善等心刹那”。巴利
Kusalādicittakkhaṇeti ādi-saddena akusalakiriyacittakkhaṇe viya vipākacittakkhaṇepi vipākājanakakammasamuṭṭhānaṃ saṅgahitanti veditabbaṃ. Vipākacittakkhaṇe pana abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇapaccayā pubbe vuttanayena ubhayañca labbhatīti tādisavipākacittakkhaṇavajjanatthaṃ ‘‘kusalādicittakkhaṇe’’ti vuttaṃ.
640 关于“依经教的方式”这句话,是因为在《发趣论》里没有说到色的亲依止缘,所以才这么说。但在经中,只要某法存在,某法就生起;它不存在,就不生起,那么它就是那法的亲依止、因、根源、生起。因此说“以识为亲依止的名色”,也说色以识为亲依止。在《林薮经》的论述方式里,林薮、村落、市镇、城镇、国土、个人等是威仪与住处的亲依止,由此衣等生活资具的获得才有难有易;但林薮等并不成为威仪和衣等获得的所缘亲依止等。所以,仅凭“不存在就不生起”这一点,就应当理解为经教方式中的亲依止性。造作识在业、所缘、结生等时候,对于名只是所缘缘,这根本不必说;因此只有色依经教方式被说为一种缘。因为当说“对于有疑惑的色,这是它的缘”时,对于名根本不必这么说。巴利
640.Suttantikapariyāyatoti paṭṭhāne rūpānaṃ upanissayapaccayassa avuttattā vuttaṃ. Suttante pana yasmiṃ sati yaṃ hoti, asati ca na hoti, so tassa upanissayo nidānaṃ hetu pabhavoti katvā ‘‘viññāṇūpanisaṃ nāmarūpa’’nti rūpassa ca viññāṇūpanissayatā vuttā. Vanapatthapariyāye ca vanapatthagāmanigamanagarajanapadapuggalūpanissayo iriyāpathavihāro, tato ca cīvarādīnaṃ jīvitaparikkhārānaṃ kasirena, appakasirena ca samudāgamanaṃ vuttaṃ, na ca vanapatthādayo ārammaṇūpanissayādibhāvaṃ iriyāpathānaṃ, cīvarādisamudāgamanassa ca bhajanti. Tasmā vinā abhāvo eva suttantikapariyāyato upanissayabhāvo daṭṭhabbo. Nāmassa abhisaṅkhāraviññāṇaṃ kammārammaṇapaṭisandhiādikāle ārammaṇapaccayova hotīti vattabbameva natthīti rūpasseva suttantikapariyāyato ekadhāva paccayabhāvo vutto. Sasaṃsayassa hi rūpassetaṃ paccayo hotīti vutte nāmassa hotīti vattabbameva natthīti.
因为已生起的(名色)是明显的,所以拿不明显的结生来提问:“那么,这是怎样的呢?”等等。应当知道:依经来说,是名;依理来说,色以识为缘。巴利
Pavattassa pākaṭattā apākaṭaṃ paṭisandhiṃ gahetvā pucchati ‘‘kathaṃ paneta’’ntiādinā. Suttato nāmaṃ, yuttito rūpaṃ viññāṇapaccayā hotīti jānitabbaṃ.
先用理证成立,再用经教来巩固它,所以说“因为即使对业等起”等等。“只是对心等起”就是像对心等起一样。在这里,世尊说“以识为缘,名色”的时候,那些审察的智者从胜义的角度看到,只有名色在运转,没有众生,没有命者。因此,他转起了无人能逆转的无上法轮。因为开示空性就是转法轮。另一种说法:通过说“只有名色”,表明了运转只是苦谛。而开示苦谛的时候,它的集、它的灭,以及趣向灭的道,也就都被开示了。因为没有无因的苦,也没有因灭了而苦还不灭的道理,而灭如果没有方法就不能证得,所以应当确定:开示四谛就是转法轮。巴利
Yuttito sādhetvā suttena taṃ daḷhaṃ karonto ‘‘kammasamuṭṭhānassāpi hī’’tiādimāha. Cittasamuṭṭhānassevāti cittasamuṭṭhānassa viya. Ettha ca ‘‘viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1, 39; mahāva. 1; udā. 1) bhāsamānena bhagavatā yasmā upaparikkhamānānaṃ paṇḍitānaṃ paramatthato nāmarūpamattameva pavattamānaṃ dissati, na satto, na jīvo, tasmā kenaci appaṭivattiyaṃ anuttaraṃ dhammacakkaṃ pavattitaṃ hoti. Suññatappakāsanañhi dhammacakkappavattananti. Atha vā nāmarūpamattatāvacanena pavattiyā dukkhasaccamattatā vuttā. Dukkhasaccappakāsanena ca tassa samudayo, tassa ca nirodho, nirodhagāminipaṭipadā ca pakāsitā eva hoti. Ahetukassa dukkhassa, hetunirodhā anirujjhanakassa ca abhāvā, nirodhassa ca upāyena vinā anadhigantabbattāti catusaccappakāsanaṃ dhammacakkappavattanaṃ niddhāretabbaṃ.
名色缘六处这一句的详细解说注释巴利
Nāmarūpapaccayāsaḷāyatanapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
641 “那”指的是名色。“它的”指的是六处。“正是那样的”指的是已经作了省略的那个。巴利
641.Tanti nāmarūpaṃ. Tassāti saḷāyatanassa. Tādisassevāti katekasesasseva.
这里说的“名”,也只是指取三蕴而言,理由和前面说的一样。“决定”这一说法,是就四大种、六依处和命根,按照各自可能的情况,通过俱生、依止、前生、根等缘,对正在生起的六处绝对地成为缘来说的。至于色处等,则没有俱生、依止、随护的作用,所以应当知道它们不被包括在内。它们作为所缘缘、前生缘等,并非仅限于同一相续所摄者,也不像眼等那样是同时生起的,所以是不定缘。“决定……命根”这里,通过“如此”这个词,或者也应当看到色处等也被包括进去了。第六处和六处即是六处:在这里,虽然“第六处”和“六处”这两个词在字面上没有相同的形式,但从意义上看,第六处就是六处的一部分,所以有部分相同,应当知道这是采用了部分相同的省略说法。因为在意义上,对于具有相同形式的事物,也允许采用部分相同的省略,比如“弯曲的、歪斜的、弯曲的”。因此,在意义上具有部分相同的事物,也应当用省略来表达。巴利
Idhāpi nāmanti khandhattayasseva gahaṇe kāraṇaṃ vuttanayameva. Niyamatoti idañca catunnaṃ bhūtānaṃ, channaṃ vatthūnaṃ, jīvitassa ca yathāsambhavaṃ sahajātanissayapurejātaindriyādinā saḷāyatanassa pavattamānassa ekantena paccayabhāvaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Rūpāyatanādīnaṃ pana sahajātanissayānupālanabhāvo natthīti aggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Ārammaṇārammaṇapurejātādibhāvo ca tesaṃ na sasantatipariyāpannānameva, na ca cakkhādīnaṃ viya ekappahārenevāti aniyamato paccayabhāvo. Niyamato…pe… jīvitindriyanti evanti ettha evaṃ-saddena vā rūpāyatanādīnampi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatananti ettha yadipi chaṭṭhāyatanasaḷāyatanasaddānaṃ saddato sarūpatā natthi, atthato pana saḷāyatanekadesova chaṭṭhāyatananti ekadesasarūpatā atthīti ekadesasarūpekaseso katoti veditabbo. Atthatopi hi sarūpānaṃ ekadesasarūpekasesaṃ icchanti ‘‘vaṅko ca kuṭilo ca kuṭilā’’ti. Tasmā atthato ekadesasarūpānañca ekasesena bhavitabbanti.
或者,把“第六处和意处”省略成“第六处”或“意处”,把“第六处和第六处”省略成“第六处”,把“意处和意处”省略成“意处”,再跟眼处等合在一起,称为“六处”。这个省略,是依名缘与名色缘中的那个意处而作、并依这种省略方式而说的;为了说明这一点,所以接着说:“第六处和六处、六处——这样作了省略。”因为,即使按照前面所说的省略方式,从意义上说也还是成立为“第六处和六处”。而且在一切省略的情况下,用单数来表达,应当理解为:这是依那些被省略的法都能用“六处”等词来称呼这一共同点而作的。巴利
Atha vā chaṭṭhāyatanañca manāyatanañca chaṭṭhāyatananti vā manāyatananti vā chaṭṭhāyatanañca chaṭṭhāyatanañca chaṭṭhāyatananti vā manāyatanañca manāyatanañca manāyatananti vā ekasesaṃ katvā cakkhādīhi saddhiṃ ‘‘saḷāyatana’’nti vuttanti tameva ekasesaṃ nāmamattapaccayassa, nāmarūpapaccayassa ca manāyatanassa vasena kataṃ atthato dassento āha ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañca saḷāyatananti evaṃ katekasesassā’’ti. Yathāvuttopi hi ekaseso atthato chaṭṭhāyatanañca saḷāyatanañcāti evaṃ kato nāma hotīti. Sabbattha ca ekasese kate ekavacananiddeso katekasesānaṃ saḷāyatanādisaddavacanīyatāsāmaññavasena katoti daṭṭhabbo.
不是别的样子,通过这句话说明了:当某某名和色不存在时,某某处也就不存在,从而显示出排除的关系。巴利
‘‘Na aññathā’’ti etena tassa tassa nāmassa, rūpassa ca abhāve taṃ taṃ āyatanaṃ na hotīti byatirekaṃ vibhāveti.
凡是任何名与色。对于任何处而言。以俱生等任何一种方式。应当了知。巴利
Yanti yaṃ yaṃ nāmaṃ, rūpañca. Yassāti yassa yassa āyatanassa. Yathāti sahajātādinā yena yena pakārena. Neyyanti ñeyyaṃ.
“以彼之力”是指以彼因等缘的力量。“最胜与最劣”在这里的意思是:从七种缘性到八种缘性,再到九种,再到十种,这就是最胜。而最劣则应当理解为:从十种缘性到九种缘性,再到八种,再到七种。但不能只从七种缘性就同时安立最胜和最劣两者,因为那样就没有最劣了。巴利
Tassa vasenāti tassa hetuādipaccayassa vasena. Ukkaṃsāvakaṃsoti ettha sattadhā paccayabhāvato ukkaṃso aṭṭhadhā paccayabhāvo, tato navadhā, tato dasadhāti ayaṃ ukkaṃso. Avakaṃso pana dasadhā paccayabhāvato navadhā paccayabhāvo, tato aṭṭhadhā, tato sattadhāti evaṃ veditabbo, na pana sattadhā paccayabhāvato eva dvepi ukkaṃsāvakaṃsā yojetabbā, tato avakaṃsābhāvatoti.
“异熟名”说的是句法关联。按前面说的方式,就是从俱生等角度分成七种,再从因等角度来分。剩下的那个,就是“非异熟名”。巴利
Vipākaṃ nāmanti sambandho. Vuttanayenevāti sahajātādivasena, sattadhā, hetuādivasena ca. Itaranti avipākaṃ nāmaṃ.
“作为心所依处的同伴而”这句话,是在说明:不像无色界那样,名没有同伴;而且心所依处与名一起,成为第六处的缘,仅此而已。但这里并不是要说明:心所依处怎样成为缘,名也那样成为缘。因为所依处是名的“不相应缘”,而名不是;名是异熟因等缘,而所依处不是。在转起时,无色法只对已经住立的业生色成为缘,而不是对正在生起的色。因此,对于眼等,应当配合的是不相应、有、不离去等缘,以及后生不相应等缘。巴利
‘‘Hadayavatthuno sahāyaṃ hutvā’’ti etena arūpe viya asahāyaṃ nāmaṃ na hoti, hadayavatthu ca nāmena saha chaṭṭhāyatanassa paccayo hotīti ettakameva dasseti, na pana yathā hadayavatthu paccayo hoti, tathā nāmampīti ayamattho adhippeto. Vatthu hi nāmassa vippayuttapaccayo hoti, na nāmaṃ. Nāmañca vipākahetādipaccayo hoti, na vatthūti. Pavatte arūpadhammā kammajarūpassa ṭhitippattasseva paccayā honti, na uppajjamānassāti vippayuttaatthiavigatā ca pacchājātavippayuttādayo eva cakkhādīnaṃ yojetabbā.
“就在那里”这句话,是用“在转起中”来点出“就在那里”这个说法,所以说“确实就在转起中”。而“在五蕴有中”这句话,则已经由“五种”这个词表明了。在转起中,眼处等名法并不是异熟缘,只对自己所生的色才是异熟缘。但在结生时,业所生与心所生相似,因此对所依处也同样成为异熟缘。巴利
‘‘Tatthevā’’ti iminā ‘‘pavatte’’ti idaṃ paccāmaṭṭhanti āha ‘‘tattheva hi pavatte’’ti. ‘‘Pañcavokārabhave’’ti pana idaṃ ‘‘pañcanna’’nti iminā dīpitamevāti. Pavattiyaṃ cakkhāyatanādikassa nāmaṃ vipākapaccayo na hoti, attanā janitarūpasseva hoti. Paṭisandhiyaṃ pana kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ cittasamuṭṭhānasadisaṃ, tasmā vatthunopi vipākapaccayo hotiyeva.
“从色”是指在诸色中。“无论哪一处生起”:在结生时,卵生和胎生的众生,只在五处之中生起身体这一处;其余众生则随其所应,也生起其他诸处。巴利
Rūpatoti rūpesu. Yaṃ yaṃ āyatanaṃ uppajjatīti paṭisandhiyaṃ aṇḍajajalābujānaṃ pañcasu āyatanesu kāyāyatanameva uppajjati. Itaresaṃ yathārahaṃ itarānipi.
这里说的“其余意处”,因为紧接着前面“在五蕴有中”那句话,所以应当理解为:它指的是只在五蕴有中转起、除开前五识之外的其余意处。名色之间俱生等共通缘的关系,以及相应等不共通缘的关系,应当按各自的实际情况来搭配。“以色为缘而有五处”这一条道理,也可以依入灭尽定的人而成立;不过这条道理并不普遍,而且在大多数情况下,对于在结生时作为缘的名色在转起时的缘作用,论中已经作了说明,所以此处没有再把它显示出来,应当这样理解。巴利
Avasesamanāyatanassāti ettha ‘‘pañcakkhandhabhave panā’’ti etassa anuvattamānattā pañcavokārabhave eva pavattamānaṃ pañcaviññāṇehi avasesaṃ manāyatanaṃ vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Nāmarūpassa sahajātādisādhāraṇapaccayabhāvo, sampayuttādiasādhāraṇapaccayabhāvo ca yathāsambhavaṃ yojetabbo. ‘‘Rūpapaccayā pañcāyatanānī’’ti ayampi nayo labbhati nirodhasamāpannānaṃ vasena, so pana apacurabhāvato yebhuyyena ca paṭisandhiyaṃ paccayabhūtasseva nāmarūpassa pavattiyaṃ paccayabhāvo vibhāvitoti na dassitoti veditabbaṃ.
六处缘触这一句的详细解说注释巴利
Saḷāyatanapaccayāphassapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
642 与二十二种世间异熟识相应,就是与二十二种世间识相应。正是从这个意义上说,恰好是二十二种。巴利
642. Bāvīsatiyā lokiyavipākaviññāṇehi sampayuttā bāvīsatilokiyaviññāṇasampayuttā. Tato eva bāvīsati.
这里说的“在此”,是指在那个六处,也就是在那六个处当中——这是它的意思。“内”只取属于自身相续所摄的。因为由自身相续所摄的业所生的,才是那种触的缘。至于色等外在的、未执取的,则只是触的所缘;眼等是以属于自身相续所摄的业与烦恼之相的转起方式成为触的缘的,它们却不像眼等那样。因此第一派导师的主张没有采纳它们;但第二派导师认为,只要以某种方式具有缘的性质,就不能排除,所以予以采纳。巴利
Tatthāti tasmiṃ saḷāyatane, tesu chasu āyatanesūti attho. Ajjhattanti sasantatipariyāpannameva gaṇhāti. Tañhi sasantatipariyāpannakammanibbattaṃ tādisassa phassassa paccayo hoti. Rūpādīni, pana bahiddhā anupādinnāni ca phassassa ārammaṇaṃ honti, na tāni cakkhādīni viya sasantatipariyāpannakammakilesanimittappavattibhāvena phassassa paccayā hontīti paṭhamācariyavāde na gahitāni, dutiyācariyavāde pana yathā tathā vā paccayabhāve sati na sakkā vajjetunti gahitāni.
这里说的“于此”,是指在“以六处为缘而有触”这一句里。那些大寺派的老师们,在说明识、名色、六处、触、受既是缘又是缘所生法、都属于同一相续时,只承认它们是异熟。而《分别论》中“以第六处为缘而有触”这句论藏文句,是就无色界说的,所以说“以第六处为缘而有触”是依照巴利原文来说的。巴利
Tatthāti saḷāyatanapaccayā phassapade. Ye tāva ācariyā mahāvihāravāsinova yathā viññāṇaṃ, evaṃ nāmarūpaṃ, saḷāyatanaṃ, phassaṃ, vedanañca paccayaṃ, paccayuppannañca sasantatipariyāpannaṃ dīpentā vipākameva icchanti. ‘‘Chaṭṭhāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti abhidhammabhājanīyapāḷi (vibha. 243) āruppaṃ sandhāya vuttāti ‘‘chaṭṭhāyatanapaccayā phassoti pāḷianusārato’’ti vuttaṃ.
“一切触不能生起”,这是句子的连接方式。如果从一切处能生起一个触,那么“以六处为缘而有触”这个单数说法就成立;或者,如果从一个处能生起一切触,那么由于从一切处生起一切触,按处的差别来说触并没有差别,因此以它们无差别为理由,单数说法也可以成立。然而,因为实际上并不能这样生起,所以不合理,于是用“并非从一切处……”等话来提出责难。或者说,这也是为了说明另一种不可能成立的说法,才说“也不是从一个处生起一切触”。“并非从一切处生起一个触”这一句本身,就应当理解为显示单数触的说法不合理的原因。或者,这是作为例证来说的。也不是从一个处生起一切触,同样,并非从一切处生起一个触。因此,单数说法不合理。接着,为了显示从多个处生起一个触的答辩,而说“对此,解答如下”等。其余相应的法处是除触以外的那些与之相应的心所法。巴利
Sabbe phassā na sambhontīti yojanā. Yadi sabbāyatanehi eko phasso sambhaveyya, ‘‘saḷāyatanapaccayā phasso’’ti ekassa vacanaṃ yujjeyya , athāpi ekamhā āyatanā sabbe phassā sambhaveyyuṃ, tathāpi sabbāyatanehi sabbaphassasambhavato āyatanabhedena phassabhedo natthīti tadabhedavasena ekassa vacanaṃ yujjeyya, tathā pana asambhavato na yuttanti codeti ‘‘na sabbāyatanehī’’tiādinā . Aññassāpi vā asambhavantassa vidhānassa bodhanatthametaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘nāpi ekamhā āyatanā sabbe phassā’’ti. ‘‘Na sabbāyatanehi eko phasso sambhotī’’ti idameva pana ekaphassavacanassāyuttattadīpakaṃ kāraṇanti veditabbaṃ. Nidassanavasena vā etaṃ vuttaṃ. Nāpi ekamhā āyatanā sabbe phassā sambhonti, evaṃ na sabbāyatanehi eko phasso sambhoti. Tasmā ekassa vacanaṃ ayuttanti. Parihāraṃ pana anekāyatanehi ekaphassassa sambhavatoti dassento ‘‘tatridaṃ vissajjana’’ntiādimāha. Avasesasampayuttadhammāyatanā phassavajjitā taṃsampayuttacetasikā dhammā.
即使是一个(触)也从多个处生起,一个(触)也从多个处生起。巴利
Ekopi anekāyatanappabhavo ekopanekāyatanappabhavo.
对于缘性,应当从六个方面来说明五种;对于那一个,则于九种缘性中来说明;而外六处则依所缘等,随其可能,说明其缘性。这就是它们之间的关联。巴利
Chadhā paccayatte pañca vibhāvaye, ekaṃ navadhā paccayatte, bāhirāni cha āyatanāni ārammaṇādinā yathāsambhavaṃ paccayatte vibhāvayeti sambandho.
“有多种差别”是指善异熟等、五门等而言有多种多样的、排除与双五识相应的异熟触。“而它们”是指色处等。因为经中说:“意也领受它们的行境和对象。”“如是”是就现在的色等以及现在摄属法处的色法而说。“仅以所缘缘”是就那一切非现在的法以及其他法处而说。巴利
Anekabhedassāti kusalavipākādipañcadvārādivasena anekavidhassa dvipañcaviññāṇasampayuttavajjassa vipākaphassassa. Tāni cāti rūpāyatanādīni. ‘‘Mano ca nesaṃ gocaravisayaṃ paccanubhotī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.455) hi vuttaṃ. Tathā cāti paccuppannāni rūpādīni paccuppannañca dhammāyatanapariyāpannaṃ rūparūpaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Ārammaṇapaccayamattenāti taṃ sabbaṃ apaccuppannaṃ, aññañca dhammāyatanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ.
触缘受句的详细解说注释巴利
Phassapaccayāvedanāpadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
643 从门来说,只有六种:虽然从生起的共性来说,受只有一种,但依生起的门来说,就正好有六种,所以说为六受。巴利
643.Dvārato saḷevāti pabhavasāmaññato ekavidhāpi uppattidvārato cha eva hontīti chaḷeva vedanā vuttā.
为了说明:虽然依心的差别而有八十九种受,但这里所指的仍然就是这些受,所以说了“然而,于诸受中……”等话。这里“其余的”是指:与领受相应的眼触等五种;它们虽然作为无间缘等而为缘,但因为无间缘等已经包含在亲依止缘里,而且那(亲依止缘)是推度与彼所缘所共通的,所以就依那个(亲依止缘)而说为“一种”。应当这样连接理解:在每一个门,也就是眼门等当中,由生起的眼识等所俱生的触——那被称为俱生意触的触——对于各自路心中与领受等相应的受,都以八种方式成为缘;而在意门中,对于只依彼所缘而现起的三地异熟受,也是如此。巴利
Cittabhedena ekūnanavutividhāpi idhādhippetā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘vedanāsu panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. ‘‘Sesāna’’nti ettha sampaṭicchanasampayuttāya cakkhusamphassādayo pañca yadipi anantarādīhi paccayā honti, anantarādīnaṃ pana upanissaye antogadhattā santīraṇatadārammaṇānañca sādhāraṇassa tassa vasena ‘‘ekadhā’’ti vuttaṃ. Ekekasmiṃ dvāre hi cakkhudvārādīsu uppannacakkhuviññāṇādīhi sahajātā phassā sakasakavīthīsu sampaṭicchanādīhi sampayuttavedanānaṃ, manodvāre tadārammaṇavaseneva pavattānaṃ tebhūmakavipākavedanānampi sahajātamanosamphassasaṅkhāto so phasso aṭṭhadhā paccayo hotīti yojetabbaṃ.
色界与无色界的异熟受,只依结生等方式生起;欲界的异熟受也有一部分是这样,所以说“对于三地异熟受也……”。因为对它们来说,俱生的意触也仅以八种方式作为缘。有些人主张,即使未执取的(触)也能作为缘,因此以“然而……”等语句,说明了与意门转向相应的触具有缘的性质。这应当理解为仅是示其门。按照这一道理,应当把一切无间触和非无间触,与各自对应的异熟受之间的亲依止关系连接起来。巴利
Rūpārūpāvacaravipākavedanā paṭisandhiādivaseneva pavattanti, kāmāvacarāpi ekaccāti ‘‘tebhūmakavipākavedanānampī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tāsampi hi sahajātamanosamphasso aṭṭhadhāva paccayo hoti. Paccayaṃ anupādinnampi keci icchantīti ‘‘yā panā’’tiādinā manodvārāvajjanasampayuttaphassassa paccayabhāvo vutto. Tañca mukhamattadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etena nayena sabbassa anantarassa, anānantarassa ca phassassa tassā tassā vipākavedanāya upanissayatā yojetabbāti.
受缘渴爱这一句的详细解说注释巴利
Vedanāpaccayātaṇhāpadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
644 在这里,指的是在这个世间,或在这个教法之中所说明的六种渴爱。或者,“在这里”是指在“以受为缘而有渴爱”这一句之中而言;“在那之中”则是指在六种渴爱之中而言。巴利
644.Idhāti imasmiṃ loke, imasmiṃ vā sāsane cha taṇhā dīpitā. Idhāti vā imasmiṃ vedanāpaccayā taṇhāpade. Tatthāti tāsu chasu taṇhāsu.
与常见相应的渴爱、与断见相应的渴爱,各各有其在色等对象上生起、随顺于那种欢喜的行相;这种行相有别于前面所说的转起行相,因为它纯粹是依欲乐而转起的。因此,渴爱有三种。巴利
Ekekāya sassatadiṭṭhisahagatāya, ucchedadiṭṭhisahagatāya ca taṇhāya tadabhinandanānuguṇo rūpādīsu pavattiākāro, kevalaṃ kāmassādavasena pavattiyā visiṭṭhākārattā vuttappavattiākārato taṇhāya tividhatā.
所谓“我所执”,就是通过喜爱,这说的正是味著渴爱。在这里,应当把受看作儿子;作为受之缘的色等法,就像乳汁等;而给予色等六种所缘的画师等人这六者,就像给乳汁等的乳母。其中,给予乐触之衣的是织工;而医生以味处之营养、并依此维持生命的方式,给予法所缘,应当看作法所缘的给予者。这一切也有一百零八种分类。巴利
Mamattenāti sampiyāyanena, assādanataṇhāya icceva vuttaṃ hoti. Tattha putto viya vedanā daṭṭhabbā, khīrādayo viya vedanāya paccayabhūtā rūpādayo, khīrādidāyikā dhāti viya rūpādichaḷārammaṇadāyakā cittakārādayo cha. Tattha sukhasamphassavatthadāyako tantavāyo, vejjo rasāyatanojāvasena, tadupatthambhitajīvitavasena ca dhammārammaṇassa dāyakoti daṭṭhabbo. Sabbāpesā aṭṭhasatappabhedāpi.
所缘缘对于正在生起的心法,只是作为所缘而已,并不像亲依止那样能产生它们,因此依作为能产生者的亲依止本身而说它“只有一种”。或者说,以亲依止也包含了所缘亲依止。而通过那所缘性,同类的其他所缘缘性也被显示出来,因此应当知道,这里所说的缘性正是依亲依止而说的。巴利
Ārammaṇapaccayo uppajjamānāya ārammaṇamattameva hoti, na upanissayo viya uppādakoti uppādakassa upanissayasseva vasena ‘‘ekadhāvā’’ti vuttaṃ. Upanissayena vā ārammaṇūpanissayo saṅgahito. Tena ca ārammaṇabhāvena taṃsabhāgo aññopi ārammaṇapaccayabhāvo dīpito hotīti upanissayavaseneva paccayabhāvo vuttoti veditabbo.
“由于……”等语,是要说明:不只是果报乐受,三种果报受也特别地作为渴爱的亲依止缘,而无差别地其他受也作为该缘。不过,舍受因为寂静,就被说成是乐,所以这里的意趣是:舍受也由于更强烈的欲求而成为渴爱的亲依止缘。然而,作为不善果报的舍受,因为不可爱,应当归入苦;其他受因为可爱,则归入乐。这样一来,舍受既可以像苦那样,也可以像乐那样,成为亲依止缘,这是可以说的。为了避免因为“受缘渴爱”这句话,就过度推论说“只要以受为缘,渴爱就一定会生起”,所以才说了“受缘……”等语。巴利
‘‘Yasmā vā’’tiādinā na kevalaṃ vipākasukhavedanā eva, tissopi pana vedanā vipākā visesena taṇhāya upanissayapaccayo, avisesena itarā cāti dasseti. Upekkhā pana santattā, sukhamicceva bhāsitāti tasmā sāpi bhiyyo icchanavasena taṇhāya upanissayoti adhippāyo. Upekkhā pana akusalavipākabhūtā aniṭṭhattā dukkhe avarodhetabbā, itarā iṭṭhattā sukheti sā dukkhaṃ viya, sukhaṃ viya ca upanissayapaccayo hotīti sakkā vattuṃ. ‘‘Vedanāpaccayā taṇhā’’ti vacanena sabbassa vedanāvato paccayassa atthitāya taṇhuppattippasaṅge tannivāraṇatthamāha ‘‘vedanāpaccayā cāpī’’tiādi.
难道不是因为缺少“伴随随眠的受是渴爱的缘”这种说法,就无法避免过度推论吗?不是这样,因为这是在讲轮回。而轮回如果离开随眠就不可能存在,所以从意义上说,已经讲了伴随随眠的受才是缘。或者,由于“无明缘”这一说法一直延续下来,就可以理解为伴随随眠的受才是缘。这里“受缘渴爱”的意思是:渴爱只以受为缘,离开受就不会生起,这是所要成立的决定,并不是说只要以受为缘,渴爱就一定会生起,因此这里并没有过度推论。巴利
Nanu ‘‘anusayasahāyā vedanā taṇhāya paccayo’’ti vacanassa abhāvā atippasaṅganivattiṃ na sakkā kātunti? Na, vaṭṭakathāya pavattattā. Vaṭṭassa ca anusayavirahe abhāvato anusayasahitāva paccayoti atthato vuttamevetaṃ hotīti. Atha vā ‘‘avijjāpaccayā’’ti anuvattamānattā anusayasahitāva paccayoti viññāyati. Vedanāpaccayā taṇhāti cettha vedanāpaccayā eva taṇhā, na vedanāya vināti ayaṃ niyamo icchito, na vedanāpaccayā taṇhā hotiyevāti, tasmā atippasaṅgo ettha natthi evāti.
“已住者”的意思是已住于梵行的人,也就是已经安住于梵行生活的人。或者,“已住”是指道,道被称为“所住”,这个人已经住于这个道,所以叫“已住者”;这是按最高程度的解释来说的,也就是指应供。又或者,最上果因为圆满安住的缘故被称为“已住”,这个人具有这个果,所以叫“已住者”。巴利
Vusīmatoti vusitavato, vusitabrahmacariyavāsassāti attho. Vussatīti vā vusīti maggo vuccati, so etassa vuttho atthīti vusīmā, ukkaṭṭhaniddesena arahā. Aggaphalaṃ vā pariniṭṭhitavāsattā ‘‘vusī’’ti vuccati, taṃ etassa atthīti vusīmā.
渴爱缘取这一句的详细解说注释巴利
Taṇhāpaccayāupādānapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
645 义的分析,就是对义的分别解说。被称为“事”的欲,这里指的是被称为欲乐对象、即色等所缘。执取,就是以欲的方式抓取,意思是牢牢地耽著。“执取欲”这个说法里,欲这个词是业作义;而在“欲以及那”这个说法里,则是作者义,因为这里指的是烦恼欲。但取这个词在两处都是作者义。坚固义就是强烈义。就像强烈的疲倦叫忧恼,强烈的麻风叫恶癞,这里也一样,所以说“如忧恼、恶癞等那样”。后见执取前见,意思是后见以前见为常而抓取它,或者后见以前见的行相生起,由此使前见变得坚固,所以说它执取前见。又或者,“后见执取前见”是为了指出执取前见的后见,如“我是常”这样的说法。正如后见以坚固的方式执取前见,“无布施”等见也是如此。不过应当知道,我执就是我语取,不是这里所说的见取。而“世间”等执取,是脱离我执的执取,属于见取,这里是由前见、后见这些说法来表达的。巴利
645.Atthavibhāgo atthassa vibhajanā. Vatthusaṅkhātaṃ kāmanti kāmaguṇasaññitaṃ rūpādiārammaṇamāha. Upādiyatīti kāmavasena gaṇhāti, daḷhaṃ assādetīti attho. Kāmaṃ upādiyatīti ettha kammasādhano kāmasaddo , kāmo ca soti ettha kattusādhano kilesakāmassa adhippetattā. Upādānasaddo pana ubhayatthāpi kattusādhanova. Daḷhattho bhusattho. Yathā bhuso āyāso upāyāso, bhusaṃ kuṭṭhaṃ upakuṭṭhaṃ, evaṃ idhāpīti āha ‘‘upāyāsaupakuṭṭhādīsu viyā’’ti. Purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi upādiyatīti purimadiṭṭhiṃ sassatabhāvena gaṇhantī upādiyati, purimadiṭṭhiākārena vā uttaradiṭṭhi uppajjamānā teneva purimadiṭṭhiṃ daḷhaṃ karontī taṃ upādiyatīti vuttā. Atha vā purimadiṭṭhiṃ uttaradiṭṭhi upādiyatīti ‘‘sassato attā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.31) idaṃ purimadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyamānaṃ uttaradiṭṭhiṃ nidassetuṃ vuttaṃ. Yathā hi esā daḷhīkaraṇavasena purimaṃ uttarā upādiyati, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādikāpīti (ma. ni. 1.445; 2.94; 3.91, 116, 136; dha. sa. 1221; vibha. 938). Attaggahaṇaṃ pana attavādupādānanti na idaṃ diṭṭhupādānadassananti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Loko cāti vā attaggahaṇavinimuttaṃ gahaṇaṃ diṭṭhupādānabhūtaṃ idha purimadiṭṭhiuttaradiṭṭhivacanehi vuttanti veditabbaṃ.
在这里,“执取戒禁”是指:把不清净的道路——比如牛戒之类的行为——当成戒来受持,这就是戒;以不违犯之义,就是禁。或者也可以说,两者都是戒,因为都被当成苦行来执持,所以叫禁,比如修习牛等本性。或者,自己发誓要成为牛等状态,这是戒;而像“走着时吃,站着时排泄”这样去做牛等的行为,这是禁。或者,远离那些被认为不该做的事,这是戒;以受持那些为伪装,再去执行饮食等特殊行为,这是禁。他把这样的戒禁——本身是不清净的道路——执取为“清净的道路”,这样执著、这样固执,就是执取;意思就是牢牢抓住那种看法。把伴随戒禁的执著称为戒禁取,所以说“既是戒禁,又是取”。所谓牛戒、牛禁等,说的就是那样的邪见。因此说“它们本身就是取”。Abhinivesato 的意思是:由于固执,或者由于执著。我语取,是指作为“我”这种言论、施设以及执取的因的邪见。那仅仅是在说“我”而已,因为“我”并不存在,所以“我”只是这句话本身。他们执取,就是牢牢抓住。怎么抓?以“我”来抓。因为固执于“我”,只是把这句话牢牢抓住,这就是意思。因此说“他们只是执取我语而已”。或者,“我语”只是言语的依处。因为“我”不存在,所以他们只是把言语的依处执取为“我”。巴利
Sīlabbataṃ upādiyatīti ettha asuddhimaggagosīlādisamādānavasena sīlaṃ, avītikkamanavasena vataṃ. Ubhayathāpi vā sīlaṃ, tapokammabhāvena gahitatāya vataṃ, gavādipakatibhāvanā. Attano vā gavādibhāvādhiṭṭhānaṃ sīlaṃ, ‘‘gacchanto bhakkheti, tiṭṭhanto muttetī’’tiādinā gavādikiriyākaraṇaṃ vataṃ. Taṃtaṃakiccasammatato vā nivatti sīlaṃ, taṃsamādānavatovesa bhojanakiccakaraṇādivisesapaṭipatti vataṃ, taṃ sīlabbataṃ asuddhimaggaṃ ‘‘suddhimaggo’’ti parāmasanto tathā abhinivisanto upādiyati, taṃ gāhaṃ daḷhaṃ gaṇhātīti attho. Sīlabbatasahacaritaṃ parāmāsaṃ sīlabbatanti gahetvā āha ‘‘sīlabbatañca taṃ upādānañcā’’ti. Gosīlagovatādīnīti ca tathābhūtaṃ diṭṭhiṃ vadati. Tenevāha ‘‘sayameva upādānānī’’ti. Abhinivesatoti abhinivesabhāvato, abhinivisanato vā. Attavādupādānanti ‘‘attā’’ti vādassa paññāpanassa, gahaṇassa ca kāraṇabhūtā diṭṭhīti attho. Attavādamattamevāti attassa abhāvā ‘‘attā’’ti idaṃ vacanamattameva. Upādiyantīti daḷhaṃ gaṇhanti. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Attā’’ti. ‘‘Attā’’ti hi abhinivisantā vacanamattameva daḷhaṃ katvā gaṇhantīti atthoti. Evaṃ ‘‘attavādamattameva upādiyantī’’ti vuttaṃ . Attavādamattanti vā vācāvatthumattamevāha. Vācāvatthumattameva hi ‘‘attā’’ti upādiyanti attassa abhāvāti.
在法的略说与广说中,欲取从略说的角度看就是渴爱的坚固,其余三种取只是邪见而已;从广说的角度则另有说明。这样,从法的略说与广说的整体中,简别出作为其组成部分的略说和广说。在“法的略说与广说”这个表述中,应理解为表示简别的依格。所谓“在诸欲中”,就是在五种欲乐中。“欲贪”是名为欲的贪,不是想做某事的欲,也不是法欲。以欲的方式、以染着的方式,欲本身就是贪,就是欲贪;同样,在一切处了知欲的含义之后,应当知道:以欢喜之义,欲就是欲喜;以渴爱之义,欲就是欲渴爱;以爱着之义,欲就是欲爱着;以烧灼之义,是欲烧;以迷醉之义,是欲迷;以吞没并彻底确立之义,是欲耽著。对未得之境的希求是渴爱,因为它对所缘有躁动不安的状态;对已得之境的执取是取,因为它对所缘有坚固执取的状态。渴爱是少欲的对立面,因为它朝向境界;取是知足的对立面,因为它是渴爱的坚固,成为过度贪求的状态。渴爱以寻求之苦为根本,因为它是未得之境时的希求状态;取以守护之苦为根本,因为它是已得之境时的执取状态。巴利
‘‘Dhammasaṅkhepavitthāre pana kāmupādānaṃ saṅkhepato taṇhādaḷhattaṃ, sesupādānattayaṃ diṭṭhimattameva, vitthārato panā’’ti evaṃ dhammasaṅkhepavitthārasamudāyato tadavayavabhūtaṃ saṅkhepaṃ, vitthārañca niddhāretīti. Dhammasaṅkhepavitthāreti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāmesūti pañcasu kāmaguṇesu . Kāmacchandoti kāmasaṅkhāto chando, na kattukamyatāchando, na ca dhammacchando. Kāmanavasena, rañjanavasena ca kāmoyeva rāgo kāmarāgo, evaṃ sabbattha kāmatthaṃ viditvā kāmo eva nandanaṭṭhena kāmanandī, taṇhāyanaṭṭhena kāmoyeva kāmataṇhā, sinehanaṭṭhena kāmo eva kāmasneho, paridayhanaṭṭhena kāmapariḷāho, mucchanaṭṭhena kāmamucchā, gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpanaṭṭhena kāmajjhosānaṃ veditabbaṃ. Appattavisayapatthanā taṇhā ārammaṇe paritassanabhāvato, sampattavisayaggahaṇaṃ upādānaṃ ārammaṇe daḷhaggāhabhāvato. Appicchatāpaṭipakkhā taṇhā visayābhimukhabhāvato, santuṭṭhipaṭipakkhā upādānaṃ taṇhādaḷhattaṃ hutvā atricchatābhāvato. Pariyesanadukkhamūlā taṇhā appattavisayapatthanābhāvato, ārakkhadukkhamūlaṃ upādānaṃ sampattavisayaggahaṇabhāvato.
在“没有布施”等说法中,“布施”指的是施舍;他否定布施,认为布施就像色法一样没有果报,所以说“布施不存在”。“已献”指的是像大胜利祭那样的大供养。“已供”指的是供请、待客、吉祥仪式。其中,邀请之后所作的奉献、施舍叫“供请”;对宾客的招待叫“待客”;在嫁娶等场合为了吉祥而作的施舍叫“吉祥仪式”。十善业道叫善行,十不善业道叫恶行。果就是等流等果,异熟就是无余异熟,意思是说没有等流等果、没有无余异熟,应当这样连接理解。正如在这里一样,在“没有布施”等说法中,也应当看作是对果、异熟的否定。“没有此世”:他是站在他世的立场上,把此世执取为“不存在”。因为观察此世才有他世,观察他世才有此世,因为有可去、有可来;由于从他世来到此处这件事不存在,就在那里断灭,所以他的心站在他世,把此世执取为“不存在”,这就是意思。因为这种邪见并非只属于站在他世的人。“没有他世”:他是站在此世的立场上,把他世执取为“不存在”。这里也应当按上面所说的方式理解其义。或者,这里的意思是:轮回的处所就是此世,而所谓他世并不存在,因为轮回不存在,就在各处断灭。巴利
Natthi dinnantiādīsu dinnanti dānamāha, taṃ aphalattā rūpaṃ viya dānaṃ nāma na hotīti paṭikkhipati. Yiṭṭhaṃ vuccati mahāvijitayaññasadiso mahāyāgo. Hutanti āhunapāhunamaṅgalakiriyā. Tattha āmantetvā havanaṃ dānaṃ āhunaṃ, pāhunānaṃ atithīnaṃ atithikiriyā pāhunaṃ, āvāhādīsu maṅgalatthaṃ dānaṃ maṅgalakiriyā, dasa kusalakammapathā sukatakammāni nāma, dasa akusalakammapathā dukkaṭakammāni nāma, phalaṃ vipākoti nissandādiphalañceva nippariyāyavipāko ca natthīti yojanā. Yathā cettha, evaṃ ‘‘natthi dinna’’ntiādīsupi phalavipākapaṭikkhepova daṭṭhabbo. Natthi ayaṃ lokoti paraloke ṭhito imaṃ lokaṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti gaṇhāti. Imaṃ hi lokaṃ avekkhitvā paraloko, parañca lokaṃ avekkhitvā ayaṃ loko hoti gantabbato, āgantabbato cāti paralokato idhāgamanassa abhāvā tattheva ucchijjanato cittena paraloke ṭhito imaṃ lokaṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti gaṇhātīti attho. Na hi ayaṃ diṭṭhi paraloke ṭhitasseva hotīti. Natthi paralokoti idhaloke ṭhito paralokaṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti gaṇhāti. Idhāpi vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Ayaṃ vā ettha attho – saṃsaraṇappadeso idhaloko, paraloko ca nāma koci natthi saṃsaraṇassa abhāvā tattha tattheva ucchijjanatoti.
从前世投生到后世,叫“化生”;凡是以这种方式投生的,就是“化生有情”。为了说明并不存在死后投生和再生这类有情,他说“没有化生有情”。“在世间没有沙门……中略……宣说”:这是为了说明,那些已经走上随顺之道、行于正道、正确修行的人,也就是如法的沙门、婆罗门,在世间并不存在;那些能以自己殊胜的智慧,亲自如实了知此世和他世,并且能够宣说的人,也就是一切知佛,并不存在。“观色是我”等句里应当说明的内容,前面已经讲过了。巴利
Purimabhavato pacchimabhave upapatanaṃ upapāto, so yesaṃ sīlaṃ, te opapātikā. Te pana cavanakaupapajjanakasattā natthīti dassento āha ‘‘natthi sattā opapātikā’’ti. Natthi loke samaṇa…pe… pavedentīti anulomapaṭipadaṃ paṭipannattā sammaggatā sammāpaṭipannā dhammikasamaṇabrāhmaṇā lokasmiṃ natthi, ye imañca lokaṃ, parañca lokaṃ attanā eva abhivisiṭṭhena ñāṇena paccakkhato ñatvā pavedanasamatthā sabbaññubuddhā nāma natthīti dasseti. Rūpaṃ attato samanupassatītiādīsu vattabbaṃ heṭṭhā vuttameva.
我执以对极微等的常见执为先导,以对身体的断见执为先导,并且是那些执取之主——即认为有一个常恒的、或被断灭的“我”存在——这种我执有时生起,所以说“大多”。这个我执从义理上说,应当看作唯以蕴为所缘。“大多”与最初的“我语取”等相连。虽然对于已执取结生者,有爱的速行路首先生起,因为它应随有之爱乐而转起,然而他并不把那有爱视为渴爱的坚固,所以没有说欲取的最初生起。巴利
Pakatiaṇuādīnaṃ sassataggāhapubbaṅgamo, sarīrassa ucchedaggāhapubbaṅgamo ca tesaṃ gāhānaṃ sāmibhūto koci sassato, ucchijjamāno vā attā atthīti attaggāho kadāci hotīti ‘‘yebhuyyenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Svāyaṃ attaggāho atthato khandhārammaṇo eva daṭṭhabbo. Yebhuyyena paṭhamaṃ attavādupādānantiādināva sambandho. Yadipi bhavarāgajavanavīthi paṭhamaṃ pavattati gahitapaṭisandhikassa bhavanikantiyā pavattitabbattā, so pana bhavarāgo taṇhādaḷhattaṃ na hotīti maññamāno na kāmupādānassa paṭhamuppattimāha.
如果不作区分,那么一切渴爱都是欲取;即使作区分,除了欲贪之外,其他已达到坚固程度的渴爱也是欲取。因此说它为阿拉汉道所断。巴利
Taṇhā kāmupādānanti pana vibhāgassa akaraṇe sabbāpi taṇhā kāmupādānaṃ, karaṇepi vā kāmarāgato aññāpi taṇhā daḷhabhāvaṃ pattā kāmupādānanti tassa arahattamaggavajjhatā vuttā.
作为生起处的心生起,是它的对象。五取蕴是它的依处。在那里欢喜的,就是乐于依处的众生。正因为如此,那种乐于依处的状态,在自相续和他相续中都清楚显现。所谓“于诸欲”,是指事欲。不执取“苦乐由业而生”,而多行喧闹、吉祥等事。这就是喧闹、吉祥等多行的状态。这是对欲取者说的。那是指见取:在无我的唯法上,以“我”而邪执,因为执取更微细的法,所以说为微细。以“依止”之说,说的是所缘依止、无间依止、本性依止,因此也包含了无间缘等。巴利
Uppattiṭṭhānabhūtā cittuppādā visayo. Pañcupādānakkhandhā ālayo. Tattha ramatīti ālayarāmā, pajā. Teneva sā ālayarāmatā sasantāne, parasantāne ca pākaṭā hoti. Kāmānanti vatthukāmānaṃ. ‘‘Sukhadukkhaṃ kammunā hotī’’ti aggahetvā kotūhalamaṅgalādibahulo hoti. Sā kotūhalamaṅgalādibahulatā. Assa kāmupādānavato. Tanti diṭṭhupādānaṃ, anattani dhammamatte ‘‘attā’’ti micchābhinivesassa sukhumataradhammupādānatāya sukhumatā vuttā. Upanissayavacanena ārammaṇānantarapakatūpanissayā vuttāti anantarapaccayādīnampi saṅgaho kato hoti.
取缘有的详细解释的注释巴利
Upādānapaccayābhavapadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
646 “义”,是从词义来说的。“法”,是从自性法来说的。“有义”,是有利益的意思,因为先前已经说过的话再说一遍也有作用。“分合”,是从分别和归纳来说的,也就是把已经分别说明的内容加以归纳,这就是它的意思。“某是某的缘”,是说某种取是某种有的缘,是从那方面来说的,这就是它的意思。巴利
646.Atthatoti vacanatthato. Dhammatoti sabhāvadhammato. Sātthatoti sātthakato, pubbe vuttassapi puna vacanassa sappayojanato. Bhedasaṅgahāti bhedato saṅgahato, vibhāgato ceva vibhattassa saṅkhipanato cāti attho. Yaṃ yassa paccayoti yaṃ yaṃ upādānaṃ yassa yassa bhavassa paccayo hoti, tato cāti attho.
“成为”,故名为“有”,这是依果报的称呼而说成业有。因为“生有”的解释对两者是通用的,所以说“从这生起,名为生有”。第二种业有,是因为有情以再生的状态而特别地存在,所以名为“有”。正因如此,才不会犯这样的过患:把一切其他有、或它的因,也都当成“有”。“以两种方式”,意思是依两种形态而转起。或者,“以两种方式”是就各自义而言的具格用法,也就是说“两种”。“有”的意思是存在。巴利
Bhavatītibhavoti phalavohārena kammabhavo vutto. Upapattibhavanibbacanameva hi dvayassapi sādhāraṇaṃ katvā vuttaṃ, bhavati etasmā upapattibhavoti vā. Dutiyo pana kammabhavo sattassa punabbhavabhāvena savisesaṃ bhavatīti bhavo. Tato eva na sabbassa bhavantarassa, taṃhetuno vā bhavabhāvappasaṅgo. Duvidhenāti dvīhi ākārehi pavattitoti attho. Duvidhenāti vā paccattatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, duvidhoti vuttaṃ hoti. Atthīti saṃvijjati.
647 647. 有人说:由自己的诸缘所造作,所以叫业;能造作自己的果报,所以叫业——应当这样称为业的诸行。小地,是指欲界地。大地,是指广大地。一切,是指没有剩余。前往有、或令前往有,就是往生。所谓“前往”,是就能够成就的能力来说,在自己生起的时候,朝向有而转起;或者,“前往”就是指产生。以“往生”这个词,排除了能令业灭尽的那种业,因为这是讲轮回流转,而那种业是依于还灭的。非福行,是指十二种思;应当知道,像“无明缘行”那里一样,这里也包含了掉举相应的思。但在“有缘生”那里,则像“行缘识”那里一样,那个(掉举相应的思)也应当排除。少大果报性,是指果报小或果报大。巴利
647. Attano paccayehi karīyatīti kammaṃ, attano phalaṃ karotīti kammanti keci, ‘‘kamma’’nti evaṃ vattabbā kammasaṅkhātā. Parittabhūmakoti kāmabhūmako. Mahābhūmakoti mahaggatabhūmako. Sabbanti anavasesaṃ. Bhavaṃ gacchati, gameti cāti bhavagāmi. Gacchatīti ca nipphādanasamatthatāvasena, attano pavattikāle bhavābhimukhaṃ hutvā pavattatīti attho, nibbattanameva vā gamanaṃ adhippetaṃ. ‘‘Bhavagāmī’’ti ca etena kammakkhayakaraṃ kammaṃ nivatteti. Ayañhi vaṭṭakathā, tañca vivaṭṭanissitanti. Apuññābhisaṅkhāroti dvādasa cetanāti uddhaccasahagatacetanāyapi gahaṇaṃ ‘‘avijjāpaccayā saṅkhārā’’ti ettha viya veditabbaṃ. ‘‘Bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti ettha pana ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇa’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; mahāva. 1; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1; netti. 24) ettha viya sāpi apanetabbā. Mandabahuvipākatāti appamahāvipākatā.
“一切往生业”这句话,说的是与思相应的贪欲等法。这里通过“具有积聚性”这一点,说明了它们被称为“业”的性质,这是从间接的角度说它们属于业有;但从直接的角度说,只有思才是业有。正如经中所说:“业有与三蕴、一处、一界相应,与一蕴、一处、一界部分相应。”生有则是依三类各三法所说的所执蕴,例如:“生有……欲有……想有……五蕴有由五蕴、十一处、十七界所摄”等等。如果也包括非所执蕴,那就应该说“由十二处、十八界”了。欲渴爱因为被欲爱所欲求、因为是欲的依止处,就像“受用”一样;因为与欲俱行,就像说“矛在游行”;因为是欲的所缘,就像说“乐是色”;因为是欲的缘位,就像说“乐是天堂”——因此称为“欲”,指的是以无间地狱和他化自在天为边界的所执蕴。由于未离色贪而依止于色,依邻近之说,就像说“床在叫喊”、“颤动的天神”一样,称为“色”,指的是以梵身天和色究竟天为边界的所执蕴。巴利
‘‘Sabbampi bhavagāmikammanti iminā cetanāsampayuttā abhijjhādayo vuttā’’ti etena ācayagāmitāya tesaṃ kammasaṅkhātatā vuttāti kammabhavapariyāpannataṃ pariyāyena vadati, nippariyāyena pana cetanāva kammabhavo. Vuttañhi ‘‘kammabhavo tīhi khandhehi ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā sampayutto, ekena khandhena ekenāyatanena ekāya dhātuyā kehici sampayutto’’ti (dhātu. 244). Upapattibhavo tīhipi tikehi vutto upādinnakkhandhova. Yathāha ‘‘upapattibhavo… kāmabhavo… saññābhavo… pañcavokārabhavo pañcahi khandhehi ekādasahāyatanehi sattarasahi dhātūhi saṅgahito’’tiādi (dhātu. 67). Yadi hi anupādinnakānampi gahaṇaṃ siyā, ‘‘dvādasahi āyatanehi aṭṭhārasahi dhātūhī’’ti vattabbaṃ siyāti. Kāmataṇhāya kāmetabbato kāmanissayatāya bhogā viya, kāmasahacaritatāya ‘‘kuntā pacarantī’’ti viya, kāmārammaṇatāya ‘‘sukhaṃ rūpa’’nti viya, kāmapaccayaṭṭhānatāya ‘‘sukho saggo’’ti viya kāmāti avīciparanimmitavasavattiparicchinnā upādinnakkhandhā vuccanti . Rūpāvirāgato yaṃ nissitā, tadupacārena ‘‘mañcā ghosantī’’ti viya, ‘‘phandanadevatā’’ti viya ca ‘‘rūpa’’nti vuccanti brahmakāyikākaniṭṭhaparicchinnā upādinnakkhandhā.
色本身就是有,所以叫色有;同样,无色本身就是有,所以叫无色有。这里说的是以空无边处天到有顶天为范围的四种已执取的蕴。无色本身就是有,所以叫无色有。欲本身就是有,所以叫欲有;不过,因为按照前面所说的含义,它应当被称为“欲”,所以说成“名为欲的有”。或者说,称为欲界的有,就叫“名为欲的有”。色有、无色有也是同样的道理,所以说“这个道理在色有、无色有中也一样”。在“有想者的有”这个说法里,应当看出省略了“vantu”这个词尾;或者,在其词义中加上“a”音,也可以读作“想有”。因此说“或者有想”等等。“混杂”这个词,是用来说明“vokāra”这个词是依业而成立的意思:被混杂、被散布、被扩展,所以叫“vokāra”;或者,混杂本身就是“vokāra”。因为它只是依一蕴而生起,所以说“一混杂”,意思是展开生起。巴利
Rūpameva bhavo rūpabhavo, tathā arūpanti ākāsānañcāyatanabhavaggaparicchinnā cattāro upādinnakkhandhā vuccanti. Arūpameva bhavo arūpabhavo. Kāmo eva bhavoti kāmabhavo, so pana yasmā yathāvuttenatthena ‘‘kāmo’’ti vattabbo hoti, tasmā ‘‘kāmasaṅkhāto bhavo’’ti vuttaṃ. Kāmāvacarasaññito vā bhavo ‘‘kāmasaṅkhāto bhavo’’ti vutto. Tathā rūpārūpabhavoti āha ‘‘esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesū’’ti. Saññāvataṃ bhavoti ettha vantu-saddassa lopo daṭṭhabbo. Tassa vā atthe akāraṃ katvā ‘‘saññabhavo’’tipi pāṭho. Tenāha ‘‘saññāvā’’tiādi. Vokiṇṇoti etena vokārasaddassa kammasādhanatamāha. Vokirīyati pasārīyati vitthārīyatīti vokāro, vokiraṇaṃ vā vokāro, so ekasseva khandhassa vasena pavattattā ‘‘eko vokāro’’ti vutto, pasaṭuppattīti attho.
648 虽然在对“有”的解说中,用“一切能导向有的业就是业有”这句话,也说明了与思相应的诸法。但“福行等”这一限定,是为了表明:即使在缘法的差别上,当以义理的区分来把握行与有时,也确实存在差别。因此才说“虽然如此”等话。若谓由于行与有是依诸法的差别而立的,并非把诸行重新又说了一遍,那么“这个重复的说法是有意义的”就不合理吗?不,并非如此。因为诸行是作为“有的一部分”而再次被称为有的。或者,这是随顺问难者的意乐而说:问难者没有把握诸法的差别,便指责这是重复,所以说“这个重复的说法是有意义的”。巴利
648. Kiñcāpi bhavaniddese ‘‘sabbampi bhavagāmikammaṃ kammabhavo’’ti (vibha. 234) iminā cetanāsampayuttadhammāpi vuttā. Puññābhisaṅkhārādayovāti pana avadhāraṇaṃ paccayadhammavisesepi atthappabhedena saṅkhārabhavaggahaṇesu attheva visesoti dassanatthaṃ kataṃ. Tenāha ‘‘evaṃ santepī’’tiādi. Saṅkhārabhavānaṃ dhammabhedato na saṅkhārā eva puna vuttāti ‘‘sātthakamevidaṃ punavacana’’nti etaṃ ayuttanti ce? Na, bhavekadesabhāvena saṅkhārānaṃ bhavoti puna vuttattā. Parena vā dhammavisesaṃ aggahetvā punavacanaṃ coditanti codakābhilāsavasena ‘‘sātthakamevidaṃ punavacana’’nti vuttaṃ.
649 能生起欲有等的业,它的欲有等状态,在注疏里是就果报的称呼来说的。任何由无明为因、作为俱生识之缘的业,前面在把握行时也已说过;但在这里,依据“一切能往生有的业”这一说法,所指的是能生起有、以取为因、已经成熟待报的业,这才叫有。由欲取为缘而造作能生色有、能生无色有的业,这就是业有;由它所生起的诸蕴就是生有——这个意思用“这个道理在色有、无色有中也一样”来指示。两种欲有,就是欲业有和欲生有,这是两种欲有。同样,“两种色有、两种无色有”也是这样。因为不把包含在内的欲有等单独分开,而是就它们内在的层面,按业有和生有分成两重,所以说“六有”。巴利
649. Kāmabhavādinibbattakassa kammassa kāmabhavādibhāvo phalavohārena aṭṭhakathāyaṃ vutto. Sahajātaviññāṇassapi paccayabhūtaṃ avijjāhetukaṃ saṅkhāraggahaṇena yaṃ kiñci kammaṃ pubbe vuttaṃ, idha pana ‘‘sabbampi bhavagāmikamma’’nti (vibha. 234) vacanato bhavassa nibbattakaṃ upādānahetukaṃ vipaccanāya katokāsameva bhavoti adhippeto. Yaṃ kāmupādānapaccayā rūpabhavanibbattakaṃ, arūpabhavanibbattakañca kammaṃ karīyati, so kammabhavo, tadabhinibbattā khandhā upapattibhavoti imamatthaṃ ‘‘esa nayo rūpārūpabhavesū’’ti atidisati. Dve kāmabhavāti kāmakammabhavo, kāmūpapattibhavoti dve kāmabhavā. Evaṃ ‘‘dve rūpabhavā, dve arūpabhavā’’ti etthāpi. Antogadhe hi visuṃ aggahetvā abbhantaragate eva katvā kāmabhavādike kammūpapattibhavavasena duguṇe katvā āha ‘‘cha bhavā’’ti.
“无差别”是指不按取来区分。而正是因为不按取来区分,才从摄类的角度把十二种分类归纳为“六有”。“不亲近”的意思是不依止、不接触。巴利
Avisesenāti upādānavasena bhedaṃ akatvā. Upādānabhedākaraṇeneva ca dvādasappabhedassa saṅgahavasena saṅgahato ‘‘cha bhavā’’ti vuttaṃ. Anupagammāti anissāya, anāmasitvāti attho.
650 有些人认为,完整地受持牛戒和狗戒,就能和牛、狗同生一处,因此他们以为“持戒禁取的人,修禅定不能成功”,所以不能转生到色界和无色界。但按照下面将要说明的方式,戒禁取可以作为条件,所以说“不应执取它”。在不净道中执取净道,就是戒禁取;通过执取净道而修成色界、无色界的禅那,这并没有什么不合理。巴利
650. Gosīlena, kukkurasīlena ca samattena samādinnena gunnaṃ, kukkurānañca sahabyatā vuttāti ‘‘sīlabbatupādānavato jhānabhāvanā na ijjhatī’’ti maññamānā tena rūpārūpabhavā na hontīti keci vadanti. Vakkhamānena pana pakārena paccayabhāvato ‘‘taṃ na gahetabba’’nti āha. Asuddhimagge ca suddhimaggaparāmasanaṃ sīlabbatupādānanti suddhimaggaparāmasanena rūpārūpāvacarajjhānānaṃ nibbattanaṃ na na yujjatīti.
“依传闻”是指:依靠“想求福报的人祭祀白羊”这类流传下来的说法;或者根据亲眼所见来推断——就像人间这些欲乐这么丰足,天界的欲乐比这里还要丰足得多。听闻古印度传说、悉多被劫、牲畜祭祀仪轨之类的内容,就是听闻非正法。“等”这个字还包括亲近恶人、过去没修过福,以及发错愿。身恶行等,意思是:对自己想要的欲乐来说,身恶行等虽然并不是达成它的正确方法,但还是去做,例如为了长久享受天界等目的而打仗之类,这就是要表达的意思。或者说,是为了现世中王位、将军之位等所摄的欲乐。就包含在那里面,是说:在恶行所生起的欲有和善行所生起的欲有当中,它们就包含在里面。说“包含”,是因为从想有和五蕴有的一部分来说,它们被包含在内;并不是说它们全部无余地都包含在欲有之中。巴利
Anussavavasenāti ‘‘setavadhayajjaṃ ālabhate bhūtikāmo’’ti ādinnaanussavavasena, yathā ime manussaloke kāmā samiddhā, evaṃ devaloke ito samiddhatarāti diṭṭhānusārena vā. Purāṇabhāratasītāharaṇapasubandhavidhiādisavanaṃ assaddhammassavanaṃ. Ādi-saddena asappurisūpanissayaṃ pubbe ca akatapuññataṃ, attamicchāpaṇidhiñca saṅgaṇhāti. Kāyaduccaritādīnipīti attano adhippetānaṃ kāmānaṃ anupāyabhūtānipi kāyaduccaritādīni karoti, cirasaggādiatthaṃ yuddhādivasenāti adhippāyo. Sandiṭṭhike vā pana rajjasenāpatiṭṭhānādisaṅgahe kāme. Tadantogadhā evāti tasmiṃ duccaritanibbatte, sucaritanibbatte ca kāmabhave antogadhā evāti attho. Antogadhāti ca saññābhavapañcavokārabhavānaṃ ekadesena antogadhattā vuttaṃ. Na hi te niravasesā kāmabhave antogadhāti.
具有善趣、恶趣、人间等种种差别。巴利
Sappabhedassāti sugatiduggatimanussādippabhedavato.
在欲界圆满的存在中,依第一种和第二种断灭论来说;在色界存在中,依第三种断灭论来说;在无色界存在中,依其余的断灭论来说,认为“这个我彻底断灭了”,于是造作能导向那种状态的业,所以经文说“这个我名叫……”等等。其中,“彻底断灭”的意思是:通过断尽整个轮回之苦而完全断灭,不再有来世的再生。巴利
Kāmāvacarasampattibhave paṭhamadutiyaucchedavādavasena, rūpabhave tatiyaucchedavādavasena, arūpabhave sesaucchedavādavasena ayamattā suucchinno hotīti tadupagaṃ kammaṃ karotīti āha ‘‘ayaṃattā nāmā’’tiādi. Tattha suucchinnoti sakalavaṭṭadukkhasamucchedena suṭṭhu ucchinno, apunabbhavuppattiko hotīti attho.
“欲界成就的有”这一句,是依照第一种现法涅槃论来说的,其余部分则依照其他现法涅槃论来说。在这里,虽然经典(《长部》1.93等)中只按照色界禅那来讲上面四种现法涅槃论,但持邪见的人不管抓到什么都会固执坚持,所以也会执取无色界的有;或者,因为无色界禅那也被归入第四禅,所以也执取无色界的有;又或者,因为那是一种寂静之乐,所以具足那种境界的人与快乐的人,在状态上有共通之处,因此也执取无色界的有。“离热恼”的意思是:通过如愿受用各种感官对象,以及通过断除,使欲贪的热恼得以止息,就是在现法中得到涅槃。巴利
‘‘Kāmāvacarasampattibhave’’ti idaṃ paṭhamadiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasena vuttaṃ, sesaṃ itaradiṭṭhadhammanibbānavādavasena. Tattha kiñcāpi pāḷiyaṃ (dī. ni. 1.93 ādayo) rūpāvacarajjhānavaseneva upari cattāro diṭṭhadhammanibbānavādā āgatā, diṭṭhigatiko pana yaṃ kiñci gahetvā yathā tathā abhinivisatīti arūpabhavaggahaṇaṃ, arūpajjhānānampi vā catutthajhānasaṅgahato arūpabhavaggahaṇaṃ, santasukhatāya vā taṃsamaṅgino sukhitabhāvasāmaññato. Vigatapariḷāhoti yathābhilāsitavisayūpahārena, pahānena ca vūpasantakāmarāgapariḷāho, diṭṭheva dhamme nibbānappattoti attho.
任何由执取清净道所推动而生的世间戒与禅那,在这里指的就是戒禁取,所以说“这叫做戒禁取”等等。这里没有按顺序讲,而是在讲戒禁取的最后才说它是有的缘,因为戒禁取和我执取一样,并不是经常现起的,而且它是我执取的因。巴利
Suddhimaggaparāmasanavasena pavattitaṃ yaṃ kiñci lokiyaṃ sīlaṃ, jhānañca sīlabbatamicceva idhādhippetanti āha ‘‘idaṃ sīlabbataṃ nāmā’’tiādi. Kamena avatvā sīlabbatupādānassa ante bhavapaccayatāvacanaṃ attavādupādānaṃ viya abhiṇhaṃ asamudācārato, attavādupādānanimittattā ca.
“在业有中”是表示简别的处格。在“以因缘等差别”这一说法里,也应当说到道缘。因为见取等对于俱生的业有来说就是道缘,所以应当知道:从俱生等缘中除去因缘,加入道缘,它们就成了七种缘。然而,这一切都以无间缘、等无间缘、无间依缘、有缘、无有缘、离去缘、习行缘为缘。对于并非无间者,则以依止缘为缘。有时也以所缘缘等为缘,但这已归入依止缘,所以说“对于不相应者,唯以依止缘”。巴利
Kammabhaveti niddhāraṇe bhummaṃ. Hetupaccayappabhedehīti ettha maggapaccayo ca vattabbo. Diṭṭhupādānādīni hi sahajātakammabhavassa maggapaccayā hontīti, tasmā tāni sahajātādīsu hetupaccayaṃ apanīya maggapaccayaṃ pakkhipitvā sattadhā paccayā hontīti veditabbāni. Sabbāni pana anantarasamanantaraanantarūpanissayanatthivigatāsevanapaccayehi paccayā honti. Nānantarassa upanissayapaccayena paccayā honti. Kadāci ārammaṇapaccayādināpi, taṃ pana upanissayapaccayeneva saṅgahetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘vippayuttassa pana upanissayapaccayenevā’’ti.
对有缘生等词句的详细解释的注释巴利
Bhavapaccayājātiādipadavitthārakathāvaṇṇanā
651 “生等”中的“等”字,涵盖了“以生为缘,老死、愁、悲、苦、忧、恼生起”这一切。因此说“生等”。只有投生有的生起才是“生”,所以说“不是投生有”。但对于正在出生者,生即是生;由于若无投生有则无生,也可以说它是“生”的缘。因为“以正在生起的色为近因”也用于色的生起,例如“以积集的色为近因的是积集,以不断相续的色为近因的是相续”。巴利
651.Jātītiādīsūti ādi-saddena ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ sokaparidevadukkhadomanassupāyāsā sambhavantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; mahāva. 1; udā. 1; netti. 24) sabbaṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘jātiādīna’’ntiādi. Upapattibhavuppattiyeva jātīti āha ‘‘na upapattibhavo’’ti. Jāyamānassa pana jāti jātīti upapattibhavopi asati abhāvā jātiyā paccayoti sakkā vattuṃ. Jāyamānarūpapadaṭṭhānatāpi hi rūpajātiyā vuttā ‘‘upacitarūpapadaṭṭhāno upacayo, anuppabandharūpapadaṭṭhānā santatī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 641).
已生起的诸蕴有低劣和优胜的差别,也就是劣与胜。不可爱的就是劣,可爱的就是胜。“等”这个字涵盖了金色、丑陋、低劣、优胜等等。即使是以双胞胎方式出生的双胞胎,他们也有差别,那就是众生的差别。因为差别的原因在相续不同的人当中完全不存在,所以说“在自身相续中”。也就是说,除了自身相续中的原因之外,找不到其他能造成差别的原因;如果另有原因,那么一切时候、一切人都应该完全没有差别,这个过失就无法避免,因为原因如果没有差别,结果的差别就不合理。因此说“唯以业有为因”。巴利
Jātānaṃ khandhānaṃ uññātatā, abhimatatā ca hīnapaṇītatā. Aniṭṭhañhi hīnaṃ, iṭṭhaṃ paṇītaṃ. Ādi-saddena suvaṇṇadubbaṇṇahīnuttamādiṃ saṅgaṇhāti. Yamakānampi satanti yamakabhāvena nibbattānampi samānānaṃ. So ca sattānaṃ viseso. Bhinnasantānikassa visesakāraṇassa sabbena sabbaṃ abhāvato ‘‘ajjhattasantāne’’ti vuttaṃ. Aññassa kāraṇassa abhāvatoti attasantānagatato aññassa visesakāraṇassa anupalabbhamānattā, sati ca tasmiṃ sabbadā sabbesaṃ abhāvatoti pasaṅgassa dunnivāraṇato kāraṇe avisiṭṭhe phalavisesassa ayujjamānakattā. Tenāha ‘‘kammabhavahetukovā’’ti.
“由彼彼”是指由亲属衰败等,与老死不同的其他苦法。因为随老死之相而生起的愁等,是与老死相关联的;除此之外的则不相关联。“以依止分”是指依止的部分、依止的少分。凡是虽未出现在《发趣论》中,却依“此有故彼有,此无故彼无”的经典方式而成为依止的,就称为“依止分”。据说,这依止是缘的大教示。巴利
Tena tenāti ñātibyasanādinā jarāmaraṇato aññena dukkhadhammena. Jarāmaraṇanimittañhi uppannā sokādayo jarāmaraṇābhisambandhā, tadaññe anabhisambandhā. Upanissayakoṭiyāti upanissayaṃsena, upanissayalesenāti attho. Yo hi paṭṭhāne anāgato sati bhāvā, asati ca abhāvā suttantapariyāyena upanissayo, so ‘‘upanissayakoṭī’’ti vuccati. Paccayamahāpadeso kireso, yadidaṃ upanissayoti.
有轮注释巴利
Bhavacakkakathāvaṇṇanā
652 不只是生仅为忧等之缘,而且由于生是忧等之缘,故生亦为无明之缘。为了说明这一点,便开始了“然而由于……”等话。这里“在此”是指在缘起的教说中。“aviditādi midanti”中的“ma”是连音字。“恒常”指一切时,直到证得最高的道。“集合”指结合,意思是没有间断。巴利
652. Na kevalaṃ sokādīnaṃyeva jāti paccayo hoti, sokādīnaṃ pana paccayattā avijjāyapi paccayo evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Etthāti paṭiccasamuppādadesanāyaṃ. Aviditādi midanti ma-kāro padasandhikaro. Satatanti sabbakālaṃ yāva aggamaggādhigamā. Samitanti saṅgataṃ, abbocchinnanti attho.
关于“其中”,是指忧等这些。“已成就”是指正在获得、现前存在。因为无明与它们不相分离,所以无明也就成为已成就的。巴利
Tesūti sokādīsu. Siddhesūti labbhamānesu. Siddhā hoti avijjā avinābhāvato.
“欲乘者”是指怀有欲求的人;或者说,欲就是他的乘具,所以叫“欲乘者”,意思是依着欲而前行的人。“已生欲者”是指已经生起渴爱之欲的人。“退失”是指消失。“被恼害”是指被忧愁等扰乱。巴利
Kāmayānassāti kāmayamānassa, kāmo vā yānaṃ etassāti kāmayāno, tassa kāmavasena yāyamānassāti attho. Chandajātassāti jātataṇhāchandassa. Parihāyantīti vigacchanti. Ruppatīti sokādinā kuppati.
以缠缚性而安住,其习性为安住,即住于缠缚者。或者读作“住于缠缚者”。其中,能缠覆故为缠覆,即邪见缠覆;依它而住,故为住于缠覆者,应当这样理解其含义。巴利
Pariyuṭṭhānatāya tiṭṭhanasīlo pariyuṭṭhānaṭṭhāyī. ‘‘Pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyino’’ti vā pāṭho. Tattha pariyuṭṭhātīti pariyuṭṭhaṃ, diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānaṃ, tena tiṭṭhatīti pariyuṭṭhaṭṭhāyīti attho daṭṭhabbo.
五种前兆,是指《如是语》83 所说“花环枯萎,衣服沾污,腋下流汗,身体变色,天子在自己的天座上不再安乐”这五种死前预兆。因为看见了这些前兆,天人们便凭对存在的贪欲之力,对那称为业所生蕴的投生存在,生起强烈的忧愁。巴利
Pañca pubbanimittānīti ‘‘mālā milāyanti, vatthāni kilissanti, kacchehi sedā muccanti, kāye vevaṇṇiyaṃ okkamati, devo devāsane nābhiramatī’’ti (itivu. 83) vuttāni pañca maraṇapubbanimittānīti attho. Tāni hi disvā kammanibbattakkhandhasaṅkhāte upapattibhave bhavacchandabalena devānaṃ balavasoko uppajjatīti.
“愚者”就是无知的人。这句话是在说明无明是它的原因。三种苦:是指听到不合自己心意的话、目睹受刑罚折磨、临死时业现前,由这些原因产生的忧愁等苦。巴利
Bāloti avidvā. Tena avijjāya kāraṇabhāvaṃ dasseti. Tividhaṃ dukkhanti tassāruppakathāsavana, kammakāraṇādassana, maraṇakālakammopaṭṭhānanidānaṃ sokādidukkhaṃ.
令诸漏达成,意思是令诸漏运行、令它们被觉知。巴利
Āsave sādhentīti āsave gamenti bodhentīti attho.
如此存在时:当轮回以不知其开端而处于无始的状态时。说初始性:指依无明而说一切存在都有开端。此有初始,所以叫有初始,即轮回。它的状态就是初始性,对此的讲述就是说初始性。或者,唯这个词是用来排除差别的:如果处于无始状态,无明可能在初、中、后一切阶段都存在,那么说无明是初始性的说法就与之矛盾,这就是它的意思。说了无明为首要之后,为了显示它的首要性,便以以执取无明等语开始。其中,以执取无明是指以无明的生起,或以不捨断,或以令其于自身相续中现前存在,这就是它的意思。业等:指业与异熟之轮。障碍:指在充满种种痛苦的轮回牢狱中障碍、阻止。以那些:指以烦恼、业、异熟之轮。无明以是轮回之因故为首要,所以被称为首要法。巴利
Evaṃsatīti evaṃ bhavacakkassa aviditāditāya anādibhāve sati. Ādimattakathananti avijjāvasena ādisabbhāvakathanaṃ. Ādi etassa atthīti hi ādimaṃ, bhavacakkaṃ. Tassa bhāvo ādimattaṃ, tassa kathanaṃ ādimattakathanaṃ. Visesanivattiattho vā mattasaddo, sati anādibhāve avijjā ādimhi, majjhe, pariyosāne ca sabbattha siyāti ādimattāya avijjāya kathanaṃ virujjhatīti attho. ‘‘Avijjā padhānā’’ti vatvā tassā padhānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘avijjāggahaṇenā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Tattha avijjāggahaṇenāti avijjāya uppādanena, appahānena vā, attano santāne sannihitabhāvakaraṇenāti attho. Kammādīnīti kammavipākavaṭṭāni. Palibodhentīti nānādukkhaparibyūḷhe saṃsāracārake nirodhenti. Tehīti kilesakammavipākavaṭṭehi. Vaṭṭassa kāraṇabhāvena padhānattā ‘‘padhānadhammo’’ti avijjā kathitā.
从无明等开始。“梵天神等”这个说法里,“等”字把生主、自在天、原人这一类都包括进来了。“说者”就是能说的人,意思是让各种有利或有害的事情发生。“感受者”就是感受,或者被感受,指体验苦乐等,或者了知一切对象;通过“快乐的人、痛苦的人”等等,自己知道,也被别人知道、被了知,这就是它的含义。“或由梵天神等,或由自己”中的“或”字是“和”的意思。因此说“没有作者和受者”,这是把“和”义的复合词取来用。巴利
Tato avijjādito. Brahmādināti ādi-saddena pajāpatissarapurisādike saṅgaṇhāti. Vadatīti vado, taṃ taṃ hitāhitaṃ pavattāti attho. Vedeti, vediyatīti vā vedeyyo, sukhādiṃ anubhavati, sabbavisaye vā jānāti, ‘‘sukhito dukkhito’’tiādinā attanā, parehi ca jānāti, ñāyati cāti attho. Brahmādinā vā attanā vāti vā-saddo ca-saddattho. Tenāha ‘‘kārakavedakarahita’’nti ca-saddatthasamāsaṃ.
十二种空性空是指:无明等十二种本性为空的法,因为空性而空,所以是十二种空性空。或者,把常性等四种空合为一种,因为它属于十二支,所以成为十二种,以这十二种空来说空,这就是它的含义。巴利
Dvādasavidhasuññatāsuññanti avijjādīnaṃ dvādasannaṃ suññasabhāvānaṃ suññatāya suññaṃ dvādasavidhasuññatāsuññaṃ, dhuvabhāvādisuññatāya vā catubbidhampi suññataṃ ekaṃ katvā dvādasaṅgagatattā dvādasavidhāti tāya dvādasasuññatāya suññanti attho.
653 “从过去引来”是指从过去、从过去的部分引来现在的果。以受为终点,就划定为一个有轮。因为一个有轮的一部分也被称为有轮。或者说,受是伴随渴爱的无明的缘,所以从受到无明,从无明到行,这样连接起来,以受为终点的有轮就是圆满的,应当这样理解。或者,通过执取无明,由于不相离的关系,也执取了渴爱和取;通过执取行,执取了有;通过执取识等,执取了生、老死以及忧等,这样一来,以受为终点的有轮也是合理的。以渴爱为根本的方面也应当这样连接。因为两者互相摄入。无明遮盖了法的自性,使人产生颠倒的执著,引导见行者走向轮回,或者引导他们的轮回,也就是行等的运转,所以被称为轮回的引导者。至于渴爱引导渴爱行者走向轮回,那更不必说了。巴利
653.Pubbantāharaṇatoti pubbantato atītakoṭṭhāsato paccuppannavipākassa āharaṇato. Vedanāvasānaṃ paricchinnaṃ ekaṃ bhavacakkaṃ hoti. Bhavacakkekadesopi hi bhavacakkanti vuccati. Vedanā vā taṇhāsahāyāya avijjāya paccayo hotīti vedanāto avijjā, avijjāto saṅkhārāti sambajjhanato vedanāvasānaṃ bhavacakkaṃ paripuṇṇamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avijjāggahaṇena vā taṇhupādānāni tadavinābhāvato. Saṅkhāraggahaṇena bhavo, viññāṇādiggahaṇena jātijarāmaraṇāni, sokādayo ca gahitāti evampi vedanāvasānaṃ bhavacakkanti yuttamevetaṃ. Evaṃ taṇhāmūlake ca yojetabbaṃ. Dvinnampi hi aññamaññānuppaveso hotīti. Avijjā dhammasabhāvaṃ paṭicchādetvā viparītābhinivesaṃ kārentī diṭṭhicarite saṃsāre nayati, tesaṃ vā saṃsāraṃ saṅkhārādipavattiṃ nayati pavattetīti saṃsāranāyikā vuttā. Taṇhāya taṇhācaritānaṃ saṃsāranāyikābhāve vattabbameva natthi.
第一个有轮。“为了果的生起”一语,是在“作者”之义上使用具格,或者正是在“工具”之义上使用具格。因为此处所见的是识等当下果的生起,它说明的是:那些未见的、前世中属于自己的因——无明与行——虽未生果,却也未被切断;或者说,它成为这种说明的手段。又或者,前一个有轮通过与第二个有轮相关联而被讲述,即为了说明被称为“受”的果的生起,渴爱等因没有断绝;因此,意思是:为了果的生起,作为其手段的前一个有轮的因被说明为没有断绝。又或者,第一个有轮所说明的,只是为了行等果的生起,无明等因未生果而只是没有断绝;或者说,只是识等因的行等持续不断——不像第二个有轮那样连终结也加以说明。因此说“为了果的生起而说明因的不断绝”。“说明次第转起”:通过“行缘识,识缘名色”等语句,说明诸法按次第转起。因为在“识缘名色”这里,先说了处尚未圆满的羯罗蓝色,此后又说“名色缘六处”,说明了六处的转起。“说明俱时生起”:通过“取缘有,有缘生”等语句,说明投生诸蕴同时生起。因为在这里,不像第一个有轮那样按次第说明处的生起。巴利
Paṭhamaṃ bhavacakkaṃ. Phaluppattiyāti kattuatthe karaṇavacanaṃ, karaṇatthe eva vā. Viññāṇādipaccuppannaphaluppatti hi idha diṭṭhā, adiṭṭhānaṃ purimabhave attano hetūnaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārānaṃ phalaṃ anuppādetvā anupacchijjanaṃ pakāseti, pakāsanassa vā karaṇaṃ hotīti. Atha vā purimabhavacakkaṃ dutiyena sambandhaṃ vuttanti vedanāsaṅkhātassa phalassa uppattiyā taṇhādīnaṃ hetūnaṃ anupacchedaṃ pakāseti, tasmā phaluppattiyā kāraṇabhūtāya paṭhamassa bhavacakkassa hetūnaṃ anupacchedappakāsanatoti attho. Saṅkhārādīnameva vā phalānaṃ uppattiyā avijjādīnaṃ hetūnaṃ phalaṃ ajanetvā anupacchedameva, viññāṇādihetūnaṃ vā saṅkhārādīnaṃ anuppabandhameva pakāseti paṭhamaṃ bhavacakkaṃ, na dutiyaṃ viya pariyosānampīti ‘‘phaluppattiyā hetūnaṃanupacchedappakāsanato’’ti vuttaṃ. Anupubbapavattidīpanatoti ‘‘saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇaṃ, viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) dhammānaṃ anupubbato pavattiyā dīpanato. ‘‘Viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpa’’nti hi ettha aparipuṇṇāyatanaṃ kalalarūpaṃ vatvā tato uddhaṃ ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti saḷāyatanappavatti vuttā. Sahuppattidīpanatoti ‘‘upādānapaccayā bhavo, bhavapaccayā jātī’’ti vā upapattikkhandhānaṃ ekajjhaṃ uppattiyā dīpanato. Na hi ettha paṭhame viya bhavacakke āyatanānaṃ kamena uppatti vuttā.
654 以因等为前导的三种连结属于此有轮,所以叫“因果因前导三连结”,也就是有轮。按因、果、因、果分成四种,是诸支的摄集,所以叫“四部分摄集”。虽然没有直接按它们自身的体性说出来,但在各自的摄集里都被散入,通过无明、行等的列举而得以说明,这就是“行相”。或者,过去因等的类别就是行相。烦恼、业、果与果、烦恼、业互相联系,反复辗转流转,因此把“流转”这个名称安在它们上面,说为“三轮转”;又因为它们是流转的一部分,所以说为“诸轮转”。巴利
654. Hetuādipubbakā tayo sandhī etassāti hetuphalahetupubbakatisandhi, bhavacakkaṃ. Hetuphalahetuphalavasena catuppabhedo aṅgānaṃ saṅgaho etassāti catubhedasaṅgahaṃ. Sarūpato avuttāpi tasmiṃ tasmiṃ saṅgahe ākirīyanti avijjāsaṅkhārādiggahaṇehi pakāsīyantīti ākārā. Atītahetuādīnaṃ vā pakārā ākārā. Kilesakammavipākā vipākakilesakammehi sambandhā hutvā punappunaṃ parivattantīti tesu vaṭṭanāmaṃ āropetvā ‘‘tivaṭṭa’’nti vuttaṃ, vaṭṭekadesattā vā ‘‘vaṭṭānī’’ti vuttāni.
连结的起始与终结已经确定,意思是连结的前后次第已经确定。巴利
Sandhīnaṃ ādipariyosānavavatthitāti sandhīnaṃ pubbāparavavatthitāti attho.
“战栗”是指:以执取的方式对种种事物生起战栗,也就是渴爱的意思。“执取”是指牢牢地抓取。“前业有中”是指在前业有存在的情况下。巴利
Paritassatīti taṃ taṃ vatthuṃ pariggahakaraṇavasena tassati, taṇhāyatīti attho. Upādiyatīti daḷhagāhaṃ gaṇhāti. Purimakammabhavasminti purimakammabhave sati.
它的实有性只是“正在被造作”而已,所以论师说“在业有中正在被造作,这就是意思”。在苦等当中,痴是指能掩盖苦等过患、尚未被断除的痴。“造作”是指能聚集、能使布施等行为转起的那些法。这些法只有一种转向,所以叫“一种转向”,即在这些法当中只有一种转向。在第七项里,思就是有。所谓“无论何种思都是有,与它相应的造作就是行”,这是依据《无碍解道》经文里按如实所见而说的法住智分别来讲述的。因为在那个分别里,是作为“思就是有”而出现的。但在解释有时,则依据《分别论》经文,在“按意义”这一项里显示“思本身就是行,而有则是与思相应的法”。因为《分别论》经文从“其中什么是福行?欲界的善思”等等开始,说到了行就是思。在那里,《无碍解道》经文说,与思相应的法由于异熟法性,由有异熟的、被称为积集的造作,即所作成的造作功能,而成为行。《分别论》经文说“一切导向有的业都是业有”,因为从有的缘的角度看,它导向有;又因为与业相杂、相伴,所以是业;由此它使生有生起,因此被称为“有”。然而,使生有生起的功能,思更为殊胜,所以《无碍解道》经文说思是“有”。造作有的功能,思更为殊胜,所以《分别论》经文从“欲界的善思”等等开始,说思是“行”。因此,从各种不同的角度,两者在两种地方都可以说,这里并没有矛盾。对它的果,也就是生有,生起欲求,就是依据“他听说四大王天的诸天神寿命长久、容貌端严、多享快乐”等所闻,对未来将要生起的生有生起欣求。“执取”一词,是就作用而说欲取;“执取著”,则是指其余的取。“造作的终点”,是指在三种意义解释中所说的造作的终点处。巴利
Tassa ca sabbhāvo kariyamānatā evāti āha ‘‘kammabhave kariyamāneti attho’’ti. Dukkhādīsu mohoti dukkhādīnaṃ ādīnavapaṭicchādako appahīno moho. Āyūhanāti sampiṇḍanakā dānādikiriyāya pavattanakā. Ekaṃ āvajjanaṃ etesanti ekāvajjanā, tesu ekāvajjanesu. Sattame cetanā bhavo. ‘‘Yā kāci vā pana cetanā bhavo, sampayuttā āyūhanā saṅkhārā’’ti idaṃ yathādassitāya dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇabhājanīye vuttāya paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā (paṭi. ma. 1.45) vasena vuttaṃ. Tattha hi ‘‘cetanā bhavo’’ti āgatā. Bhavaniddese pana ‘‘sātthato’’ti ettha ‘‘cetanāva saṅkhārā, bhavo pana cetanāsampayuttāpī’’ti vibhaṅgapāḷivasena dassitaṃ. ‘‘Tattha katamo puññābhisaṅkhāro? Kusalā cetanā kāmāvacarā’’tiādinā hi saṅkhārānaṃ cetanābhāvo vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ (vibha. 226) vutto. Tattha paṭisambhidāpāḷiyaṃ ‘‘cetanāsampayuttā vipākadhammattā savipākena āyūhanasaṅkhātena saṅkhatābhisaṅkharaṇakiccena saṅkhārā’’ti vuttā. Vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘sabbampi bhavagāmikammaṃ kammabhavo’’ti (vibha. 234) bhavassa paccayabhāvena bhavagāmibhāvato, kammasaṃsaṭṭhasahāyatāya kammabhāvato ca upapattibhavaṃ bhāventīti ‘‘bhavo’’ti vuttā. Upapattibhavabhāvanākiccaṃ pana cetanāya sātisayanti paṭisambhidāpāḷiyā cetanā ‘‘bhavo’’ti vuttā. Bhavābhisaṅkharaṇakiccaṃ cetanāya sātisayanti vibhaṅgapāḷiyaṃ ‘‘kusalā cetanā’’tiādinā (vibha. 226) cetanā ‘‘saṅkhārā’’ti vuttā. Tasmā tena tena pariyāyena ubhayaṃ ubhayattha vattuṃ yuttanti natthettha virodho. Tassa phale upapattibhave nikāmanāti ‘‘tassa sutaṃ hoti ‘cātumahārājikā devā dīghāyukā vaṇṇavanto sukhabahulā’ti’’ādisutānusārena bhāvini upapattibhave abhikaṅkhanā. Gahaṇanti kāmupādānaṃ kiccenāha. Parāmasananti itarāni. Āyūhanāvasāneti tīsupi atthavikappesu vuttassa āyūhanassa avasāne.
这里,指的就是现在这一世的生命存在。所谓“有之间的连结”,就是过去世的生命存在与现在这一世的生命存在相连接;或者说是以“有之间的状态”来连接,这就是“有之间的连结”,是依这个意义来说的。那个被称为“结生”的,就是识——这是它们之间的关联。因为识确实被称为“以结生为现起”。在胎中,就是指在母胎里,或者指在处于胎的状态的阶段。巴利
Idhāti imasmiṃ paccuppannabhave. Bhavantarassa atītabhavassa iminā paccuppannabhavena paṭisandhānaṃ bhavantarapaṭisandhānaṃ, bhavantarabhāvena vā paṭisandhānaṃ bhavantarapaṭisandhānaṃ, tassa vasena. Yaṃ paṭisandhīti vuccati, taṃ viññāṇanti sambandho. Tathā hi viññāṇaṃ ‘‘paṭisandhānapaccupaṭṭhāna’’nti vuccati. Gabbheti mātukucchiyaṃ, gabbhāvatthāyaṃ vā.
在两种义释的说法里,说到“造作”行时,他说“它的前分”;在第三种义释的说法里,则说“与它相应”。与它相应的无明已被包含在内,这就是它们的关联。幼童的心生起时多是有分,大多数情况下没有能力造作能引生另一有的业,所以说“此处因处所相违”。通过“造业时痴被显示”这句话,显示的是作为业之条件的痴,而不只是与业相应的痴。巴利
Dvīsu atthavikappesu vutte āyūhanasaṅkhāre ‘‘tassa pubbabhāgā’’ti āha, tatiye atthavikappe vutte ‘‘taṃsampayuttā’’ti. Taṃsampayuttā avijjā gahitāva hotīti sambandho. Daharassa cittappavatti bhavaṅgabahulā yebhuyyena bhavantarajanakakammāyūhanasamatthā na hotīti ‘‘idha paṭipakkattā āyatanāna’’nti vuttaṃ. ‘‘Kammakaraṇakāle sammoho dassito’’ti etena kammassa paccayabhūtaṃ sammohaṃ dasseti, na kammasampayuttameva.
在这里,过去生中有五种业的资粮,现在有五种果报法,现在有五种业的资粮,未来有五种果报法。这样,十法就是业,十法就是果报。因此,在两种情形中是业、是业轮转,在两种情形中是果报、是果报轮转。这就是业的概要说明和果报的概要说明,业有和果报有,业轮转和果报轮转,业的运转和果报的运转,业的相续和果报的相续,也就是作用和作用的果报。巴利
‘‘Tattha purimabhavasmiṃ pañca kammasambhārā, etarahi pañca vipākadhammā, etarahi pañca kammasambhārā, anāgate pañca vipākadhammāti dasa dhammā kammaṃ, dasa dhammā vipāko, iti dvīsu ṭhānesu kammaṃ, kammavaṭṭaṃ, dvīsu ṭhānesu vipāko, vipākavaṭṭanti kammasaṅkhepo ca vipākasaṅkhepo ca, kammabhavo ca vipākabhavo ca kammavaṭṭañca vipākavaṭṭañca, kammapavattañca vipākapavattañca, kammasantati ca vipākasantati ca, kiriyā ceva kiriyāphalañcāti –
这样生起的这个是有因的,
苦、无常、动摇、短暂、不坚固;
诸法从诸法依因而生起。
这里根本找不到所谓的“我”,也找不到所谓的“他者”。
诸法由因与资粮为缘,而生成诸法。
为了灭尽诸因,佛陀宣说了法。
“ 当诸因被彻底止息,轮回就被斩断,不再流转。
这样,为了彻底终结苦,梵行就在这里存在。
众生不可得时,既不能说断灭,也不能说常住。”巴利
‘‘Evaṃ samuppannamidaṃ sahetukaṃ, Dukkhaṃ aniccaṃ calamittaraddhuvaṃ; Dhammehi dhammā pabhavanti hetuso, Na hettha attāva parova vijjati. ‘‘Dhammā dhamme sañjanenti, hetusambhārapaccayā; Hetūnañca nirodhāya, dhammo buddhena desito. ‘‘Hetūsu uparuddhesu, chinnaṃ vaṭṭaṃ na vaṭṭati; Evaṃ dukkhantakiriyāya, brahmacariyidha vijjati; Satte ca nupalabbhante, nevucchedo na sassata’’nti. (vibha. aṭṭha. 242);
在这里,业本身积集、增长果报,所以叫业资粮;或者说,业就是行有,而资助它的无明、渴爱、取就是业资粮。或者说,能带来结生的有就是业,资助它的则是前面说过的策励行以及无明等,这些也是业资粮。应当知道,这里把“业和业资粮”合起来只说成“业资粮”,是采用省略其中一项的方式。十种法就是业:无明等因为与业相伴、类似业、又能资助业,所以也被说成“业”。在这里,无明等和识等被略摄,所以叫略说;业和果也是这样。或者说,“业和果”这样被略摄,所以叫略说,指的就是无明等和识等。不过,因为略说的体性有共通之处,所以用单数来表达,应当这样理解;或者,“略说”这个词是“部分”的同义词,因此业的部分就是业的略说。巴利
Tattha kammāneva vipākaṃ sambharanti vaḍḍhentīti kammasambhārā, kammaṃ vā saṅkhārabhavā, tadupakārakāni avijjātaṇhupādānāni kammasambhārā. Paṭisandhidāyako vā bhavo kammaṃ, tadūpakārakā yathāvuttā āyūhanasaṅkhārā, avijjādayo ca kammasambhārāti kammañca kammasambhārā ca kammasambhārāti ekasesavasena kammasambhāraggahaṇaṃ veditabbaṃ. Dasa dhammā kammanti avijjādayopi kammasahāyatāya kammasarikkhakā, tadūpakārā cāti ‘‘kamma’’nti vuttā. Saṅkhippanti ettha avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo cāti saṅkhepo, kammaṃ, vipāko ca. ‘‘Kammaṃ vipāko’’ti evaṃ saṅkhipīyatīti vā saṅkhepo, avijjādayo, viññāṇādayo ca. Saṅkhepabhāvasāmaññena pana ekavacanaṃ katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ, saṅkhepasaddo vā bhāgādhivacananti kammabhāgo kammasaṅkhepo.
这样生起的:从业也有果报。在那里,也就是“从无明生行”这样生起的,或者按三连结等方式生起的,这就是有轮。短暂:有去性,也就是有灭性。用显示生灭的无常一词,以及显示变异的动摇一词,来说明没有显示出来的不能长久安住。不坚固:以此说明没有坚固性、没有坚实性。因本身就是资粮,所以叫因资粮。“依处、依因”这里,这样说的就是处,其他各种共同的因是资粮,不共的是因。这样:这样唯从因生起法,因灭则轮回断,并且为了那灭尽而宣说法。梵行于此:这里“梵行于此”和“众生”中的“ca”表示合集,即“这样存在梵行,常见与断见也不生起”。因为这样,当依因唯法生起时,众生不可得;如果众生可得,就会成为常或断;因为不可得,所以说其中既非断也非常。巴利
Evaṃ samuppannanti kammatopi vipāko. Tatthāpi ‘‘avijjāto saṅkhārā’’ti evaṃ samuppannaṃ, tisandhiādivasena vā samuppannaṃ idaṃ bhavacakkanti attho. Ittaranti gamanadhammaṃ, vinassadhammanti attho. Tena uppādavayavantatādīpakena aniccasaddena, vikārāpattidīpakena calasaddena ca adīpitaṃ kālantaraṭṭhāyitābhāvaṃ vibhāveti. Addhuvanti etena thirabhāvābhāvanissārataṃ. Hetu eva sambhārā hetusambhārā. ‘‘Ṭhānaso hetuso’’ti (kathā. 355; paṭi. ma. 1.44) ettha evaṃ vuttaṃ vā ṭhānaṃ, aññampi tassa tassa sādhāraṇaṃ kāraṇaṃ sambhāro, asādhāraṇaṃ hetu. Evanti evaṃ hetuto dhammamattasambhave, hetunirodhā ca vaṭṭacchede dhamme ca taṃnirodhāya desite satīti attho. Brahmacariyaṃ idha brahmacariyidha satte cāti ettha ca-saddo ‘‘evaṃ brahmacariyañca vijjati, sassatucchedā ca na hontī’’ti samuccayattho. Evañhi hetuāyatte dhammamattasambhave satto nupalabbhati, tasmiñca upalabbhante sassato, ucchedo vā siyāti nupalabbhante tasmiṃ neva ucchedo na sassatanti vuttaṃ hoti.
655 从谛而生起:因为从真实而生起,或者因为从诸谛而生起。巴利
655.Saccappabhavatoti saccato, saccānaṃ vā pabhavato ca.
善业与不善业:因为这是在轮回的教说中说的,所以应当知道它属于有漏。所谓“不加区分”,就是不去区分“思”和“与思相应”这两种情况,意思是说,这一切善业和不善业都是集谛。因为在《分别论》中说“渴爱……乃至……其余有漏善法”时,并没有区分思和与思相应,或者说,并没有区分各种圣谛,而是直接说为集谛。在《谛分别》中,一切烦恼、一切导向存在的业,都被说为“集谛”。第二谛是它的生起之源,所以叫“第二谛所生”。“取缘有”这句话,因为这里指的是生有和业有,所以说这是第一谛和第二谛两者。巴利
Kusalākusalaṃkammanti vaṭṭakathāya vattamānattā sāsavanti viññāyati. Avisesenāti ‘‘cetanā cetanāsampayuttakā’’ti visesaṃ akatvā, sabbampi taṃ kusalākusalaṃ kammaṃ samudayasaccanti vuttanti attho. ‘‘Taṇhā ca…pe… avasesā ca sāsavā kusalā dhammā’’ti (vibha. 208-210) hi cetanācetanāsampayuttavisesaṃ akatvā vuttanti, ariyasaccavisesaṃ vā akatvā samudayasaccanti vuttanti attho. Saccavibhaṅge hi sabbepi kilesā sabbampi bhavagāmikammaṃ ‘‘samudayasacca’’nti vuttaṃ. Dutiyasaccaṃ pabhavo etassāti dutiyasaccapabhavaṃ. Upādānapaccayā bhavoti upapattibhavassa, kammabhavassa ca adhippetattā vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭhamadutiyasaccadvaya’’nti.
656 关于“事”:就是指所缘,或者指苦等应当被掩盖的事。所谓“迷惑”:就是不让知、不让通达法的自性,因为掩盖了它,所以叫迷惑。这里的“事”指的是所缘。又互相支持:就像两束芦苇,不能离开互相依靠而站立。所谓“于各自境中”:就是在各自的对象上,比如色处等。正在生起的诸蕴,以变异的状态而得以生起,看起来像是它们在使蕴生起,所以说“使蕴生起”。因此说“以它们现起的状态而转起”。又令住于异熟差别的状态:这里也应当按“使蕴生起”那里所说的道理来理解。也就是依异熟差别而转起的意思。被煮故为熟,被破坏故为差别,熟与差别就是异熟差别,它的状态就是被煮与被破坏,这就是意思。为愁等之所依故:因为它们是愁等的因,也就是与由它们所成的无明俱行的行,成为他世显现的缘。或者,死心是结生识的无间缘,所以说“成为他世显现的缘”。然而,那死心如果没有无明与行,就不能成为他世的缘,为了显示有伴助,所以说“为愁等之所依故”。二种:依各自的自性,以及依作为他法之缘的状态,所以成二种二种。这是以恼害、动摇略说而作的解说。巴利
656.Vatthūsūti ārammaṇesu, dukkhādīsu vā paṭicchādetabbesu vatthūsu. Sammohetīti dhammasabhāvaṃ jānituṃ paṭivijjhituṃ adentī tassa paṭicchādanavasena sammoheti. Vatthunti idha ārammaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ. Aññamaññañca upatthambheti aññamaññasannissayena vinā ṭhātuṃ asakkontā dve naḷakalāpā viya. Savisayeti yathāsakaṃ visaye rūpāyatanādike. Jāyamānānaṃ khandhānaṃ vikārabhāvena labbhamānā jāti te janentī viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘khandhe ca janetī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘tesaṃ abhinibbattibhāvena pavattattā’’ti. Pākabhedabhāvañca adhitiṭṭhatīti etthāpi ‘‘khandhe janetī’’ti ettha vuttanayeneva attho gahetabbo. Pākabhedavasena vattaticceva attho . Paccatīti pāko, bhijjatīti bhedo, pāko ca bhedo ca pākabhedaṃ, tassa bhāvaṃ paccanaṃ, bhijjanañcāti attho. Sokādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānattāti tesaṃ kāraṇattā, tehi siddhāya avijjāya sahitehi saṅkhārehi paccayo ca hoti bhavantarapātubhāvāyāti adhippāyo. Cuticittaṃ vā paṭisandhiviññāṇassa anantarapaccayo hotīti ‘‘paccayo ca hoti bhavantarapātubhāvāyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Taṃ pana cuticittaṃ avijjāsaṅkhārarahitaṃ bhavantarassa paccayo na hotīti sasahāyattadassanatthamāha ‘‘sokādīnaṃ adhiṭṭhānattā’’ti. Dvedhāti attano attano sarasena, dhammantarapaccayabhāvena cāti dvedhā dvedhā. Byāpanicchālopena hi niddeso.
657 以“无明为缘而有行”这句话,通过显示行是依因缘而生的,就说明“到底是谁在造作”这个问题并不成立,因此这就遮止了作者见。“自我从这个存在转到另一个存在”这种见解就是自我相续见,它被“以行为缘而有识生起”这句话遮止了。把五蕴执为没有差别的单一自我,这就是密集想,它被“以识为缘而有名色,仅此而已”这句话遮止了,就像劈开双多罗树干一样。“如是遮止种种见”这句话,说的是遮止“忧愁、悲叹、痛苦”等见。因为忧愁等也是依因缘而生、不能自主的,正如“以生为缘而有老死、忧……乃至……生起”所说的那样。也由于遮止了邪见,也就是遮止了作者见等种种邪执。巴利
657.‘‘Avijjāpaccayāsaṅkhārā’’ti etena saṅkhārānaṃ paccayuppannatādassanena ‘‘ko nu kho abhisaṅkharotīti esa no kallo pañho’’ti dasseti, tenetaṃ kārakadassananivāraṇaṃ. Attā bhavato bhavantaraṃ saṅkamatīti dassanaṃ attasaṅkantidassanaṃ, taṃ saṅkhārapaccayā viññāṇuppattivacanena nivāritaṃ hoti. Pañcannaṃ khandhānaṃ abhedato eko attāti gahaṇaṃ ghanasaññā, taṃ yamakatālakandaṃ bhindantena viya ‘‘viññāṇapaccayā nāmarūpamattameta’’nti vacanena nivāritaṃ hoti. ‘‘Evamādidassananivāraṇa’’nti etena ‘‘socati paridevati dukkhito’’tiādidassananivāraṇamāha. Sokādayopi hi paccayāyattā avasavattinoti ‘‘jātipaccayā jarāmaraṇaṃ soka…pe… sambhavantī’’ti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1) etena vuttamevāti. Micchādassananivāraṇatopīti kārakadassanādinānāvidhamicchābhinivesanivāraṇatopi.
658 依自相与共相这句话,是在说:若离开这两种相,就无法如实照见诸法,因为并不存在脱离这两者、还能在诸法中按胜义被观见的可能。就像绊倒,因为是苦生起的因。就像坠落,因为是跌入另一存在的悬崖。就像痈肿出现,因为与苦性的箭相连,又有烦恼不净的流漏。就像痈肿成熟时的小疮——当痈肿正在成熟时,在它上面生出的小疮;或者痈肿多处破裂时的疮。就像触击,因为触有撞击的作用。就像触击之苦——如同由撞击所生的苦,因为三种苦性中,三受都是苦。就像想求对治,这是以部分代表全体来说的。就像拿取不适宜的东西,因为它是种种灾患生起的因。就像涂敷不适宜的东西,因为把苦因安置在自己的相续中。就像痈肿变异出现,因为有身痈肿的生起变异,并由此而有肿胀等产生。肿胀、发红、生脓等,就是痈肿的变异。痈肿自然破裂,若没有成熟就不可能,所以说及破裂时,就已经包含了它的成熟,因此说如痈肿破裂,即老死。或者,痈肿的变异与破裂即痈肿破裂,其中变异就是成熟,应当这样理解。巴利
658.‘‘Salakkhaṇasāmaññalakkhaṇavasenā’’ti etena sabbappakārena dhammānaṃ yāthāvato adassanamāha tadubhayavinimuttassa dhammesu paramatthato passitabbabhāvassa abhāvato. Upakkhalanaṃ viya dukkhuppattihetuto. Patanaṃ viya bhavantarapapātato. Gaṇḍapātubhāvo viya dukkhatāsūlayogato, kilesāsucipaggharaṇato ca. Gaṇḍabhedapīḷakā viyāti bhedanatthaṃ paccamāne gaṇḍe tassa upari jāyamānā khuddakapīḷakā viya, gaṇḍassa vā anekadhābhede pīḷakā viya. Ghaṭṭanaṃ viya saṅghaṭṭanarasatāya phasso. Ghaṭṭanadukkhaṃ viyāti ghaṭṭanato jātaṃ dukkhaṃ viya tividhadukkhatāvasena tissannampi vedanānaṃ dukkhabhāvato. Paṭikārābhilāso viyāti samudāyassa ekadesanidassanabhāvenāha. Asappāyaggahaṇaṃ viya bahuvidhānatthuppattinimittato. Asappāyalepanaṃ viya dukkhahetuno sasantāne sannidhāpanato. Gaṇḍavikārapātubhāvo viya attabhāvagaṇḍassa nibbattivikārabhāvato , tannimittañcassa sūnabhāvādisambhavato. Sūnatāsarāgapubbaggahaṇādayo hi gaṇḍavikārā. Sarasato gaṇḍassa bhijjanaṃ pākena vinā na hotīti bhedaggahaṇenevassa pākopi gahitoti katvā āha ‘‘gaṇḍabhedo viya jarāmaraṇa’’nti. Gaṇḍassa vā visadisāpatti, bhijjanañca gaṇḍabhedo, tattha visadisāpatti pākoti veditabbaṃ.
用譬喻来说明有轮时,先用同一立足点的各种譬喻来说明;现在为了用不同立足点来说明,所以说“或者因为……”等。其中,眼睛被膜障住的人看不见色,即使看见一点,也是颠倒地看;同样,被无明障住的人不通达、不见苦等,或者错误地通达,所以无明就像膜。就像作茧的虫,因为茧是自己造的,而且是自己轮回转动的因,所以行就像茧的处所。没有行的摄受,识就得不到立足处,就像没有摄政王摄受就得不到立足处的王子;这里“没有摄受就得不到立足处”是譬喻和所喻的共同点。“生起之相”说的是业等所缘。“由于构想”是指由作所缘,或者由相应的寻而思惟。因为天、人、兽、鸟等各种不同种类,名色就像幻术。因为所依的差别而有增长的差别,六处就像丛林。诸处作为所缘和能缘,彼此相对的状态就是处的触击。由于这个处的触击,生起两种撞击,而且是受之苦因,所以触就像火。有热恼,所以受就像灼热。因为不断增长渴爱,享受诸境就像喝盐水。因为对境没有满足,渴爱就像渴。“彼之取”是指令其渴望的——对渴爱和邪见的欢喜,属于具有它的人;或者,那可能就是取。因为带来灾祸而不觉知,有取就像鱼吞钩。这里应当知道,对于行等,与茧的处所、摄政王等,各以两种相似性,说了两种譬喻。巴利
Upamāhi bhavacakkaṃ viññāpentena ekādhiṭṭhānehi upamāvisesehi taṃ viññāpetvā idāni nānādhiṭṭhānehi viññāpetuṃ ‘‘yasmā vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha paṭalābhibhūtacakkhuko rūpāni na passati, kiñci passantopi viparītaṃ passati, evaṃ avijjābhibhūto dukkhādīni na paṭipajjati na passati, micchā vā paṭipajjatīti paṭalaṃ viya avijjā. Kosakārakimi viya attanāva katattā, vaṭṭassa attano eva paribbhamanakāraṇattā ca kosappadesā viya saṅkhārā. Saṅkhārapariggahaṃ vinā patiṭṭhaṃ alabhamānaṃ viññāṇaṃ pariṇāyakapariggahaṃ vinā patiṭṭhaṃ alabhamāno rājakumāro viyāti pariggahena vinā patiṭṭhālābho ettha upamopameyyasāmaññaṃ. Upapattinimittanti kammādiārammaṇamāha. Parikappanatoti ārammaṇakaraṇato, sampayuttena vā vitakkena vitakkanato. Devamanussamigavihaṅgādivividhappakāratāya māyā viya nāmarūpaṃ. Patiṭṭhāvisesena vuddhivisesāpattito vanappagumbo viya saḷāyatanaṃ. Āyatanānaṃ visayivisayabhūtānaṃ aññamaññābhimukhabhāvo āyatanaghaṭṭanaṃ. Tato āyatanaghaṭṭanato dvayasaṅghaṭṭanuppattito, vedanādukkhahetuto ca aggi viya phasso. Sapariḷāhato dāho viya vedanā. Uparūpari taṇhāpavaḍḍhanato loṇūdakapānaṃ viya visayānubhavanaṃ. Ārammaṇe pātukamyatābhāvato pipāsā viya taṇhā. Tadassupādānanti taṃ abhilāsakaraṇaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhābhinandanaṃ assa taṃsamaṅgino puggalassa, tadassa vā bhaveyya upādānaṃ. Byasanāvahatāya ajānanato bhavupādānaṃ macchassa baḷisupādānaṃ viya. Ettha ca saṅkhārādīnaṃ kosappadesapariṇāyakādīhi dvīhi dvīhi sadisatāya dve dve upamā vuttāti veditabbā.
659 有些事物本身很浅,看起来却好像很深,就像山谷里积满枯草败叶的水池。但这里说的法并不是这样。它本身就是深的,同时又能照耀、显现、清清楚楚地被人看到,所以叫“深奥而显耀”。“如其所应”,就是按照义理等方面,与之相应。巴利
659. Koci agambhīro eva gambhīro viya khāyati purāṇatiṇapaṇṇādibharito pabbatasaṅkhepe jalāsayo viya, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana gambhīrova hutvā obhāsati pakāsati dissatīti gambhīrāvabhāso. Yathārahanti atthādivasena yathānurūpaṃ.
老死不是不从生而有,而是一定从生而有。这个确定义成立之后,为了消除“老死到底是从生而有,还是从其他而有”的疑惑,就说了“并不是离开生而从其他而有”。这里说的“其他”,是指与生相对的范围,不是泛指其他,因为说的是“离开生”。因此,这并没有否定生之外还有其他助缘的作用。接下来的几支也是同样的道理。“如是”,指的是这种方式,也就是以这种方式的意思。“以生为缘所生、所集起之义”:就是以生为缘而生起之后,与自身相应的缘一层一层向上而来,也就是相续生起的意思。或者,“所生之义”和“所集起之义”合起来就是“所生所集起之义”。因为“老死不是不从生而有,也不是离开生而从其他而有”,这就说明了以生为缘所生之义;而“如是,从生而集起”,则是以生为缘所集起之义。意思是:无论哪一种生、以怎样的方式作为缘,它就随着那样的缘而显现。巴利
Jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na na hoti, hoti evāti avadhāraṇe siddhe ‘‘siyā nu kho jarāmaraṇaṃ jātito, aññatopī’’ti āsaṅkāyaṃ tadāsaṅkānivattanatthaṃ ‘‘na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tattha aññaggahaṇaṃ jātiyā paṭiyogīvisayaṃ, na aññamattavisayaṃ ‘‘jātiṃ vinā’’ti vacanato. Tenassa nāññaṃ jātiyā sahakārīkāraṇabhūtaṃ nivattitaṃ hoti. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Itthanti idaṃ pakāraṃ, iminā pakārenāti attho. Jātipaccayasambhūtasamudāgataṭṭhoti jātipaccayasambhūtaṃ hutvā sahitassa attano paccayānurūpassa uddhaṃ uddhaṃ āgatabhāvo, anuppavattaṭṭhoti attho. Atha vā sambhūtaṭṭho ca samudāgataṭṭho ca sambhūtasamudāgataṭṭho. ‘‘Na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hoti, na ca jātiṃ vinā aññato hotī’’ti hi jātipaccayasambhūtaṭṭho vutto. Itthañca jātito samudāgacchatīti jātipaccayasamudāgataṭṭho, yā yā jāti yathā yathā paccayo hoti, tadanurūpapātubhāvoti attho.
用“老死并非不从生而有”这句话,显示老死以生为缘这一点是不虚妄的;用“离开生,老死不会从别处而来”这句话,显示它不会变成别的样子;用“如此,它从生而集起”这句话,显示它的如实性。通过这几点,他显示:正如缘法对于由自己所生的缘所生法,处于缘的状态时是不虚妄、不变异的,同样,缘所生法也处于那种状态。其余各支也是同样的道理。那么,通过“于因果的智即是义无碍解”这句话,怎么知道“义”具有因果的性质呢?因为在对“义无碍解”这个复合词解释其各组成部分的含义时,说了“于因果的智”。在这里,为了显示“于义”这个词的含义而说了“于因果”,为了显示“无碍解”这个词的含义而说了“智”。因此,说“义”和“因果”是同义词,“智”和“无碍解”也是同义词,这样就成立了“义”具有因果的性质。巴利
Tattha ‘‘na jātito jarāmaraṇaṃ na hotī’’ti iminā jarāmaraṇassa jātipaccayatāya avitathataṃ dasseti, ‘‘na jātiṃ vinā aññato jarāmaraṇaṃ hotī’’ti iminā anaññathattaṃ, ‘‘itthañca jātito samudāgacchatī’’ti iminā tathataṃ. Tena ca yathā paccayadhammā attano paccayuppannānaṃ paccayabhāve, tathā avitathā anaññathā, evaṃ paccayuppannadhammāpi tabbhāveti dasseti. Esa nayo sesesupi. ‘‘Hetuphale ñāṇaṃ atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti etena vacanena atthassa hetuphalabhāvo kathaṃ ñātabboti? ‘‘Atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti etassa samāsapadassa avayavapadatthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetuphale ñāṇa’’nti vuttattā. ‘‘Atthe paṭisambhidā atthapaṭisambhidā’’ti ettha hi ‘‘atthe’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘hetuphale’’ti vuttaṃ, ‘‘paṭisambhidā’’ti etassa atthaṃ dassentena ‘‘ñāṇa’’nti, tasmā hetuphalaatthasaddā ekatthā, ñāṇapaṭisambhidā cāti imamatthaṃ vadantena sādhito atthassa hetuphalabhāvo.
“以什么方式”是指以什么现起方式。诸法确实依着由缘的差别所成立的现起方式,而各有其特殊的样貌。所以经文说:“一切法都以一切方式,出现在佛陀世尊的智面前。”
“以什么状态”是指安住在什么状态。诸法具有种种状态的差别,因此能依各种不同的状态差别,完成各自不同的意义和作用。这样的现起方式与状态差别,对无明者、对未曾积累善法资粮者尚且难以了知,智慧也无从获得立足处,因此说“那……甚深”——也就是那方式与状态甚深。
“对因的智”这里,“因”是“法”的同义词,应当按前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Yenākārenāti yena pavattiākārena. Sabhāvadhammā hi paccayavisesasiddhena pavattiākārena visiṭṭhākārā honti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbe dhammā sabbākārena buddhassa bhagavato ñāṇamukhe āpāthamāgacchantī’’ti (mahāni. 156; cūḷani. mogharājamāṇavapucchāniddesa 85). Yadavatthāti yāya avatthāya avatthitā. Avatthāvisesavanto hi dhammā tena tena avatthāvisesena taṃ taṃ atthakiccaṃ sādhetuṃ samatthā honti. Svāyaṃ pavattiākāro, avatthāviseso ca avijjāyapi anupacitakusalasambhārehi duravabodhato eva ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho cāti āha ‘‘tassa…pe… gambhīro’’ti. Tassa ākārassa, avatthāya ca. Hetumhi ñāṇanti ettha hetuno dhammapariyāyatā vuttanayeneva veditabbā.
“它的”:指缘起的。“以种种理由”:指以种种适合所化众生觉悟的、被称为理由的因由。“在那里”:指在那种说法方式中。“顺逆”:这里并不是说缘生起、缘所生法生起叫顺,缘灭、缘所生法灭叫逆,而是说从开头到结尾为顺,从结尾到开头为逆。从开头开始的顺说,以及从结尾开始的逆说,有三连接、四简略。又如“这四种食以什么为因”等,是从中间开始的逆说;如“缘眼与色而生起眼识,三者相合为触,缘触而有受”等,是顺说,有二连接、三简略。又如“诸比丘,对可被结缚的法随观乐味而住时,渴爱增长,缘渴爱而有取”等,有一连接、二简略。有时缘起也被说为一支,这已在“诸比丘,在这里,多闻圣弟子”等处显示出来。巴利
Assāti paṭiccasamuppādassa. Tena tena kāraṇenāti tena tena veneyyānaṃ bujjhanānuguṇatāsaṅkhātena kāraṇena. Tatthāti tasmiṃ desanappakāre. Anulomapaṭilomatoti nayidha paccayuppādā paccayuppannuppādasaṅkhātaṃ anulomaṃ, paccayanirodhā paccayuppannanirodhasaṅkhātañca paṭilomamāha. Ādito pana antagamanamanulomaṃ, antato ca ādigamanaṃ paṭilomamāha. Ādito paṭṭhāya anulomadesanāya, antato paṭṭhāya paṭilomadesanāya ca tisandhicatusaṅkhepaṃ. ‘‘Ime cattāro āhārā kiṃnidānā’’tiādikāya (saṃ. ni. 2.11) vemajjhato paṭṭhāya paṭilomadesanāya, ‘‘cakkhuñca paṭicca rūpe ca uppajjati cakkhuviññāṇaṃ, tiṇṇaṃ saṅgati phasso, phassapaccayā vedanā’’tiādikāya (ma. ni. 1.204, 400; ma. ni. 3.421, 425-426; saṃ. ni. 2.43-45; 2.4.60; kathā. 465, 467) anulomadesanāya ca dvisandhitisaṅkhepaṃ. ‘‘Saṃyojanīyesu, bhikkhave, dhammesu assādānupassino viharato taṇhā pavaḍḍhati, taṇhāpaccayā upādāna’’ntiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 2.53, 57) ekasandhidvisaṅkhepaṃ. Katthaci ekaṅgopi ca paṭiccasamuppādo desito, so ‘‘tatra, bhikkhave, sutavā ariyasāvako’’tiādinā (saṃ. ni. 2.62) dassito eva.
无明等的自性被通达,这就是通达。注释书里已经这样说过:“对于那些、那些法,在那些、那些地方所说的,应当被通达的、称为自相的不颠倒自性,就是通达。”与具有了知特相的智相对立的,是无明的无智之义。与以现前为所缘而具有见之特相的智相对立的,是不见之义。然而,这个无明不让苦等的真实自性被通达,它覆盖、缠绕而住,这就是它不证悟诸谛之义。非福行的一部分是有贪的,另一部分是无贪的。或者,因为非福行对贪没有对治性,所以增长贪的一切非福行都是有贪的;另一部分因为是贪的对立面,所以是无贪的。“诸比丘,无闻凡夫长久以来,对此执取、执为我所、执著‘这是我的,我是这个,这是我的我’”——因为识特别被说为执我的事,所以识的空义甚深。“我认知、我轮回”——由于对“我认知、我轮回”即有造作与转生的执著力强,所以无造作之义、不转生之义、结生显现之义甚深。名色在结生刹那同时生起,在转起时则各自分别、随应俱生;名与色不相结合,所以可分离;名与名、色与色,某些与某些不可分离,应当这样配合。因为当说同时生起、同时灭去时,就是指不可分离,这适用于色的一聚。或者,在一蕴有与四蕴有中,名色不同时存在,所以相互可分离;在五蕴有中,因为同时存在,所以应知为不可分离。巴利
Avijjādīnaṃ sabhāvo paṭivijjhīyatīti paṭivedho. Vuttaṃ hetaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘tesaṃ tesaṃ vā tattha tattha vuttadhammānaṃ paṭivijjhitabbo salakkhaṇasaṅkhāto aviparītasabhāvo paṭivedho’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā). Jānanalakkhaṇassa ñāṇassa paṭipakkhabhūto avijjāya aññāṇaṭṭho. Ārammaṇassa paccakkhakaraṇena dassanabhūtassa paṭipakkhabhūto adassanaṭṭho. Yena panesā dukkhādīnaṃ yāthāvasarasaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ na deti, chādetvā pariyonandhitvā tiṭṭhati, so tassā saccāsampaṭivedhaṭṭho. Apuññābhisaṅkhārekadeso sarāgo, añño virāgo. Rāgassa vā apaṭipakkhabhāvato rāgapavaḍḍhako apuññābhisaṅkhāro sabbopi sarāgo, itaro tappaṭipakkhabhāvato virāgo. ‘‘Dīgharattaṃ hetaṃ, bhikkhave, assutavato puthujjanassa ajjhositaṃ mamāyitaṃ parāmaṭṭhaṃ ‘etaṃ mama, esohamasmi, eso me attā’’ti (saṃ. ni. 2.62) attaparāmāsassa viññāṇaṃ visesato vatthu vuttanti viññāṇassa suññataṭṭho gambhīro. Attā vijānāti saṃsaratīti sabyāpāratāsaṅkanti abhinivesabalavatāya abyāpāraṭṭhaasaṅkantipaṭisandhipātubhāvaṭṭhā ca gambhīrā. Nāmarūpassa paṭisandhikkhaṇe ekuppādo, pavattiyaṃ visuṃ visuṃ yathārahaṃ ekuppādo, nāmassa rūpena, rūpassa ca nāmena asampayogato vinibbhogo, nāmassa nāmena, rūpassa ca rūpena, ekaccassa ekaccena avinibbhogo yojetabbo. Ekuppādekanirodhe hi avinibbhoge adhippete so rūpassa ca ekakalāpavuttino labbhati. Atha vā ekacatuvokārabhavesu nāmarūpānaṃ asahavattanato aññamaññavinibbhogo, pañcavokārabhave sahavattanato avinibbhogo ca veditabbo.
这里说的“增上义”,就是指根的缘力。眼等五根应当配合《法集论》(Dhs 598-599)所说的“世间、门、田”等义来理解。意处也因为会坏灭,意触等也有门和田的性质,所以这些义同样成立。对于出现在面前的颜色等对象,能够显现、适合了知的特相就是“照明”,这是眼等根的境性;而意处则是了知。撞击义特别适用于眼触等五种,其余六种也可以配合。触的自性是碰触,作用是撞击,其余的是现起的方式。领受所缘的作用,是就“味”来说的;感受义则是就特相来说的。苦、乐、不苦不乐这三种受,依次是就各自的自性来说的。因为“我感受”这种执著力量很强,所以受的无我义很深。或者说,无我的受,它所感受的就是无我的感受,无我的感受本身就是这个义,也就是无我感受义。带有喜的渴爱是“欢喜”义;更强的渴爱把对象吞下并彻底完成,是“执著”义。其余的可以按共通的方式来理解。执取、执持、执著这些义,四种取都一样;而执取义只就见取等来说,难超越义也是这样。因为经中说“见的荒漠”(Dhs 392),所以见有难超越性;或者因为执取坚固,四种取的难超越义也可以配合。因为难超越,渴爱也被说为海洋义。在“生处、趣、住、居、乐”这些复合词中,应当看作处格词形没有消失。这样,它就和“积集”“造作”这些词构成复合词。在老死支中,以死为主,所以坏灭等义被显示为死义中的深义。因为新新之法坏灭,破坏等已经成熟而相续生起,这就是老;或者,坏灭义应当看作就老而说。因为新性离去,适合称为坏灭。变易义通于两者。或者依相续来说,老有坏灭和消亡的性质;依世俗和刹那来说,死有破坏和变易的性质,应当这样配合。巴利
Adhipatiyaṭṭho nāma idha indriyapaccayabhāvo. ‘‘Lokopeso dvārāpesā khettampeta’’nti (dha. sa. 598-599) vuttā lokādiatthā cakkhādīsu pañcasu yojetabbā. Manāyatanassāpi lujjanato, manosamphassādīnaṃ dvārakhettabhāvato ca ete atthā sambhavanti eva. Āpāthagatānaṃ rūpādīnaṃ pakāsanayogyatālakkhaṇaṃ obhāsanaṃ cakkhādīnaṃ visayibhāvo, manāyatanassa vijānanaṃ. Saṅghaṭṭanaṭṭho visesato cakkhusamphassādīnaṃ pañcannaṃ, itare channampi yojetabbā. Phusanañca phassassa sabhāvo, saṅghaṭṭanaṃ raso, itare upaṭṭhānākārā. Ārammaṇarasānubhavanaṭṭho rasavasena vutto, vedayitaṭṭho lakkhaṇavasena. Sukhadukkhamajjhattabhāvā yathākkamaṃ tissannaṃ vedanānaṃ sabhāvavasena vuttā. Attā vedayatīti abhinivesassa balavatāya nijjīvaṭṭho vedanāya gambhīro. Nijjīvāya vā vedanāya vedayitaṃ nijjīvavedayitaṃ, nijjīvavedayitameva attho nijjīvavedayitaṭṭho. Sappītikataṇhāya abhinanditaṭṭho, balavatarataṇhāya gilitvā pariniṭṭhāpanaṃ ajjhosānaṭṭho. Itaro sādhāraṇavasena veditabbo. Ādānaggahaṇābhinivesaṭṭhā catunnampi upādānānaṃ samānā, parāmāsaṭṭho vutto diṭṭhupādānādīnameva, tathā duratikkamaṭṭho. ‘‘Diṭṭhikantāro’’ti (dha. sa. 392) hi vacanato diṭṭhīnaṃ duratikkamatā, daḷhaggahaṇattā vā catunnampi duratikkamaṭṭho yojetabbo. Duratikkamatāyapi hi taṇhāya samuddaṭṭho vutto. Yonigatiṭhitinivāsesukhipananti samāse bhummavacanassa alopo daṭṭhabbo. Evañhi tena āyūhanābhisaṅkharaṇapadānaṃ samāso hoti. Jarāmaraṇaṅgaṃ maraṇappadhānanti maraṇaṭṭhā eva khayādayo gambhīrāti dassitā. Navanavānañhi khayena khaṇḍiccādiparipakkappavatti jarāti, khayaṭṭho vā jarāya vuttoti daṭṭhabbo. Navabhāvāpagamo hi khayoti vattuṃ yuttoti. Vipariṇāmaṭṭho dvinnampi. Santativasena vā jarāya khayavayabhāvo, sammutikhaṇikavasena maraṇassa bhedavipariṇāmatā yojetabbā.
660 “义的方法”是指诸义的方法。藉由无明等义,以单一性等自身的状态引导、使前进,所以称为单一性等;它们的方法,就叫做义的方法。因为被引导,所以叫方法。或者,诸义本身以单一性等状态被引导、被了知,所以称为义的方法。又或者,通过这些被引导,所以是方法;以单一性等,诸义被引导为“一”等,因此单一性等就是诸义的方法,也就是义的方法。巴利
660.Atthanayāti atthānaṃ nayā, avijjādiatthehi ekattādī sakena bhāvena nayanti gamentīti ekattādayo, tesaṃ nayāti vuttā. Nīyantīti hi nayāti. Atthā eva vā ekattādibhāvena nīyamānā ñāyamānā atthanayāti vuttā. Nīyanti etehīti vā nayā, ekattādīhi ca atthā ‘‘eka’’ntiādinā nīyanti, tasmā ekattādayo atthānaṃ nayāti atthanayā.
“以芽等状态”是说:把芽、叶、茎、干、枝、小枝、嫩叶等状态中正在现行的各个部分合在一起,由于相续没有中断,种子达到了树的状态,并以树的状态持续存在,这也被称为“一性”。相续不断就像这样成为单一性;这里也同样显示:以无明、行等为因、由因缘所生的那些法的相续没有中断,落入同一相续,就是单一性的方法。“以因果关联”这句话说明了相续不断。因为,即使因果在胜义上确实是各别的,但在这里,它们以因的身份和果的身份而存在的关联性本身,就是相续不断;由于在哪一相续中业被造作,果就在那里生起,所以既没有已作之法的毁灭,也没有未作之法的来临。由于执取单一性,是不观察因果的差异,把因和果合为无别,以执取二者为一性、无差别。“那同一识流转、轮回”等语,是执取常见。巴利
Aṅkurādibhāvenāti aṅkurapattanāḷakhandhasākhāpallavapalāsādibhāvena pavattamāne avayave ekajjhaṃ gahetvā santānānupacchedena bījaṃ rukkhabhāvaṃ pattaṃ rukkhabhāvena pavattaṃ tañca ekattena vuccatīti santānānupacchedo yathā ekattaṃ, evaṃ idhāpi avijjāsaṅkhārādihetuhetusamuppannānaṃ santānānupacchedo ekasantatipatitatā ekattanayoti dasseti. ‘‘Hetuphalasambandhenā’’ti etena santānānupacchedaṃ vibhāveti. Satipi hi hetuphalānaṃ paramatthato bhede hetubhāvena, phalabhāvena ca tesaṃ sambandhabhāvoyevettha santānānupacchedo, yato yasmiṃ santāne kammaṃ nibbattaṃ, tattheva phaluppattīti katassa vināso, akatassa abbhāgamo ca natthīti. Ekattaggahaṇatoti hetuphalānaṃ bhedaṃ anupadhāretvā hetuṃ, phalañca abhinnaṃ katvā ubhinnaṃ ekabhāvassa abhedassa gahaṇena. ‘‘Tadeva viññāṇaṃ sandhāvati saṃsaratī’’tiādinā sassatadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
特相确定,指的是确定自性,也就是清楚了解因和果各有不同的自性。所谓“不同的相续”,是因为执取毫无关联的差异性,便认为“另一个死了,另一个生了”,于是执取“一个有情断灭了,另一个有情生起了”,这样就抓住了断见。巴利
Lakkhaṇavavatthānanti sabhāvavavatthānaṃ hetuno, phalassa ca bhinnasabhāvatāvabodho. Bhinnasantānassevāti sambandharahitassa nānattassa gahaṇato añño mato, añño jāto, tasmā ‘‘sattantaro ucchinno, sattantaro uppanno’’ti gaṇhanto ucchedadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
“应当由我们生起”,把这句话接过来理解就是:由我们来使之生起。没有作用,就是没有意图、没有参与。所谓“正确地看见”,就是看见“没有造作者、没有生命、只是诸法而已”。自性本身就是规律,这叫自性规律,就像“有燃料的火向上燃烧,有燃料的风横向吹动”这类例子一样。由此成立:缘所生之法各自作为因。若执取“因为没有造作者,所以没有任何业能带来果报”,这就是执持无作见。巴利
Amhehi uppādetabbanti ānetvā sambandho. Byāpārābhāvo anabhisandhitāya abyāvaṭatā. Sammā passantoti ‘‘nirīhā nijjīvā dhammamattā’’ti passanto. Sabhāvo eva niyamo sabhāvaniyamo ‘‘sasambhāraggino uddhamukhatā, sasambhāravāyuno tiriyagamana’’nti evamādi viya. Tena siddho yathāsakaṃ paccayuppannassa hetubhāvo. ‘‘Kassaci kattuno abhāvā na kāci kiriyā phalapabandhinī’’ti akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ upādiyati.
从乳出酪,不是从水出;从芝麻出油,不是从沙出。通过这样显示一切并非从一切生起,他舍断了无因见;看见果只与因相应,就舍断了无作见。所谓“从某处从某处”,意思是:如果一法能从另一法生起,那么为什么不从沙出油、从甘蔗出乳呢?因此,他认为根本没有谁是谁的因,就执取了无因见。虽然无因见并不存在,但由于决定性的作用,从芝麻、牛、精血等当中,仍然会生出油、乳、身体等,所以他也执取了决定论。应当按适当的情形这样理解。巴利
‘‘Khīrato dadhi, na udakato, tilato telaṃ, na vālikato’’ti sabbato sabbasambhavābhāvadassanena ahetukadiṭṭhiṃ hetuanurūpameva phalaṃ passanto akiriyadiṭṭhiṃ pajahati. Yato kutocīti yadi aññasmā aññassa uppatti siyā, vālikato telassa, ucchuto khīrassa kasmā uppatti na siyā, tasmā na koci kassaci hetu atthīti ahetukadiṭṭhiṃ, avijjamānepi hetumhi niyatatāya tilagāvīsukkasoṇitādīhi telakhīrasarīrādīni pavattantīti niyativādañca upādiyatīti viññātabbaṃ yathārahaṃ.
661 为什么?因为,砸碎这有轮而超越轮回之怖的人,哪怕在梦里也不存在一人。这就是其中的关联。它没有底,没有立足处,极难渡过,极难越过。就像雷电之轮一样,如同雷电形成的圆盘。那雷电之轮只有粉碎一切,不粉碎就不能运转;同样,有轮也只是在产生纯粹的苦,所以被称为“恒常粉碎”。巴利
661. Kasmā? Yasmā idañhi bhavacakkaṃ apadāletvā saṃsārabhayamatīto na koci supinantarepi atthīti sambandho. Agādhaṃ appatiṭṭhaṃ duratiyānaṃ duratikkamaṃ. Asanivicakkamivāti asanimaṇḍalamiva. Tañhi nimmathanameva, nānimmathanaṃ pavattati, evaṃ bhavacakkampi ekantadukkhuppādanatova ‘‘niccanimmathana’’nti vuttaṃ.
为了说明“以智慧之剑不劈开、未超越轮回怖畏的人根本不存在”这一点的佐证经典,而说了“这也是(世尊)说过的”等话。线的纠缠叫“线乱”,像线乱一样生起,就叫“线乱生”,意思是烦恼、业和果报把它缠得极其厉害。有一种叫kulī的雌鸟,它的巢叫kulika,像那个巢一样生起,就叫“kulikuṇḍika生”。像文若草和芦草一样存在、生起,就叫“文若芦草生”。据说这两种草纠缠在一起生长。因为没有增长,所以叫“无幸处”;因为是苦的去处,所以叫“恶趣”;因为从安乐的积聚处坠落,所以叫“堕落”——这四种无幸处,以及“诸蕴相续”等(《清净道论》等)所说的轮回,他都无法超越。或者说,这里所说的整个轮回,依增长、离去等含义而被称为无幸处等,因为它纯粹就是苦蕴。巴利
Ñāṇāsinā apadāletvā saṃsārabhayamatīto natthīti etassa sādhakasuttaṃ dassento ‘‘vuttampi ceta’’ntiādimāha. Tantūnaṃ ākulakaṃ tantākulakaṃ, tantākulakamiva jātā tantākulakajātā, kilesakammavipākehi ativiya jaṭitāti attho. Kuliyā sakuṇiyā nīḍaṃ kulikaṃ, taṃ viya jātā kulikuṇḍikajātā. Muñcā viya, pabbajā viya ca bhūtā jātā muñjapabbajabhūtā. Tadubhayaṃ kira tiṇaṃ ākulaṃ jaṭitaṃ hutvā vaḍḍhati. Vaḍḍhiyā abhāvato apāyaṃ, dukkhagatibhāvato duggatiṃ, sukhasamussayato vinipatitattā vinipātañca, catubbidhaṃ apāyaṃ ‘‘khandhānañca paṭipāṭī’’tiādinā (visuddhi. 2.619; dī. ni. aṭṭha. 2.95 āpasādanāvaṇṇanā; saṃ. ni. aṭṭha. 2.2.60; a. ni. aṭṭha. 2.4.199; vibha. aṭṭha. 226 saṅkhārapadaniddesa; dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; su. ni. aṭṭha. 2.523; udā. aṭṭha. 39; itivu. aṭṭha. 14, 58; theragā. aṭṭha. 1.67, 99; paṭi. ma. aṭṭha. 2.1.117; cūḷani. aṭṭha. 6; bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 2.58) vuttaṃ saṃsārañca nātivattati. Saṃsāro eva vā sabbo idha vaḍḍhiapagamādiatthehi apāyādināmako vutto kevalaṃ dukkhakkhandhabhāvato.